JP2021182994A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To prevent gambling property from excessive increase.SOLUTION: The game machine comprises: adjustment means which, when occurrence of a highly granting state is determined with a fact that the frequency of an advantageous state having occurred in a period of a consecutive winning state reaches a specific frequency, performs adjustment so as to reduce a granting speed being the magnitude of a game value granted in a unit period; and performance control means capable of controlling a performance based on control information transmitted from game control means. The performance control means is capable of executing performance control based on control information transmitted from the game control means and capable of identifying whether a game is in a highly granting state or not. Performance execution means is capable of executing a specific performance which displays in a display region a displaced specific image generated by image processing means, during variable display. A display image of game-related information is arranged in a special display layer in which an arranged image is more preferentially displayed in the display region than in the specific display layer.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 11-28

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player, and can be controlled to a normal state and a special state that is more likely to be controlled to be more advantageous than the normal state.

Conventionally, there is a gaming machine that is controlled over a predetermined number of variable display times in a high probability state (probability change state), which is a special state that is easily controlled by a jackpot state that is more advantageous than a normal state (for example, Patent Document 1). reference).

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2016-8350

However, in Patent Document 1, a large amount of advantageous states (big hit states) controlled to the high probability state (probability change state) are repeatedly generated by the end of the high probability state (probability change state). There is a problem that a game ball, which is a game medium, may be given in a short period of time, and there is a fear that the player's gambling spirit may be excessively agitated.

The present invention has been made by paying attention to such a problem, and provides a gaming machine capable of preventing an excessive gaming value from being imparted in a short period of time and an excessive increase in gambling. The purpose.

The gaming machine of means 1 is
It is possible to control an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player, and a special state (for example, a time-saving state (high accuracy and high base state)) that is more likely to be controlled to the normal state and the advantageous state than the normal state. A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to (low accuracy and high base state)).
A game control means (for example, CPU 103) capable of controlling the progress of the game,
An effect control means (for example, an effect control CPU 120) capable of controlling an effect based on control information (for example, an effect control command shown in FIG. 11-2) transmitted from the game control means.
The number of times of the advantageous state that has occurred in the advantageous period (for example, the period of the consecutive villa state) that has never been controlled to the normal state from the time when the normal state is controlled to either the advantageous state or the special state is When the specified number of times has been reached (for example, when the number of consecutive villas is "5" or more, which is the first determination number of times), the predetermined numerical data is changed from the first value (for example, "0") to the second value (for example). For example, an update means that can be updated to "1" or "2" (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the ball ejection state determination process shown in FIG. 11-13).
As shown in FIGS. 11-13 and 11-21, adjustment means (for example, FIGS. 11-13 and 11-21) for adjusting so that the speed at which the game value given in the unit period is reduced when the predetermined numerical data is the second value. In addition, the CPU 103 sets the ball ejection state flag value to "1" or "2" in the ball ejection state determination process to prolong the fanfare effect period, interval period, and ending effect period during the big hit game).
Equipped with
The game control means can transmit control information that can identify that the predetermined numerical data is the second value to the effect control means (for example, as shown in FIGS. 11-13, the CPU 103 can transmit the control information. Step 162 A part for executing the command control process shown in FIG. 5 after executing the transmission setting of the payout state specification command in the process of SGS17).
The effect control means can execute effect control based on control information that can identify that the predetermined numerical data is the second value (for example, as shown in FIGS. 11-27 and 11-28). In addition, the effect control CPU 120 identifies the ball ejection state from the received ball ejection state designation command in the advance notice effect determination process, and is variably displaying using the advance notice effect type determination table according to the specified ball ejection state. The part where it is possible to determine whether or not to execute the advance notice effect and the type of effect of the advance notice effect to be executed),
Moreover,
It has a display area in which an image can be displayed, and the display area is smaller than the game-related information related to the progress of the game (for example, the first special figure reserved storage number, the second special figure reserved storage number, and the decorative symbol). A display means (for example, an image display device 5) capable of displaying a display image (for example, a first interface image 006SG005I or a second interface image 006SG005J) of a design), and
A storage means (for example, CGROM205) that can store image data including at least a specific image (for example, a decorative pattern or a background image) displayed in the display area and a display image of the game-related information.
A plurality of display layers (for example, a layer 1 image drawing area, a layer 2 image drawing area, a layer 3 image drawing area, a displacement image creation area, and a display image creation area shown in FIGS. 15-5) on which an image based on the image data can be arranged. An image processing means (for example, a display control unit 123 and an SDRAM 210) capable of generating an image to be displayed in the display area by superimposing and synthesizing each image arranged on the plurality of display layers.
An effect executing means capable of executing an effect of displaying the specific image in the display area (for example, a portion where the effect control CPU 120 executes the variable display effect process shown in FIGS. 15-17).
Equipped with
The storage means sets the display position of at least a part of the specific image in the display area from the first position (for example, in the case of the feature unit 006SG, the central portion of the display area of the image display device 5) to the first position. Can store display position displacement information for displacement to a different second position (for example, in the case of the feature unit 006SG, an upper position or a lower position of the display area of the image display device 5) (for example, displacement in the CGROM 205). The part where the image data is stored),
The image processing means can generate a displacement specific image in which the specific image arranged on the specific display layer based on the image data is displaced based on the display position displacement information (for example, shown in FIGS. 15-23). As described above, the decorative pattern drawn in the layer 2 image drawing area and the background image drawn in the layer 3 image drawing area are superimposed to create a displacement target image, and the displacement target image is applied to the displacement target image. As a result, the images of the left region 006SG005L and the right region 006SG005R are moved upward and the images of the middle region 006SG005C are moved downward as the display images displayed on the image display device 5 during the development suggestion effect. The part that creates the image),
The effect executing means can execute a specific effect (for example, a development suggestion effect in the feature unit 006SG) for displaying the displacement specific image generated by the image processing means in the display area during variable display.
The display image of the game-related information is arranged in a special display layer in which the arranged image is preferentially displayed in the display area over the specific display layer (for example, as shown in FIGS. 15-26, the first interface. The image 006SG005I and the second interface image 006SG005J are portions drawn in the layer 1 image drawing area having the highest image display priority).
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, when the predetermined numerical data is the second value, the adjustment for lowering the game value imparting speed is executed, so that when the predetermined numerical data is the second value, an excessive amount is excessive in a short period of time. It is possible to prevent the game value from being given and the gambling to be excessively increased, and it is possible to execute the effect control corresponding to whether or not the predetermined numerical data is the second value, so that the game interest can be improved. .. Further, since a displacement specific image in which at least a part of the specific image displayed in the predetermined effect is displaced can be generated from the image data of the specific image and the display position displacement information and displayed in the specific effect, these displacements can be displayed. The specific effect can be executed with a smaller amount of data as compared with the case where the image data of the specific image is stored exclusively. Further, it is possible to prevent the display image of the game-related information from being displaced due to the displacement of the specific image at the time of executing the specific effect, and the visibility of the display image of the game-related information is deteriorated.

Further, the embodiment for carrying out the invention described later includes the invention relating to the gaming machine of the following means 2. Conventionally, in a gaming machine, an image displayed on an image display device (display means) is broken at a specific timing such as during a reach effect during variable display as shown in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2019-141396. There was something that could perform a splattering effect (specific effect). However, in such a game machine, since the effect is simply that the image is broken and scattered, the effect is improved by executing the effect in the state where other images are displayed on the image display device. However, in this case, it is necessary to create dedicated image data for each image displayed on the image display device in order to execute the effect, and the amount of data to be stored in the storage means is large. There is a problem that the image may become excessively large, and in view of this point, it is required to provide a game machine capable of suppressing the amount of data stored in the storage means in order to execute a specific effect.

The gaming machine of means 2 is
It has a display area in which an image can be displayed, and the display area is smaller than the game-related information related to the progress of the game (for example, the first special figure reserved storage number, the second special figure reserved storage number, and the decorative symbol). A display means (for example, an image display device 5) capable of displaying a display image (for example, a first interface image 006SG005I or a second interface image 006SG005J) of a design), and
A storage means (for example, CGROM205) that can store image data including at least a specific image (for example, a decorative pattern or a background image) displayed in the display area and a display image of the game-related information.
A plurality of display layers (for example, a layer 1 image drawing area, a layer 2 image drawing area, a layer 3 image drawing area, a displacement image creation area, and a display image creation area shown in FIGS. 15-5) on which an image based on the image data can be arranged. An image processing means (for example, a display control unit 123 and an SDRAM 210) capable of generating an image to be displayed in the display area by superimposing and synthesizing each image arranged on the plurality of display layers.
An effect executing means capable of executing an effect of displaying the specific image in the display area (for example, a portion where the effect control CPU 120 executes the variable display effect process shown in FIGS. 15-17).
Equipped with
The storage means sets the display position of at least a part of the specific image in the display area from the first position (for example, in the case of the feature unit 006SG, the central portion of the display area of the image display device 5) to the first position. Can store display position displacement information for displacement to a different second position (for example, in the case of the feature unit 006SG, an upper position or a lower position of the display area of the image display device 5) (for example, displacement in the CGROM 205). The part where the image data is stored),
The image processing means can generate a displacement specific image in which the specific image arranged on the specific display layer based on the image data is displaced based on the display position displacement information (for example, shown in FIGS. 15-23). As described above, the decorative pattern drawn in the layer 2 image drawing area and the background image drawn in the layer 3 image drawing area are superimposed to create a displacement target image, and the displacement target image is applied to the displacement target image. As a result, the images of the left region 006SG005L and the right region 006SG005R are moved upward and the images of the middle region 006SG005C are moved downward as the display images displayed on the image display device 5 during the development suggestion effect. The part that creates the image),
The effect executing means can execute a specific effect (for example, a development suggestion effect in the feature unit 006SG) for displaying the displacement specific image generated by the image processing means in the display area during variable display.
The display image of the game-related information is arranged in a special display layer in which the arranged image is preferentially displayed in the display area over the specific display layer (for example, as shown in FIGS. 15-26, the first interface. The image 006SG005I and the second interface image 006SG005J are portions drawn in the layer 1 image drawing area having the highest image display priority).
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, a displacement specific image in which at least a part of the specific image displayed in the predetermined effect is displaced can be generated from the image data of the specific image and the display position displacement information and displayed in the specific effect. Therefore, the specific effect can be executed with a smaller amount of data as compared with the case where the image data of these displacement specific images is stored exclusively. Further, it is possible to prevent the display image of the game-related information from being displaced due to the displacement of the specific image at the time of executing the specific effect, and the visibility of the display image of the game-related information is deteriorated.

It should be noted that the present invention may have only the invention-specific matters described in the claims of the present invention, and has a configuration other than the invention-specific matters together with the invention-specific matters described in the claims of the present invention. It may be a thing.

It is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine in this embodiment. It is a rear perspective view of the pachinko gaming machine in this embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows various control boards mounted on a pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a game control main process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the timer interrupt processing for game control. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a special symbol process process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the display result determination table. It is a flowchart which shows an example of an effect control main process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of an effect control process process. It is a front view of a pachinko machine. It is a block diagram which shows various control boards mounted on a pachinko gaming machine. It is a schematic diagram of a movable body unit. (A) and (B) are diagrams illustrating the effect control command. It is explanatory drawing which shows each random number. (A) is an explanatory diagram showing the display result determination table 1, and (B) is an explanatory diagram showing the display result determination table 2. (A) is a diagram showing a configuration example of a jackpot type determination table, and (B) is a diagram showing the contents of various jackpots. It is a figure which illustrates the fluctuation pattern. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between a variable display result and a variation pattern. It is a block diagram which shows the structural example of the data holding area for game control. (A) is a block diagram showing a configuration example of an effect control data holding area, and (B) is a diagram showing a configuration example of a start winning command buffer. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the start winning a prize determination process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the random value value determination processing at the time of a prize. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a command analysis process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the look-ahead notice setting process. It is a figure which shows the presence / absence of execution of the pre-reading notice effect, and the determination ratio of a display pattern. It is a figure which shows the update example of the 1st hold storage display area and the 2nd hold storage display area. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the variable display start setting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the effect processing during variable display. It is explanatory drawing of the variable display control timer and the movable body control timer. It is a timing chart in the variable display of super reach α1 jackpot and super reach α2 jackpot. It is a timing chart in the variable display of the super reach α1 deviation and the super reach α2 deviation. It is a timing chart in the variable display of super reach β1 jackpot and super reach β2 jackpot. It is a timing chart in the variable display of the super reach β1 deviation and the super reach β2 deviation. It is a figure which shows the presence / absence of a movable body suggestion motion, and an image enlargement ratio in each enlarged display period. (A) is a figure which shows the effect mode of each movable body motion suggestion effect, and (B) is a figure which shows the effect mode of each movable body motion effect. It is a figure which shows the effect mode up to the reach effect in an image display device. It is a figure which shows the effect mode of the reach effect in an image display device. It is a figure which shows the effect mode of the reach effect in an image display device. It is a figure which shows the effect mode of the reach effect in an image display device. It is a figure which shows the effect mode of the reach effect in an image display device. It is a figure which shows the effect mode of the reach effect in an image display device. It is a figure which shows the effect mode of the reach effect in an image display device. It is a figure which shows the effect mode of the reach effect in an image display device. It is a figure which shows the effect mode of the reach effect in an image display device. It is a figure which shows the effect mode of the reach effect in the image display device in the modification. It is a figure which shows the effect mode of the reach effect in the image display device in the modification. It is a block diagram which shows various control boards and the like mounted on the pachinko gaming machine of the feature part 162SG. (A), (B), and (C) are diagrams illustrating the effect control command. It is explanatory drawing which shows each random number. (A) is an explanatory diagram showing the display result determination table 1, and (B) is an explanatory diagram showing the display result determination table 2. (A) is a diagram showing a configuration example of a jackpot type determination table, and (B) is a diagram showing the contents of various jackpots. It is a figure which illustrates the fluctuation pattern. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between a variable display result and a variation pattern. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between the variable display time of each fluctuation pattern, and a ball ejection state flag. It is a block diagram which shows the structural example of the data holding area for game control. (A) is a block diagram showing a configuration example of an effect control data holding area, and (B) is a diagram showing a configuration example of a start winning command buffer. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the game control main processing in the pachinko game machine of the feature part 162SG. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the timer interrupt processing for game control in the pachinko game machine of the feature part 162SG. (A) is a flowchart showing an example of a ball ejection state determination process, and (b) is an explanatory diagram showing a relationship between a ball ejection state flag value and each adjustment. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the start winning a prize determination process. (A) is a flowchart showing an example of a winning random number value determination process, and (B) is a diagram showing the contents of a variable category command. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the special symbol normal processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the variation pattern setting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the special symbol stop processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the jackpot end processing. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between the progress of a big hit and the opening and closing state of a big prize opening. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between the payout state flag value and each period in a big hit state. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a command analysis process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the look-ahead notice setting process. (A) is a diagram showing an example of the display pattern determination ratio for the hold storage of the jackpot (excluding the probability variation jackpot C), and (B) is a diagram showing an example of the display pattern determination ratio for the hold storage of the outlier. Is. (A) is a diagram showing a first reserved storage display area and a second reserved storage display area, and (B) is a diagram showing an update example of the first reserved storage display area and the second reserved storage display area. .. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the variable display start setting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the advance notice effect determination process. It is a figure which shows the notice production type determination table A to C. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the effect processing during variable display. It is a figure which shows the variation pattern determination table for loss. It is explanatory drawing which shows the variation pattern determination table for loss which is selected according to the value of the ball ejection state flag. It is explanatory drawing which shows the display result determination table. It is a figure which shows the numerical range of a big hit in the variable display of 1st special figure in a normal state or a time saving state, and the numerical range of a loss with a time saving. It is a flowchart which shows an example of an effect control process process. It is a block diagram which shows the circuit composition example in an effect control board. It is explanatory drawing which shows the structure of a layer. It is explanatory drawing of the generation of the displacement image when the displacement image is applied to the displacement target image. It is explanatory drawing which shows the application example of the displacement image to the displacement target image. It is explanatory drawing which shows the contents of VRAM. (A) and (B) are diagrams illustrating the effect control command. It is explanatory drawing which shows each random number. It is explanatory drawing which shows the display result determination table 1. (A) is a diagram showing a configuration example of a jackpot type determination table, and (B) is a diagram showing the contents of various jackpots. It is a figure which illustrates the fluctuation pattern. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between a variable display result and a variation pattern. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the special symbol normal processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the variation pattern setting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the special symbol stop processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the jackpot end processing. This is a part of the flowchart showing an example of the effect control process process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the effect processing during variable display. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a display image processing process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the generated image and the area which can be displayed by an image display apparatus. (A) is a diagram showing a display mode of a decorative symbol in a normal state, and (B) is a diagram showing a display mode of a decorative symbol in a time-saving state. It is a figure which shows the production mode of the development suggestion production. It is a figure which shows the production mode of the development suggestion production. It is explanatory drawing of the image generated in the development suggestion production. It is a figure which shows the production mode of the reach suggestion effect in the modification. It is a figure which shows the production mode of the reach suggestion effect in the modification. It is explanatory drawing of the image generated in the reach suggestion effect in the modification. It is a figure which shows the production mode of the revival effect in the modification. It is a figure which shows the production mode of the revival effect in the modification. It is explanatory drawing of the image generated in the resurrection effect in the modification. It is a figure which shows the determination ratio of the display color of the crack effect image in the revival effect in the modification. It is a figure which shows the effect mode of the look-ahead notice effect in the modification. It is explanatory drawing of the image generated in the look-ahead notice effect in a modification. It is a figure which shows the determination ratio of the display color of the cutting effect image in the look-ahead notice effect in the modification. It is a figure which shows the change pattern of the display color of the cutting effect image in the look-ahead notice effect in the modification. It is a figure which shows the production mode of the promotion effect in the modification. It is explanatory drawing of the image generated in the promotion effect in the modification. It is explanatory drawing which shows the image generated in the modification, and the area which can be displayed by an image display apparatus. It is a figure which shows the production mode of the promotion effect in the modification. It is a figure which shows the production mode of the promotion effect in the modification. It is a figure which shows the effect mode of the temporary stop suggestion effect in the modification. It is a figure which shows the effect mode of the temporary stop suggestion effect in the modification. It is a figure which shows the effect mode of the temporary stop notification effect in the modification. It is explanatory drawing of the image generated in the temporary stop suggestion effect and the temporary stop notification in the modification. It is explanatory drawing of the display of the stereoscopic image in the modification. It is a figure which shows the production mode of the notice effect during variable display and the development suggestion effect in a modification. It is explanatory drawing when this invention is applied to the slot machine in the modification.

(Basic explanation)
First, the basic configuration and control of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (also the configuration and control of a general pachinko gaming machine) will be described.

[form]
The gaming machine of Form 1 is
It is possible to control an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player, and a special state (for example, a time-saving state (high accuracy and high base state)) that is more likely to be controlled to the normal state and the advantageous state than the normal state. A gaming machine that can be controlled to (low accuracy and high base state)) (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1).
The number of times of the advantageous state that has occurred in the advantageous period (for example, the period of the consecutive villa state) that has never been controlled to the normal state from the time when the normal state is controlled to either the advantageous state or the special state is When the specified number of times has been reached (for example, when the number of consecutive villas is "5" or more, which is the first determination number of times), the predetermined numerical data is changed from the first value (for example, "0") to the second value (for example). For example, the update means that can be updated to "1" or "2" (for example, the portion where the CPU 103 executes the ball ejection state determination process shown in FIG. 11-13) and the predetermined numerical data are the second values. Occasionally, as shown in FIGS. 11-13 and 11-21, the CPU 103 ejects balls in the ball ejection state determination process. By setting the state flag value to "1" or "2", the fanfare production period, interval period, and ending production period during the jackpot game are extended).
The updating means updates the predetermined numerical data from the second value to the first value when the end condition is satisfied (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-13, the CPU 103 sets a ball ejection state flag. When the ball is set to "1", the ball ejection status flag is set to "0" based on the fact that the remaining number of variable displays after the judgment is set to 0),
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, when the predetermined numerical data is the second value, the adjustment for lowering the game value imparting speed is executed, so that when the predetermined numerical data is the second value, an excessive amount is excessive in a short period of time. It is possible to prevent the game value from being given and the gambling property from being excessively increased.

The gaming machine of the second aspect of the feature unit 162SG is the gaming machine according to the first aspect.
A gaming machine capable of executing variable display and controlling the advantageous state when the variable display result becomes a specific result (for example, a big hit).
The adjusting means is a variable display in which the variable display period of the variable display executed when the predetermined numerical data is the second value is executed when the predetermined numerical data is the first value. Adjust so that it is longer than the variable display period (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-8, when the value of the ball ejection state flag is "1" or "2" (first high ball ejection state or second). The part where the special figure variable display time in each fluctuation pattern is set longer than when the value of the ball ejection state flag is "0" (when the ball ejection state is low). ),
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, since the time interval of the advantageous state generated when the predetermined numerical data is the second value can be lengthened by lengthening the variable display period, the time interval of the advantageous state can be lengthened, so that when the predetermined numerical data is the second value. The game value granting speed can be reduced without reducing the game value granted in an advantageous state.

The gaming machine of the third form of the feature unit 162SG is the gaming machine according to the first or second form.
The advantageous state is a grantable period in which the game value can be granted (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-20, a period of each round game in which the big winning opening is open) and a grant in which the game value cannot be granted. Includes the impossible period (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-20, the fanfare production period, the interval period, and the ending production period in which the big winning opening is closed).
The adjusting means controls the period during which the advantageous state cannot be granted, which is controlled when the predetermined numerical data is the second value, when the predetermined numerical data is the first value. (For example, as shown in FIG. 11-21, when the value of the ball ejection state flag is "1" or "2", the value of the ball ejection status flag is adjusted to be longer than the non-grantable period. The part where the fanfare production period, interval period, and ending period are set longer during the jackpot game than when it is "0"),
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it is possible to reduce the speed at which the game value is given when the predetermined numerical data is the second value by lengthening the period during which the game value cannot be given.

The gaming machine of the fourth embodiment of the feature unit 162SG is the gaming machine according to any one of the first to third embodiments.
Whether the advantageous state is a first advantageous state (for example, probabilistic jackpot B) or a second advantageous state (for example, probabilistic jackpot A) in which the magnitude of the game value given is larger than that of the first advantageous state. (For example, a portion in which the CPU 103 executes a process of determining a jackpot type (step 162SGS154) in the special symbol normal process shown in FIGS. 11-16).
In the adjusting means, when the predetermined numerical data is the second value, the ratio at which the first advantageous state is determined by the advantageous state type determining means is the ratio at which the predetermined numerical data is the first value. At times, the first advantageous state is adjusted to be higher than the ratio at which the first advantageous state is determined by the advantageous state type determining means (for example, as shown in the modified example 162SG-1, the ball ejection state is a high ball ejection state. In this case, the determination rate of the probability variation jackpot A is lowered and the determination rate of the probability variation jackpot B is increased as the jackpot type compared to the case where the ball ejection state is the low ball ejection state).
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, when the predetermined numerical value data is the second value, it is easy to determine the first advantageous state in which the magnitude of the game value given is small, so that the predetermined numerical value data is the second value. Since the magnitude of the game value given at the time can be reduced, as a result, the speed at which the game value is given when the predetermined numerical data is the second value can be reduced.

The gaming machine of the fifth embodiment of the feature unit 162SG is the gaming machine according to any one of the first to fourth embodiments.
In the adjusting means, when the predetermined numerical data is the second value, the ratio at which the end of the advantageous period is determined by the advantageous period end determining means is the first value. Is adjusted so as to be higher than the rate at which the end of the advantageous period is determined by the advantageous period end determining means (for example, as shown in the modified example 162SG-2, the big hit is higher than the low ball output state in the high ball output state. The part that increases the rate of determining the type as a non-probability change jackpot, and the part that increases the rate of winning the fall lottery in the high ball output state rather than the low ball output state),
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, when the predetermined numerical data is the second value, the end of the advantageous period is easily determined and controlled to the normal state, so that a continuous advantageous state is generated through the special state. Since the number of times can be reduced, as a result, the speed at which the game value is given when the predetermined numerical data is the second value can be reduced.

The gaming machine of the form 6 of the feature unit 162SG is the gaming machine according to any one of the forms 1 to 5.
The end condition is that the number of occurrences of the advantageous state that occurred in the advantageous period after the predetermined numerical data was updated from the first value to the second value by the update means reached the end determination number. (For example, as shown in the modified example 162SG-3, the first high output is performed on condition that the variable display is executed 100 times after being controlled to the first high output state or the second high output state. The part that controls the ball state and the second high ball output state to the low ball output state),
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the adjustment can be terminated when the advantageous state of the number of termination determinations occurs in the advantageous period after the predetermined numerical data is updated from the first value to the previous second value.

The gaming machine according to the seventh embodiment of the feature unit 162SG is the gaming machine according to any one of the first to sixth embodiments.
A gaming machine capable of executing variable display and controlling the advantageous state when the variable display result becomes a specific result (for example, a big hit).
The end condition is that the number of variable displays executed after the predetermined numerical data is updated from the first value to the second value by the update means reaches the end determination number (for example, after the determination). "100", which is a value set as the remaining number of variable displays, becomes "0" by executing 100 variable displays).
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the adjustment can be completed when the variable display of the end determination number is executed after the predetermined numerical data is updated from the first value to the previous second value.

The gaming machine of the eighth form of the feature unit 162SG is the gaming machine according to any one of the first to seventh forms.
The end condition is that the magnitude of the game value used for the game after the predetermined numerical data is updated from the first value to the second value by the update means reaches the magnitude of the end determination. (For example, as shown in the modified example 162SG-4, after setting the value of the ball ejection state flag to "1", the game ball or the out slot that has won a prize in each winning slot during the period of the consecutive villa state. The part where the value of the ball ejection status flag is set to "0" based on the total number of entered game balls reaching a predetermined number (for example, 1000 balls),
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the adjustment is terminated when the magnitude of the game value used for the game reaches the magnitude of the end determination after the predetermined numerical data is updated from the first value to the previous second value. can do.

The gaming machine of the 9th form of the feature unit 162SG is the gaming machine according to any one of the 1st to 8th forms.
A storage means (for example, RAM 102) capable of holding the value of the predetermined numerical data even when the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped,
When the power supply to the gaming machine is started, the initialization means (for example, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started, the CPU 103 is shown in FIGS. 11-11) for initializing the stored contents of the storage means based on the satisfaction of a predetermined condition. When the game control main process shown is executed, the process of step S6a and step S6b is executed based on the fact that the recovery condition is not satisfied (step S3; N)).
Equipped with
When the stored contents of the storage means are initialized by the initialization means, the first value is set in the predetermined numerical data (for example, as shown in FIGS. 11-11, the CPU 103 performs the step S6b. The part where "0" corresponding to the low ball ejection state is set as the value of the ball ejection status flag in the processing),
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the adjustment from being performed at the start of power supply.

The gaming machine of the form 10 of the feature unit 162SG is the gaming machine according to any one of the forms 1 to 9.
A storage means (for example, RAM 102) capable of holding the value of the predetermined numerical data even when the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped is provided.
When the power supply to the gaming machine is started, the predetermined numerical data is restored based on the value of the predetermined numerical data held in the storage means (for example, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started, the CPU 103 determines FIG. 11 When the game control main process shown in -11 is executed, if the recovery condition is satisfied (step S3; Y), the recovery process (step S4) including the update process of the payout status flag by the backup data is executed. Therefore, if the ball is in a high ball output state when the power failure occurs, the ball is restored to the high ball output state, and if the ball is in a low ball output state when the power failure occurs, the ball is restored to the low ball output state).
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, if the predetermined numerical data at the time of occurrence of the power failure is the second value, the adjustment can be continued at the time of recovery from the power failure.

The gaming machine of the 11th form of the feature unit 162SG is the gaming machine according to any one of the 1st to 10th forms.
Notifying means capable of notifying that the predetermined numerical data is the second value (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-13, in the ball ejection state determination process, the ball ejection state flag is set in the process of step S162SG06. A portion that starts lighting of the high ball ejection state notification LED 162SG071 in the process of step 162SG08 after the value is set to "1").
It is characterized by that.
It can be recognized that the adjustment is performed because the predetermined numerical data is the second value.

The gaming machine of the form 12 of the feature unit 162SG is the gaming machine according to the embodiment 11.
A game control means (for example, CPU 103) capable of controlling the progress of the game,
A light emitting means having a plurality of light emitting units (for example, a first special symbol display device 4A and a second special symbol display device 4B, a normal symbol display 20, a high ball ejection state notification LED 162SG071) whose light emission is controlled by the game control means. And, with
The notification is performed by causing the light emitting unit to emit light (for example, a portion for notifying the high ball ejection state by lighting the high ball ejection state notification LED 162SG071).
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, notification can be performed by light emission control common to other light emitting units by the game control means.

The gaming machine of the form 13 of the feature unit 162SG is the gaming machine according to any one of the forms 1 to 12.
A game control means (for example, CPU 103) capable of controlling the progress of the game,
An effect control means (for example, an effect control CPU 120) capable of controlling an effect based on control information (for example, an effect control command shown in FIG. 11-2) transmitted from the game control means.
Equipped with
The game control means can transmit control information that can identify that the predetermined numerical data is the second value to the effect control means (for example, as shown in FIGS. 11-13, the CPU 103 can transmit the control information. Step 162 A part for executing the command control process shown in FIG. 5 after executing the transmission setting of the payout state specification command in the process of SGS17).
The effect control means can execute effect control based on control information that can identify that the predetermined numerical data is the second value (for example, as shown in FIGS. 11-27 and 11-28). In addition, the effect control CPU 120 identifies the ball ejection state from the received ball ejection state designation command in the advance notice effect determination process, and is variably displaying using the advance notice effect type determination table according to the specified ball ejection state. The part where it is possible to determine whether or not to execute the advance notice effect and the type of effect of the advance notice effect to be executed),
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it is possible to execute the effect control corresponding to whether or not the predetermined numerical data is the second value, so that the game entertainment can be improved.

The gaming machine of the form 14 of the feature unit 162SG is the gaming machine according to any one of the forms 1 to 13.
A specific effect that can suggest that there is a high possibility of being controlled to the advantageous state (for example, a reach effect) and a notice effect that announces the execution of the specific effect (for example, a look-ahead notice effect) can be executed. An execution means (for example, a CPU 120 for effect control) is provided.
The effect executing means limits the execution of the advance notice effect in a predetermined period before the predetermined numerical data is updated from the second value to the first value by the updating means (for example, FIG. 11-). As shown in 23, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the remaining number of variable displays after determination is equal to or less than the limit number of pre-reading in the process of step 162SGS242b of the pre-reading notice setting process, and the remaining number of variable displays after determination is When the number of read-aheads is less than or equal to the limit (step 162SGS242b; Y is the part where the look-ahead notice effect is not executed).
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the advance notice effect from becoming unsuitable because the adjustment is not executed because the predetermined numerical data is updated from the second value to the first value.

(Configuration of pachinko gaming machine 1, etc.)
FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine 1 and shows an arrangement layout of main members. The pachinko gaming machine (gaming machine) 1 is roughly classified into a gaming board (gauge board) 2 constituting a game board surface and a gaming machine frame (underframe) 3 for supporting and fixing the game board 2. A game area is formed on the game board 2, and a game ball as a game medium is launched from a predetermined hitting ball launching device into the game area.

The "variable display" of the special symbol is, for example, to display a plurality of types of special symbols in a variable manner (the same applies to other symbols described later). Variations include update display of a plurality of symbols, scroll display of a plurality of symbols, deformation of one or more symbols, enlargement / reduction of one or more symbols, and the like. In the variation of the special symbol or the ordinary symbol described later, a plurality of types of special symbols or ordinary symbols are updated and displayed. In the variation of the decorative pattern described later, a plurality of types of decorative patterns are scrolled or updated, and one or more decorative patterns are deformed or enlarged / reduced. It should be noted that the fluctuation includes a mode in which a certain symbol is blinking and displayed. At the end of the variable display, a predetermined special symbol is stopped and displayed (also referred to as derivation or derivation display) as a display result (the same applies to the variable display of other symbols described later). The variable display may be expressed as variable display or variable.

The special symbol variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A is also referred to as a "first special symbol", and the special symbol variably displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B is also referred to as a "second special symbol". Further, the special figure game using the first special figure is also referred to as a "first special figure game", and the special figure game using the second special figure is also referred to as a "second special figure game". It should be noted that there may be only one type of special symbol display device that performs variable display of the special symbol.

An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 2. The image display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display device), an organic EL (Electro Luminescence), or the like, and displays various effects images. The image display device 5 may be composed of a projector and a screen. Various effect images are displayed on the image display device 5.

For example, on the screen of the image display device 5, a decorative symbol (a symbol indicating a number or the like) as a plurality of types of decorative identification information different from the special symbol is synchronized with the first special figure game or the second special figure game. Is variablely displayed. Here, in synchronization with the first special figure game or the second special figure game, the decorative symbols are variably displayed (for example, up and down) in each of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right". Direction scroll display and update display). It should be noted that the special figure game and the variable display of decorative symbols executed in synchronization are also collectively referred to as simply variable display.

On the screen of the image display device 5, a display area for displaying a hold display corresponding to the variable display in which execution is suspended or an active display corresponding to the variable display being executed may be provided. Hold display and active display are collectively referred to as variable display compatible display corresponding to variable display.

The number of variable displays on hold is also called the number of hold storages. The number of reserved storage corresponding to the first special figure game is also referred to as the first reserved storage number, and the number of reserved storage corresponding to the second special figure game is also referred to as the second reserved storage number. The total of the first reserved storage number and the second reserved storage number is also referred to as the total reserved storage number.

At a predetermined position of the game board 2, a first hold indicator 25A and a second hold indicator 25B configured to include a plurality of LEDs are provided. The first hold display 25A displays the first hold storage number according to the number of LEDs lit. The second hold indicator 25B displays the second hold storage number according to the number of LEDs lit.

A winning ball device 6A is provided below the image display device 5, and a variable winning ball device 6B is provided on the right side of the winning ball device 6A.

The winning ball device 6A forms, for example, a first starting winning opening in which a game ball is always kept in a constant open state in which a game ball can enter by a predetermined ball receiving member. When a game ball enters the first start winning opening, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls may be paid out and the first special figure game may be started.

The variable winning ball device 6B (ordinary electric accessory) forms a second starting winning opening that is changed between a closed state and an open state by a solenoid 81 (see FIG. 3). The variable winning ball device 6B includes, for example, an electric tulip-shaped accessory having a pair of movable wing pieces, and the movable wing pieces are in a vertical position when the solenoid 81 is in the off state, so that the tip of the movable wing pieces is in a vertical position. Is close to the winning ball device 6A and is in a closed state in which the game ball does not enter the second starting winning opening (also referred to as the second starting winning opening is closed). On the other hand, the variable-sweep wing device 6B is in an open state in which the game ball can enter the second start winning opening because the movable wing piece is in the tilted position when the solenoid 81 is on (second start). It is also said that the winning opening is open.) When a game ball enters the second start winning opening, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls may be paid out and the second special figure game may be started. The variable winning ball device 6B may be any as long as it changes between the closed state and the open state, and is not limited to the one provided with the electric tulip type accessory.

A predetermined ball receiving member always keeps a constant open state at a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, three places on the lower left of the game area and one place on the upper side of the variable winning ball device 6B). A general winning opening 10 is provided. In this case, when entering any of the general winning openings 10, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out as prize balls.

A special variable winning ball device 7 having a large winning opening is provided between the winning ball device 6A and the variable winning ball device 6B. The special variable winning ball device 7 is provided with a large winning opening door that is opened and closed by a solenoid 82 (see FIG. 3), and the large winning opening as a specific area that changes between an open state and a closed state by the large winning opening door. Form.

As an example, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the big winning door (for special electric accessory) is off, the big winning door closes the big winning door and the game ball is large. You will not be able to enter (pass) the winning opening. On the other hand, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door is on, the large winning opening door opens the large winning opening, and the game ball can easily enter the large winning opening. Become.

When a game ball enters the large prize opening, a predetermined number (for example, 14) of game balls are paid out as prize balls. When a game ball enters the large winning opening, more prize balls are paid out than when the game ball enters, for example, the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening, and the general winning opening 10.

The entry of a game ball into each winning opening including the general winning opening 10 is also referred to as "winning". In particular, winning a prize at the starting opening (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening) is also referred to as a starting winning.

A normal symbol display 20 is provided at a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, the lower left of the game area). As an example, the ordinary symbol display 20 is composed of 7-segment LEDs and the like, and performs variable display of ordinary symbols as a plurality of types of ordinary identification information different from special symbols. An ordinary symbol is represented by a number indicating "0" to "9" or a lighting pattern such as "-". The normal symbol may include a pattern in which all the LEDs are turned off. Such a variable display of a normal pattern is also called a normal figure game.

A passing gate 41 through which a game ball can pass is provided on the right side of the image display device 5. Based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the passing gate 41, the normal drawing game is executed.

Below the normal symbol display 20, a normal symbol hold display 25C is provided. The normal figure hold display 25C is configured to include, for example, four LEDs, and displays the number of normal figure hold storages, which is the number of normal figure games whose execution is held, by the number of LEDs lit.

In addition to the above configuration, the surface of the game board 2 is provided with a windmill that changes the flow direction and speed of the game ball and a large number of obstacle nails. At the bottom of the game area, there is an out opening for taking in a game ball that has not entered any of the winning openings.

Speakers 8L and 8R for reproducing and outputting sound effects and the like are provided at the upper left and right positions of the gaming machine frame 3. A main lamp 9a is provided above the image display device 5 in the gaming machine frame 3, and frame lamps 9b are provided on the left and right sides of the main lamp 9a so as to surround the gaming area. Further, an attacker lamp 9c is provided in the vicinity of the special variable winning ball device 7 on the game board 2.

At a predetermined position of the game board 2 (upper position of the image display device 5 in FIG. 1), a movable body 32 that operates according to the effect is provided. Further, the movable body 32 is provided with a movable body lamp 9d. The movable body lamp 9d, the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, and the attacker lamp 9c described above may be collectively referred to as a game effect lamp 9. The main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker lamp 9c, and the movable body lamp 9d are configured to include an LED.

At the lower right position of the gaming machine frame 3, a ball striking operation handle (operation knob) 30 operated by a player or the like to launch the game ball toward the game area by the striking ball launching device is provided.

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area, a gaming ball paid out as a prize ball or a gaming ball rented by a predetermined ball lending machine is held (stored) so as to be able to be supplied to a hitting ball launching device. ) A hit ball supply plate (upper plate) is provided. In addition to the upper plate, the gaming machine frame 3 may be provided with a payout unit (ball hitting plate) on which prize balls are paid out when the upper plate is full.

A stick controller 31A that can be grasped and tilted by the player is attached to a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area. The stick controller 31A is provided with a trigger button that can be pressed and operated by the player. The operation on the stick controller 31A is detected by the controller sensor unit 35A (see FIG. 3).

A push button 31B is provided at a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area so that the player can perform a predetermined instruction operation by a pressing operation or the like. The operation for the push button 31B is detected by the push sensor 35B (see FIG. 3).

The pachinko gaming machine 1 is provided with a stick controller 31A and a push button 31B as detection means for detecting the movement (operation, etc.) of the player, but detection means other than these may be provided.

FIG. 2 is a rear perspective view of the pachinko gaming machine 1. A main board 11 housed in a board case 201 is mounted on the back surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1. The main board 11 is provided with a setting key 51 and a setting changeover switch 52. The setting key 51 functions as a lock switch for switching to a setting change state or a setting confirmation state. The setting changeover switch 52 functions as a setting switch for changing the setting values such as the winning probability of the big hit and the payout rate in the setting change state. The setting key 51 and the setting changeover switch 52 may be attached to the outside of the main board 11 such as a predetermined position of the power supply board 17.

A display monitor 29 is arranged in the center of the back surface of the main board 11, and a display changeover switch 31 is arranged on the side of the display monitor 29. The display monitor 29 may be configured by using, for example, a 7-segment LED display device. The display monitor 29 and the display changeover switch 31 are arranged in front of the main board 11 when the back side of the game board 2 is visually recognized with the gaming machine frame 3 open.

The display monitor 29 can display winning information such as a continuous ratio, a combination ratio, and a base. The ratio is the ratio of the total number of prize balls to the number of prize balls by winning a prize in the big winning opening (attacker). The role ratio is the ratio of the number of prize balls by winning the second starting winning opening (Denchu) and the number of winning balls by winning the big winning opening (attacker) to the total number of prize balls. The base is the ratio of the total number of prize balls to the number of game balls launched. The display monitor 29 can display the set value in the pachinko gaming machine 1 when the setting is changed or the setting is confirmed. The display monitor 29 may be capable of displaying a setting value or the like to be changed or confirmed when the setting is changed or confirmed.

The setting key 51 and the setting changeover switch 52 cannot be operated from the front side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 when the gaming machine frame 3 is closed. A glass door frame 3a having a glass window is rotatably provided in the gaming machine frame 3, and the gaming area can be opened and closed by the glass door frame 3a. When the glass door frame 3a is closed, the game area can be seen through the glass window.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, a security cover 50A is attached to the right end portion of the outer frame 1a formed in the shape of a vertically long square frame. When the gaming machine frame 3 is closed, the security cover 50A covers the right side portion of the board case 201 including the setting key 51 and the setting changeover switch 52 from the back surface side. The security cover 50A is a substantially L-shaped member including a short piece 50Aa and a long piece 50Ab, and may be made of a transparent synthetic resin.

(Outline of the progress of the game)
The game ball is launched toward the game area by the rotation operation of the pachinko game machine 1 by the player to the ball striking operation handle 30. When the game ball passes through the passing gate 41, the normal symbol game by the normal symbol display 20 is started. In addition, when the game ball passes through the passing gate 41 during the period during the execution of the previous normal map game (when the game ball passes through the passing gate 41 but the normal map game based on the passage cannot be executed immediately). , The normal map game based on the passage is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit (for example, 4).

In this normal symbol game, if a specific normal symbol (design per normal symbol) is stopped and displayed, the display result of the normal symbol becomes "per normal symbol". On the other hand, if a normal symbol other than a normal symbol (a normal symbol lost symbol) is stopped and displayed as a confirmed normal symbol, the display result of the normal symbol becomes "normal symbol lost". When it becomes "per-normal", the opening control is performed so that the variable winning ball device 6B is opened for a predetermined period (the second starting winning opening is opened).

When the game ball enters the first starting winning opening formed in the winning ball device 6A, the first special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A is started.

When the game ball enters the second starting winning opening formed in the variable winning ball device 6B, the second special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B is started.

In addition, when the game ball enters (wins) the start winning opening during the period during which the special figure game is being executed, or during the period controlled by the big hit game state or the small hit game state described later (starting prize has occurred). If the special figure game based on the start prize cannot be executed immediately), the execution of the special figure game based on the approach is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit (for example, 4).

In the special symbol game, if a specific special symbol (big hit symbol, for example, "7", the actual symbol differs depending on the jackpot type described later) is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol, it becomes "big hit" and the jackpot symbol. If a predetermined special symbol (small hit symbol, for example, "2") different from the above is stopped and displayed, it becomes "small hit". Further, if a special symbol (missing symbol, for example, "-") different from the big hit symbol or the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed, it becomes "missing".

After the display result in the special figure game becomes "big hit", it is controlled to the big hit game state as an advantageous state advantageous for the player. After the display result in the special figure game becomes "small hit", it is controlled to the small hit game state.

In the big hit game state, the big winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined manner. The open state includes the elapsed timing of a predetermined period (for example, 29 seconds or 1.8 seconds) and the timing until the number of game balls that have entered the large winning opening reaches a predetermined number (for example, 9). It will continue until the earlier timing. The predetermined period is an upper limit period during which the large winning opening can be opened in one round, and is also hereinafter referred to as an opening upper limit period. One cycle in which the big winning opening is open in this way is called a round (round game). In the big hit game state, the round can be repeatedly executed until the predetermined upper limit number (15 times or 2 times) is reached.

In the big hit game state, the player can obtain the prize ball by letting the game ball enter the big prize opening. Therefore, the jackpot gaming state is an advantageous state for the player. The larger the number of rounds in the jackpot game state and the longer the open upper limit period, the more advantageous it is for the player.

A big hit type is set for "big hit". For example, multiple types of opening modes (number of rounds and opening upper limit period) of the big winning opening and game states after the big hit game state (normal state, time saving state, probability change state, etc.) are prepared, and the big hit type is set according to these. Has been done. As the jackpot type, a jackpot type in which a large number of prize balls can be obtained, a jackpot type in which a small number of prize balls can be obtained, or a jackpot type in which almost no prize balls can be obtained may be provided.

In the small hit game state, the large winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined opening mode. For example, in the small hit game state, the opening mode similar to the big hit game state in some big hit types (the number of times the big winning opening is opened is the same as the number of rounds above, and the closing timing of the big winning opening is also the same. Etc.), the big winning opening is opened. As with the big hit type, the small hit type may be provided for the "small hit".

After the jackpot game state is completed, it may be controlled to a time saving state or a probability change state according to the jackpot type.

In the time saving state, control (time saving control) is executed in which the average special figure fluctuation time (period in which the special figure is changed) is shortened from the normal state. In the time-saving state, the average fluctuation time of the normal map (the period during which the normal map is changed) is shortened from the normal state, and the probability of becoming a "normal map hit" in the normal map game is improved from the normal state. Control (high opening control, high base control) that makes it easier for the game ball to enter the second start winning opening is also executed. The time saving state is a state in which the variation efficiency of the special symbol (particularly the second special symbol) is improved, which is advantageous for the player.

In the probabilistic state (probability fluctuation state), in addition to the time saving control, the probability change control in which the probability that the display result becomes a "big hit" is higher than in the normal state is executed. The probabilistic state is a state in which the fluctuation efficiency of the special symbol is improved and the “big hit” is likely to occur, which is a more advantageous state for the player.

The time saving state and the probabilistic change state continue until any one of the end conditions such as the execution of the special figure game a predetermined number of times and the start of the next big hit game state are satisfied first. A game whose end condition is that the special figure game has been executed a predetermined number of times is also referred to as a number-cutting (time-cutting time reduction, number-cutting probability change, etc.).

The normal state is a gaming state other than a special state such as an advantageous state such as a big hit gaming state that is advantageous for the player, a time saving state, and a probability change state, and the display result in the normal figure game is "normal figure hit". The pachinko gaming machine 1 such as the probability and the probability that the display result in the special figure game becomes a "big hit" returns to a predetermined state after the power is turned on, such as the initial setting state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (for example, when a system reset is performed). It is in the same controlled state as when the process was not executed).

The state in which the probability change control is executed is also called a high probability state, and the state in which the probability change control is not executed is also called a low probability state. The state in which the time reduction control is executed is also called a high base state, and the state in which the time reduction control is not executed is also called a low base state. By combining these, it is also called a low-accuracy high-base state in a time-saving state, a high-accuracy high-base state in a probabilistic state, and a low-accuracy low-base state in a normal state. The high-accuracy state and the low-base state are also called the high-accuracy low-base state.

After the small hit game state ends, the game state is not changed, and the game state is continuously controlled to the game state before the display result of the special figure game becomes "small hit" (however, "small hit" occurs. If the special figure game at the time is the special figure game of the predetermined number of times in the above number of times cut, the game state is naturally changed). In addition, it is not necessary that there is no "small hit" as the display result of the special figure game.

The gaming state may change based on the fact that the gaming ball has passed through a specific area (for example, a specific area in the big winning opening) during the big hit game state. For example, when the game ball passes through a specific area, it may be controlled to a probable change state after the big hit game state.
(Progress of production, etc.)

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, various effects (effects of notifying the progress of the game and enlivening the game) are executed according to the progress of the game. The production will be described below. The effect is performed by displaying various effect images on the image display device 5, but in addition to or in place of the display, audio output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and a game effect lamp 9 It may be turned on or off, the operation of the movable body 32, or an effect using an arbitrary effect device including a part or all of them.

As an effect executed according to the progress of the game, in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the "left", "middle", and "right" provided in the image display device 5, the first special figure game or the first 2 In response to the start of the special figure game, the variable display of the decorative pattern is started. At the timing when the display result (also referred to as the finalized special symbol) is stopped and displayed in the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game, the final decorative symbol (combination of three decorative symbols) which is the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol is displayed. ) Is also displayed (derived) as a stop.

In the period from the start to the end of the variable display of the decorative symbol, the variable display mode of the decorative symbol may become a predetermined reach mode (reach is established). Here, the reach mode is a variable display of a decorative symbol that has not yet been stopped and displayed when the decorative symbol that has been stopped and displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 constitutes a part of the jackpot combination described later. It is an aspect that is continuing.

In addition, the reach effect is executed in response to the above-mentioned reach mode during the variable display of the decorative pattern. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the ratio of the display result (display result of the special figure game or variable display of the decorative symbol) to be "big hit" (also called big hit reliability or big hit expectation) is determined according to the production mode. Multiple different types of reach effects are performed. Reach effects include, for example, normal reach and super reach, which has a higher hit reliability than normal reach.

When the display result of the special figure game is "big hit", a definite decorative symbol that is a predetermined jackpot combination is derived as a display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol on the screen of the image display device 5 (decoration). The display result of the variable display of the symbol is "big hit"). As an example, the same decorative symbols (for example, "7") are all stopped and displayed on predetermined effective lines in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right". ..

In the case of "probability change jackpot" which is controlled to the probability change state after the end of the jackpot game state, an odd number of decorative symbols (for example, "7" etc.) are all stopped and displayed, and the probability change state is changed after the end of the jackpot game state. In the case of an uncontrolled "non-probability variable jackpot (normal jackpot)", an even number of decorative symbols (for example, "6") may be stopped and displayed. In this case, the odd-numbered decorative symbol is also referred to as a probabilistic symbol, and the even-numbered decorative symbol is also referred to as a non-probable variable symbol (normal symbol). After the non-probability pattern becomes the reach mode, the promotion effect that finally becomes the "probability change jackpot" may be executed.

When the display result of the special figure game is "small hit", a fixed decorative symbol (for example, "for example," 1 3 5 "etc.) is derived (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is" small hit "). As an example, the decorative symbols constituting the chance eyes are stopped and displayed on the predetermined effective lines in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right". In addition, when the display result of the special figure game becomes "big hit" of some big hit types (big hit type of the big hit game state in the same mode as the small hit game state), and when it becomes "small hit". , A common fixed decorative pattern may be derived and displayed.

When the display result of the special figure game is "missing", the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is not the reach mode, and the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol is a definite decorative symbol of a non-reach combination ("" (Also referred to as "non-reach loss") may be stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern may be "non-reach loss"). In addition, when the display result is "missing", after the variable display mode of the decorative symbol becomes the reach mode, the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol is a predetermined reach combination ("reach loss") that is not a big hit combination. The confirmed decorative symbol (also referred to as) may be stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol may be "reach loss").

The effect that the pachinko gaming machine 1 can execute includes displaying the above-mentioned variable display compatible display (hold display or active display). Further, as another effect, for example, a notice effect for notifying the reliability of the jackpot is executed during the variable display of the decorative symbol. The notice effect includes a notice effect that announces the jackpot reliability in the variable display during execution, and a pre-reading advance notice effect that announces the jackpot reliability in the variable display (variable display in which execution is suspended) before execution. As the pre-reading notice effect, an effect of changing the display mode of the variable display compatible display (holding display or active display) to a mode different from the usual mode may be executed.

Further, in the image display device 5, one variable display is pseudo-like a plurality of variable displays by temporarily stopping the decorative symbol during the variable display of the decorative symbol and then restarting the variable display. The pseudo-continuous production may be executed.

Even during the big hit game state, the big hit middle effect that notifies the big hit game state is executed. As the big hit middle effect, an effect of notifying the number of rounds and a promotion effect indicating that the value of the big hit gaming state is improved may be executed. Further, even during the small hit game state, the small hit medium effect for notifying the small hit game state is executed. It should be noted that the big hit game during the small hit game state and in some big hit types (the big hit type of the big hit game state having the same aspect as the small hit game state, for example, the big hit type in which the subsequent game state is a highly accurate state). By executing a common effect depending on the state, the player may not know whether the current state is in the small hit game state or the big hit game state. In such a case, by executing a common effect after the end of the small hit game state and after the end of the big hit game state, it is not possible to distinguish between the high probability state and the low probability state. You may.

Further, for example, when a special figure game or the like is not executed, a demo (demonstration) image is displayed on the image display device 5 (a customer waiting demo effect is executed).

(Board configuration)
For example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is equipped with a main board 11, an effect control board 12, a voice control board 13, a lamp control board 14, a relay board 15, and the like as shown in FIG. In addition, various boards such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, and a launch control board are arranged on the back surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1. Further, a power supply board 17 is also mounted. Various control boards are configured so that not only electronic circuit boards such as printed wiring boards on which conductor patterns are formed and electric components can be mounted, but also electrical components are mounted on the electronic circuit boards to realize specific electrical functions. It is a concept including the electronic circuit mounting board.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, electric power from an AC power source such as AC100V in an external power source such as a commercial power source can be supplied to electric parts including various control boards such as a main board 11 and an effect control board 12 by a power supply board 17. The power supply board 17 includes, for example, a rectifying circuit for converting alternating current (AC) to direct current (DC), a power supply circuit for converting a predetermined direct current voltage to a specific direct current voltage (for example, direct current 12V, direct current 5V, etc.), and the like. I have.

The main board 11 is a control board on the main side, and is a progress of the above-mentioned game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (execution of a special figure game (including management of hold), execution of a normal figure game (including management of hold), and a big hit. It has a function to control a gaming state, a small hit gaming state, a gaming state, etc.). The main board 11 includes a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, a solenoid circuit 111, and the like.

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, which includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101, a RAM (Random Access Memory) 102, and a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103. , A random number circuit 104 and an I / O (Input / Output port) 105.

The CPU 103 performs a process of controlling the progress of the game (a process of realizing the function of the main board 11) by executing the program stored in the ROM 101. At this time, various data stored in the ROM 101 (data such as a fluctuation pattern described later, an effect control command described later, and various tables referred to when making various decisions described later) are used, and the RAM 102 is used as the main memory. .. The RAM 102 is a backup RAM in which the stored contents are stored for a predetermined period even if the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped in part or in whole. Note that all or part of the program stored in the ROM 101 may be expanded into the RAM 102 and executed on the RAM 102.

The random number circuit 104 counts updatable numerical data indicating various random numbers (game random numbers) used when controlling the progress of the game. The game random number may be one that is updated by the CPU 103 executing a predetermined computer program (one that is updated by software).

The I / O 105 has, for example, an input port into which various signals (detection signals described later) are input, various signals (first special symbol display device 4A, second special symbol display device 4B, ordinary symbol display 20, first hold). It includes an output port for transmitting (a signal for controlling (driving) the display 25A, the second hold display 25B, the normal figure hold display 25C, etc., and a solenoid drive signal).

The switch circuit 110 is a detection signal (a game ball passes or is passed) from various switches for detecting a game ball (gate switch 21, start port switch (first start port switch 22A and second start port switch 22B), count switch 23). It takes in a detection signal indicating that the switch has been turned on by entering and transmits it to the game control microcomputer 100. By transmitting the detection signal, the passage or approach of the game ball is detected.

A reset signal, a power cutoff signal, and a clear signal from the power supply board 17 are taken into the switch circuit 110 and transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100. The reset signal is an operation stop signal for putting a control circuit such as a game control microcomputer 100 into an operation stop state, and can be output by using any of a power supply monitoring circuit, a watchdog timer built-in IC, and a system reset IC. All you need is. The power cutoff signal turns off when the predetermined power supply voltage used in the pachinko gaming machine 1 exceeds a predetermined value, and turns on when the period during which the predetermined power supply voltage falls below the predetermined value continues until the power failure reference time or longer. Become. The clear signal is turned on in response to, for example, a pressing operation on the clear switch provided on the power supply board 17.

The solenoid circuit 111 transfers a solenoid drive signal from the game control microcomputer 100 (for example, a signal for turning on the solenoid 81 or the solenoid 82) to the solenoid 81 for an ordinary electric accessory or the solenoid 82 for a prize-winning door. To transmit.

A display monitor 29, a display changeover switch 31, a setting key 51, a setting changeover switch 52, and a door opening sensor 90 are connected to the main board 11. The door opening sensor 90 detects the opening of the gaming machine frame 3 including the glass door frame 3a.

The main board 11 (microcomputer 100 for game control) issues an effect control command (command for designating (notifying) the progress of the game) according to the progress of the game as a part of controlling the progress of the game. Supply to 12. The effect control command output from the main board 11 is relayed by the relay board 15 and supplied to the effect control board 12. The effect control command includes, for example, various determination results on the main board 11 (for example, display results of a special figure game (including a jackpot type)), and fluctuation patterns used when executing a special figure game (details will be described later). )), The game status (for example, the start and end of the variable display, the opening status of the large winning opening, the occurrence of the winning, the number of reserved memories, the game status), the command for specifying the occurrence of an error, and the like are included.

The effect control board 12 is a control board on the sub side independent of the main board 11, receives an effect control command, and produces an effect (various effects according to the progress of the game) based on the received effect control command. It has a function of executing various notifications such as driving of the movable body 32, error notification, and notification of power failure recovery).

The effect control board 12 is equipped with an effect control CPU 120, a ROM 121, a RAM 122, a display control unit 123, a random number circuit 124, and an I / O 125.

The effect control CPU 120 is a process for executing an effect together with the display control unit 123 by executing a program stored in the ROM 121 (a process for realizing the above-mentioned function of the effect control board 12, and is an effect to be executed). (Including the decision etc.). At this time, various data (data such as various tables) stored in the ROM 121 are used, and the RAM 122 is used as the main memory.

The effect control CPU 120 displays the execution of the effect based on the detection signal from the controller sensor unit 35A or the push sensor 35B (a signal output when an operation by the player is detected and an appropriate signal indicating the operation content). It may also instruct the control unit 123.

The display control unit 123 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor), a CGROM (Character Generator ROM), a VRAM (Video RAM), and the like, and executes the effect based on the effect execution instruction from the effect control CPU 120.

The display control unit 123 supplies the image display device 5 with a video signal corresponding to the effect to be executed based on the effect execution instruction from the effect control CPU 120, so that the effect image is displayed on the image display device 5. The display control unit 123 further supplies a sound designation signal (a signal for designating the sound to be output) to the voice control board 13 in order to output sound synchronized with the display of the effect image and turn on / off the game effect lamp 9. Or, a lamp signal (a signal for designating the lighting / extinguishing mode of the lamp) is supplied to the lamp control board 14. Further, the display control unit 123 supplies a signal for operating the movable body 32 to the movable body 32 or a drive circuit for driving the movable body 32.

The voice control board 13 is equipped with various circuits for driving the speakers 8L and 8R, drives the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound designation signal, and outputs the voice designated by the sound designation signal from the speakers 8L and 8R. Let me.

The lamp control board 14 is equipped with various circuits for driving the game effect lamp 9, drives the game effect lamp 9 based on the lamp signal, and turns on / off the game effect lamp 9 in a mode designated by the lamp signal. do. In this way, the display control unit 123 controls the audio output and the lighting / extinguishing of the lamp.

The effect control CPU 120 executes audio output, lamp lighting / extinguishing control (sound designation signal, lamp signal supply, etc.), and movable body 32 control (signal supply for operating the movable body 32, etc.). You may do so.

The random number circuit 124 counts updatable numerical data indicating various random number values (random numbers for effect) used for executing various effects. The effect random number may be one that is updated (updated by software) when the effect control CPU 120 executes a predetermined computer program.

The I / O 125 mounted on the effect control board 12 is for transmitting various signals (video signal, sound designation signal, lamp signal) and an input port for taking in the effect control command transmitted from, for example, the main board 11. Consists of including the output port of.

Boards other than the main board 11, such as the effect control board 12, the sound control board 13, and the lamp control board 14, are also referred to as sub-boards. A plurality of sub-boards may be provided for each function as in the pachinko gaming machine 1, or one sub-board may be configured to have a plurality of functions.

(motion)
Next, the operation (action) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described.

(Main operation of main board 11)
First, the main operation of the main board 11 will be described. When the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started, the gaming control microcomputer 100 is activated, and the gaming control main process is executed by the CPU 103. FIG. 4 is a flowchart showing a game control main process executed by the CPU 103 on the main board 11.

In the game control main process shown in FIG. 4, the CPU 103 first sets interrupt prohibition (step S1). Subsequently, necessary initial settings are made (step S2). The initial setting includes a stack pointer setting, a register setting of a built-in device (CTC (counter / timer circuit), a parallel input / output port, etc.), a setting for making the RAM 102 accessible, and the like.

Next, it is determined whether or not the recovery condition is satisfied (step S3). The recovery condition can be satisfied when the clear signal is off, there is backup data, and the backup RAM is normal. When the power supply of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started, for example, if the clear switch provided on the power supply board 17 is pressed, a clear signal in the ON state is input to the game control microcomputer 100. When such a clear signal in the ON state is input, it may be determined in step S3 that the recovery condition is not satisfied. The backup data may be stored in RAM 102, which is a backup RAM for game control. In step S3, the presence or absence of backup data, the presence or absence of data errors, and the like may be confirmed or inspected to determine whether or not the recovery conditions can be satisfied.

If the recovery condition is satisfied (step S3; Yes), the recovery process (step S4) is executed, and then the setting confirmation process (step S5) is executed. By the recovery process in step S4, the work area is set based on the stored contents of the RAM 102. By setting the work area using the backup data stored in the RAM 102, the game state is restored when the power supply is stopped. For example, when the special symbol is changing, the state before the stop is special. It suffices if the fluctuation of the design can be resumed.

If the recovery condition is not satisfied (step S3; No), the setting change process (step S7) is executed after the initialization process (step S6) is executed. The initialization process in step S6 includes a clear process for clearing the flags, counters, and buffers stored in the RAM 102, and the initial value is set in the work area by executing the clear process.

In the setting confirmation process of step S5, it is determined whether or not the predetermined setting confirmation condition is satisfied. The setting confirmation condition is satisfied, for example, when the detection signal from the door open sensor 90 is on and the setting key 51 is turned on when the power supply is started. The setting confirmation process in step S5 is executed when the recovery conditions including the fact that the clear signal is in the off state are satisfied in step S3. Therefore, since the setting confirmation condition can be satisfied only when the clear signal is in the off state, the fact that the clear signal is in the off state can also be included in the setting confirmation condition.

When the setting confirmation condition is satisfied in the setting confirmation process of step S5, the setting confirmation state in which the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be confirmed is set, and the setting is made from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. A confirmation start command is sent. In the setting confirmation state, it is possible to confirm the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 by the display of the display monitor 29. When the setting confirmation state is terminated, the setting confirmation end command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12.

When the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the setting confirmation state, it may be in the gaming stop state in which the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped. When the game is stopped, the launch of the game ball by the operation of the hitting ball operation handle, the detection of the game ball by various switches, etc. are stopped, and the first special symbol display device 4A, the second special symbol display device 4B, and the normal symbol are stopped. The display 20 may be controlled so that the lost symbol or the like is stopped and displayed, or the display corresponding to the game stopped state different from the lost symbol is displayed. When the setting confirmation state ends, the game stop state that accompanies this may also end.

In the setting change process of step S7, it is determined whether or not the predetermined setting change condition is satisfied. The setting change condition is satisfied, for example, when the detection signal from the door open sensor 90 is on and the setting key 51 is turned on when the power supply is started. The setting change condition may include that the clear signal is in the ON state.

When the setting change condition is satisfied in the setting change process of step S7, the setting change state in which the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be changed is set, and the setting is set from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. A change start command is sent. In the setting change state, the set value is displayed on the display monitor 29, and each time the operation of the setting changeover switch 52 is detected, the numerical value displayed on the display monitor 29 is sequentially updated and displayed. After that, based on the fact that the setting key 51 is turned off by an operation by a staff member of the game hall or the like, the setting value displayed on the display monitor 29 is stored (updated and stored) in the backup area of the RAM 102, and the display monitor 29 is stored. Turns off. When the setting change state is terminated, the setting change end command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12.

When the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the setting change state, the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be in the gaming stop state as in the case of the setting confirmation state. When the setting change state ends, the game stop state that accompanies this may also end.

When the effect control board 12 side receives the setting confirmation start command or the setting change start command, the control may be performed to notify that the setting is being confirmed or the setting is being changed. For example, a predetermined image may be displayed on the image display device 5, a predetermined sound may be output from the speakers 8L and 8R, or a light emitting member such as a game effect lamp 9 may be made to emit light in a predetermined manner.

The clear signal is turned on by, for example, pressing the clear switch provided on the power supply board 17. Therefore, when the detection signal from the door open sensor 90 is on and the setting key 51 is on when the power supply is started, if the clear switch is on, the step is performed together with the initialization process of step S6. The setting change process of S7 is executed and the setting change state can be controlled. If the clear switch is off, the setting confirmation process of step S5 is executed together with the recovery process of step S4 and the setting confirmation state can be controlled. If the detection signal from the door open sensor 90 is off or the setting key 51 is off when the power supply is started, the initialization process of step S6 is executed if the clear switch is on. On the other hand, it is not controlled to the setting change state, and if the clear switch is off, the recovery process of step S4 is executed, but it is not controlled to the setting confirmation state.

After executing the setting confirmation process or the setting change process, the CPU 103 executes a random number circuit setting process for initializing the random number circuit 104 (step S8). Then, the CTC register built in the game control microcomputer 100 is set so that the timer is interrupted periodically every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms) (step S9), and interrupts are permitted (step S10). ). After that, the loop processing is started. After that, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute the timer interrupt process.

When the CPU 103 that has executed the game control main process receives the interrupt request signal from the CTC and receives the interrupt request, it executes the game control timer interrupt process shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 5 is started, the CPU 103 first executes a predetermined switch process to enter the gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22A, and the second start port via the switch circuit 110. It is determined whether or not detection signals are received from various switches such as the switch 22B and the count switch 23 (step S21). Subsequently, by executing a predetermined error processing on the main side, an abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is performed, and a warning can be generated if necessary according to the diagnosis result (step S22). After that, by executing a predetermined information output process, for example, the jackpot information (information indicating the number of times the jackpot has occurred) and the start information (starting) supplied to the hall management computer installed outside the pachinko gaming machine 1. Data such as information such as the number of times of winning and the probability fluctuation information (information indicating the number of times of the probability change state) are output (step S23).

Following the information output process, a game random number update process for updating at least a part of the game random numbers used on the main board 11 side by software is executed (step S24). After that, the CPU 103 executes a special symbol process process (step S25). By executing the special symbol process process for each timer interrupt by the CPU 103, it is possible to manage the execution and hold of the special symbol game, control the big hit game state and the small hit game state, control the game state, and the like.

Following the special symbol process process, the normal symbol process process is executed (step S26). By executing the normal symbol process processing for each timer interrupt, the CPU 103 manages the execution and hold of the normal figure game based on the detection signal from the gate switch 21 (based on the passing of the game ball through the passing gate 41). It enables opening control of the variable winning ball device 6B based on "per-figure". The execution of the normal figure game is performed by driving the normal symbol display 20, and the normal figure hold display 25C is turned on to display the number of normal figure hold.

After executing the normal symbol process process, as a part of the game control timer interrupt process, a process when a power failure occurs, a process for paying out a prize ball, and the like may be performed. After that, the CPU 103 executes the command control process (step S27). The CPU 103 may send and set an effect control command in each of the above processes. In the command control process of step S27, a process of transmitting the effect control command set for transmission to a control board on the sub side such as the effect control board 12 is performed. After executing the command control process, the interrupt is permitted and then the game control timer interrupt process is terminated.

FIG. 6 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S25 shown in FIG. 5 as the special symbol process process. In this special symbol process process, the CPU 103 first executes a start winning determination process (step S101).

In the start winning determination process, a process of detecting the occurrence of a start winning, storing the hold information in a predetermined area of the RAM 102, and updating the hold storage number is executed. When the start winning is generated, the display result (including the jackpot type) and the random value for determining the fluctuation pattern are extracted and stored as hold information. Further, a process of pre-reading and determining a display result or a fluctuation pattern may be executed based on the extracted random number value. After storing the hold information and the number of hold storages, the transmission setting for transmitting the effect control command for specifying the judgment result such as the occurrence of the start winning prize, the number of hold storages, the read-ahead judgment, etc. is set on the effect control board 12. Will be. The effect control command at the time of starting winning, which is set to be transmitted in this way, is executed from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by executing the command control process in step S27 shown in FIG. 4, for example, after the special symbol process process is completed. Is transmitted to.

After executing the start winning determination process in step S101, the CPU 103 selects and executes any of the processes of steps S110 to S120 according to the value of the special figure process flag provided in the RAM 102. In each process (steps S110 to S120) of the special symbol process process, a transmission setting for transmitting an effect control command corresponding to each process to the effect control board 12 is performed.

The special symbol normal processing in step S110 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “0” (initial value). In this special symbol normal processing, it is determined whether or not to start the first special figure game or the second special figure game based on the presence or absence of the reserved information. In addition, in the special symbol normal processing, whether or not the display result of the special symbol or decorative symbol is set to "big hit" or "small hit" based on the random number value for determining the display result, and the big hit type when the display result is set to "big hit". Is determined (predetermined) before the display result is derived and displayed. Further, in the special symbol normal processing, a definite special symbol (either a big hit symbol, a small hit symbol, or a lost symbol) to be stopped and displayed in the special symbol game is set according to the determined display result. After that, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "1", and the special symbol normal processing ends. It should be noted that the special figure game using the second special figure may be executed with priority over the special figure game using the first special figure (also referred to as special figure 2 priority digestion). Further, the winning order of the game balls to the first starting winning opening and the second starting winning opening may be stored, and the starting condition of the special figure game may be satisfied in the winning order (also referred to as winning order digestion).

When making various decisions based on the random number value, various tables stored in the ROM 101 (a table in which the decision value to be compared with the random number value is assigned to the decision result) are referred to. The same applies to other decisions on the main board 11 and various decisions on the effect control board 12. In the effect control board 12, various tables are stored in the ROM 121.

The variation pattern setting process in step S111 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “1”. In this fluctuation pattern setting process, one of a plurality of types of fluctuation patterns is used by using a random value for determining the fluctuation pattern based on the pre-determination result of whether or not the display result is "big hit" or "small hit". It includes the process of determining. In the variation pattern setting process, when the variation pattern is determined, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "2", and the variation pattern setting process ends.

The fluctuation pattern includes the execution time of the special figure game (special figure fluctuation time) (which is also the execution time of the variable display of the decorative symbol), the variable display mode of the decorative symbol (presence or absence of reach, etc.), and the variable display of the decorative symbol. It specifies the content of the effect (type of reach effect, etc.), and is also called a variable display pattern.

The special symbol variation process in step S112 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “2”. In this special symbol variation processing, the processing for setting the special symbol to be varied in the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and the elapsed time from the start of the variation of the special symbol are performed. It includes processing to measure. In addition, it is also determined whether or not the measured elapsed time has reached the special figure fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern. Then, when the elapsed time from the start of the change of the special symbol reaches the special symbol fluctuation time, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "3", and the special symbol variation process ends.

The special symbol stop process in step S113 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “3”. In this special symbol stop process, the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B stop the fluctuation of the special symbol, and stop display (derive) the confirmed special symbol that is the display result of the special symbol. Contains the process of making settings for. Then, when the display result is "big hit", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "4". On the other hand, when the big hit flag is off and the display result is "small hit", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "8". If the display result is "missing", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0". When the display result is "small hit" or "missing", the game state is also updated when the time reduction state or the probability change state is controlled and the end of the number of cuts is established. When the value of the special symbol process flag is updated, the special symbol stop processing ends.

The jackpot opening preprocessing in step S114 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “4”. This big hit pre-opening process includes a process of setting to open the big winning opening by starting the execution of the round in the big hit game state based on the display result being "big hit". It has been. When the large winning opening is opened, a process of supplying a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door is executed. At this time, for example, the open upper limit period for opening the big winning opening and the upper limit execution number of rounds are set according to which type of big hit. When these settings are completed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", and the jackpot release preprocessing ends.

The process of opening the jackpot in step S115 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “5”. In this big hit opening process, the big winning opening is based on the process of measuring the elapsed time since the big winning opening is opened, the measured elapsed time, the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23, and the like. It includes a process of determining whether or not it is time to return the device from the open state to the closed state. Then, when the large winning opening is returned to the closed state, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "6" after executing a process of stopping the supply of the solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door. End the processing while the jackpot is open.

The post-processing after opening the jackpot in step S116 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “6”. In this big hit post-opening process, there is a process of determining whether or not the number of rounds to be executed with the big winning opening open has reached the set maximum number of executions, and a big hit game state when the maximum number of executions has been reached. It includes the process of making settings to terminate. Then, when the number of round executions has not reached the upper limit, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", while when the number of round executions reaches the upper limit, the special figure process flag is set. The value is updated to "7". When the value of the special figure process flag is updated, the jackpot release post-processing ends.

The jackpot end process of step S117 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “7”. In this jackpot end process, there is a process of waiting until the waiting time corresponding to the period corresponding to the period in which the ending effect as an effect effect for notifying the end of the jackpot game state is executed, and a probable change corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state. It includes processing to make various settings to start control and time reduction control. When such a setting is made, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the jackpot end process ends.

The small hit release preprocessing in step S118 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “8”. This small hit pre-opening process includes a process of setting the large winning opening to be in the open state in the small hit game state based on the display result being "small hit". At this time, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "9", and the small hit opening preprocessing ends.

The small hit opening process in step S119 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “9”. In this small hit opening process, it is the timing to return the big prize opening from the open state to the closed state based on the process of measuring the elapsed time from the opening state of the big winning opening and the measured elapsed time. It includes a process to determine whether or not it is. When the large winning opening is returned to the closed state and the end timing of the small hit game state is reached, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "10", and the processing during the small hit opening process ends.

The small hit end process of step S120 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “10”. The small hit end process includes a process of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to a period in which the effect operation for notifying the end of the small hit game state is executed has elapsed. Here, when the small hit gaming state ends, the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 before the small hit gaming state is continued. When the waiting time at the end of the small hit game state has elapsed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the small hit end process ends.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 is configured such that the winning probability of a big hit and the payout rate change according to a set value. For example, in the special symbol normal processing of the special symbol process processing, the winning probability of the big hit and the payout rate are changed by using the display result determination table (winning probability) according to the set value. For example, the set value consists of 6 stages of 1 to 6, with 6 having the highest probability of winning a big hit, and the smaller the value in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, 1 the lower the probability of winning a big hit. In this example, when 6 is set as the set value, the advantage is highest for the player, and the smaller the value in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, 1 is, the lower the advantage is gradually. .. If the winning probability of the big hit changes according to the set value, the payout rate may also change according to the set value. While the jackpot winning probability is constant regardless of the set value, the number of rounds in the jackpot gaming state may change according to the set value. The pachinko gaming machine 1 may be configured so that any one of a plurality of setting values having different advantages for the player can be set. The set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is notified by transmitting a set value designation command from the side of the main board 11 to the side of the effect control board 12.

FIG. 7 shows a configuration example of the display result determination table. FIG. 7A shows a configuration example of the display result determination table for the first special figure used when the variable special figure is the first special figure, and FIG. 7B shows the second special figure of the variable special figure. The configuration example of the display result determination table for the second special figure used in the case of a figure is shown. The display result determination table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 101. In the display result determination table, the hit determination value to be compared with the random number value MR1 is assigned to the special symbol display result which is the variable display result of the special symbol according to the set value. The random number value MR1 is a random number value for determining a display result, and the value is randomly updated in the range of 0 to 65535. As the display result determination table, a display result determination table common to the first special figure and the second special figure may be used.

In the display result judgment table, when the game state is the probability change state (high probability state), more judgment values are displayed as the "big hit" than when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state (low probability state). Assigned to the result. As a result, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in a high-probability state such as a probabilistic state in which the probabilistic change control is performed, there is a probability that the pachinko gaming machine 1 is determined to be controlled in the jackpot gaming state as compared with the low-probability state such as the normal state or the time-saving state. It gets higher.

In the display result determination table for the first special figure, it is determined so that the probability of being determined to control the special figure display result as a "small hit" to the small hit game state is the same regardless of the game state or the set value. A value has been assigned. In the second special figure display result determination table, the probability that the special figure display result is determined to be controlled to the small hit game state as a "small hit" is the probability of being determined to be controlled to the small hit game state regardless of the game state or the set value. Judgment values are assigned so that the values are the same as those in the judgment table. It should be noted that the probability of being determined to control the small hit gaming state with the special figure display result as "small hit" may be different according to the set value. Regardless of the variable special map, the probability determined to control the small hit gaming state with the special map display result as "small hit" may be the same probability.

In the display result determination table for the first special figure and the display result determination table for the second special figure, when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 1020 to 1237 of the hit judgment values is irrespective of the set value. It is set in the common numerical range of the big hit judgment value for judging the big hit. When the set value is 1, 1020 to 1237 are assigned to "big hit", and while only the common numerical range of the big hit judgment value for judging the big hit is set, the set value 2 to the set value 6 are set. In this case, the numerical range corresponding to each set value is set to the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value.

In the display result determination table for the first special figure and the display result determination table for the second special figure, when the game state is a probable change state, the range from 1020 to 1346 of the hit judgment values is a big hit regardless of the set value. It is set in the common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value for judgment. When the set value is 1, 1020 to 1346 are assigned to "big hit", so that only the common numerical range of the big hit judgment value for judging the big hit is set, while the set value 2 to the set value In the case of 6, the numerical range corresponding to each set value is set to the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value.

In the display result determination table for the first special figure, when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 32767 to 33094 of the hit judgment values is small for judging the small hit regardless of the set value. It is set in the common numerical range of the hit judgment value. The small hit determination value is set to a numerical range different from the common numerical range and the non-common numerical range of the big hit determination value regardless of whether the set value is 1 to 6. This prevents the numerical range of the small hit determination value from overlapping with the range of the large hit determination value that changes according to each set value.

In the display result determination table for the first special figure, when the gaming state is the probabilistic state, the range from 32767 to 33094 of the hit determination values is the set value as in the case where the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state. Regardless of, it is set in the common numerical range of the small hit judgment value for judging the small hit. The small hit determination value is set to a numerical range different from the common numerical range and the non-common numerical range of the big hit determination value regardless of whether the set value is 1 to 6. This prevents the numerical range of the small hit determination value from overlapping with the range of the large hit determination value that changes according to each set value.

In the display result determination table for the second special figure, when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 32767 to 33421 of the hit judgment values is small for judging the small hit regardless of the set value. It is set in the common numerical range of the hit judgment value. The small hit determination value is set to a numerical range different from the common numerical range and the non-common numerical range of the big hit determination value regardless of whether the set value is 1 to 6. This prevents the numerical range of the small hit determination value from overlapping with the range of the large hit determination value that changes according to each set value.

In the display result determination table for the second special figure, when the gaming state is the probabilistic state, the range from 32767 to 33421 of the hit determination values is the set value as in the case where the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state. Regardless of, it is set in the common numerical range of the small hit judgment value for judging the small hit. The small hit determination value is set to a numerical range different from the common numerical range and the non-common numerical range of the big hit determination value regardless of whether the set value is 1 to 6. This prevents the numerical range of the small hit determination value from overlapping with the range of the large hit determination value that changes according to each set value.

The set value that can be set for the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be 5 or less or 7 or more. The smaller the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the more advantageous the player may be. The playability may be changed according to the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 1, the jackpot probability in the normal state is 1/320 and the probability change state is 65%, which is the game property (so-called probability change loop type). When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 2, the jackpot probability in the normal state is 1/200, and the gaming ball is provided inside the special variable winning ball device 7 during the jackpot game. While controlling the gaming state after the end of the jackpot game to a probabilistic state based on passing through the switch, the game performance (so-called V) in which the rate at which the gaming ball passes through the predetermined switch during the jackpot game is different according to the fluctuation special map. Probability variation type), and when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 3, the jackpot probability is 1/320 and the small hit probability is 1/50, and the game is played during high base (during time reduction control). It may be a game property (so-called 1 type 2 type mixed type) in which the ball is controlled to a big hit gaming state based on passing through a predetermined switch provided inside the special variable winning ball device 7. When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is any of 1 to 3, the game playability is the same, but the jackpot probability and the small hit are higher than when these set values are any of 1 to 3. A setting may be provided in which the number of prize balls that can be obtained during the jackpot game is small while the probability is high (for example, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is any of 4 to 6). If the playability is changed according to the set value, a common switch may be used for different purposes. Specifically, when the set value is 1 to 3, a predetermined switch provided in the special variable winning ball device 7 is used as an effect switch (to execute a predetermined effect each time the game ball passes through a predetermined area. When the set value is 4 to 6, the predetermined switch is used as a game switch (to control the game state to the probability change state or the jackpot game state based on the fact that the game ball has passed the predetermined switch). It may be used as a switch).

The jackpot type may be determined at different ratios according to the set value based on the allocation of the determination values in the jackpot type determination table. Alternatively, the jackpot type may be determined at a common ratio regardless of the set value. The variation pattern may be determined at different ratios depending on the set value based on the allocation of the determination values in the variation pattern determination table. Alternatively, the variation pattern may be determined at a common rate regardless of the set value. Since the execution rate of normal reach or super reach differs depending on the set value, the set value may be suggested by the frequency of execution of normal reach or super reach. Alternatively, the execution ratios of normal reach and super reach may be the same regardless of the set value. In addition, it may be possible to execute an arbitrary setting suggestion effect at different ratios according to the set value.

(Main operation of the effect control board 12)
Next, the main operation of the effect control board 12 will be described. In the effect control board 12, when the power supply voltage is supplied from the power supply board or the like, the effect control CPU 120 is activated to execute the effect control main process as shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the effect control main process shown in FIG. 8 is started, the effect control CPU 120 first executes a predetermined initialization process (step S71), clears the RAM 122, sets various initial values, and sets the effect control board 12. Set the registers of the mounted CTC (counter / timer circuit). Further, the initial operation control process is executed (step S72). In the initial operation control process, control for performing the initial operation of the movable body 32, such as control for driving the movable body 32 to return to the initial position and control for confirming a predetermined operation, is executed.

After that, it is determined whether or not the timer interrupt flag is turned on (step S73). The timer interrupt flag is set to the ON state every time a predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds) elapses, based on the register setting of the CTC, for example. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is off (step S73; No), the process of step S73 is repeatedly executed and waits.

Further, on the side of the effect control board 12, an interrupt for receiving an effect control command from the main board 11 is generated in addition to the timer interrupt that is generated every time a predetermined time elapses. This interrupt is, for example, an interrupt generated when the effect control INT signal from the main board 11 is turned on. When an interrupt occurs due to the effect control INT signal being turned on, the effect control CPU 120 automatically sets the interrupt disabled, but if a CPU that is not automatically interrupt disabled is used, the interrupt is interrupted. It is desirable to emit a prohibition command (DI command). The effect control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process in response to an interrupt caused by the effect control INT signal being turned on. In this command reception interrupt process, among the input ports included in the I / O 125, the effect control command is taken in from a predetermined input port that receives the control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15. The effect control command captured at this time is stored in, for example, the effect control command reception buffer provided in the RAM 122. After that, the effect control CPU 120 sets the interrupt enable, and then ends the command reception interrupt process.

If the timer interrupt flag is on in step S73 (step S73; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared and turned off (step S74), and the command analysis process is executed (step S75). In the command analysis process, for example, after reading various effect control commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 and stored in the effect control command reception buffer, the read effect control commands are used. Corresponding settings and controls are made. For example, the read effect control command may be stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 or stored in the RAM 122 so that which effect control command is received and the content specified by the effect control command can be confirmed by the effect control process process or the like. Turn on the provided receive flag. Further, when the effect control command specifies the game state, the display control unit 123 may be instructed to display the background according to the game state.

After executing the command analysis process in step S75, the effect control process process is executed (step S76). In the effect control process processing, for example, an effect image display operation in the display area of the image display device 5, an audio output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, a lighting operation in a decorative light emitting body such as a game effect lamp 9 and a decorative LED, and a movable body 32. Controls are performed to operate various production devices such as the driving operation of the LED. Further, regarding the control content of the effect operation using various effect devices, determination, determination, setting, etc. are performed according to the effect control command or the like transmitted from the main board 11.

Following the effect control process process in step S76, the effect random number update process is executed (step S77), and at least a part of the effect random numbers used on the effect control board 12 side is updated by the software. After that, the process returns to the process of step S73. Other processes may be executed before returning to the process of step S73.

FIG. 9 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S76 of FIG. 8 as the effect control process process. In the effect control process process shown in FIG. 9, the effect control CPU 120 first executes the read-ahead notice setting process (step S161). In the pre-reading notice setting process, for example, a determination, determination, setting, and the like for executing the pre-reading notice effect are performed based on the effect control command at the time of starting winning, which is transmitted from the main board 11. In addition, a process for displaying the hold display is executed based on the number of hold storages specified from the effect control command.

After executing the process of step S161, the effect control CPU 120 selects and executes any of the following processes of steps S170 to S177 according to the value of the effect process flag provided in, for example, the RAM 122.

The variable display start waiting process in step S170 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “0” (initial value). This variable display start waiting process is a process of determining whether or not to start variable display of the decorative symbol on the image display device 5 based on whether or not a command for designating the start of variable display is received from the main board 11. And so on. When it is determined that the variable display of the decorative symbol on the image display device 5 is to be started, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "1", and the variable display start waiting process is terminated.

The variable display start setting process in step S171 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “1”. In this variable display start setting process, the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol (fixed decorative symbol), the mode of the variable display of the decorative symbol, the reach effect, and various types are based on the display result and the variation pattern specified by the effect control command. It is determined whether or not various effects such as a notice effect are executed, the mode thereof, and the execution start timing. Then, an effect control pattern (a collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute the effect) that reflects the determination result and the like is set. After that, based on the set effect control pattern, the display control unit 123 is instructed to start the execution of the variable display of the decorative symbol, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "2", and the variable display start setting process is terminated. The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to start the variable display of the decorative symbol in response to the instruction to start the execution of the variable display of the decorative symbol.

The variable display effect process in step S172 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “2”. In this variable display effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 instructs the display control unit 123 to display the effect image based on the effect control pattern set in step S171 on the display screen of the image display device 5. , Driving the movable body 32, outputting voice and sound effects from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting commands (sound effect signals) to the voice control board 13, and commands (illuminated signals) to the lamp control board 14. Various effect controls are executed during the variable display of the decorative pattern, such as turning on / off / blinking the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED by the output. After performing such effect control, for example, an end code indicating the end of variable display of the decorative symbol is read from the effect control pattern, or a command is received from the main board 11 to specify that the fixed decorative symbol is to be stopped and displayed. In response to what has been done, the final decorative symbol, which is the display result of the decorative symbol, is stopped and displayed. When the fixed decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "3", and the effect process during variable display ends.

The special figure hit waiting process in step S173 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “3”. In this special figure hit waiting process, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not an effect control command specifying to start the big hit game state or the small hit game state has been received from the main board 11. Then, when the effect control command for specifying the start of the big hit game state or the small hit game state is received, if the command specifies the start of the big hit game state, the value of the effect process flag is set to "6". Update to. On the other hand, if the command specifies the start of the small hit game state, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "4", which is the value corresponding to the small hit medium effect process. In addition, when the reception waiting time for the command has elapsed without receiving the command specifying to start the big hit game state or the small hit game state, it is determined that the display result in the special figure game is "missing". Then, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value "0". When the value of the effect process flag is updated, the waiting process for hitting the special figure ends.

The small hit medium effect process in step S174 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “4”. In this small hit medium effect process, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to the effect content in the small hit game state, and executes various effect controls in the small hit game state based on the set content. .. Further, in the small hit middle effect process, for example, the value of the effect process flag is set to the value corresponding to the small hit end effect in response to receiving a command from the main board 11 to specify the end of the small hit game state. Update to a certain "5" and end the small hit medium production process.

The small hit end effect process in step S175 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “5”. In this small hit end effect process, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the end of the small hit game state, and various effect controls at the end of the small hit game state based on the setting contents. To execute. After that, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value "0", and the small hit end effect process is terminated.

The jackpot effect process in step S176 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “6”. In this big hit middle effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to the effect content in the big hit game state, and executes various effect controls in the big hit game state based on the set content. Further, in the big hit middle effect process, for example, the value of the effect process flag is set to the value corresponding to the ending effect process in response to receiving a command from the main board 11 to specify the end of the big hit game state. Update to ", and end the production process during the big hit.

The ending effect process of step S177 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “7”. In this ending effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to the end of the big hit game state, and controls various effects of the ending effect at the end of the big hit game state based on the setting contents. Run. After that, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value "0", and the ending effect process is terminated.

(Modified example of basic explanation)
The present invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine 1 described in the above basic description, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the spirit of the present invention.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 of the above basic explanation is a payout type gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of gaming media as prizes based on the occurrence of winning, but the gaming media are enclosed and points are given based on the occurrence of winning. It may be an enclosed gaming machine.

Only one type of symbol (for example, a symbol indicating "-") is displayed during the variable display of the special symbol, and the variable display may be performed by repeating the display and extinguishing of the symbol. Further, even if the symbol is displayed during the variable display, the symbol may not be displayed when the variable display is stopped (the symbol indicating "-" may not be displayed as the display result).

In the above basic explanation, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is shown as a gaming machine, but a medal is inserted and a predetermined number of bets is set, and a plurality of types of symbols are rotated according to the operation of the operation lever by the player, and the player If the combination of stop symbols becomes a specific combination of symbols when the symbols are stopped in response to the operation of the stop button by, a slot machine capable of executing a game in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out to the player (for example, a big bonus) The present invention can also be applied to a slot machine equipped with one or more of regular bonus, RT, AT, ART, and CZ (hereinafter, bonus, etc.).

The program and data for realizing the present invention are not limited to the form of being distributed and provided by a detachable recording medium to the computer device included in the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the computer device and the like in advance. It may take the form of being distributed by installing it in the storage device of the. Further, the program and data for realizing the present invention are distributed by downloading from other devices on the network connected via a communication line or the like by providing a communication processing unit. It doesn't matter.

The execution mode of the game is not limited to the one executed by attaching a detachable recording medium, but can be executed by temporarily storing the program and data downloaded via the communication line or the like in the internal memory or the like. It may be executed directly by using the hardware resources of other devices on the network connected via a communication line or the like. Furthermore, it is also possible to execute a game by exchanging data with another computer device or the like via a network.

In this specification, one of the expressions for comparison of various ratios such as the execution ratio of the production (expressions such as "high", "low", and "differentiate") is "0%". It may be included. For example, one may have a percentage of "0%" and the other a percentage of "100%" or less than "100%".

(Explanation of feature section 109SG)
Next, the feature portion 109SG (hereinafter, abbreviated as the present feature portion 109SG) in the embodiment of the present invention will be described.

As the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2013-99572 (Patent Document 1), the conventional gaming machine can notify the effect result by the operation of the movable body (execution of the specific effect) and can output the effect sound. Some are equipped with various speakers (sound output means).

As the gaming machine described in Patent Document 1, it is possible to execute a suggestion effect suggesting that the specific effect is executed by repeatedly operating the movable body in a period before the specific effect is executed. It is conceivable that the player pays attention to whether or not the specific effect is executed by executing the effect. Further, as such a game machine, the repetitive operation of the movable body as a suggestion effect is completed before a predetermined period before the specific effect, and the type of the effect sound output from the speaker is different before and after the predetermined period (. It is conceivable to improve the game entertainment by changing the type of production sound output from the speaker), but it is possible that the type of production sound output from these speakers has changed before and after the predetermined period. There is a problem that it becomes difficult to recognize due to the movement of the movable body.

The present invention has been made by paying attention to such a problem, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine in which it is easy to recognize that the type of effect sound has changed before and after a predetermined period.

FIG. 10-1 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the feature unit 109SG. As shown in FIG. 10-1, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the feature unit 109S, a movable body unit 109SG400 is provided between the gaming board 2 and the image display device 5 provided on the back side thereof. ..

The movable body unit 109SG400 has a base 109SG410 as shown in FIG. 10-3 (A). The first movable body 109SG401 is located in the center of the base 109SG410 in the left-right width direction, and the second movable body 109SG402L is located in the left part of the base 109SG410 in the left-right width direction. The third movable body 109SG402R is arranged respectively.

Further, the movable body unit 109SG400 includes a first movable body motor 109SG421 for operating the first movable body 109SG401, a second movable body motor 109SG422 for operating the second movable body 109SG402L, and a third. It has a third movable body motor 109SG423 for operating the movable body 109SG402R. Therefore, the second movable body 109SG402L and the third movable body 109SG402R in the feature unit 109SG can operate separately from the first movable body 109SG401. Further, a movable body LED 109SG495 is built in a predetermined position of the first movable body 109SG401 (for example, an upper position of the first movable body 109SG401).

Of the first movable body 109SG401, the second movable body 109SG402L, and the third movable body 109SG402R, the first movable body 109SG401 is a retracted position which is a lower position of the image display device 5 by being driven by the first movable body motor 109SG421. (See FIG. 10-3 (A)), the suggested position above the retracted position (see FIG. 10-3 (B)), the effect above the suggested position and also the front position of the image display device 5. It can be moved to the position (see FIG. 10-3 (C)).

The second movable body 109SG402L and the third movable body 109SG402R are retracted positions (FIG. 10) which are lower positions of the image display device 5 by driving the second movable body motor 109SG422 and the third movable body motor 109SG423. It is possible to move from -3 (A)) to the left-right proximity position (see FIG. 10-3 (C)) of the first movable body 109SG401 that has moved to the effect position.

In the feature unit 109SG, as shown in FIGS. 10-3 (A) to 10-3 (C), the first movable body 109SG401, the second movable body 109SG402L, and the third movable body 109SG402R are all in the retracted position. The first state of the movable body unit 109SG400 and the first movable body 109SG401 are located at the suggested positions, while the second movable body 109SG402L and the third movable body 109SG402R are located at the retracted positions. The second state of the movable body unit 109SG400, the first movable body 109SG401 is located at the effect position, and the second movable body 109SG402L and the third movable body 109SG402R are located at the effect position. The state in which the movable body unit 109SG400 is located close to the left and right sides is defined as the third state of the movable body unit 109SG400.

FIG. 10-4 (A) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the contents of the effect control command used in the feature unit 109SG. The effect control command has, for example, a 2-byte configuration, the first byte represents MODE (command classification), and the second byte represents EXT (command type). The first bit (bit 7) of the MODE data is always "1", and the first bit of the EXT data is "0". The command form shown in FIG. 10-4 (A) is an example, and other command forms may be used. Further, in this example, the control command is composed of two control signals, but the number of control signals constituting the control command may be one or a plurality of three or more.

In the example shown in FIG. 10-4 (A), the command 8001H is a first variable display start command for designating the start of variable display in the special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 4A. .. The command 8002H is a second variable display start command for designating the start of variable display in the special figure game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 4B. The command 81XXH is a decoration that is variably displayed in each of the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in the image display device 5 in response to the variable display of the special symbol in the special symbol game. This is a variation pattern specification command that specifies a variation pattern (variation time (variable display time)) such as a symbol (also referred to as an effect symbol). Here, XXH indicates that it is an unspecified hexadecimal number, and may be a value arbitrarily set according to the content of instruction by the effect control command. In the variation pattern specification command, different EXT data are set according to the variation pattern to be specified.

The command 8CXXH is a variable display result designation command, and is an effect control command for designating a variable display result such as a special symbol or a decorative symbol. In the variable display result specification command, for example, as shown in FIG. 10-4 (B), it is determined whether the variable display result (also referred to as the variable display result) is "missing", "big hit", or "small hit". Different EXT data are set according to the result (pre-determined result) and the determination result (big hit type determination result) of which of a plurality of types the jackpot type is to be used when the variable display result is "big hit".

In the variable display result designation command, for example, as shown in FIG. 10-4 (B), the command 8C00H is the first variable display result designation command indicating a predetermined result indicating that the variable display result is “missing”. .. The command 8C01H is a second variable display result designation command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "big hit" and the big hit type is "probability variable big hit A" and the big hit type determination result. The command 8C02H is a third variable display result designation command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "big hit" and the big hit type is "probability variable big hit B" and the big hit type determination result. The command 8C03H is a fourth variable display result designation command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "big hit" and the big hit type is "probability variable big hit C" and the big hit type determination result. The command 8C04H is a fifth variable display result designation command for notifying the pre-determined result and the jackpot type determination result that the variable display result is "big hit" and the jackpot type is "non-probability variable jackpot". The command 8C05H is a sixth variable display result designation command for notifying a preliminary determination result that the variable display result is a "small hit".

The command 8F00H is a symbol confirmation command for designating the change stop (confirmation) of the decorative symbol in each of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in the image display device 5. The command 95XXH is a gaming state designation command for designating the current gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1. In the game state designation command, for example, different EXT data are set according to the current game state in the pachinko gaming machine 1. As a specific example, the command 9500H is used as the first game state specification command corresponding to the game state (low probability low base state, normal state) in which neither the time reduction control nor the probability change control is performed, and the command 9501H is executed by the time reduction control. On the other hand, it is a second game state specification command corresponding to a game state (low probability high base state, time saving state) in which probability change control is not performed. Further, the command 9502H is used as the third game state specification command corresponding to the game state (high probability low base state, time reduction no probability change state) in which the time reduction control is performed while the probability change control is performed, and the command 9503H is the time reduction control and probability change. This is the 4th game state specification command corresponding to the game state (high accuracy high base state, time reduction probability change state) in which control is performed together.

The command A0XXH is a hit start designation command (also referred to as a "fanfare command") for designating the display of an effect image indicating the start of a big hit game or a small hit game. The command A1XXH is a notification command during the opening of the big winning opening that notifies that the big winning opening is in the open state in the big hit game state. The command A2XXH is a notification command after opening the big winning opening that notifies that it is a period during which the big winning opening has changed from the open state to the closed state in the big hit game state. The command A3XXH is a hit end designation command for designating the display of the effect image at the end of the big hit game or the small hit.

In the hit start specification command and the hit end specification command, different EXT data may be set according to the pre-determined result and the big hit type determination result, for example, by setting the same EXT data as the variable display result specification command. .. Alternatively, in the hit start designation command or the hit end designation command, the correspondence between the pre-determined result and the jackpot type determination result and the set EXT data may be different from the correspondence in the variable display result designation command. .. In the notification command during the opening of the big winning opening and the notification command after opening the big winning opening, for example, the number of round executions (for example, "1" to "10") in the normal open big hit state and the high-speed open big hit state described later corresponds to. Different EXT data are set.

The command B100H is based on the fact that the game ball that has passed (entered) the first starting winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6A is detected by the first starting opening switch 22A and the starting winning (first starting winning) is generated. This is a first start opening winning designation command for notifying that the first start condition for executing the special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 4A is satisfied. The command B200H is based on the fact that the game ball that has passed (entered) the second starting winning opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B is detected by the second starting opening switch 22B and the starting winning (second starting winning) is generated. , The second start opening winning designation command for notifying that the second start condition for executing the special figure game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 4B is satisfied.

The command C1XXH is a first hold storage number notification command for notifying the first special figure hold storage number in order to make it possible to specify the special figure hold storage number. The command C2XXH is a second hold storage number notification command for notifying the second special figure hold storage number in order to make it possible to specify the special figure hold storage number. The first hold storage number notification command is, for example, when the first start opening prize designation command is transmitted based on the fact that the game ball passes (enters) the first start winning opening and the first start condition is satisfied. , Is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. The second hold storage number notification command is, for example, when the second start opening prize designation command is transmitted based on the fact that the game ball passes (enters) the second start winning opening and the second start condition is satisfied. , Is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. Further, the first hold storage number notification command and the second hold storage number notification command are used in the special figure game when either the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied (when the hold storage number decreases). It may be transmitted in response to the start of execution.

Instead of the first hold storage number notification command and the second hold storage number notification command, the total hold storage number notification command for notifying the total hold storage number may be transmitted. That is, a total hold storage number notification command may be used to notify an increase (or decrease) of the total hold storage number.

The command C4XXH and the command C6XXH are effect control commands (commands for designating a winning determination result) indicating the contents of the winning determination result. Of these, the command C4XXH is a symbol designation command indicating whether or not the variable display result is a "big hit", a judgment result of a big hit type (probability change or non-probability change), and a small hit as a winning judgment result. .. Further, the command C6XXH is a variation category command indicating a determination result of whether the random value for the variation pattern determination is the variation pattern of "non-reach", "super reach", or "other" as the determination result at the time of winning. Is.

The commands shown in FIG. 10-4 (A) are examples, and may not have some of these commands, or different commands may be used in place of these commands. You may add a command different from the command in. For example, a prize ball number notification command for making it possible to specify the number of prize balls to be paid out based on the winning of a game ball at each winning opening, or a gate for notifying that the game ball has passed through the passing gate 41. A passage notification command, a notification command for notifying the remaining number of times that the probability change control or the time reduction control is executed, or the like may be provided.

FIG. 10-5 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a random number value counted on the side of the main board 11. As shown in FIG. 10-5, in the feature unit 109SG, on the side of the main board 11, the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern , Numerical data indicating each of the random number values MR4 for determining the display result of the normal map is controlled so as to be countable. In addition, random values other than these may be used in order to enhance the game effect. Random numbers used to control the progress of such games are also referred to as game random numbers.

The random number circuit 104 may count numerical data indicating a part or all of these random number values MR1 to MR4. The CPU 103 uses a random counter different from the random number circuit 104, such as a random counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 109SG154 shown in FIG. 10-10, and updates various numerical data by software to update the random number value. Numerical data indicating a part of MR1 to MR4 may be counted.

The random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result is a random number value used for determining whether or not to control the variable display result such as a special symbol in the special figure game as a “big hit” to the big hit gaming state, for example. It takes a value in the range of "1" to "65536". The random value MR2 for determining the jackpot type has one of "probability variable jackpot A", "probability variation jackpot B", "probability variation jackpot C", and "non-probability variation jackpot" when the variable display result is "big hit". It is a random value used to determine, for example, a value in the range of "1" to "100".

The random value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern is a random value used to determine the fluctuation pattern in the variable display of the special symbol or the decorative symbol to one of a plurality of types prepared in advance, and is, for example, "1" to "1" to ". It takes a value in the range of 997.

The random number value MR4 for determining the normal figure display result is used to determine whether the variable display result in the normal figure game by the normal symbol display 20 is "per normal figure" or "out of normal figure". It is a random value to be obtained, and takes a value in the range of "3" to "13", for example.

FIG. 10-6 (A) shows a configuration example of the special figure display result determination table 1 stored in the ROM 101. The feature unit 109SG uses a special figure display result determination table common to the first special figure and the second special figure as the special figure display result determination table, but the present invention is not limited to this. , The individual special figure display result determination table may be used for the first special figure and the second special figure.

The special figure display result determination table 1 is a variable display result in a special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 4A and a special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 4B. In order to determine whether or not to control the variable display result as a "big hit" to the big hit game state before the definite special symbol is derived and displayed, based on the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result. It is a referenced table.

In the special figure display result determination table 1 in the feature unit 109SG, depending on whether the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a normal state, a time saving state (low probability state), or a probability change state (high probability state). A numerical value (judgment value) to be compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result is assigned to the special figure display result of "big hit" or "missing".

In the special figure display result judgment table 1, the table data indicating the judgment value to be compared with the random number value MR1 for the special figure display result judgment determines whether or not the special figure display result is controlled as a "big hit" in the big hit gaming state. It is the judgment data assigned to the decision result. In the special figure display result determination table 1 in the feature unit 109SG, when the gaming state is the probabilistic state (high probability state), more judgment values are obtained than when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state (low probability state). It is assigned to the special figure display result of "big hit". As a result, in the probabilistic state (high probability state) in which the probability change control is performed in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the special figure display result is controlled as a "big hit" in the normal state or the time saving state (low probability state). Then, the probability of being determined to control the special figure display result as a "big hit" to the big hit gaming state is higher than the probability of being determined (about 1/300 in the feature unit 109SG) (about 1 in the feature unit 109SG). / 30). That is, in the special figure display result determination table 1, it is determined that when the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the probabilistic state (high probability state), it is controlled to the big hit gaming state as compared with the normal state or the time saving state. The determination data is assigned to the determination result of whether or not to control the jackpot gaming state so that the probability of the game is high.

Further, FIG. 10-6 (B) shows a configuration example of the special figure display result determination table 2 stored in the ROM 101. The special figure display result determination table 2 is a variable display result in a special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 4A and a special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 4B. Before the definite special symbol that becomes It is a table referenced for.

In the special figure display result determination table 2 in the feature unit 109SG, regardless of whether the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a normal state, a time saving state (low probability state), or a probability change state (high probability state). A numerical value (determination value) to be compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result is assigned to the special figure display result of "small hit".

In the special figure display result determination table 2, whether or not the table data indicating the determination value to be compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result is controlled to the small hit gaming state with the special figure display result as "small hit". It is the judgment data assigned to the decision result. In the special figure display result judgment table 2 in the feature unit 109SG, the number of judgment values assigned to the "small hit" is different between the case of the special figure game of the first special figure and the case of the second special figure. There is. Specifically, in the case of the special figure game of the first special figure, the judgment value is assigned to "small hit", but in the case of the special figure game of the second special figure, it is assigned to "small hit". Judgment value is not assigned. Therefore, as will be described later, the variable display of the second special figure is executed with priority over the variable display of the first special figure, and the second start winning is formed by the variable winning ball device 6B by executing the time saving control. In the high base state where a prize is generated in the mouth and a lot of variable display of the second special figure is executed, "small hit" is almost not generated, and the second start formed by the variable prize ball device 6B. In a high base state where a game ball can easily enter the winning opening, it is possible to avoid the occurrence of a small hit in which a large number of game balls cannot be obtained and to prevent the game interest from deteriorating.

FIG. 10-7 (A) shows a configuration example of the jackpot type determination table stored in the ROM 101. The jackpot type determination table in the feature unit 109SG is based on the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type when it is determined to control the jackpot game state with the special figure display result as "big hit". It is a table referenced to determine the crab. In the jackpot type determination table, whether the special symbol whose variable display (variable display) is performed in the special symbol game is the first special symbol (special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A) or the second special symbol (first). 2 The numerical value (judgment value) to be compared with the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type is "non-probability variation jackpot", "probability variation jackpot A", or "probability variation jackpot A", depending on whether the game is a special figure game by the special symbol display device 4B). It is assigned to a plurality of types of jackpots such as "probability variation jackpot B" and "probability variation jackpot C".

Here, the jackpot type in the feature unit 109SG will be described with reference to FIG. 10-7 (B). In the feature unit 109SG, the jackpot type includes high accuracy control and time saving control after the end of the jackpot gaming state. "Probability change big hit A" and "Probability change big hit B" that are executed and shift to the high accuracy high base state, and high accuracy low base state where high accuracy control is executed but time saving control is not executed after the end of the big hit game state. A "probability variation jackpot C" to be transferred and a "non-probability variation jackpot" to be executed only for the time saving control after the end of the jackpot game state and to transition to the low probability variation high base state are set.

The big hit game state by the "probability change big hit A" is a normal open big hit in which the special variable winning ball device 7 is repeatedly executed 10 times (so-called 10 rounds) to change the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state advantageous to the player. On the other hand, the big hit game state by "probability change big hit B" is a normal open big hit in which the special variable winning ball device 7 is repeatedly executed five times (so-called 5 rounds) to change to the first state advantageous to the player. .. The big hit game state by the "probability change big hit C" is a normal open big hit in which the land that changes the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state advantageous to the player is repeatedly executed twice (so-called 2 rounds). .. Further, in the jackpot game state by "probability variation jackpot C" and "non-probability variation jackpot", the round that changes the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state that is advantageous to the player is repeatedly executed twice (so-called two rounds). It is usually an open jackpot. Therefore, "Probability change jackpot A" is called 10 rounds (10R) probability variation jackpot, "Probability variation jackpot B" is called 5 rounds (5R) probability variation jackpot, and "Probability variation jackpot C" is called 2 rounds (2R) probability variation jackpot. May be called.

Further, although not particularly shown, the small hit game state in the feature unit 109SG changes the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state advantageous to the player twice, and the opening time is 0.1 seconds. It has become. After the small hit game is completed, the game state immediately before the small hit game is inherited.

The high-accuracy control and the time-saving control executed after the end of the jackpot gaming state of the probabilistic jackpot are continuously executed until the jackpot occurs again after the end of the jackpot gaming state. Therefore, when the jackpot that occurs again is a probability variation jackpot, the high accuracy control and the time saving control are executed again after the end of the jackpot gaming state, so that the jackpot gaming state continuously occurs without going through the normal state. , So-called consecutive villa state.

On the other hand, the time saving control executed after the end of the big hit game state by the "non-probability change big hit" is that the special figure game is executed a predetermined number of times (100 times in the feature unit 109SG), or the special figure of the predetermined number of times. It ends when the game is in a big hit game state before the game is executed.

In the setting example of the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 10-7 (A), "probability variable jackpot A" and "probability variable jackpot A" are used depending on whether the variablely displayed special figure is the first special figure or the second special figure. The assignment of judgment values for the jackpot types of "probability variation jackpot B", "probability variation jackpot C", and "non-probability variation jackpot" is different. That is, when the special figure to be variably displayed is the first special figure, the determination value in the predetermined range (value in the range of "81" to "100") is "probability change jackpot B" or "probability change" with a small number of rounds. While assigned to the jackpot type of "big hit C", if the special figure that is variably displayed is the second special figure, the judgment value is assigned to the jackpot type of "probability variation jackpot B" or "probability variation jackpot C". Not done. With such a setting, the jackpot type is determined to be one of a plurality of types based on the fact that the first start condition for starting the special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 4A is satisfied. In the case of Therefore, the ratio of determining the jackpot type to "probability variation jackpot B" or "probability variation jackpot C" with a small number of rounds can be different. In particular, in the special figure game using the second special figure, it is not decided to control the jackpot type to the normal open jackpot state or the high-speed open jackpot state with a small number of rounds by setting the jackpot type to "probability variation jackpot B" or "probability variation jackpot C". Therefore, for example, by the high opening control accompanying the time saving control, in the game state where the game ball easily enters the second start winning opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B, it is possible to avoid the frequent occurrence of the big hit state where the winning ball is small. It is possible to prevent the game entertainment from deteriorating.

In the setting example of the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 10-7 (A), the allocation of the determination value for the jackpot type of "non-probability variation" is the special figure game of the first special figure or the second special figure. Since it is the same regardless of whether it is present or not, the probability of becoming a non-probability jackpot and the probability of becoming a probabilistic jackpot are the same regardless of whether it is the special figure game of the first special figure or the second special figure. It is said that.

Therefore, as described above, the assignment of the determination values for the "probability change jackpot B" and the "probability variation jackpot C" differs depending on whether the game is the special figure game of the first special figure or the second special figure. Therefore, the assignment of the judgment value to the "probability change jackpot A" also differs depending on whether it is the special figure game of the first special figure or the second special figure, and for the "probability change jackpot A" having a large number of rounds, the second It is set so that the case of the special figure game of the special figure is easier to determine than the case of the special figure game of the first special figure.

Even in the case of the special figure game of the second special figure, the judgment value in a predetermined range different from that of the special figure game of the first special figure is the big hit of "probability change big hit B" or "probability change big hit C". It may be assigned to a type. For example, in the case of the special figure game of the second special figure, the judgment value smaller than that in the case of the special figure game of the first special figure is in the big hit type of "probability change big hit B" or "probability change big hit C". May be assigned. Alternatively, the jackpot type may be determined by referring to the common table data regardless of whether the game is the special figure game of the first special figure or the second special figure.

FIG. 10-8 shows the fluctuation pattern in the feature unit 109SG. In the feature unit 109SG, among the cases where the variable display result is "off", the variable display mode of the decorative symbol corresponds to the case of "non-reach" and the case of "reach", and is variable. A plurality of fluctuation patterns are prepared in advance in response to cases where the display result is a "big hit" or a "small hit". The variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "off" and the variation display mode of the decorative symbol is "non-reach" is called a non-reach variation pattern (also referred to as "non-reach loss variation pattern"). The variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "off" and the variation display mode of the decorative symbol is "reach" is called a reach variation pattern (also referred to as "reach loss variation pattern"). Further, the non-reach fluctuation pattern and the reach fluctuation pattern are included in the missed fluctuation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is “missing”. The fluctuation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "big hit" is called a big hit fluctuation pattern.

The jackpot fluctuation pattern and the reach fluctuation pattern include a normal reach fluctuation pattern in which the reach effect of the normal reach is executed and a super reach fluctuation pattern in which the reach effect of the super reach is executed. Although the feature unit 109SG provides only one type of normal reach fluctuation pattern, the present invention is not limited to this, and a plurality of normal reach fluctuation patterns such as normal reach α, normal reach β, and the like are provided. It may be provided.

The fluctuation pattern in the feature unit 109SG corresponds to a special hit fluctuation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "small hit" or the variable display result is "big hit" and the big hit type is "probability variable big hit C". PC1-1) is also included.

As shown in FIG. 10-8, the special figure variable display time of the normal reach variation pattern in which the reach effect of the normal reach is executed in the feature unit 109SG is set shorter than that of the super reach variation pattern.

Further, in the present feature unit 109SG, as will be described later, these fluctuation patterns are first determined as the type of fluctuation pattern, for example, the type of non-reach, the type of normal reach, the type of super reach, and the like. Then, instead of determining the variation pattern to be executed from the variation patterns belonging to the determined type, the determination is made using only the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern without determining these types. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, in addition to the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern, a random value for determining the variation pattern type is provided, and the random values for determining the variation pattern type are used. The type of the variation pattern may be determined first, and then the variation pattern to be executed may be determined from the variation patterns belonging to the determined type.

FIG. 10-9 is an explanatory diagram of a method of determining a fluctuation pattern in the feature unit 109SG. In the feature unit 109SG, the variation pattern determination table to be selected is different depending on the display result of the variable display to be executed and the number of reserved storages.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 10-9, when the variable display result is a non-probability variable jackpot, the jackpot variation pattern determination table A is selected, and the variation pattern is used using the jackpot variation pattern determination table A. PB1-1 (normal reach jackpot fluctuation pattern), PB1-2 (super reach α1 jackpot fluctuation pattern), PB1-3 (super reach α2 jackpot fluctuation pattern), and PB1-4 (super reach β1 jackpot fluctuation pattern). And PB1-5 (variation pattern of super reach β2 jackpot).

If the variable display result is a probabilistic jackpot, select the jackpot variation pattern determination table A, and use the jackpot variation pattern determination table A to set the variation patterns to PB1-1 (normal reach jackpot variation pattern) and PB1. -2 (Variation pattern of super reach α1 jackpot), PB1-3 (Variation pattern of super reach α2 jackpot), PB1-4 (Variation pattern of super reach β1 jackpot) and PB1-5 (Variation pattern of super reach β2 jackpot) To decide from.

As shown in FIG. 10-9, the jackpot variation pattern determination table A and the jackpot variation pattern determination table B have the same number of determination values assigned to PB1-1, while PB1-2 and PB1. The number of determination values assigned to -3, PB1-4, and PB1-5 is different. Specifically, in the jackpot variation pattern determination table A, 2 pieces are determined for PB1-1, 45 pieces are determined for PB1-2, 150 pieces are determined for PB1-3, 300 pieces are determined for PB1-4, and 500 pieces are determined for PB1-5. Each value is assigned. On the other hand, in the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table B, there are 2 determination values for PB1-1, 30 for PB1-2, 135 for PB1-3, 315 for PB1-4, and 515 for PB1-5. Each is assigned. That is, in the present feature unit 109SG, when the variable display result is a probability variation jackpot, the fluctuation pattern is a fluctuation pattern of superreach β1 and β2 at a higher rate than when the variable display result is a non-probability variation jackpot PB1-4. Alternatively, since it is determined to be PB1-5, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the fluctuation pattern in the variable display.

If the variable display result is a small hit, the variation pattern determination table for special hits is selected, and the variation pattern is determined as PC1-1 (variation pattern for special hits) using the variation pattern determination table for special hits. do. That is, in the present feature unit 109SG, the variable display is executed with the same variation pattern depending on whether the variable display result is the probability variation big hit C or the small hit, so that the player can perform the variable display from the variation pattern. It is difficult to specify whether the result is a probabilistic big hit C or a small hit.

Further, when the variable display result is "off" in the normal gaming state (low base state) and the number of reserved storages of the variation special figure is 2 or less, the deviation pattern determination table A is selected, and the variation pattern determination table A is selected. Using the deviation pattern determination table A, the variation patterns are PA1-1 (non-reach deviation variation pattern), PA2-1 (normal reach deviation variation pattern), PA2-2 (super reach α1 deviation variation pattern), and PA2. It is determined from -3 (variation pattern of super reach α2 deviation), PA2-4 (variation pattern of super reach β1 deviation), and PA2-5 (variation pattern of super reach β2 deviation).

Further, when the variable display result is "missing" in the normal gaming state (low base state) and the number of reserved storages of the variable special figure is 3, the deviation pattern determination table B for loss is selected and the deviation is obtained. Using the fluctuation pattern determination table B, the fluctuation patterns are PA1-2 (shortening fluctuation pattern of non-reach loss), PA2-1 (variation pattern of normal reach loss), PA2-2 (variation pattern of super reach α1 loss), and PA2. It is determined from -3 (variation pattern of super reach α2 deviation), PA2-4 (variation pattern of super reach β1 deviation), and PA2-5 (variation pattern of super reach β2 deviation).

Further, when the variable display result is "off" in the normal game state (low base state) and the number of reserved storages of the variation special figure is 4, the deviation pattern determination table C for loss is selected and the deviation is achieved. Using the fluctuation pattern determination table C, the fluctuation patterns are PA1-3 (shortening fluctuation pattern of non-reach loss), PA2-1 (variation pattern of normal reach loss), PA2-2 (variation pattern of super reach α1 loss), and PA2. It is determined from -3 (variation pattern of super reach α2 deviation), PA2-4 (variation pattern of super reach β1 deviation), and PA2-5 (variation pattern of super reach β2 deviation).

If the variable display result is "off" in the time saving state (high base state), the out-of-order variation pattern determination table D is selected, and the out-of-order variation pattern determination table D is used to set the variation pattern to PA1-4. (Non-reach out-of-time shortening fluctuation pattern), PA2-1 (normal reach out-of-time fluctuation pattern), PA2-2 (super reach α1 out-of-order fluctuation pattern), PA2-3 (super reach α2 out-of-range fluctuation pattern), and PA2 It is determined from -4 (variation pattern of super reach β1 deviation) and PA2-5 (variation pattern of super reach β2 deviation).

That is, when the variable display result is "off" in the feature unit 109SG, the special figure is based on the fact that the number of reserved storages of the variable special figure is 3 or 4, or the time is shortened. Since the variable display time is shorter than the normal non-reach deviation pattern (PA1-1), the variable display is executed at a higher rate due to the shortening variation pattern (PA1-2, PA1-3, PA1-4). It is possible to shorten the period until the next variable display result becomes a big hit while preventing the game from being delayed.

As shown in FIGS. 10-28 to 10-35, the variable display of the super reach α1 (variable display of the variable patterns PA2-2 and PB1-2) in the feature unit 109SG has a special figure variable display time of 40. It is a second, and it is a variable display that executes a battle effect between the ally character A and the enemy character A as the reach effect of the super reach. The variable display of the super reach α2 (variable display of the variable patterns PA2-3 and PB1-3) has a special figure variable display time of 50 seconds, and as a reach effect of the super reach, a battle effect between the ally character A and the enemy character B is produced. It is a variable display to execute. The variable display of Super Reach β1 (variable display of variable patterns PA2-4 and PB1-4) has a special figure variable display time of 60 seconds, and as a super reach reach effect, a battle effect between ally character A and enemy character A is produced. It is a variable display to execute. The variable display of Super Reach β2 (variable display of variable patterns PA2-5 and PB1-5) has a special figure variable display time of 60 seconds, and as a super reach reach effect, a battle effect between ally character A and enemy character A is produced. It is a variable display to execute.

As shown in FIG. 10-9, the jackpot expectation of each variable display in the feature unit 109SG is set to the highest jackpot expectation of super reach β2, and thereafter, super reach β1 and super reach α2. , Super reach α1, normal reach, and non-reach are set in the order of high hit expectation (big hit expectation in each variable display in this feature unit 109SG: super reach β2> super reach β1> super reach α2> super reach α1. > Normal reach> Non-reach).

In other words, paying attention to the variable display of the super reach, in this feature unit 109SG, which of the ally character A and the ally character B displayed as the battle effect (super reach effect) is the battle effect (super). The jackpot expectation differs depending on the combination of whether the enemy character displayed as the reach effect) is the enemy character A or the enemy character B.

The RAM 102 in the feature unit 109SG is a game control data holding area 109SG150 as shown in FIG. 10-10, for example, as an area for holding various data used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. Is provided. The game control data holding area 109SG150 shown in FIG. 10-10 includes a first special figure holding storage unit 109SG151A, a second special figure holding storage unit 109SG151B, a normal figure holding storage unit 109SG151C, and a game control flag setting unit 109SG152. , The game control timer setting unit 109SG153, the game control counter setting unit 109SG154, and the game control buffer setting unit 109SG155 are provided.

In the first special figure reservation storage unit 109SG151A, the game ball passes (enters) through the first start winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6A, and a starting prize (first starting winning) is generated, but the special starting prize has not been started yet. The reserved data of the figure game (the special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 4A) is stored. As an example, the first special figure reservation storage unit 109SG151A associates the winning order (the order of detecting the game ball) with the holding number with the first starting winning opening, and sets the first starting condition in the passage (entry) of the game ball. Hold data such as random number value MR1 for special figure display result determination, random number value MR2 for jackpot type determination, and random number value MR3 for variable pattern determination extracted from the random number circuit 104 etc. by the CPU 103 based on the establishment. As the number of stored data reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, "4"), the data is stored. The hold data stored in the first special figure hold storage unit 109SG151A in this way indicates that the execution of the special figure game using the first special figure is held, and the variable display result (special figure display) in this special figure game. It is pending information that makes it possible to determine whether or not it will be a big hit based on the result).

The second special figure reservation storage unit 109SG151B has not been started yet, although the game ball has passed (entered) through the second starting winning opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B and a starting winning (second starting winning) has occurred. The reserved data of the special figure game (the special figure game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 4B) is stored. As an example, the second special figure reservation storage unit 109SG151B associates the winning order (the order of detecting the game ball) with the second starting winning opening with the holding number, and determines the second starting condition in the passage (entry) of the game ball. Hold data such as random number value MR1 for special figure display result determination, random number value MR2 for jackpot type determination, and random number value MR3 for variable pattern determination extracted from the random number circuit 104 or the like by the CPU 103 based on the establishment. As the number reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, "4"), the data is stored. The hold data stored in the second special figure hold storage unit 109SG151B in this way indicates that the execution of the special figure game using the second special figure is held, and the variable display result (special figure display) in this special figure game. It is pending information that makes it possible to determine whether or not it will be a big hit based on the result).

It should be noted that the hold information (first hold information) based on the establishment of the first start condition due to the game ball passing (entering) through the first start winning opening and the game ball passing (entering) through the second start winning opening. The hold information (second hold information) based on the establishment of the second start winning prize may be stored in association with the hold number in the common hold storage unit. In this case, the start opening data indicating which of the first start winning opening and the second starting winning opening the game ball has passed (entered) may be included in the hold information and stored in association with the hold number. ..

The normal figure hold storage unit 109SG 151C stores the hold information of the normal figure game that has not yet been started by the normal symbol display 20 even though the game ball that has passed through the passing gate 41 is detected by the gate switch 21. For example, the normal map holding storage unit 109SG151C associates with the hold number in the order in which the game ball passes through the passage gate 41, and determines the normal figure display result extracted from the random number circuit 104 or the like by the CPU 103 based on the passage of the game ball. Numerical data indicating the random number value MR4 for use is stored as reserved data until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, “4”).

The game control flag setting unit 109SG152 is provided with a plurality of types of flags whose state can be updated according to the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control flag setting unit 109SG152 stores data indicating a flag value and data indicating an on state or an off state for each of a plurality of types of flags.

The game control timer setting unit 109SG153 is provided with various timers used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control timer setting unit 109SG153 stores data indicating timer values for each of a plurality of types of timers.

The game control counter setting unit 109SG154 is provided with a plurality of types of counters for counting the count values used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control counter setting unit 109SG154 stores data indicating the count values of each of the plurality of types of counters. Here, the game control counter setting unit 109SG154 may be provided with a random counter for counting a part or all of the game random numbers so that the CPU 103 can be updated by software.

In the random counter of the game control counter setting unit 109SG154, a random number value not generated by the random number circuit 104, for example, numerical data indicating the random number values MR2 to MR4 is stored as a random count value, and is stored as a random count value according to the execution of the software by the CPU 103. Numerical data indicating each random number value is updated periodically or irregularly. The software executed by the CPU 103 to update the random count value may be for updating the random count value separately from the operation of updating the numerical data in the random number circuit 104, or may be extracted from the random number circuit 104. It may be for updating the random count value by performing a predetermined process such as scramble processing or arithmetic processing on all or a part of the numerical data.

The game control buffer setting unit 109SG155 is provided with various buffers for temporarily storing data used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control buffer setting unit 109SG155 stores data indicating buffer values in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

The RAM 122 mounted on the effect control board 12 is provided with an effect control data holding area 109SG190 as shown in FIG. 10-11 (A), for example, as an area for holding various data used for controlling the effect operation. Has been done. The effect control data holding area 109SG190 shown in FIG. 10-11 (A) includes an effect control flag setting unit 109SG191, an effect control timer setting unit 109SG192, an effect control counter setting unit 109SG193, and an effect control buffer setting unit 109SG194. I have.

The effect control flag setting unit 109SG191 has a plurality of types capable of updating the state according to the effect operation state such as the display state of the effect image on the screen of the image display device 5 and the effect control command transmitted from the main board 11. Flag is provided. For example, the effect control flag setting unit 109SG191 stores data indicating a flag value and data indicating an on state or an off state for each of a plurality of types of flags.

The effect control timer setting unit 109SG192 is provided with a plurality of types of timers used to control the progress of various effect operations such as the display operation of the effect image on the screen of the image display device 5. For example, the effect control timer setting unit 109SG192 stores data indicating timer values for each of a plurality of types of timers.

The effect control counter setting unit 109SG193 is provided with a plurality of types of counters used to control the progress of various effect operations. For example, the effect control counter setting unit 109SG193 stores data indicating the count values of the plurality of types of counters.

The effect control buffer setting unit 109SG194 is provided with various buffers for temporarily storing data used for controlling the progress of various effect operations. For example, the effect control buffer setting unit 109SG194 stores data indicating buffer values in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

In the feature unit 109SG, the data constituting the start winning reception command buffer 109SG194A as shown in FIG. 10-11 (B) is stored in a predetermined area of the effect control buffer setting unit 109SG194. In the start winning command receive command buffer 109SG194A, the storage area (buffer numbers "1-1" to "1-4" corresponding to the maximum value (for example, "4") of the total number of reserved storages of the first special figure reserved storage is stored. A corresponding area) and a storage area (area corresponding to the buffer number “1-0”) corresponding to the first special figure during variable display are provided. Further, the start winning command buffer 109SG194A has a storage area (buffer numbers "2-1" to "2-4" corresponding to the maximum value (for example, "4") of the total number of reserved storages in the second special figure reserved storage. A storage area corresponding to the second special figure during variable display (area corresponding to the buffer number “2-0”) is provided. When there is a start winning to the 1st start winning opening or the 2nd starting winning opening, the starting opening winning designation command (1st starting opening winning designation command or the 2nd starting opening winning designation command), the symbol designation command, the variable category designation Four commands, a command and a hold storage number notification command (first hold storage number notification command or second hold storage number notification command), are transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 as one set. The storage area corresponding to the first special figure hold storage and the storage area corresponding to the second special figure hold storage in the start winning command receive command buffer 109SG194A are the start opening winning designation command, the symbol designation command, the variable category designation command, and the storage area corresponding to the second special figure hold storage. A storage area (entry) for storing the first special figure hold storage and the second special figure hold storage separately is secured in association with the hold storage number notification command.

The stored contents of these storage areas (entries) will be described later when the start condition is satisfied and the variable display of the highest held storage (buffer number "1-1" or buffer number "2-1") is started. The stored contents of the buffer number "1-0" or the buffer number "2-0" for storing the contents of the reserved storage for which the start condition is satisfied are displayed in a variable manner. It is set to be cleared in the special figure hit waiting process executed when the process is finished.

Further, in the start winning command buffer 109SG194A of the feature unit 109SG, a hold display flag in which a flag value corresponding to the display pattern (display mode) of the hold storage display is set is set in the first special figure hold storage and the second special figure hold storage. Figure A storage area is secured for each storage area (entry) so that it can be stored in association with each buffer number corresponding to the hold storage.

In the hold display flag, "0" corresponding to the display pattern of the normal hold storage display is stored when the execution of the look-ahead notice effect is not determined in the look-ahead notice setting process described later. As a result, the hold storage display in the normal display mode (for example, white circle) is displayed in the first hold storage display area 109SG005D and the second hold storage display area 109SG005U provided at the lower part of the image display device 5, and the first is displayed. When it is decided to execute the reading notice effect, "1" (square) corresponding to the display pattern of the hold storage display in a special mode (for example, square (◇) or star (☆)) different from the normal display mode. (◇))) or "2" (star (☆)) is set, so that the reserved storage display in a special mode different from the normal display mode is the first reserved storage display area 109SG005D and the second reserved storage display area 109SG005U. In the variable display corresponding to the hold storage display, it is foretold that there is a high possibility of a big hit or a super reach.

The effect control CPU 120 stores the command at the time of the start winning to the first start winning opening from the beginning (the youngest entry of the buffer number) in the empty entry corresponding to the first special figure hold storage of the start winning command buffer 109SG194A. Then, at the time of the start winning to the second start winning opening, the command is stored from the beginning (the youngest entry of the buffer number) in the empty entry corresponding to the second special figure hold storage of the start winning command buffer 109SG194A. go. At the time of the start winning, the start opening prize designation command to the hold storage number notification command are sequentially transmitted. Therefore, when the command is received, the start opening prize designation command is placed in the storage area corresponding to each of the end "1" to "4" of the buffer number corresponding to the first special figure hold storage or the second special figure hold storage. , The symbol specification command, the variable category specification command, and the hold storage count notification command are stored in this order.

The command stored in the start winning command buffer 109SG194A shown in FIG. 10-11 (B) is an entry (buffer) corresponding to the hold storage of the variable display that ended immediately before each time the variable display of the decorative symbol was started. The entry stored in the number "1-0" or "2-0") is deleted, and the entry corresponding to the pending storage of the variable display to be started (buffer number "1-1" or "2") is deleted. The storage contents of the entries stored in the entry corresponding to -1 ”) and the entries after the hold storage of the variable display to be started are shifted. For example, when the variable display of the decorative symbol of the first special figure hold storage is completed in the stored state shown in FIG. 10-11 (B), each command stored in the buffer number "0" is deleted, and the buffer number is deleted. Each command stored in "1" is shifted to the buffer number "0", and each command stored in the area corresponding to the buffer number "2" is moved to the area corresponding to the buffer number "1". Each command that has been shifted and stored in the area corresponding to the buffer numbers "3" and "4" is shifted to the area corresponding to the buffer numbers "2" and "3". Therefore, the buffer number "0" is an area (entry) for storing each command related to the hold storage that is variably displayed at that time.

Next, the start winning determination process of the feature unit 109SG executed in step S101 of FIG. 5 will be described with reference to FIGS. 10-12. In the start winning determination process, the CPU 103 first turns on the first starting port switch 22A based on the detection signal from the first starting opening switch 22A provided corresponding to the first starting winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6A. It is determined whether or not the state is present (step 109SGS101a). At this time, if the first start port switch 22A is in the ON state (step 109SGS101a; Y), the number of reserved special figure reservations, which is the number of reserved special figure games using the first special figure, is the predetermined upper limit. It is determined whether or not it is a value (for example, "4" as the upper limit storage number) (step 109SGS102). The CPU 103 may specify the first special figure reserved storage number by reading, for example, the first reserved storage number count value which is the stored value of the first reserved storage number counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 109SG154. When the first special figure reserved storage number is not the upper limit value in step 109SGS102 (step 109SGS102; N), for example, the stored value of the start port buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 109SG155 is set to "1" (step 109SGS102; N). Step 109 SGS103).

Variable when the first start port switch 22A is off in step 109SGS101a (step 109SGS101; N) or when the first special figure reserved storage number reaches the upper limit value in step 109SGS102 (step 109SGS102; Y). Based on the detection signal from the second starting port switch 22B provided corresponding to the second starting winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6B, it is determined whether or not the second starting opening switch 22B is in the ON state ( Step 109 SGS101b). At this time, if the second start port switch 22B is in the ON state (step 109SGS101b; Y), the second special figure hold storage number, which is the hold storage number of the special figure game using the second special figure, is a predetermined upper limit. It is determined whether or not it is a value (for example, "4" as the upper limit storage number) (step 109SGS105). The CPU 103 may specify the second special figure reserved storage number by reading, for example, the second reserved storage number count value which is the stored value of the second reserved storage number counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 109SG154. When the second special figure reserved storage number is not the upper limit value in step 109SGS105 (step 109SGS105; N), for example, the stored value of the start port buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 109SG155 is set to "2" (step 109SGS105; N). Step 109 SGS106).

After executing any of the processes of step 109SGS103 and step 109SGS106, the special figure hold storage number corresponding to the start port buffer value, which is the storage value of the start port buffer, is updated to be added by 1 (step 109SGS107). For example, when the start port buffer value is "1", the first hold storage count value is added by 1, while when the start port buffer value is "2", the second hold storage count value is added by 1. In this way, the first reserved memory count value is set to 1 when the game ball passes (enters) the first start winning opening and the first start condition corresponding to the special figure game using the first special figure is satisfied. Updated to increase. Further, the second reserved memory count value is set to 1 when the game ball passes (enters) the second start winning opening and the second start condition corresponding to the special figure game using the second special figure is satisfied. Updated to increase. At this time, the total number of reserved storages is also updated to be added by 1 (step 109SGS108). For example, the total hold storage count value, which is the storage value of the total hold storage counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 109SG154, may be updated to be added by 1.

After executing the process of step 109SGS108, the CPU 103 determines the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result and the jackpot type determination from the numerical data updated by the random number circuit 104 and the random number of the game control counter setting unit 109SG154. Numerical data indicating the random number value MR2 for the purpose and the random number value MR3 for the fluctuation pattern determination are extracted (step 109SGS109). Numerical data indicating each random value extracted in this way is stored by being set as hold information at the beginning of an empty entry in the special figure hold storage unit corresponding to the start port buffer value (step 109SGS110). For example, when the start port buffer value is "1", the first special figure reservation storage unit 109SG151A stores numerical data indicating the random numbers MR1 to MR3, while when the start port buffer value is "2", the start port buffer value is "2". Numerical data indicating random number values MR1 to MR3 are stored in the second special figure reservation storage unit 109SG151B.

Numerical data indicating the random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result and the random value MR2 for determining the jackpot type determine whether or not the variable display result of the special symbol or decorative symbol is "big hit", and further, the variable display result. It is used to determine the type of big hit when it is called "big hit". The random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern is used to determine the variation pattern including the variable display time of the special symbol or the decorative symbol. By executing the process of step 109SGS109, the CPU 103 extracts numerical data indicating all of the random number values used for determining the variable display result including the variable display result of the special symbol and the decorative symbol and the variable display time.

Following the process of step 109SGS110, the transmission setting of the start opening winning designation command according to the start opening buffer value is performed (step 109SGS111). For example, when the start port buffer value is "1", the storage address of the first start port winning designation command table in the ROM 101 is stored in the buffer area specified by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer. 12 is set to send the first start opening winning designation command. On the other hand, when the start port buffer value is "2", the storage address of the second start port winning designation command table in the ROM 101 is stored in the buffer area of the transmission command buffer, so that the effect control board 12 can be used. The setting for sending the second start opening prize designation command is made. The start port winning designation command set in this way is executed from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by, for example, executing the command control process in step S27 shown in FIG. 4 after the special symbol process process is completed. Be transmitted.

Following the process of step 109SGS111, the winning random number value determination process is executed (step 109SGS112). After that, for example, by storing the storage address of the hold storage number notification command table in the ROM 101 in the buffer area designated by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer, the hold storage number notification command is transmitted to the effect control board 12. (Step 109 SGS113). The hold storage number notification command set in this way is executed from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by, for example, executing the command control process in step S27 shown in FIG. 4 after the special symbol process process is completed. Be transmitted.

After executing the process of step 109SGS113, it is determined whether or not the start port buffer value is "1" (step 109SGS114). At this time, if the start port buffer value is "1" (step 109SGS114; Y), the start port buffer is cleared, the stored value is initialized to "0" (step 109SGS115), and then the process of step 109SGS104 is performed. move on. On the other hand, when the start port buffer value is "2" (step 109SGS114; N), the start port buffer is cleared, the stored value is initialized to "0" (step 109SGS116), and then the start prize is won. End the process. As a result, even when both the first start port switch 22A and the second start port switch 22B detect a valid start prize for the game ball at the same time, the process based on the detection of both valid start prizes can be surely completed.

FIG. 10-13 (A) is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step 109SGS112 of FIG. 10-12 as the winning random number value determination process. When the variable display of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is started in the feature unit 109SG, the special symbol display result (variable display of the special symbol) is performed by the special symbol normal processing (step S22 in FIG. 5, FIG. 10-11) described later. The result) is regarded as a "big hit", and it is determined whether or not to control the big hit gaming state. Further, in the variation pattern setting process (step S23 in FIG. 5, FIG. 10-12), which will be described later, the determination of the variation pattern that specifically defines the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is performed. On the other hand, apart from these determinations, the CPU 103 executes the winning random number value determination processing in step 109SGS112 at the timing when the game ball is detected at the starting winning opening (first starting winning opening or second starting winning opening). As a result, it is determined whether or not it is determined that the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed as a result of displaying the special symbol, and whether or not the variable display mode of the decorative symbol becomes a predetermined display mode accompanied by super reach. As a result, before the variable display of the special symbol or the decorative symbol based on the detection of the game ball that has entered the start winning opening is started, that is, whether or not to make a big hit at the start of the variable display is determined. Before, it is determined whether the special figure display result is a "big hit" or the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is the variable display mode of which category, and based on this determination result, the effect control CPU 120 or the like determines. , As will be described later, advance notice effects such as pre-reading advance notice effects will be executed.

In the winning random number value determination process shown in FIG. 10-13 (A), the CPU 103 first confirms the state of the time saving flag and the probability variation flag provided in, for example, the game control flag setting unit 109SG152, for pachinko gaming. The current gaming state in the machine 1 is specified (step 109SGS121). The CPU 103 identifies that it is in the probabilistic state when the probabilistic flag is on, identifies that it is in the probabilistic state when the probabilistic flag is off and the time saving flag is on, and both the probabilistic flag and the time saving flag are in the time saving state. When it is off, it may be specified that it is in the normal state.

Following the process of step 109SGS121, the special figure display result determination table 1 shown in FIG. 10-6 is selected and set (step 109SGS122). After that, it is determined whether or not the numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result extracted in step 109SGS109 of FIG. 10-12 is within the predetermined jackpot determination range (step 109SGS123). In the jackpot determination range, individual determination values assigned to the special figure display result of "big hit" in the special figure display result determination table 1 selected by the process of step 109SGS 122 are set, and the CPU 103 determines each determination as a random value MR1. It suffices if it is possible to determine whether or not there is a determination value that matches the random number value MR1 by comparing the values one by one. Alternatively, a numerical value indicating the minimum value (lower limit value) and the maximum value (upper limit value) of the judgment value included in the big hit judgment range is set, and the CPU 103 sets the random number value MR1 and the minimum value or the maximum value of the big hit judgment range. By comparing, it suffices if it can be determined whether or not the random number value MR1 is within the range of the jackpot determination range. At this time, by determining that the random number value MR1 is within the range of the jackpot determination range, it can be determined that the variable display result based on the reserved data including the random number value MR1 is determined as "big hit".

When it is determined in step 109SGS123 that the jackpot is not within the jackpot determination range, that is, when it is determined that the jackpot is not achieved in the variable display (step 109SGS123; N), the special figure display result determination table shown in FIG. 10-6. 2 is selected and set (step 109SGS124). After that, it is determined whether or not the numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result extracted in step 109SGS109 of FIG. 10-12 is within the predetermined small hit determination range (step 109SGS125).

When the numerical data indicating the random value MR1 is within the predetermined small hit determination range, that is, when it is determined to be a small hit in the variable display (step 109SGS125; Y), the variable display result is "small hit". The transmission setting of the sixth symbol designation command, which is the symbol designation command corresponding to the above, is executed (step 109SGS126), the variation pattern determination table for special hits is selected and set (step 109SGS127), and the process proceeds to step 109SGS138. ..

If the numerical data indicating the random value MR1 is not within the predetermined small hit judgment range, that is, if the variable display result is "missing" in the variable display, the symbol corresponding to the variable display result being "missing". The transmission setting of the first symbol designation command, which is a designated command, is executed (step 109SGS128), and it is determined whether or not the time saving flag is on, that is, whether or not the current gaming state is the time saving state (step). 109SGS129). When the time reduction flag is off (step 109SGS129; N), the deviation pattern determination table A is selected and set, and when the time reduction flag is on (step 109SGS129; Y), the deviation pattern determination table A is selected and set. Table D is selected and set (step 109SGS131). The deviation pattern determination table A is an deviation variation pattern determination table used when the number of reserved storages is 2 or less. Further, the deviation pattern determination table D is an deviation variation pattern determination table used when the gaming state is a high base state in which the time saving control is executed.

In addition, in this feature unit 109SG, in addition to the deviation pattern determination table A and the deviation variation pattern determination table D, the deviation pattern determination table B used when the number of reserved storages is three , The deviation pattern determination table C used when the number of reserved storages is 4, is prepared in advance. However, as shown in FIG. 10-9, these are out of the deviation pattern determination tables A to C. In the deviation pattern determination table A, 600 determination values from 0 to 599 are assigned to the non-reach variation pattern within the range that the random value MR3 for the variation pattern determination can take. In the variation pattern determination table B, 700 determination values from 0 to 699 are assigned to the non-reach variation pattern within the range that the random value MR3 for the variation pattern determination can take, and the variation pattern determination table for loss is assigned. In C, 800 determination values from 0 to 799 are assigned to the non-reach variation pattern within the range that the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern can take. On the other hand, in the deviation pattern determination tables A to C, 97 determination values from 901 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach within the range that the random number value MR3 for the variation pattern determination can take. ..

Therefore, by determining the variation pattern using the deviation pattern determination table A in step 109SGS126, the determination of non-reach and super reach is always non-reach or super reach even if the reserved storage number changes after the determination. Therefore, in the determination at the time of starting winning, the variation pattern determination table A for loss is used for determination.

Further, when it is determined in step 109SGS123 that the jackpot is within the jackpot determination range, that is, when it is determined to be a jackpot during variable display (step 109SGS123; Y), as shown in FIG. 10-13 (A). , The jackpot type is determined based on the random value MR2 for determining the jackpot type (step 109SGS132). At this time, the CPU 103 responds to the fluctuation special figure (“first special figure” corresponding to “1” or “second special figure” corresponding to “2”) specified corresponding to the start port buffer value. , Select the jackpot type determination table data from the table data that constitutes the jackpot type determination table. Then, by referring to the selected jackpot type determination table data, it is determined which of the plurality of types the jackpot type is determined.

In addition, a symbol designation command according to the determined jackpot type, that is, a second symbol designation command when the probability variation jackpot A, a third symbol designation command when the probability variation jackpot B, and a probability variation jackpot C. Executes the transmission setting of the 4th symbol designation command, and if it is a non-variable jackpot, the transmission setting of the 5th symbol designation command (step 109SGS133), and then determines whether or not the determined jackpot type is a non-variable jackpot. (Step 109SGS134a). When the determined jackpot type is a non-probability variation jackpot (step 109SGS134a; Y), the jackpot variation pattern determination table A is selected and set as a table for determining the jackpot variation pattern (step 109SGS135), and the step is performed. Proceed to 109SGS138.

If the determined jackpot type is a probabilistic jackpot (step 109SGS134a; N), the jackpot variation pattern determination table B is selected and set (step 109SGS136), and the process proceeds to step 109SGS138.

After executing any of the processes of step 109SGS127, step 109SGS130, step 109SGS131, step 109SGS135, and step 109SGS136, a numerical value indicating each variation pattern determination table set in each of these steps and a random number value MR3 for variation pattern determination. Using the data, the variation category according to the range of the determination value including the random number value MR3 is determined (step 109SGS138). In this feature unit 109SG, as shown in FIG. 10-13 (B), when at least the variable display result is "off", the variable display mode is "non-reach" in common regardless of the total number of reserved storages. A variable category that is a variable display mode of "super reach", a variable category that is a variable display mode other than "non-reach" and "super reach" (for example, normal reach), and a variable category of "other" that is a variable display mode other than "non-reach" and "super reach" are provided. It suffices if it can be determined whether or not such a fluctuation category is determined based on the random number value MR3.

After that, after setting for transmitting the variation category designation command according to the determination result by the process of step 109SGS138 to the effect control board 12 (step 109SGS132), the random number value determination process at the time of winning is terminated.

Next, the operation of the effect control board 12 will be described. FIG. 10-14 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S75 of FIG. 6 as the command analysis process. In the command analysis process shown in FIG. 10-14, the effect control CPU 120 first receives from the main board 11 transmitted via the relay board 15 by confirming the stored contents of the effect control command reception buffer. It is determined whether or not there is a command (step 109SGS221). At this time, if there is no received command (step 109SGS221; N), the command analysis process ends.

If there is a receive command in step 109SGS221 (step 109SGS221; Y), for example, by checking the MODE data of the receive command, it is determined whether or not the receive command is the first start opening winning designation command. (Step 109SGS222).

If the reception command is not the first start opening winning designation command in step 109SGS222 (step 109SGS222; N), it is determined whether or not the reception command is the second start opening winning designation command (step 109SGS224).

If the reception command is not the second start opening winning designation command in step 109SGS224 (step 109SGS224; N), it is determined whether or not the reception command is a symbol designation command (step 109SGS226). If the received command is not a symbol designation command in step 109SGS226 (step 109SGS226; N), it is determined whether or not the received command is a variable category command (step 109SGS227). If the received command is not a variable category command in step 109SGS227 (step 109SGS227; N), it is determined whether or not the received command is the first reserved storage number notification command (step 109SGS228).

If the reception command is not the first hold storage number notification command in step 109SGS228 (step 109SGS228; N), it is determined whether or not the reception command is the second hold storage number notification command (step 109SGS230).

When the reception command is the first start opening winning designation command in step 109SGS222 (step 109SGS222; Y), or when the reception command is the second start opening winning designation command in step 109SGS224 (step 109SGS224; Y), in step 109SGS226. When the receive command is a symbol designation command (step 109SGS226; Y), when the receive command is a variable category command in step 109SGS227 (step 109SGS227; Y), the receive command is the first hold storage number notification command in step 109SGS228. In the case (109SGS228; Y), when the reception command is the second hold storage number notification command in step 109SGS230 (step 109SGS230; Y), the reception command is vacant in the start winning reception command buffer 109SG194A shown in FIG. 10-11. It is stored at the beginning of the area (step 109SGS233), and the process returns to the process of step 109SGS221.

When the hold storage number notification command (first hold storage number notification command or second hold storage number notification command) is received together with the variable display start command (first variable display start command or second variable display start command). , The hold storage number notification command may not be stored in the start winning command receive command buffer 109SG194A. That is, it suffices that the effect control commands received in response to the occurrence of the start winning can be sequentially stored from the beginning of the free area in the start winning command buffer 109SG194A.

If the reception command is not the second hold storage number notification command in step 109SGS230 (step 109SGS230; N), settings are made according to other reception commands (step 109SGS234), and the process returns to step 109SGS221.

In particular, in the processing of the feature unit 162SGS234, when the reception command is the first ball ejection state specification command, it is determined that the ball ejection state is the low ball ejection state, and the value of the ball ejection state flag for production is set to "0". If the receive command is the second payout state specification command, it is determined that the payout state is the first high payout state, and the value of the payout state flag for production is set to "1". If the receiving command is the third ball ejection state specification command, it is determined that the ball ejection state is the second high ball ejection state, and the value of the ball ejection state flag for production is set to "2". Set (update) to.

In the command analysis process of the feature unit 109SG, if the received command is any of the start opening prize designation command, the symbol designation command, the variable category command, and the hold storage number notification command, the received command is used at the start winning. The form of sequentially storing the free area of the receive command buffer 109SG194A from the beginning is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and when the receive command is the first start opening winning command, the hold storage number notification command is used. If a timer for waiting for reception is set and the hold storage number notification command is not received before the timer goes out, the entry hold storage that has not received the hold storage number notification command will be described later. It may be set out of the target of the reading notice effect.

FIG. 10-15 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S161 of FIG. 5 as the pre-reading notice setting process. In the pre-reading notice setting process shown in FIG. 10-15, the effect control CPU 120 first checks the start winning command buffer 109SG194A (step 109SGS241), and the hold storage (entry) in which the hold display flag is not set is set. It is determined whether or not there is (step 109SGS242a). When there is no hold storage in which the hold display flag is not set (step 109SGS242a; N), the look-ahead notice setting process is terminated, and when there is hold storage in which the hold display flag is not set (step 109SGS242a; Y), the look-ahead notice setting process is terminated. Further, it is determined whether or not the reach effect of the super reach is being executed (step 109SGS242b).

Whether or not the reach effect of the super reach is being executed depends on whether or not the value of the effect control process flag is 2 (whether or not the variable display is being executed) and the value of the effect control process flag. If is 2, the content of the process data of the variable display being executed may be referred to, and it may be determined whether or not the reach effect of the super reach is being executed.

If the reach effect of the super reach is being executed (step 109SGS242b; Y), the process proceeds to step 109SGS250, and if the reach effect of the super reach is not being executed (step 109SGS242bb; N), the entry (hold display flag is further set). It is determined whether or not the symbol designation command stored in the non-set entry) is a symbol designation command indicating a small hit (step 109SGS243a). If the symbol designation command stored in the entry is a symbol designation command indicating a small hit (step 109SGS243a; Y), the process proceeds to step 109SGS250, and the symbol designation command stored in the entry indicates a miss or a jackpot. When it is a symbol designation command (step 109SGS243a; N), it is determined whether or not the symbol designation command stored in the entry is the first symbol designation command (symbol designation command indicating loss) (step 109SGS243b). ..

When the symbol designation command stored in the entry is not the first symbol designation command, that is, when the symbol designation command stored in the entry is a symbol designation command indicating a big hit (step 109SGS243b; N), The jackpot type is specified from the symbol specification command of the entry (step 109SGS244).

Then, for example, based on the numerical data indicating the random number value for the look-ahead advance notice effect extracted from the random number circuit 124 or the random counter of the effect control counter setting unit 109SG193 and the jackpot type specified in step 109SGS244, the jackpot pre-reading (not shown) is performed. By referring to the advance notice effect determination table, it is determined whether or not to execute the look-ahead advance notice effect and the display pattern when the look-ahead advance notice effect is executed (step 109SGS245).

In step 109SGS245, for example, the presence / absence of execution of the pre-reading advance notice effect and the display pattern (notice type) are determined at a determination ratio as shown in FIGS. 10-16. In the setting example of the determination ratio shown in FIG. 10-16, the presence / absence of the pre-reading advance notice effect and the determination ratio of the display pattern (notice type) are different depending on the jackpot type specified in the process of step 109SGS244.

Specifically, two types of display patterns α and display patterns β are provided as display patterns (notice types) for the pre-reading notice effect. Of these, when the display pattern of the pre-reading notice effect is determined to be the display pattern α, the hold storage display is displayed in the first hold storage display area 109SG005D or the second hold storage display area 109SG005U as a white square (◇). When the display pattern (notice type) of the pre-reading notice effect is determined to be the display pattern β, the hold storage display is a white star (☆) and the first hold storage display area 109SG005D or the second hold storage display is displayed. It is displayed in the area 109SG005U.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 10-16, when the jackpot type is "probability variation jackpot", the ratio at which the display pattern β is determined as the display pattern (notice type) is higher than the ratio at which the display pattern α is determined. Is also set high. On the other hand, when the jackpot type is "non-probability variable jackpot", the ratio at which the display pattern β is determined as the display pattern (notice type) is set lower than the ratio at which the display pattern α is determined.

With such a setting, when the variable display result is "big hit" and the display pattern β is displayed as the display pattern (notice type), the big hit type is compared with the case where the display pattern α is displayed. Is a probable big hit, and the player's expectation that it will be a probable big hit can be increased.

In addition, in this feature unit 109SG, when the variable display result is a big hit, the display pattern α or the white star that displays the hold storage display in the white square (◇) by always deciding the execution of the pre-reading notice effect. Although one of the display patterns β displayed in the shape (☆) is executed, the present invention is not limited to this, and the variable display result is variable even when it is a big hit. A case may be provided in which it is determined not to execute the pre-reading notice effect as in the case where the display result is “off”.

Further, in step 109SGS243b, when the symbol designation command of the entry in which the display undecided flag is on is the first symbol designation command, that is, when the command indicates an error (step 109SGS243b; Y), the display is undecided. The variable category indicated by the variable category specification command of the entry in which the flag is on is specified (step 109SGS247). Specifically, if the variation category specification command of the entry is C600H, it is specified as a category of "non-reach" variation pattern, and if it is C601H, it is a category of "super reach" variation pattern. If it is C602H, it may be specified that it is a category of "other" fluctuation patterns including normal reach.

Then, for example, it is not shown based on the numerical data indicating the random number value for the pre-reading advance notice effect extracted from the random number circuit 124 or the random counter of the effect control counter setting unit 109SG193, and the category of the fluctuation pattern specified in step 109SGS247. By referring to the pre-reading notice effect determination table at the time of loss, it is determined whether or not to execute the pre-reading notice effect and the display pattern (notice type) when the pre-reading notice effect is executed (step 109SGS248).

In step 109SGS248, for example, the presence / absence of execution of the pre-reading advance notice effect and the display pattern (notice type) are determined at a determination ratio as shown in FIGS. 10-16. In the setting example of the determination ratio shown in FIG. 10-16, the presence / absence of execution of the pre-reading advance notice effect and the determination ratio of the display pattern (notice type) are different depending on the category of the fluctuation pattern specified in the process of step 109SGS247. There is.

Specifically, two types of display patterns (notice types) are provided, a display pattern α and a display pattern β. Of these, when the display pattern (notice type) is determined to be the display pattern α, the first hold storage display area 109SG005D or the second hold storage display area is represented by a white square (◇) in which the hold storage display is a specific mode. When it is displayed on the 109SG005U and the display pattern (notice type) is determined to be the display pattern β, the hold storage display is a white star shape (☆), which is a specific mode, and the first hold storage display area 109SG005D or the second hold. It is displayed in the storage display area 109SG005U. When the pre-reading notice effect is determined not to be executed, it is displayed in the first reserved storage display area 109SG005D or the second reserved storage display area 109SG005U in a round shape (◯) in which the reserved storage display is a normal mode.

As shown in FIGS. 10-16, when the variable display result is "missing" and the variable pattern category is "other", the variable display result is "missing" and the variable pattern category is "non-". The rate at which the pre-reading notice effect is executed (the rate determined other than "no notice effect") is set higher than in the case of "reach". Also, when the variable display result is "off" and the variable pattern category is "super reach", the variable display result is "off" and the variable pattern category is "other". The rate at which the pre-reading notice effect is executed (the rate determined other than "no notice effect") is set high.

When the execution of the pre-reading notice effect is decided when the variable display result is "off", when the variable category is "other", the variable pattern category is "non-reach". Also, the ratio at which the display pattern α is determined is set high. Further, when the category of the fluctuation pattern is "super reach", the rate at which the display pattern α is determined is set higher than when the category of the fluctuation pattern is "other". Further, when the variable display result is "off" and the execution of the pre-reading notice effect is decided, when the variable pattern category is "other", the variable pattern category is "non-reach". The rate at which the display pattern β is determined is set higher than in the case of, and when the fluctuation pattern category is "super reach", the display pattern is higher than when the fluctuation pattern category is "other". The rate at which β is determined is set high.

When the variable display result is "off", the rate at which the pre-reading notice effect is determined to be non-execution regardless of whether the variation pattern category is "non-reach", "other", or "super reach". Is set to the highest, and the ratio at which the pre-reading notice effect is determined to be executed and the display pattern β is determined is set to the lowest.

Further, when the variable display result is "big hit", the pre-reading notice effect is not determined to be non-execution (no advance notice effect), the pre-reading advance notice effect is determined to be executed, and the display pattern α. Alternatively, the ratio at which the display pattern β is determined is set higher than the ratio at which the display pattern α or the display pattern β is determined in any of the fluctuation pattern categories when the variable display result is “missing”.

Further, when the variable display result is "off (non-reach)", "off (super reach)", or "off (other)", the display pattern α is determined when the execution of the pre-reading notice effect is determined. Is set higher than the rate at which the display pattern β is determined. On the other hand, when the variable display result is "big hit (probability variable big hit)", when the execution of the pre-reading notice effect is decided, the ratio at which the display pattern β is determined is the ratio at which the display pattern α is determined. Is set higher than.

When the display pattern α or the display pattern β is executed (displayed) as the display pattern (notice type) of the pre-reading notice effect by such a setting, the display pattern α or the display pattern β is not executed (displayed). There is a higher possibility that the variable display result will be a "big hit", especially when the display pattern β is executed (displayed), the variable display result will be a "big hit" and the jackpot type will be "probability variable jackpot". Since the ratio is increased, the player's expectation can be increased.

After the execution of step 109SGS248, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the execution of the pre-reading advance notice effect is determined in step 109SGS247, that is, the display pattern (notice type) is determined to be either the display pattern α or the display pattern β. It is determined whether or not (step 109SGS249).

After the execution of step 109SGS245 or when the execution of the pre-reading notice effect is decided (step 109SGS249; Y), the flag value corresponding to the decided display pattern (notice type) is set in the hold display flag of the entry (step). 109SGS246). Specifically, if the display pattern (notice type) determined in step 109SGS245 or step 109SGS248 is the display pattern α indicating the hold storage display by “◇”, “1” is set in the hold display flag of the entry, and the step If the display pattern (notice type) determined in 109SGS245 or step 109SGS248 is the display pattern β indicating the hold storage display by “☆”, “2” is set in the hold display flag of the entry, and then the process proceeds to step 109SGS252.

If the execution of the pre-reading notice effect is not determined in step 109SGS249 (step 109SGS249; N), after setting the hold display flag of the entry to "0" indicating a white "○" (step 109SGS249). 109SGS250), the process proceeds to step 109SGS252.

Further, as described above, even when the reach effect of the super reach is being executed (step 109SGS242b; Y) or when the symbol designation command of the entry is a symbol designation command indicating a small hit (step 109SGS243a), the entry is also entered. After setting the hold display flag to "0" indicating a white "○" (step 109SGS250), the process proceeds to step 109SGS252.

Then, the effect control CPU 120 updates the hold display based on the stored contents of the start winning command buffer 109SG194A (step 109SGS252). As a result, the hold storage newly stored in the start winning command buffer 109SG194A is displayed in the display mode corresponding to any of "0", "1", and "2" set in the hold display flag. NS. Further, even when the variable display is executed and the stored contents of the start winning command buffer 109SG194A are shifted, the stored contents of the start winning command buffer 109SG194A after the shift are shown in FIG. 10-17. As shown, the hold display of the first hold storage display area 109SG005D and the second hold storage display area 109SG005U provided at the lower position of the image display device 5 is updated.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 10-17, if the number of reserved storages in the first special figure is one, one reserved storage display is displayed. As for the display mode of the hold storage display, when the flag value of the hold display flag corresponding to the hold storage is "0", it is displayed in the display mode of "○" as shown in FIG. 10-17. , When the flag value of the hold display flag is "1", it is displayed in the display mode of "◇", and when the flag value of the hold display flag is "2", the display mode is "☆". It is displayed in. If the number of reserved storages in the first special figure is two, two reserved storage displays are displayed, and each reserved storage display corresponds to a flag value set in the corresponding reserved storage display flag. Is displayed in the first hold storage display area 109SG005D. Further, if the number of reserved storages in the first special figure is three, three reserved storage displays are displayed, and each reserved storage display corresponds to a flag value set in the corresponding reserved storage display flag. Is displayed in the first hold storage display area 109SG005D. Further, if the number of reserved storages in the first special figure is four, four reserved storage displays are displayed, and each reserved storage display corresponds to a flag value set in the corresponding reserved storage display flag. Is displayed in the first hold storage display area 109SG005D.

Further, if the number of the second special figure reserved storage is one, one reserved storage display is displayed. As in the case of the first special figure, when the flag value of the hold display flag corresponding to the hold storage is "0", the display mode of the hold storage display is "○". When the flag value of the hold display flag is "1", it is displayed in the display mode of "◇", and when the flag value of the hold display flag is "2", "☆" is displayed. It is displayed in the mode. If the number of the second special figure reserved storage is two, for example, as shown in FIG. 10-17, two reserved storage displays are displayed, and each reserved storage display is a reserved display of the corresponding reserved storage. As a mode according to the flag value set in the flag, for example, in the display mode in which the hold storage display of 1 is "○" and the display mode in which the hold storage display of 1 is "☆", the second hold storage display area 109SG005U is displayed. Is displayed. Further, if the number of reserved storages in the second special figure is three, three reserved storage displays are displayed, and each reserved storage display corresponds to a flag value set in the corresponding reserved storage display flag. Is displayed in the second hold storage display area 109SG005U. Further, if the number of reserved storages in the second special figure is four, four reserved storage displays are displayed, and each reserved storage display corresponds to a flag value set in the corresponding reserved storage display flag. Is displayed in the second hold storage display area 109SG005U.

Then, as shown in FIG. 10-17, the hold storage display is also displayed in a predetermined shift direction (screen in the feature unit 109SG) in response to the decrease (consumption) of the hold storage each time the variable display is executed. Shift toward the center of.

That is, when the hold memory is consumed in the variable display start setting process described later, which is executed at the start of the variable display, and the hold memory of the start winning command buffer 109SG194A is shifted, the start winning after the shift is started. Based on the hold storage of the receive command buffer 109SG194A, the hold storage display in the first hold storage display area 109SG005D and the second hold storage display area 109SG005U is also shifted and displayed, and there is a new hold storage due to the start winning. In that case, the display pattern of the hold storage is determined and set in the hold display flag, and the first hold storage display area 109SG005D or the second hold is set in the display mode according to the flag value set in the hold display flag. It will be displayed in the storage display area 109SG005U.

The feature unit 109SG exemplifies a mode in which the process of step 109SGS252 is executed in the pre-reading notice setting process, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the first reserved storage display area 109SG005D is not limited thereto. The process for updating the hold display of the second hold storage display area 109SG005U may be individually executed as a process different from the pre-reading notice setting process (for example, the hold display update process).

Further, the feature unit 109SG determines in step 109SGS242 whether or not to execute the pre-reading notice effect in the hold memory in the start winning, provided that the command at the time of starting winning is newly stored. Since the start winning to the first starting winning opening and the starting winning to the second starting winning opening occur at the same time, a new storage of the command at the time of starting winning in both the first special figure and the second special figure in step 109SGS242 is performed. If it is determined that there is, that is, if there is an entry in which the display undecided flag is on in both the first special figure hold memory and the second special figure hold memory, both entries are pre-read notice. It is the target of determination of execution and non-execution of the production. Both the hold memory in which the command at the time of the start winning in the first special figure is newly stored and the hold memory in which the command at the time of the start winning in the second special figure is newly stored are executed and non-executed of the pre-reading notice effect. In the case of a decision target, if there is no entry of the hold display flag of "1" or "2" indicating the execution of the pre-reading notice effect, the hold display of the hold storage of the first special figure and the hold of the second special figure are held. The pre-reading notice effect may be executed at the same time on both sides of the display.

Further, in the feature unit 109SG, when the start winning to the first starting winning opening and the starting winning to the second starting winning opening occur at the same time as described above, the command at the time of starting winning in the first special figure is issued. Both the newly stored hold memory and the newly stored hold memory in which the command at the time of the start winning in the second special figure is newly stored are subject to the determination of execution and non-execution of the pre-reading notice effect, but this is the present invention. In such a case, the execution and non-execution of the pre-reading notice effect in the reserved storage in the first special figure, and the execution and non-execution of the pre-reading notice effect in the reserved storage in the second special figure. You may decide to execute only one of them.

Specifically, when the gaming state is a normal state in which the high opening control is not performed, the determination of execution and non-execution of the pre-reading notice effect in the hold storage in the first special figure is held in the second special figure. Prioritize the execution and non-execution of the pre-reading notice effect in memory. Then, when it is decided to execute the pre-reading notice effect in the reserved memory in the first special figure, the execution of the pre-reading notice effect in the reserved memory in the second special figure is uniquely decided not to be executed, and the first special figure is determined. When it is decided not to execute the pre-reading notice effect in the reserved memory in the figure, it may be decided to execute or not execute the pre-reading notice effect in the reserved storage in the second special figure.

On the other hand, when the gaming state is a time-saving state (high-accuracy high-base state / low-accuracy high-base state) in which high-opening control is performed, execution and non-execution of the pre-reading notice effect in the hold memory in the second special figure. Is prioritized over the decision of execution and non-execution of the pre-reading notice effect in the reserved memory in the first special figure. Then, when it is decided to execute the look-ahead notice effect in the hold memory in the second special figure, the execution of the look-ahead notice effect in the hold memory in the first special figure is uniquely decided not to be executed, and the second special figure is made. When it is decided not to execute the pre-reading notice effect in the reserved memory in the figure, it may be decided to execute or not execute the pre-reading notice effect in the reserved storage in the first special figure.

FIG. 10-18 is a flowchart showing the variable display start setting process (step S171) in the effect control process process shown in FIG. 7. In the variable display start setting process, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the first variable display start command reception flag is on (step 109SGS271). When the first variable display start command reception flag is in the ON state (step 109SGS271; Y), the buffer numbers “1-0” to “1-4” of the first special figure hold storage in the start winning command buffer 109SG194A. The various command data and various flags stored in association with the above are shifted upward by one buffer number (step 109SGS272). The contents of the buffer number "1-0" are deleted because they cannot be shifted because there is no shift destination.

Specifically, the shift is made so that various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "1-1" of the first special figure hold storage are stored in association with the buffer number "1-0". Then, the various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "1-2" of the first special figure hold storage are shifted so as to be stored in association with the buffer number "1-1". 1 Special figure The first special figure is shifted so that various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "1-3" of the hold storage are stored in association with the buffer number "1-2". The various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "1-4" of the hold storage are shifted so as to be stored in association with the buffer number "1-3".

If the first variable display start command reception flag is off in step 109SGS271 (step 109SGS271; N), it is determined whether or not the second variable display start command reception flag is on (step 109SGS273). When the second variable display start command reception flag is off (step 109SGS273; N), the variable display start setting process is terminated, and when the second variable display start command reception flag is on (step 109SGS273; Y). ), Various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer numbers "2-0" to "2-4" of the second special figure hold storage in the start winning command buffer 109SG194A, one buffer number. It shifts upward by the minute (step 109SGS274). The contents of the buffer number "2-0" are deleted because they cannot be shifted because there is no shift destination.

Specifically, the shift is made so that various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "2-1" of the second special figure hold storage are stored in association with the buffer number "2-0". Then, the various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "2-2" of the second special figure hold storage are shifted so as to be stored in association with the buffer number "2-1". 2 Special figure The second special figure is shifted so that various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "2-3" of the hold storage are stored in association with the buffer number "2-2". The various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "2-4" of the hold storage are shifted so as to be stored in association with the buffer number "2-3".

After executing step 109SGS272 or step 109SGS274, the effect control CPU 120 reads the variation pattern designation command from the variation pattern specification command storage area (step 109SGS275).

Next, the display result (stop symbol) of the decorative symbol is determined according to the data stored in the display result designation command storage area (that is, the received display result designation command) (step 109SGS276). In this case, the effect control CPU 120 determines the stop symbol of the decorative symbol according to the display result specified by the display result designation command, and stores the data indicating the stopped symbol of the determined decorative symbol in the decorative symbol display result storage area. do.

In the feature unit 109SG, when the received variable display result designation command is the second variable display result designation command corresponding to the probability variation jackpot A, the effect control CPU 120 has, for example, "7" as a stop symbol. ”Determine the combination of decorative symbols (big hit symbols). Further, when the received variable display result specification command is the third variable display result specification command corresponding to the probability variation jackpot B, a plurality of combinations of odd-numbered symbols other than "7" (for example, "111") are used as stop symbols. It is determined from the combination of decorative patterns such as "333", "555", and "999"). Further, when the received variable display result specification command is the fourth variable display result specification command corresponding to the probabilistic big hit C, the stop symbols are "334" and "778", which are the same chances as the small hit. Decide from the inside. Further, when the received variable display result specification command is the fifth variable display result specification command corresponding to the non-probability change jackpot, the effect control CPU 120 has, for example, a decorative symbol in which three symbols are arranged as even symbols as stop symbols. Determine the combination (big hit symbol). Further, when the received variable display result specification command is the sixth variable display result specification command corresponding to a small hit, the stop symbols are "334" and "778", which are the same chances as the probabilistic big hit C. Decide from the inside. Further, when the received variable display result specification command is the first variable display result specification command corresponding to the loss, it is a decorative symbol in which the three symbols are not uniform as the stop symbol, and a combination other than the above-mentioned chance eyes. Determine (missing symbol).

In determining these stop symbols, the effect control CPU 120 extracts, for example, a random number for determining the stop symbol, and uses a stop symbol determination table in which data indicating a combination of decorative symbols and a numerical value are associated with each other. Then, the stop symbol of the decorative symbol may be determined. That is, the stop symbol may be determined by selecting data indicating a combination of decorative symbols corresponding to the numerical value corresponding to the extracted random number.

Then, in step 109SGS281, the effect control CPU 120 selects an effect control pattern (process table) corresponding to the variation pattern designation command. Then, the process timer in the process data 1 of the selected process table is started (step 109SGS282).

In the process table, display control execution data for controlling the display of the image display device 5, lamp control execution data for controlling the lighting of each LED, and sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R are controlled. The sound control execution data, the operation unit control execution data for controlling the operation of the push button 31B and the stick controller 31A, etc. are sequentially arranged in chronological order in association with each process data n (1 to N). There is.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 performs an effect device (image display as an effect component) according to the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound control execution data 1, operation unit control execution data 1). Control of the device 5, various lamps as production parts, speakers 8L, 8R as production parts, and operation units (push button 31B, stick controller 31A, etc.) is executed (step 109SGS283). For example, the image display device 5 outputs a command to the display control unit 123 in order to display an image corresponding to the fluctuation pattern. Further, in order to control lighting / extinguishing of various lamps, a control signal (lamp control execution data) is output to the lamp control board 14. Further, in order to output the voice from the speakers 8L and 8R, the control signal (sound number data) is output to the voice control board 13.

In the feature unit 109SG, the effect control CPU 120 controls the variation pattern designation command so that the decorative pattern is variably displayed by the variation pattern corresponding to one-to-one, while the effect control CPU 120 controls the variation pattern. The fluctuation pattern to be used may be selected from a plurality of types of fluctuation patterns corresponding to the specified command.

Then, a value corresponding to the variable display time specified by the variable pattern designation command is set in the variable display time timer (step 109SGS284). Further, the first time is set in the variable display control timer (step 109SGS285). The first time is, for example, 33 ms, and the effect control CPU 120 converts the image data in the variable display including the image data indicating the display state of the decorative symbol on the left, middle, and right into the VRAM each time the first time elapses. The writing and display control unit 123 outputs a signal corresponding to the image data written in the VRAM to the image display device 5, and the image display device 5 displays the image corresponding to the signal. As a result, variable display of decorative patterns and display of moving images of other effects are realized (see FIGS. 10-20).

Further, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the variable display variation pattern is a super reach variation pattern (step 109SGS287). When the variation pattern of the variable display is the variation pattern of the super reach (step 109SGS287; Y), the second time is set in the movable body control timer (step 109SGS288). The second time is, for example, 1 ms, and each time the first time elapses, the effect control CPU 120 of the first movable body motor 109SG421, the second movable body motor 109SG422, and the third movable body motor 109SG423. Take control. As a result, the movement control of the first movable body 109SG401, the second movable body 109SG402L, and the third movable body 109SG402R is realized (see FIG. 10-20).

After the execution of step 109SGS288, or when the variation pattern of the variable display is not the variation pattern of the super reach (step 109SGS287; N), the effect control CPU 120 changes the value of the effect control process flag during the effect display process (step). The value corresponding to S172) is set, and the variable display start setting process is terminated (step 109SGS286).

FIG. 10-19 is a flowchart showing the effect processing during variable display (step S172) in the effect control process process. In the effect processing during variable display, the effect control CPU 120 sets the respective values of the process timer, the variable display time timer, and the variable display control timer to -1 (step 109SGS301, step 109SGS302, step 109SGS303). When the variable display is a variable display of super reach (step 109SGS303b; Y), the value of the movable body control timer is set to -1 (step 109SGS303c).

After the execution of step 109SGS303c, or when the super reach is not variable display (step 109SGS303b; N), the process proceeds to step 109SGS306.

In step 109SGS306, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the process timer has timed out. If the process timer is out, the process data is switched (step 109SGS307). That is, the process timer is started again by setting the process timer setting value set next in the process table to the process timer (step 109SGS308). Further, the control state for the effect device (effect component) is changed based on the display control execution data, the lamp control execution data, the sound control execution data, the operation unit control data, etc., which are set next (step 109SGS309a). On the other hand, when the process timer is not timer-out, the effect device (for effect) is according to the contents of the process data corresponding to the process timer (display control execution data, lamp control execution data, sound control execution data, operation unit control data, etc.). The control of the component) is executed (step 109SGS309b).

After executing the process of step 109SGS309a or step 109SGS309b, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the variable display is a super reach variable display (step 109SGS309f).

When the variable display is a variable display of super reach (step 109SGS309f; Y), it is further determined whether or not the movable body control timer is timer-out (109SGS309g). When the movable body control timer is out of time (step 109SGS309g; Y), the first movable body motor 109SG421, the second movable body motor 109SG422, and the third movable body motor 109SG423 are driven according to the contents of the process data. (Step 109SGS309h). Then, the movable body control timer is reset (the second time is set again in the movable body control timer), and the process proceeds to step 109SGS310 (step 109SGS309i).

If the variable display is not a variable display of super reach (step 109SGS309f; N) and the movable body control timer is not timer-out (step 109SGS309g; N), execute the processes of step 109SGS309h and step 109SGS309i. Proceed to step 109SGS310 without proceeding.

Next, it is confirmed whether or not the variable display control timer is out of the timer (step 109SGS310). When the variable display control timer is out of the timer (step 109SGS310; Y), the effect control CPU 120 is the next display screen (33 ms from the time of the previous image update) during variable display including the decorative symbol on the left, middle, and right. Image data of the screen to be displayed after the lapse of time) is created and written in a predetermined area of VRAM (step 109SGS311). In this way, in the image display device 5, variable display control of decorative patterns and display control of other images (display control of moving images) are realized. The display control unit 123 transmits a signal based on data obtained by superimposing image data of a predetermined area such as a set background image and image data based on display control execution data set in the process table to the image display device 5. Output. In this way, the image display device 5 displays the background image, the character image, and the decorative pattern in the variation of the decorative pattern. Further, the first time is reset to the variable display control timer (step 109SGS312).

Further, when the variable display control timer is not timer-out (step 109SGS310; N), after the execution of step 109SGS312, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the variable display time timer is timer-out (step 109SGS313). .. If the variable display time timer is out of the timer, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the special figure hit wait process (step S173) (step 109SGS315). Even if the variable display time timer is not out, if the confirmation command reception flag indicating that the symbol confirmation designation command has been received is in the ON state (step 109SGS314; Y), the value of the effect control process flag is set as a special figure. The value is updated according to the wait process (step S173) (step 109SGS315). Even if the variable display time timer is not out of the timer, the control shifts to stop the fluctuation when the symbol confirmation specification command is received. Therefore, for example, the fluctuation pattern specification command that indicates a long fluctuation time due to noise between the boards. Is received, the variable display of the decorative symbol can be terminated when the regular variable display time has elapsed (at the end of the variable display of the special symbol).

In the process table used for the variable display control of the decorative symbol, the process data during the variable display of the decorative symbol is set. That is, the sum of the process timer setting values of the process data 1 to n in the process table corresponds to the variable display time of the decorative symbol. Therefore, when the process timer of the last process data n in the process of step 109SGS306 times out, there is no process data (display control execution data, lamp control execution data, etc.) to be switched, and variable display control of the decorative symbol based on the process table. Is finished.

Next, the operation mode of each effect device during the reach effect of the super reach α1, the super reach α2, the super reach β1, and the super reach β2 in the feature unit 109SG will be described. The effect mode of the variable display will be described with reference to FIGS. 10-21 to 10-24.

First, as shown in FIGS. 10-21 and 10-22, regarding the variable display of the super reach α1 and the super reach α2, when the reach production of the super reach α1 and the super reach α2 is started, the first enlarged display period , The character image displayed on the image display device 5 in the second enlarged display period and the third enlarged display period (in the case of the reach effect of the super reach α1, the reach effect of the ally character A and the enemy character A, and the reach effect of the super reach α2). If so, the enlarged display of the ally character A and the enemy character B) is executed.

Specifically, in the first enlarged display period, the character image is enlarged from the normal display magnification (1x) to the display magnification m1 at a constant speed, and in the second enlarged display period, the character image is displayed from the display magnification m1. The image is magnified at a constant speed up to a magnification of m2, and in the third magnified display period, the character image is magnified at a constant speed from the display magnification m2 to the display magnification m3. Then, after the third enlarged display period ends, the display magnification of the character image is maintained at m3 for a predetermined period, and the display magnification of the character image is returned to the normal display magnification at the timing when the predetermined period elapses. ..

In the feature unit 109SG, the first enlarged display period, the second enlarged display period, and the third enlarged display period are all periods of the same length. Further, as shown in FIGS. 10-21 and 10-22, the difference between the display magnifications is the largest between the normal display magnification and the display magnification m1, and the difference between the display magnification m2 and the display magnification m3. Is the smallest. That is, in the feature unit 109SG, the enlargement speed of the character image is set to be the fastest in the first enlargement display period and the slowest in the third enlargement display period (character image enlargement speed: 1st enlarged display period> 2nd enlarged display period> 3rd enlarged display period). In the feature unit 109SG, "fast enlargement speed" means that the enlargement ratio of the image per unit time is large.

Hereinafter, in the feature unit 109SG, the period T2, the third enlarged display period, and the character image are the combined period (the period for executing the movable body motion suggestion effect) of the first enlarged display period and the second enlarged display period described above. A period including a predetermined period for maintaining the display magnification at m3 may be referred to as a period T3.

As shown in FIG. 10-21, during the reach production of the super reach α1 and the super reach α2, if the variable display result is a big hit, the variable display ends from the end timing of the period T3 to the end timing of the variable display. As an effect of notifying that the variable display result is a big hit, the first movable body 109SG401 is moved from the retracted position to the effected position, and the second movable body 109SG402L and the third movable body 109SG402R are moved to the left and right of the first movable body 109SG401. After moving to a close position (after changing the movable body unit 109SG400 from the first state to the third state), after a while, the first movable body 109SG401, the second movable body 109SG402L, and the third movable body 109SG402R are each. The movable body operation effect A for moving the movable body unit 109SG400 to the retracted position (changing the movable body unit 109SG400 from the third state to the first state) is executed.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 10-22, if the variable display result is out of alignment during the reach production of the super reach α1 and the super reach α2, from the end timing of the period T3 to the end timing of the variable display. By not operating the first movable body 109SG401, the second movable body 109SG402L, and the third movable body 109SG402R, the deviation notification effect for notifying that the variable display result is out of order is executed.

Hereinafter, in the feature unit 109SG, the execution period of the movable body effect A and the out-of-order notification effect may be referred to as a period T4. For these periods T2 to period T4, period T3 is the shortest period and period T4 is the longest period (length of period T2 to period T4: period T4> period T2> period T3).

Further, during the reach effect of the super reach α1 and the super reach α2, the effect image is also displayed on the image display device 5 as the movable body motion suggestion effect A and the movable body operation effect A (only when the variable display result is a big hit). ..

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 10-21 and 10-22, in the image display device 5, the first movable body extends over the above-mentioned period T2 (first enlarged display period and second enlarged display period). A movable body motion suggestion effect A in which a plurality of star-shaped effect images 109SG005S move toward the 109SG401 at a speed V1 is executed.

Further, when the variable display result is a big hit, as a part of the above-mentioned movable body operation effect A, a plurality of star-shaped effect images 109SG005S are imaged from the first movable body 109SG401 at a speed V2 over a period T4. It moves (spreads) toward the edge of the display device 5. The absolute value of the velocity V2 is larger than the absolute value of the velocity V1. That is, the movable body motion effect A in the feature unit 109SG is also an effect in which the star-shaped effect image 109SG005S moves at a higher speed than the movable body motion suggestion effect A.

Further, during the reach production of the super reach α1 and the super reach α2, the light emission of the movable body LED 109SG495 is also executed. Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 10-21 and 10-22, the movable body LED109SG495 has the above-mentioned period T2 (first enlarged display period and second enlarged display period) and the middle of the period T3 (more accurately). Makes the movable body LED 109SG495 emit light at the brightness C1 from the start timing of the first enlarged display period to the end timing of the third enlarged display period). Further, when the variable display result is a big hit, the movable body LED 109SG495 is caused to emit light at the luminance C2, which is higher than the luminance C1, over the period T4.

In addition, during the reach production of Super Reach α1 and Super Reach α2, it is possible to output four types of production sounds such as BGM, SE (sound effect), operation suggestion sound, and jackpot notification sound of music, etc. from the speakers 8L and 8R. The type of sound that is output differs depending on the time during the reach production.

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 10-21 and 10-22, the BGM is a production sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R from the start of the variable display, and is from the speakers 8L and 8R only during the period T3. Output is stopped. That is, the output of the BGM in the reach effect is executed from the start timing of the reach effect to the end timing of the period T2 and over the period T4.

Further, the SE (sound effect) is a directing sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R from the start of the variable display like the BGM, but unlike the BGM, there is no period during which the output from the speakers 8L and 8R is stopped. .. That is, the output of SE in the reach effect is executed over the entire reach effect.

The motion suggestion sound is a sound effect output from the speakers 8L and 8R as a part of the movable body motion suggestion effect A. That is, the motion suggestion sound is output only in the period T2 which is the execution period of the movable body motion suggestion effect A, and is not output in other periods. The jackpot notification sound is a sound effect output from the speakers 8L and 8R as a part of the movable body operation effect A. That is, the jackpot notification sound is output only in the period T4, which is the execution period of the movable body motion effect A when the variable display result is a jackpot, and is not output in other periods.

As shown in FIGS. 10-23 and 10-24, regarding the variable display of the super reach β1 and the super reach β2, when the reach production of the super reach β1 and the super reach β2 is started, the first enlarged display period, the first Character image displayed on the image display device 5 during the 2 magnified display period and the 3rd magnified display period (if the reach effect of the super reach β1, the ally character B and the enemy character A, and the reach effect of the super reach β2) Enlarged display of ally character B and enemy character B) is executed.

After that, the enlarged display of the character image in the variable display of the super reach β1 and the super reach β2, the light emission mode of the movable LED 109SG495, the output of the BGM, SE, the operation suggestion sound, and the jackpot notification sound from the speakers 8L and 8R are shown in FIG. 10-. The description of the same embodiment as the variable display of the super reach α1 and the super reach α2 shown in 21 and FIG. 10-22 will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 10-23, during the reach production of super reach β1 and super reach β2, if the variable display result is a big hit, it is variable from the end timing of the period T3 to the end timing of the variable display. As an effect of notifying that the display result is a big hit, the first movable body 109SG401 is moved from the retracted position to the effected position, and the second movable body 109SG402L and the third movable body 109SG402R are moved to the close position of the first movable body 109SG401. After moving (after changing the movable body unit 109SG400 from the first state to the third state), after a while, the first movable body 109SG401, the second movable body 109SG402L, and the third movable body 109SG402R are moved to the respective retracted positions. The movable body motion effect B to be moved (changes the movable body unit 109SG400 from the third state to the first state) is executed.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 10-24, if the variable display result is out of alignment during the reach production of super reach β1 and super reach β2, from the end timing of the period T3 to the end timing of the variable display. By not operating the first movable body 109SG401, the second movable body 109SG402L, and the third movable body 109SG402R, the deviation notification effect for notifying that the variable display result is out of order is executed. The movable body effect B is an effect that is executed over the period T4 as in the above-mentioned movable body effect A and the out-of-order notification effect.

Further, during the reach production of the super reach β1 and the super reach β2, as shown in FIGS. 10-23 and 10-24, the above-mentioned period T2 (first enlarged display period and second enlarged display period) is extended. The movable body motion suggestion effect B for repeatedly moving (reciprocating) the first movable body 109SG401 between the retracted position and the suggested position is executed. The period T1 required for one reciprocating movement between the retracted position and the suggested position of the first movable body 109SG401 in the movable body motion suggestion effect B is shorter than the above-mentioned period T3 (the period T1 is shorter than the above-mentioned period T3. Length of period T1 to period T4: period T4> period T2> period T3> period T1).

As described above, in the variable display of super reach α1, super reach α2, super reach β1, and super reach β2, as shown in FIG. 10-25, the movable body is used in the first enlarged display period and the second enlarged display period. While the motion suggestion effect is executed, the movable body motion suggestion effect is not executed in the third enlarged display period. Further, in the first enlarged display period, the second enlarged display period, and the third enlarged display period, the first enlarged display period has the fastest enlargement speed of the character image (the enlargement rate of the image per unit time is large), and the third. The enlargement display period is set to the slowest enlargement speed of the character image (the enlargement ratio of the image per unit time is small).

Further, as shown in FIG. 10-26 (A), when the movable body motion suggestion effect A and the movable body motion suggestion effect B are compared, the movable body motion suggestion effect A is a star-shaped effect image on the image display device 5. The 109SG005S repeatedly acts on the first movable body 109SG401 (a plurality of star-shaped effect images 109SG005S move toward the first movable body 109SG401 at a speed V1), and the first movable body 109SG401 itself. Is not moving, whereas the movable body motion suggestion effect B is different in that the first movable body 109SG 401 is an effect of repeatedly moving between the retracted position and the suggested position. On the other hand, both the movable body motion suggestion effect A and the movable body motion suggestion effect B have in common that the movable body LED 109SG495 emits light at the brightness C1 during the execution period of the effect.

As shown in FIG. 10-26 (B), when the movable body motion effect A and the movable body motion effect B are compared, the movable body motion effect A moves the first movable body 109SG401 from the retracted position to the effect position. , The second movable body 109SG402L and the third movable body 109SG402R are moved to the proximity position of the first movable body moved to the effect position (the movable body unit 109SG400 is changed from the first state to the third state), and a plurality of This is an effect in which the star-shaped effect image 109SG005S diffuses from the first movable body 109SG401 at a speed V2. The movable body motion effect B moves the first movable body 109SG401 from the retracted position to the effect position, and moves the second movable body 109SG402L and the third movable body 109SG402R to the close position of the first movable body moved to the effect position. It is an effect of moving (changing the movable body unit 109SG400 from the first state to the third state), and the display that a plurality of star-shaped effect images 109SG005S are diffused from the first movable body 109SG401 at a speed V2 is not executed. This is different from the movable body motion effect A. Further, both the movable body operation effect A and the movable body operation effect B have in common that the movable body LED 109SG495 emits light at the brightness C1 during the execution period of the effect.

Next, the display mode of the reach effect on the image display device 5 in the variable display of the super reach α1, the super reach α2, the super reach β1, and the super reach β2 will be described with reference to FIGS. 10-27 to 10-35.

First, as shown in FIGS. 10-27 (A) and 10-27 (B), after a while after the variable display of any one of super reach α1, super reach α2, super reach β1, and super reach β2 is started. , The decorative symbol displayed in the "left" decorative symbol display area 5L and the "right" decorative symbol display area 5R stops at a combination indicating reach. Then, when a predetermined period elapses in the reach state, if the variable display is the variable display of the super reach α1, the battle effect between the ally character A and the enemy character A is started as the reach effect (FIGS. 10-27 (C). ) And FIG. 10-28 (A), if the variable display is the variable display of Super Reach α2, the battle effect between the ally character A and the enemy character B is started as the reach effect (FIG. 10-27 (D) and FIG. (See FIG. 10-30 (A)), if the variable display is the variable display of Super Reach β1, the battle effect between the ally character B and the enemy character A is started as the reach effect (FIGS. 10-27 (E) and FIG. 10). -32 (A), if the variable display is the variable display of Super Reach β2, the battle effect between the ally character B and the enemy character B is started as the reach effect (FIGS. 10-27 (F) and 10-. 34 (A)).

At the start of the reach effect of these super reach, the decorative symbols displayed in the "left" decorative symbol display area 5L and the "right" decorative symbol display area 5R are the left and right upper ends of the display area of the image display device 5. The decorative symbol displayed in the display area 5Cni of the "middle" decorative symbol is temporarily invisible.

As shown in FIGS. 10-28 (A) and 10-28 (B), when the latter half of the battle effect, which is the reach effect of the super reach α1, is approached, as shown in FIG. 10-28 (C), allies The display of the moving image in which the character A attacks the enemy character A is started. In the moving image, as shown in FIGS. 10-28 (C) to 10-28 (F), the ally character A is used as the first enlarged display period, the second enlarged display period, and the third enlarged display period described above. When a melee attack is to be applied to the enemy character A, the images of the ally character A and the enemy character A are enlarged and displayed.

In particular, in the first enlarged display period and the second enlarged display period (FIGS. 10-28 (D) to 10-28 (F)), the images of the ally character A and the enemy character A are the first in the image display device 5. It is displayed with a lower contrast than before the enlarged display period (FIGS. 10-28 (A) to 10-28 (C)), and is duplicated in the images of the ally character A and the enemy character A having these low contrasts. , An image (movable body motion suggestion effect A) in which a plurality of star-shaped effect images 109SG005S move toward the first movable body 109SG401 at a speed V1 is displayed. At this time, since the star-shaped effect image 109SG005S is displayed with the same contrast as before the first enlarged display period, the player can see that the plurality of star-shaped effect images 109SG005S are the first movable body 109SG401 at a speed V1. It is easier to recognize how it moves toward.

Further, during the first magnified display period to the third magnified display period, light emission at the brightness C1 of the movable body LED 109SG495 provided in the first movable body 109SG401 is also executed.

Then, as shown in FIGS. 10-28 (E) to 10-28 (F), when the third enlarged display period has elapsed, the ally character A and the enemy character A are displayed at a display magnification m3 over a predetermined period. Display at. During the predetermined period, the movable body LED 109SG495 is not emitted.

As shown in FIGS. 10-29 (H) and 10-29 (I), when the variable display result is a big hit, the ally character A and the enemy are in the central portion of the image display device 5 as the movable body motion effect A. The explosion effect image 109SG005B is displayed overlapping with the image of the character A, and a plurality of star-shaped images are displayed so as to move from the center of the image display device 5 toward the edge of the image display device 5 at a speed V2. The effect image 109SG005S is displayed.

Further, at this time, the first movable body 109SG401 moves from the retracted position to the effect position, and the second movable body 109SG402L and the third movable body 109SG402R move to the left and right close positions of the first movable body 109SG401 moved to the effect position. (The movable body unit 109SG400 changes from the first state to the third state). That is, the explosion effect image 109SG005B is displayed behind the first movable body 109SG401, and the plurality of star-shaped effect images 109SG005S are displayed so as to move toward the edge of the image display device 5 at a speed V2. NS.

After that, after the operation of each movable body is completed (after the movable body unit 109SG400 changes from the third state to the first state), the first movable body after the display of the explosion effect image 109SG005B on the image display device 5 is completed. Movie that the movement of the body 109SG401, the second movable body 109SG402L, and the third movable body 109SG402R to each retracted position is completed, the attack of the ally character A hits the enemy character A on the image display device 5, and the ally character A wins. Is executed, and it is notified that the jackpot game state is controlled. At this time, in the image display device 5, the decorative symbol (the decorative symbol displayed in each decorative symbol display area 5C on the “right”) is displayed as a numerical value corresponding to the variable display result being a big hit. After moving at high speed from the back side to the front side of the device 5, the image display device 5 stops while swinging at the center of the image display device 5.

Then, when the variable display of the special symbol ends (the small symbol displayed at the right end of the image display device 5 stops at the combination indicating the jackpot), the game is controlled to the jackpot gaming state.

On the other hand, if the variable display result is out of order, as shown in FIGS. 10-29 (J) and 10-29 (K), the attack of the enemy character A on the image display device 5 is an ally as an out-of-order notification effect. The display of the action of hitting the character A and defeating the ally character is executed, and the fact that the jackpot game state is not controlled (the fact that it is out of the game) is notified. At this time, in the image display device 5, the decorative symbol (the decorative symbol displayed in each decorative symbol display area 5C on the “right”) is slow as a numerical value corresponding to the fact that the variable display result is out of order (FIG. After moving from above the image display device 5 at a speed lower than that at the time of the big hit shown in 10-29 (I), the image display device 5 stops while swinging at the center of the image display device 5.

As shown in FIGS. 10-30 (A) and 10-30 (B), the latter half of the battle effect (reach effect) as the reach effect of the super reach α2 is shown in FIG. 10-30 (C). As a result, the display of the moving image in which the ally character A attacks the enemy character B is started. In the moving image, as shown in FIGS. 10-30 (C) to 10-30 (F), the ally character A is used as the first enlarged display period, the second enlarged display period, and the third enlarged display period described above. When a melee attack is to be applied to the enemy character B, the images of the ally character A and the enemy character B are enlarged and displayed.

In particular, in the first enlarged display period and the second enlarged display period (FIGS. 10-30 (D) to 10-30 (F)), the images of the ally character A and the enemy character B are first in the image display device 5. It is displayed with a lower contrast than before the enlarged display period (FIGS. 10-30 (A) to 10-30 (C)), and is duplicated in the images of the ally character A and the enemy character B having these low contrasts. , An image (movable body motion suggestion effect A) in which a plurality of star-shaped effect images 109SG005S move toward the first movable body 109SG401 at a speed V1 is displayed. At this time, since the star-shaped effect image 109SG005S is displayed with the same contrast as before the first enlarged display period, the player can see that the plurality of star-shaped effect images 109SG005S are the first movable body 109SG401 at a speed V1. It is easier to recognize how it moves toward.

Further, during the first magnified display period to the third magnified display period, light emission at the brightness C1 of the movable body LED 109SG495 provided in the first movable body 109SG401 is also executed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 10-30 (F), when the third enlarged display period has elapsed, the ally character A and the enemy character B are displayed at the display magnification m3 over a predetermined period. During the predetermined period, the movable body LED 109SG495 is not emitted.

As shown in FIGS. 10-31 (G) to 10-31 (I), when the variable display result is a big hit, the ally character A and the enemy are in the central portion of the image display device 5 as the movable body motion effect A. The explosion effect image 109SG005B is displayed overlapping with the image of the character B, and a plurality of star-shaped images are displayed so as to move from the center of the image display device 5 toward the edge of the image display device 5 at a speed V2. The effect image 109SG005S is displayed.

Further, at this time, the first movable body 109SG401 moves from the retracted position to the effect position, and the second movable body 109SG402L and the third movable body 109SG402R move to the left and right close positions of the first movable body 109SG401 moved to the effect position. (The movable body unit 109SG400 changes from the first state to the third state). That is, the explosion effect image 109SG005B is displayed behind the first movable body 109SG401, and the plurality of star-shaped effect images 109SG005S are displayed so as to move toward the edge of the image display device 5 at a speed V2. NS.

After that, after the operation of each movable body is completed (after the movable body unit 109SG400 changes from the third state to the first state), the first movable body after the display of the explosion effect image 109SG005B on the image display device 5 is completed. Movie that the movement of the body 109SG401, the second movable body 109SG402L, and the third movable body 109SG402R to each retracted position is completed, the attack of the ally character A hits the enemy character B on the image display device 5, and the ally character A wins. Is executed, and it is notified that the jackpot game state is controlled. At this time, in the image display device 5, the decorative symbol (the decorative symbol displayed in each decorative symbol display area 5C on the “right”) is displayed as a numerical value corresponding to the variable display result being a big hit. After moving at high speed from the back side to the front side of the device 5, the image display device 5 stops while swinging at the center of the image display device 5.

Then, when the variable display of the special symbol ends (the small symbol displayed at the right end of the image display device 5 stops at the combination indicating the jackpot), the game is controlled to the jackpot gaming state.

On the other hand, if the variable display result is out of order, as shown in FIGS. 10-31 (J) and 10-31 (K), the attack of the enemy character B on the image display device 5 is an ally as an out-of-order notification effect. The display of the action of hitting the character A and defeating the ally character is executed, and the fact that the jackpot game state is not controlled (the fact that it is out of the game) is notified. At this time, in the image display device 5, the decorative symbol (the decorative symbol displayed in each decorative symbol display area 5C on the “right”) is slow as a numerical value corresponding to the fact that the variable display result is out of order (FIG. After moving from above the image display device 5 at a speed lower than that at the time of the big hit shown in 10-29 (I), the image display device 5 stops while swinging at the center of the image display device 5.

As shown in FIGS. 10-32 (A) and 10-32 (B), when the latter half of the battle effect (reach effect) is approached as the reach effect of the super reach β1, as shown in FIG. 10-32 (C). At the same time, the display of the moving image in which the ally character B attacks the enemy character A is started. In the moving image, as shown in FIGS. 10-32 (C) to 10-32 (F), the ally character B is used as the first enlarged display period, the second enlarged display period, and the third enlarged display period described above. When a melee attack is to be applied to the enemy character A, the images of the ally character B and the enemy character A are enlarged and displayed.

In particular, in the first enlarged display period and the second enlarged display period, the movement between the retracted position and the suggested position of the first movable body 109SG401 is repeatedly executed as the movable body motion suggestion effect B (movable body unit). The change from the first state to the second state and the change from the second state to the first state of the 109SG400 are repeatedly executed).

Further, as shown in FIGS. 10-32 (D) and 10-32 (E), the effect image 109SG005X is displayed on the image display device 5 during the enlarged display period of the images of the ally character B and the enemy character A. The effect image 109SG005X emphasizes the enlarged display of the images of the ally character B and the enemy character A.

Further, during the first magnified display period to the third magnified display period, light emission at the brightness C1 of the movable body LED 109SG495 provided in the first movable body 109SG401 is also executed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 10-32 (F), when the third enlarged display period has elapsed, the ally character B and the enemy character A are displayed at the display magnification m3 over a predetermined period. During the predetermined period, the movable body LED 109SG495 is not emitted.

As shown in FIGS. 10-33 (G) to 10-33 (I), when the variable display result is a big hit, the ally character B and the enemy are in the center of the image display device 5 as the movable body motion effect B. The explosion effect image 109SG005B is displayed overlapping with the image of the character A.

Further, at this time, the first movable body 109SG401 moves from the retracted position to the effect position, and the second movable body 109SG402L and the third movable body 109SG402R move to the left and right close positions of the first movable body 109SG401 moved to the effect position. (The movable body unit 109SG400 changes from the first state to the third state). That is, the explosion effect image 109SG005B is displayed behind the first movable body 109SG401.

After that, after the operation of each movable body is completed (after the movable body unit 109SG400 changes from the third state to the first state), the first movable body after the display of the explosion effect image 109SG005B on the image display device 5 is completed. Movie that the movement of the body 109SG401, the second movable body 109SG402L, and the third movable body 109SG402R to each retracted position is completed, the attack of the ally character B hits the enemy character A in the image display device 5, and the ally character A wins. Is executed, and it is notified that the jackpot game state is controlled. At this time, in the image display device 5, the decorative symbol (the decorative symbol displayed in each decorative symbol display area 5C on the “right”) is displayed as a numerical value corresponding to the variable display result being a big hit. After moving at high speed from the back side to the front side of the device 5, the image display device 5 stops while swinging at the center of the image display device 5.

Then, when the variable display of the special symbol ends (the small symbol displayed at the right end of the image display device 5 stops at the combination indicating the jackpot), the game is controlled to the jackpot gaming state.

On the other hand, if the variable display result is out of order, as shown in FIGS. 10-33 (J) and 10-33 (K), the attack of the enemy character A on the image display device 5 is an ally as an out-of-order notification effect. The display of the action of hitting the character B and defeating the ally character is executed, and the fact that the jackpot game state is not controlled (the fact that it is out of the game) is notified. At this time, in the image display device 5, the decorative symbol (the decorative symbol displayed in each decorative symbol display area 5C on the “right”) is slow as a numerical value corresponding to the fact that the variable display result is out of order (FIG. After moving from above the image display device 5 at a speed lower than that at the time of the big hit shown in 10-29 (I), the image display device 5 stops while swinging at the center of the image display device 5.

As shown in FIGS. 10-34 (A) and 10-34 (B), when the latter half of the battle effect (reach effect) is approached as the reach effect of the super reach β2, as shown in FIG. 10-34 (C). At the same time, the display of the moving image in which the ally character B attacks the enemy character B is started. In the moving image, as shown in FIGS. 10-34 (C) to 10-34 (F), the ally character B is used as the first enlarged display period, the second enlarged display period, and the third enlarged display period described above. When a melee attack is to be applied to the enemy character B, the images of the ally character B and the enemy character B are enlarged and displayed.

In particular, in the first enlarged display period and the second enlarged display period, the movement between the retracted position and the suggested position of the first movable body 109SG401 is repeatedly executed as the movable body motion suggestion effect B (movable body unit). The change from the first state to the second state and the change from the second state to the first state of the 109SG400 are repeatedly executed).

Further, as shown in FIGS. 10-34 (D) and 10-34 (E), the effect image 109SG005X is displayed on the image display device 5 during the enlarged display period of the images of the ally character B and the enemy character A. The effect image 109SG005X emphasizes the enlarged display of the images of the ally character B and the enemy character A.

Further, during the first magnified display period to the third magnified display period, light emission at the brightness C1 of the movable body LED 109SG495 provided in the first movable body 109SG401 is also executed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 10-34 (F), when the third enlarged display period has elapsed, the ally character B and the enemy character B are displayed at the display magnification m3 over a predetermined period. During the predetermined period, the movable body LED 109SG495 is not emitted.

Then, as shown in FIGS. 10-35 (G) to 10-35 (I), when the variable display result is a big hit, the ally character B in the central portion of the image display device 5 is used as the movable body operation effect B. The explosion effect image 109SG005B is displayed overlapping with the image of the enemy character B, and a plurality of stars move from the center of the image display device 5 toward the edge of the image display device 5 at a speed of V2. The type effect image 109SG005S is displayed.

Further, at this time, the first movable body 109SG401 moves from the retracted position to the effect position, and the second movable body 109SG402L and the third movable body 109SG402R move to the left and right close positions of the first movable body 109SG401 moved to the effect position. (The movable body unit 109SG400 changes from the first state to the third state). That is, the explosion effect image 109SG005B is displayed behind the first movable body 109SG401.

After that, after the operation of each movable body is completed (after the movable body unit 109SG400 changes from the third state to the first state), the first movable body after the display of the explosion effect image 109SG005B on the image display device 5 is completed. Movie that the movement of the body 109SG401, the second movable body 109SG402L, and the third movable body 109SG402R to each retracted position is completed, the attack of the ally character B hits the enemy character B in the image display device 5, and the ally character A wins. Is executed, and it is notified that the jackpot game state is controlled. At this time, in the image display device 5, the decorative symbol (the decorative symbol displayed in each decorative symbol display area 5C on the “right”) is displayed as a numerical value corresponding to the variable display result being a big hit. After moving at high speed from the back side to the front side of the device 5, the image display device 5 stops while swinging at the center of the image display device 5.

Then, when the variable display of the special symbol ends (the small symbol displayed at the right end of the image display device 5 stops at the combination indicating the jackpot), the game is controlled to the jackpot gaming state.

On the other hand, if the variable display result is out of order, as shown in FIGS. 10-35 (J) and 10-35 (K), the attack of the enemy character B on the image display device 5 is an ally as an out-of-order notification effect. The display of the action of hitting the character B and defeating the ally character is executed, and the fact that the jackpot game state is not controlled (the fact that it is out of the game) is notified.
At this time, in the image display device 5, the decorative symbol (the decorative symbol displayed in each decorative symbol display area 5C on the “right”) is slow as a numerical value corresponding to the fact that the variable display result is out of order (FIG. After moving from above the image display device 5 at a speed lower than that at the time of the big hit shown in 10-29 (I), the image display device 5 stops while swinging at the center of the image display device 5.

As described above, as shown in 10-31 to FIG. 10-35, the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the feature unit 109SG does not display the explosion effect image 109SG005B on the image display device 5 while the movable body motion suggestion effect B is being executed. On the other hand, during the execution of the movable body motion effect B, the explosion effect image 109SG005B is displayed on the image display device 5, so that the display of the explosion effect image 109SG005B enlarges the images of the ally character and the enemy character during the reach effect. Since the display and the effect of the movable body motion effect B by the movable body (first movable body 109SG401, second movable body 109SG402L, third movable body 109SG402R) can be made more conspicuous, the game entertainment can be improved.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 10-21 to 10-24, since the enlargement speed of the image of each character differs between the first enlarged display period and the second enlarged display period, the effect of the effect in the enlarged display period can be improved. Since the operating speed of the first movable body 109SG401 is the same in the first enlarged display period and the second enlarged display period, it is possible to reduce the control load of the first movable body 109SG401 in the movable body operation effect.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 10-21 to 10-24, the enlargement speed of the second enlarged display period is slower than that of the first enlarged display period, and the third enlarged display period after the movable body motion suggestion effect is completed is Since the enlargement speed is further slower than the second enlarged display period, the enlarged display of the images of the ally character and the enemy character is continued even after the movable body motion suggestion effect is completed, so that the game entertainment can be improved. The feature unit 109SG exemplifies a mode in which the enlargement speed of the first magnified display period is the fastest and the magnified speed of the third enlarged display period is the slowest, but the present invention is not limited to this. (3) The enlargement speed of the enlarged display period may be the fastest, the enlargement speed of the first enlarged display period may be the slowest, or the enlargement speed of the second enlarged display period may be the fastest.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 10-21 to 10-24, since the execution of the pre-reading notice effect is restricted during the reach effect including the enlarged display period, the player to the reach effect by executing the pre-reading notice effect. It is possible to prevent the attention of the person from being reduced. The feature unit 109SG exemplifies a mode in which the execution of the pre-reading notice effect is restricted over the entire execution period of the reach effect, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the pre-reading notice is not limited to this. The period for limiting the execution of the effect may be only a part of the reach effect (for example, only the first enlarged display period to the third enlarged display period). Further, the feature unit 109SG exemplifies a form in which the pre-reading notice effect is not executed during the reach effect as a form for restricting the execution of the pre-reading notice effect, but the present invention is not limited to this. , During the reach effect, the pre-reading notice effect may be executed at a lower rate than other periods.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 10-32 and 10-34, the player can visually recognize the reach effect during the execution of the movable body motion suggestion effect B, but as shown in FIGS. 10-33 and 10-35. In addition, during the execution of the movable body motion effect B, the effect image 109SG005B of the explosion is displayed on the image display device 5, so that the visibility of the reach effect is lowered. That is, since the visibility of the reach effect effect image (image of the ally character and the enemy character) changes according to the operation status of the first movable body 109SG401, the operation of the first movable body 109SG401 is used as the movable body operation suggestion effect. It is possible to easily understand whether it is an operation or an operation as a movable body operation effect, and it is possible to adjust the degree of attention of the first movable body 109SG401 and the effect image of the reach effect.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 10-21 and 10-23, while the movable body motion suggestion effect is being executed, the BGM, SE, and motion suggestion sound are output from the speakers 8L and 8R, while the movable body motion suggestion effect is executed. Since the BGM, SE, and jackpot notification sounds are output from the speakers 8L and 8R, they are output from the speakers 8L and 8R before and after the period from the end of the third enlarged display period to the start timing of the movable body operation effect. It is possible for the player to easily recognize that the effect sound is changing.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 10-21 to 10-24, the period T3 is longer than the period T1 required for one reciprocating movement between the retracted position and the suggested position of the first movable body 109SG401. Since the period T3 is shorter than the period T2 for executing the movable body motion suggestion effect, the operation of the first movable body 109SG401 in the movable body motion effect is the operation of the first movable body 109SG401 in the movable body motion suggestion effect. If this is the case, it is possible to prevent the player from being mistaken for it, and the period for executing the movable body motion suggestion effect becomes longer than the period for executing the movable body motion effect in the reach effect of the suggested target. It is also possible to prevent a decrease.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 10-21 to 10-24, the movable body LED109SG495 is turned off by turning off the movable body LED109SG495 during the period from the end of the third enlarged display period to the start of the movable body operation effect or the detachment notification effect. During the period when is off, it is possible for the player to easily recognize that the first movable body 109SG401 is not operating.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 10-32 and 10-34, in the movable body motion suggestion effect B, only the first movable body 109SG401 is operated, and as shown in FIGS. 10-33 and 10-35, the movable body is operated. In the motion effect B, all of the first movable body 109SG401, the second movable body 109SG402L, and the third movable body 109SG402R are operated. It is possible for the player to easily distinguish whether the movement is also an action.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 10-21 to 10-24, during the first enlarged display period, the second enlarged display period, and the third enlarged display period, the movable body LED 109SG495 is made to emit light with the luminance C1 and the movable body operation effect is produced. Since the movable body LED 109SG495 is made to emit light at the brightness C2, which is higher than the brightness C1, the brightness of the movable body LED109SG495 makes it easy for the player to recognize that the movable body operation effect is being executed. , It is possible to improve the entertainment of the game during the execution of the movable body movement effect.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 10-28 and 10-30, while the movable body motion suggestion effect A is being executed, a plurality of star-shaped effect images 109SG005S are displayed on the image display device 5, and other reach effects are displayed. The effect image (the image of the ally character A and the enemy character A or the enemy character B) is displayed at a lower contrast than before the first enlarged display period, that is, the effect image of the reach effect during the execution of the movable body motion suggestion effect A. Since the visibility of the star-shaped effect image 109SG005S can be made to stand out, the player can be made to pay attention to the first movable body 109SG401 by moving the star-shaped effect image 109SG005S at the speed V1. Therefore, it is possible to enhance the effect of the operation of the first movable body 109SG401.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 10-29 and 10-31, when the movable body motion effect A is executed, the speed V2 in which the plurality of star-shaped effect images 109SG005S are faster than the speed V1 in the image display device 5. Since it is displayed so as to move from the first movable body 109SG401 toward the edge of the image display device 5, it is possible to make a plurality of star-shaped effect images 109SG005S stand out in the movable body motion effect A, and these Since the player can be attracted to the first movable body 109SG401 by moving the plurality of star-shaped effect images 109SG005S at the speed V2, the effect of the operation of the first movable body 109SG401 can be enhanced. Can be improved.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 10-28 (F) and 10-30 (F), the star-shaped effect image 109SG005S is hidden in the image display device 5 before the movable body motion effect A or the out-of-order notification effect is executed. Therefore, it is possible for the player to easily recognize that the effect to be executed from now on is a movable body motion effect or an out-of-order notification effect.

Although the feature portion 109SG of the present invention has been described above with reference to the drawings, the specific configuration is not limited to these feature portions, and the present invention may be changed or added without departing from the gist of the present invention. included.

For example, in the feature unit 109SG, as shown in FIGS. 10-21 to 10-24, the start timing of the movable body motion suggestion effect and the start timing of the enlarged display period (first enlarged display period) are the same, that is, , Illustrates a form in which the start timing of the reciprocating motion between the retracted position and the suggested position of the first movable body 109SG401 and the enlarged display start timing of the effect image (image of the ally character and the enemy character) of the reach effect are the same. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the start timing of the movable body motion suggestion effect and the start timing of the enlarged display period (first enlarged display period) may be different. In particular, when the start timing of the movable body motion suggestion effect is set before the start timing of the enlarged display period (first enlarged display period), the reciprocating operation of the first movable body 109SG401 as the movable body motion suggestion effect is performed. Can raise the attention of the player.

Further, in the feature unit 109SG, the display mode of the image on the image display device 5 after the end of the magnified display period and the display mode of the image on the image display device 5 immediately before the end of the magnified display period are almost the same (the display magnification is slightly different). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, as the modified example 109SG-2, after the end of the enlarged display period, the image display device 5 displays a specific effect. And by displaying an effect image or the like, the display mode of the image on the image display device 5 immediately before the end of the enlarged display period may be different. By doing so, after the enlarged display period has expired, it is possible to make it easier for the player to recognize that the enlarged display period has ended.

Further, the feature unit 109SG can display the explosion effect image 109SG005B according to the operation of the first movable body 109SG401, the second movable body 109SG402L, and the third movable body 109SG402R in the image display device 5. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and as a modification 109SG-3, in the image display device 5, depending on the progress of the battle effect between the ally character and the enemy character executed as the reach effect. The effect image may be displayed.

In this way, when the image display device 5 can display both the explosion effect image 109SG005B according to the movement of the movable body and the effect image according to the progress of the battle effect, it corresponds to the movement of these movable bodies. The size of the effect image 109SG005B of the explosion and the effect image according to the progress of the battle effect may be different. By doing so, the image display device 5 can display an effect image of an appropriate size corresponding to the difference between the movement of the movable body and the battle effect during the reach effect, so that the game entertainment can be improved. ..

Further, when the image display device 5 can display both the explosion effect image 109SG005B according to the movement of the movable body and the effect image according to the progress of the battle effect, the explosion effect according to the movement of these movable bodies is possible. The image transparency of the image 109SG005B and the effect image according to the progress of the battle effect may be different. By doing so, the image display device 5 can display an effect image with appropriate image transparency corresponding to the difference between the movement of the movable body and the battle effect during the reach effect, thus improving the game entertainment. can.

Further, in the feature unit 109SG, the ally character and the enemy character are visually recognized in the image display device 5 during the period from the end of the movable body motion suggestion effect and the enlarged display period to the start timing of the movable body motion effect or the detachment notification effect. Although the embodiment that does not change the sex is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and as the modified example 109SG-4, the movable body motion suggestion effect and the movable body motion effect or the detachment notification after the enlarged display period ends. During the period until the start timing of the effect, the contrast and brightness of the image display device 5 are set to the first low visibility state, which is lower than before the end of the enlarged display period, thereby reducing the visibility of the ally character and the enemy character. You may let me. Further, when the movable body motion effect is executed (when the variable display result is a big hit), the contrast and the brightness in the image display device 5 are changed from the first low visibility state to the second low visibility state, which is further lower. The visibility of the ally character and the enemy character may be further reduced. By doing so, after the end of the enlarged display period, the player can easily recognize that the enlarged display period has ended due to the deterioration of the visibility of the ally character and the enemy character in the image display device 5. At the time of executing the movable body effect, attention to the operation of the first movable body 109SG401, the second movable body 109SG402L, and the third movable body 109SG402R can be raised.

Further, in the feature unit 109SG, as shown in FIGS. 10-28 to 10-35, the same effect image is displayed in the image display device 5 during the execution of the movable body motion suggestion effect and during the execution of the movable body motion effect. Although the form of displaying (the same ally character and the enemy character) is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and as a modification 109SG-5, the movable body motion effect is being executed. The image display device 5 may display different effect images. In particular, the number of types of effect images displayed on the image display device 5 during the execution of the movable body motion suggestion effect is based on the number of types of effect images displayed on the image display device 5 during the execution of the movable body motion effect. May be more. By doing so, the number of variations of the effect image displayed on the image display device 5 during the execution of the movable body motion suggestion effect can be increased, so that the game entertainment at the time of executing the movable body motion suggestion effect can be improved. ..

Further, in the feature unit 109SG, as shown in FIGS. 10-28 to 10-35, the same effect image is displayed on the image display device 5 during the execution of the movable body motion suggestion effect and during the execution of the movable body motion effect. Although the form of displaying (the same ally character and the enemy character) is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and as a modification 109SG-6, during the execution of the movable body motion suggestion effect, While the image display device 5 displays the image corresponding to the movable body motion suggestion effect, the image display device 5 displays the image corresponding to the movable body motion suggestion effect, while the image display device 5 displays the movable body motion suggestion effect. As the image corresponding to the body motion effect, an image different from the image corresponding to the movable body motion suggestion effect may be displayed.

Further, when the image display device 5 can display the image corresponding to the movable body motion suggestion effect and the image corresponding to the movable body motion effect effect, the display period of the image corresponding to the movable body motion suggestion effect and the display period of the image corresponding to the movable body motion effect effect are set. It may be different. By doing so, the motion of the first movable body 109SG401, the second movable body 109SG402L, and the third movable body 109SG402R (execution of the movable body motion suggestion effect) of the image corresponding to the movable body motion suggestion effect and the image corresponding to the movable body motion effect effect. It is possible to display in an appropriate period corresponding to (whether it is the execution of the movable body motion effect).

Further, when displaying the image corresponding to the movable body motion effect on the image display device 5, the visibility of the image corresponding to the movable body motion effect may be lowered by lowering the contrast and the brightness of the image display device 5. By doing so, when the movable body motion effect is executed, the player's attention can be raised to the movable body motion effect instead of the image corresponding to the movable body motion effect.

Further, when displaying the image corresponding to the movable body motion suggestion effect on the image display device 5, the speaker 8L8R outputs the movable body motion suggestion effect corresponding sound corresponding to the movable body motion suggestion effect compatible image and outputs the image display device 5 When displaying the image corresponding to the movable body motion effect, the speaker 8L8R may output the sound corresponding to the movable body motion effect corresponding to the image corresponding to the movable body motion effect. By doing so, it is possible to output the sound corresponding to each image displayed on the image display device 5 from the speakers 8L and 8R at the time of executing the movable body motion suggestion effect and at the time of executing the movable body motion effect. Therefore, it is possible to easily make the player recognize that the movable body motion suggestion effect is being executed or the movable body motion effect is being executed.

Further, when the movable body motion effect is executed during the reach effect (when the variable display result is a big hit), the image display device 5 can move on the image display device 5 from the timing before the start of the movable body motion effect. The display of the image corresponding to the body movement effect may be started. By doing so, it is possible to raise the player's expectation that the movable body movement effect is started during the reach effect of the super reach, and it is also possible to increase the attention to the movable body motion effect.

Further, in the feature unit 109SG, in the reach effect of the super reach α1 and the super reach α2, as the movable body motion suggestion effect A, a plurality of star-shaped effect images 109SG005S are directed toward the first movable body 109SG401 in the image display device 5. Although the embodiment in which the display moving at the speed V1 is executed is exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and as the modified example 109SG-7, the speed V1 is not a constant speed but within a predetermined range. It may be variable. In this case, for example, as the movable body motion suggestion effect A, when a plurality of star-shaped effect images 109SG005S move toward the first movable body 109SG401, the speed of the star-shaped effect image 109SG005S is set to the speed of the first movable body 109SG401. The speed is changed to a low speed (changes the speed V1 to a low speed) as it approaches. The speed V2 of the plurality of star-shaped effect images 109SG005S at the time of executing the movable body motion effect A may be set to be faster than the maximum speed of the speed V1. By doing so, when the movable body motion suggestion effect A is executed, the moving speed (speed V1) of the plurality of star-shaped effect images 109SG005S displayed on the image display device 5 changes, so that the game entertainment is improved. can.

Further, the feature unit 109SG outputs a motion suggestion sound from the speakers 8L and 8R according to the execution of the movable body motion suggestion effect, and notifies the jackpot of the speakers 8L and 8R to 1 according to the execution of the movable body motion suggestion effect. Although the form of outputting sound has been illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and a plurality of sounds may be output as the operation suggestion sound and the jackpot notification sound output from these speakers 8L and 8R. ..

Further, in the case where a plurality of sounds can be output as the operation suggestion sound and the big hit notification sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R, a plurality of output start timings of the operation suggestion sound and the big hit notification sound are provided, and the operation is performed at any timing. Different sounds may be output from the speakers 8L and 8R depending on whether the output of the suggestion sound or the jackpot notification sound is started. By doing so, the player can easily recognize that the movable body motion suggestion effect or the movable body motion effect is being executed by the sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and according to the output timing. Since these motion suggestion sounds and jackpot notification sounds change, it is possible to improve the entertainment of the game.

In particular, when the output timing of the operation suggestion sound is determined from a plurality of timings, the output timing may be determined at different ratios according to the variable display result. In this case, since the player can pay attention to which timing the output of the motion suggestion sound starts, it is possible to improve the interest of the game. Further, when the output timing of the jackpot notification sound is determined from a plurality of timings, the output timing may be determined at different ratios according to the jackpot type and the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. In this case, since the player can pay attention to which timing the output of the jackpot notification sound is started, the game entertainment can be improved.

Further, in the feature unit 109SG, as shown in FIGS. 10-21 to 10-24, the first movable body 109SG 401 is moved at a constant speed between the retracted position and the suggested position during the execution period of the movable body motion suggestion effect. Although the form of reciprocating movement is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the case where the first movable body 109SG401 is reciprocated between the retracted position and the suggested position during the execution period of the movable body motion suggestion effect is used. The first movable body 109SG401 may be temporarily stopped at the retracted position and the suggested position, or the first movable body 109SG401 may be decelerated or accelerated at a position near the retracted position and the suggested position. By doing so, it is possible to prevent step-out from occurring in the first movable body motor 109SG421 for operating the first movable body 109SG401.

Further, in the feature unit 109SG, after the movable body motion suggestion effect is completed, the first movable body 109SG 401 is made to stand by at the retracted position until the movable body motion effect or the detachment notification effect is started. The present invention is not limited to this, and after the movable body motion suggestion effect is completed, the first movable body 109SG401 is made to stand by at the suggested position until the movable body motion effect or the disconnection notification effect is started. May be good. By doing so, when the movable body motion effect is executed, the first movable body 109SG401 can be immediately moved to the effect position, so that the game entertainment can be improved. Further, since the first movable body 109SG401 is maintained at the suggested position after the movable body motion suggestion effect is completed, it is possible to evoke a player's expectation that the movable body motion suggestion effect is executed.

Further, in the feature unit 109SG, as shown in FIGS. 10-21 to 10-24, the rising speed of the first movable body 109SG 401 is set between the execution of the movable body motion suggestion effect and the execution of the movable body motion effect. Although they are the same, the present invention is not limited to this, and the rising speed of the first movable body 109SG401 is different between the time of executing the movable body motion suggestion effect and the time of executing the movable body motion effect. May be good.

Further, in the feature unit 109SG, as shown in FIG. 10-20, the update control of the effect image displayed on the image display device 5 and the movable body (first movable body 109SG401, second movable body 109SG402L, third movable body). Although the embodiment in which the movement control of the 109SG402R) is executed based on the control timer is exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and the update control of the effect image displayed on the image display device 5 and the movable body are not limited to this. In addition to the movement control of the above, the lighting control of the LED provided in the pachinko game machine 1 and the output control of the effect sound from the speakers 8L and 8R may be executed based on each dedicated control timer.

In this way, when executing the update control of the effect image displayed on the image display device 5, the movement control of the movable body, the lighting control of the LED, and the output control of the effect sound, for example, for the effect control every 1 ms. The CPU 120 executes a timer interrupt (S73 to S77 are executed every 1 ms in the effect control main process shown in FIG. 8), the effect image update control is performed every 33 ms, the movable body movement control is performed every 1 ms, and the LED. The lighting control of the timer may be executed every 10 ms, and the output control of the effect sound may be executed every 1 ms. In particular, when executing the update control of the effect image, the lighting control of the LED, and the output control of the effect sound, the movement control of the movable body (motor 109SG421 for the first movable body, motor 109SG422 for the second movable body, for the third movable body) is always performed. Since the drive control of the motor 109SG423) is executed together, it is possible to preferably execute the movement control of the movable body, the update control of the effect image, the lighting control of the LED, and the output control of the effect sound.

Further, the feature unit 109SG exemplifies a mode in which the movable body LED 109SG495 emits light during execution of the movable body motion suggestion effect, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a plurality of light emitting modes of the movable body LED109SG495 are used. The ratio of the movable body LED 109SG495 controlled to the jackpot gaming state may be different depending on which mode the movable body LED 109SG495 emits light during the execution of the movable body operation suggestion effect.

Further, the feature unit 109SG exemplifies a form in which a plurality of star-shaped effect images 109SG005S are displayed on the image display device 5 as the movable body motion suggestion effect A, but the present invention is not limited thereto. A plurality of display modes of the star-shaped effect image 109SG005S displayed on the image display device 5 are provided as the movable body motion suggestion effect A, and the star-shaped effect image 109SG005S is displayed as the movable body motion suggestion effect A in any of the modes. The ratio controlled to the jackpot gaming state may be different depending on the game.

Further, as shown in FIG. 10-25, the feature unit 109SG performs a reciprocating motion (movable body motion suggestion effect) between the retracted position and the suggested position of the first movable body 109SG 401 during the third enlarged display period. Although the embodiment is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the reciprocating motion between the retracted position and the suggested position of the first movable body 109SG401 is executed even in the third enlarged display period. A case may be provided. In particular, in some cases where the variable display result is a big hit, the third expansion can be performed by enabling the reciprocating operation between the retracted position and the suggested position of the first movable body 109SG401 in the third enlarged display period. Since the player can pay attention to whether or not the first movable body 109SG401 reciprocates between the retracted position and the suggested position during the display period, the game interest can be improved.

Further, in the feature unit 109SG, a plurality of star-shaped effect images 109SG005S are moved toward the first movable body 109SG401 (movable body motion suggestion effect A), or the first movable body 109SG401 is moved between the retracted position and the suggested position. Although the embodiment suggesting the execution of the movable body motion effect A or the movable body motion effect B by repeatedly moving the body (movable body motion suggestion effect B) is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and these are specified. The execution of the movable body motion effect A or the movable body motion effect B may be suggested in an aspect other than the display of the image of the above and the operation of the first movable body 109SG401 itself. For example, when the first movable body 109SG 401 is provided with an LED (movable body LED109SG495) as shown in the feature unit 109SG, the movable body operation effect A or the movable body operation depends on the lighting, blinking cycle, lighting color, etc. of the LED. The execution of the effect B may be suggested.

Further, in the feature unit 109SG, as shown in FIGS. 10-28 and 10-30, the contrast between the image of the ally character A and the image of the enemy character A or the enemy character B in the image display device 5 as the movable body motion suggestion effect A. Although a mode in which a plurality of star-shaped effect images 109SG005S are displayed (see FIGS. 10-28 (D) and 10-30 (D)) in a reduced state is illustrated, the present invention is limited thereto. Instead, the movable body motion suggestion effect A is a timing before the image display device 5 reduces the contrast between the image of the ally character A and the image of the enemy character A or the enemy character B (for example, FIG. 10-28 (C)). And the timing of FIG. 10-30 (C)), the display of the plurality of star-shaped effect images 109SG005S may be started.

In this way, when the image display device 5 starts displaying a plurality of star-shaped effect images 109SG005S from a timing before the contrast between the image of the ally character A and the image of the enemy character A or the enemy character B is lowered, the display of the plurality of star-shaped effect images 109SG005S is started. By increasing the transparency (transparency) of the plurality of star-shaped effect images 109SG005S, the effect image displayed on the image display device 5 (in the examples of FIGS. 10-28 and 10-30, the ally character A and the enemy character A) Alternatively, the image of the enemy character B) may be made easier to see than when the contrast is lowered.

Further, in the feature unit 109SG, as shown in FIGS. 10-29 (G) and the like, the explosion effect image 109SG005B is displayed on the image display device 5 and displayed on the image display device 5 when the movable body motion effect is executed. The present invention exemplifies a form in which a part of the effect image is invisible due to the effect image 109SG005B of the explosion, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the image is displayed when the movable body motion effect is executed. The explosion effect image 109SG005B or an image dedicated to the movable body motion effect may be displayed in the entire display area of the device 5, so that all the other effect images are invisible.

Further, the feature unit 109SG exemplifies a mode in which the movable body motion effect is executed during the reach effect of the super reach, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the timing for executing the movable body motion effect is not limited to this. The timing may be other than during the reach production of Super Reach. For example, as a modification 109SG-8, as shown in FIGS. 10-36 (A), 10-36 (B), and 10-37 (C) to 10-37 (H), a combination of decorative symbols is used. It may be possible to execute the movable body motion effect during the period from the reach to the start timing of the reach effect of the super reach.

In this case, as shown in FIG. 10-36 (B), the movable body motion suggestion effect is first started after the reach is reached, and in the image display device 5, the reach effect to be executed after that is highly expected (big hit). Reach effect (for example, reach effect of super reach α1, super reach α2, super reach β1, super reach β2 described in the feature unit 109SG) and low expectation (big hit game state) Which of the reach effects (for example, the reach effects with lower expectations than the reach effects of super reach α1, super reach α2, super reach β1, and super reach β2 described in the feature unit 109SG) As a branch effect for notifying whether to branch to, the image of the character with the eyes closed is displayed. As the branch effect, as shown in FIG. 10-37 (C), during the execution of the movable body motion suggestion effect. The character is gradually enlarged and displayed.

When the variable display is a variable display that executes a low expectation reach effect, it is displayed on the image display device 5 as shown in FIGS. 10-37 (C) to 10-37 (E). The display area of the image display device 5 gradually darkens without the character opening his eyes. That is, in the branch effect, the character displayed on the image display device 5 is darkened without opening the eyes, so that the reach effect with a high expectation is not executed (the reach effect with a low expectation is executed). Be notified. Then, after the display area of the image display device 5 is completely darkened (after the branching effect is completed), the reach effect with a low expectation is executed.

On the other hand, when the variable display is a variable display that executes a high-expected reach effect, it is displayed on the image display device 5 as shown in FIGS. 10-37 (F) to 10-37 (H). It is notified that the reach effect with high expectation is executed by opening the eyes of the character. At this time, the movable body motion effect is also executed. Then, after the movable body motion effect and the branch effect are completed, the reach effect with a high degree of expectation is executed.

That is, the movable body motion effect may be executed as an effect of notifying that the jackpot game state is controlled as exemplified in the feature unit 109SG, but it is informed that a high-expected reach effect is executed. It may be executed as an effect to be performed (an effect to notify that the degree of expectation controlled by the big hit game state is high).

In the present modification 109SG-8, as shown in FIGS. 10-36 (B) and 10-37 (C), the character in the state where the eyes are closed is gradually enlarged and displayed in the image display device 5 as a branch effect. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and when a character in a state where the eyes are closed is gradually enlarged and displayed as a branching effect, the character is displayed on the image display device 5. At the same time, by displaying an effect image such as a concentrated line, the player may be able to pay attention to whether or not the character opens his eyes.

As described above, the feature unit 109SG exemplifies a mode in which the present invention is applied as a branch of whether or not the variable display result becomes a big hit during the reach effect of the super reach. As shown, the present invention may be applied as a branch of whether a low expectation reach effect or a high expectation reach effect is executed. In this case, the specific image in the present invention is a character image (the first specific image is the image of the character with the eyes closed, the second specific image is the image of the character with the eyes open), and the effect image in the present invention. Corresponds to the above-mentioned images such as concentrated lines.

As shown in FIGS. 10-36 and 10-37, in the present modification 109SG-8, when the movable body motion effect is executed as an effect of notifying that the reach effect of high expectation is executed, the effect is to be executed. Although the embodiment in which the movable body motion suggestion effect is executed before the execution of the movable body motion effect is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the movable body motion suggestion effect may not be executed. Further, the execution rate of the movable body motion effect may be different between the case where the movable body motion suggestion effect is executed and the case where the movable body motion suggestion effect is not executed (the rate at which the high-expected reach effect is executed is different). (Explanation of feature unit 162SG)
Next, the feature portion 162SG (hereinafter, abbreviated as the present feature portion 162SG) in the embodiment of the present invention will be described. The pachinko gaming machine 162SG001 of the feature unit 162SG has the same configuration as the pachinko gaming machine 1 having the above-mentioned basic configuration, and the same configuration with the same reference numerals as the basic configuration is described here. The description will be omitted, and the feature configuration of the pachinko gaming machine 162SG001 having the feature section 162SG different from that of the pachinko gaming machine 1 having the basic configuration will be described below.

FIG. 11-1 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the pachinko gaming machine 162SG001 of the feature unit 162SG. As shown in the block diagram of FIG. 11-1, in the pachinko gaming machine 162SG001 of the feature unit 162SG, the predetermined game board 2 is specified together with the first special symbol display device 4A, the second special symbol display device 4B, and the ordinary symbol display device 20. A variable display time extension, which will be described later, for adjusting the number of game balls paid out (given to the player) in a unit period due to the determination of a high payout state at the lower left position of the game area, which is the position. A high ball ejection state notification LED 162SG071 for notifying by lighting that the adjustment or the jackpot period extension adjustment is being executed is provided so as to be visible to the player.

These high ball output state notification LEDs 162SG071 are connected to the main board 11 like the first special symbol display device 4A, the second special symbol display device 4B, and the normal symbol display 20, and are connected to the main board 11 (microcomputer for game control). According to 100), lighting / extinguishing is controlled by executing a ball ejection state determination process (see FIG. 11-13) described later, and the lighting / extinguishing control cycle is the first special symbol. The cycle is the same as the control cycle of the display device 4A, the second special symbol display device 4B, and the normal symbol display device 20.

As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 162SG001 of the feature unit 162SG, the variable display time extension adjustment and the jackpot period extension adjustment are executed by determining the high ball ejection state by lighting the high ball ejection state notification LED 162SG071. Can be confirmed (understood).

FIG. 11-2 (A) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the contents of the effect control command used in the feature unit 162SG. The effect control command has, for example, a 2-byte configuration, the first byte represents MODE (command classification), and the second byte represents EXT (command type). The first bit (bit 7) of the MODE data is always "1", and the first bit of the EXT data is "0". The command form shown in FIG. 11-2 (A) is an example, and other command forms may be used. Further, in this example, the control command is composed of two control signals, but the number of control signals constituting the control command may be one or a plurality of three or more.

In the example shown in FIG. 11-2 (A), the command 8001H is a first variable display start command for designating the start of variable display in the special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 4A. .. The command 8002H is a second variable display start command for designating the start of variable display in the special figure game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 4B. The command 81XXH is a decoration that is variably displayed in each of the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in the image display device 5 in response to the variable display of the special symbol in the special symbol game. This is a variation pattern specification command that specifies a variation pattern (variation time (variable display time)) such as a symbol (also referred to as an effect symbol). Here, XXH indicates that it is an unspecified hexadecimal number, and may be a value arbitrarily set according to the content of instruction by the effect control command. In the variation pattern specification command, different EXT data are set according to the variation pattern to be specified.

The command 8CXXH is a variable display result designation command, and is an effect control command for designating a variable display result such as a special symbol or a decorative symbol. In the variable display result specification command, for example, as shown in FIG. 11-2 (B), it is determined whether the variable display result (also referred to as the variable display result) is "missing", "big hit", or "small hit". Different EXT data are set according to the result (pre-determined result) and the determination result (big hit type determination result) of which of a plurality of types the jackpot type is to be used when the variable display result is "big hit".

In the variable display result designation command, for example, as shown in FIG. 11-2 (B), the command 8C00H is the first variable display result designation command indicating a preliminary determination result that the variable display result is “missing”. .. The command 8C01H is a second variable display result designation command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "big hit" and the big hit type is "probability variable big hit A" and the big hit type determination result. The command 8C02H is a third variable display result designation command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "big hit" and the big hit type is "probability variable big hit B" and the big hit type determination result. The command 8C03H is a fourth variable display result designation command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "big hit" and the big hit type is "probability variable big hit C" and the big hit type determination result. The command 8C04H is a fifth variable display result designation command for notifying the pre-determined result and the jackpot type determination result that the variable display result is "big hit" and the jackpot type is "non-probability variable jackpot". The command 8C05H is a sixth variable display result designation command for notifying a preliminary determination result that the variable display result is a "small hit".

The command 8F00H is a symbol confirmation command for designating the change stop (confirmation) of the decorative symbol in each of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in the image display device 5. The command 95XXH is a game state designation command for designating the current game state in the pachinko gaming machine 162SG001. In the game state designation command, for example, different EXT data is set according to the current game state in the pachinko gaming machine 162SG001. As a specific example, the command 9500H is used as the first game state specification command corresponding to the game state (low probability low base state, normal state) in which neither the time reduction control nor the probability change control is performed, and the command 9501H is executed by the time reduction control. On the other hand, it is a second game state specification command corresponding to a game state (low probability high base state, time saving state) in which probability change control is not performed. Further, the command 9502H is used as the third game state specification command corresponding to the game state (high probability low base state, time reduction no probability change state) in which the time reduction control is performed while the probability change control is performed, and the command 9503H is the time reduction control and probability change. This is the 4th game state specification command corresponding to the game state (high accuracy high base state, time reduction probability change state) in which control is performed together.

The command 96XXH is a ball ejection state designation command for designating the determination status of the ball ejection state determination in the pachinko gaming machine 162SG001. In the ball ejection state designation command, as shown in FIG. 11-2 (C), different EXT data are set according to the determination status of the ball ejection state determination. As a specific example, the command 9600H is a command for designating a ball ejection state 1 corresponding to a low ball ejection state that is not determined to be a high ball ejection state, and the command 9601H is a command for the number of consecutive villas of a big hit to be the first determination number (5). The command 9602H is used as the command 9602H, and the number of consecutive villas in the jackpot is the second. 2 The command is to specify the ball ejection state 3 corresponding to the determination state determined to be the second high ball ejection state that is the number of determinations (10 times) or more.

The command 97XXH is a command for notifying the number of consecutive villas after the judgment, which is the number of times of the big hit state that occurred in the determined high ball output state after the determination of the high ball output state, and corresponds to the number of consecutive villas after the judgment. By setting the EXT data, the number of consecutive villas after the determination is specified on the effect control board 12 side by the EXT data.

The command 98XXH is a command for notifying the remaining variable display count after the determination, which is the variable display count (including the variable display count after the end of the high base state) executed after the determination of the high ball output state, and is variable after the determination. By setting the EXT data corresponding to the remaining number of display times, the variable remaining number of display after determination is specified on the effect control board 12 side by the EXT data.

The command A0XXH is a hit start designation command (also referred to as a "fanfare command") for designating the display of an effect image indicating the start of a big hit game or a small hit game. The command A1XXH is a notification command during the opening of the big winning opening that notifies that the big winning opening is in the open state in the big hit game state. The command A2XXH is a notification command after opening the big winning opening that notifies that it is a period during which the big winning opening has changed from the open state to the closed state in the big hit game state. The command A3XXH is a hit end designation command for designating the display of the effect image at the end of the big hit game or the small hit.

In the hit start specification command and the hit end specification command, different EXT data may be set according to the pre-determined result and the big hit type determination result, for example, by setting the same EXT data as the variable display result specification command. .. Alternatively, in the hit start designation command or the hit end designation command, the correspondence between the pre-determined result and the jackpot type determination result and the set EXT data may be different from the correspondence in the variable display result designation command. .. In the notification command during the opening of the big winning opening and the notification command after opening the big winning opening, for example, the number of round executions (for example, "1" to "10") in the normal open big hit state and the high-speed open big hit state described later corresponds to. Different EXT data are set.

The command B100H is based on the fact that the game ball that has passed (entered) the first starting winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6A is detected by the first starting opening switch 22A and the starting winning (first starting winning) is generated. This is a first start opening winning designation command for notifying that the first start condition for executing the special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 4A is satisfied. The command B200H is based on the fact that the game ball that has passed (entered) the second starting winning opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B is detected by the second starting opening switch 22B and the starting winning (second starting winning) is generated. , The second start opening winning designation command for notifying that the second start condition for executing the special figure game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 4B is satisfied.

The command C1XXH is a first hold storage number notification command for notifying the first special figure hold storage number in order to make it possible to specify the special figure hold storage number. The command C2XXH is a second hold storage number notification command for notifying the second special figure hold storage number in order to make it possible to specify the special figure hold storage number. The first hold storage number notification command is, for example, when the first start opening prize designation command is transmitted based on the fact that the game ball passes (enters) the first start winning opening and the first start condition is satisfied. , Is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. The second hold storage number notification command is, for example, when the second start opening prize designation command is transmitted based on the fact that the game ball passes (enters) the second start winning opening and the second start condition is satisfied. , Is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. Further, the first hold storage number notification command and the second hold storage number notification command are used in the special figure game when either the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied (when the hold storage number decreases). It may be transmitted in response to the start of execution.

Instead of the first hold storage number notification command and the second hold storage number notification command, the total hold storage number notification command for notifying the total hold storage number may be transmitted. That is, a total hold storage number notification command may be used to notify an increase (or decrease) of the total hold storage number.

The command C4XXH and the command C6XXH are effect control commands (commands for designating a winning determination result) indicating the contents of the winning determination result. Of these, the command C4XXH is a symbol designation command indicating whether or not the variable display result is a "big hit", the judgment result of the big hit type (probability change, non-probability change, sudden probability), and the small hit as the judgment result at the time of winning. Is. Further, the command C6XXH is a variation category command indicating a determination result of whether the random value for the variation pattern determination is the variation pattern of "non-reach", "super reach", or "other" as the determination result at the time of winning. Is.

The commands shown in FIG. 11-2 (A) are examples, and may not have some of these commands, or different commands may be used in place of these commands. You may add a command different from the command in. For example, a prize ball number notification command for making it possible to specify the number of prize balls to be paid out based on the winning of a game ball at each winning opening, or a gate for notifying that the game ball has passed through the passing gate 41. A passage notification command, a notification command for notifying the remaining number of times that the probability change control or the time reduction control is executed, or the like may be provided.

FIG. 11-3 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a random number value counted on the side of the main board 11. As shown in FIG. 11-3, in the feature unit 162SG, on the side of the main board 11, the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern , Numerical data indicating each of the random number values MR4 for determining the display result of the normal map is controlled so as to be countable. In addition, random values other than these may be used in order to enhance the game effect. Random numbers used to control the progress of such games are also referred to as game random numbers.

The random number circuit 104 may count numerical data indicating a part or all of these random number values MR1 to MR4. The CPU 103 uses a random counter different from the random number circuit 104, such as a random counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 162SG154 shown in FIG. 11-9, and updates various numerical data by software to update the random number value. Numerical data indicating a part of MR1 to MR4 may be counted.

The random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result is a random number value used for determining whether or not to control the variable display result such as a special symbol in the special figure game as a “big hit” to the big hit gaming state, for example. It takes a value in the range of "1" to "65536". The random value MR2 for determining the jackpot type has one of "probability variable jackpot A", "probability variation jackpot B", "probability variation jackpot C", and "non-probability variation jackpot" when the variable display result is "big hit". It is a random value used to determine, for example, a value in the range of "1" to "100".

The random value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern is a random value used to determine the fluctuation pattern in the variable display of the special symbol or the decorative symbol to one of a plurality of types prepared in advance, and is, for example, "1" to "1" to ". It takes a value in the range of 997.

The random number value MR4 for determining the normal figure display result is used to determine whether the variable display result in the normal figure game by the normal symbol display 20 is "per normal figure" or "out of normal figure". It is a random value to be obtained, and takes a value in the range of "3" to "13", for example.

FIG. 11-4 (A) shows a configuration example of the display result determination table 1 stored in the ROM 101. The feature unit 162SG uses a display result determination table common to the first special figure and the second special figure as the display result determination table, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the first special figure is not limited to this. A separate display result determination table may be used for the figure and the second special figure.

The display result determination table 1 has a variable display result in a special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 4A and a special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 4B. Before the definite special symbol is derived and displayed, it is referred to to determine whether or not to control the variable display result as a "big hit" to the big hit game state based on the random number value MR1 for determining the special symbol display result. It is a table.

In the display result determination table 1 in the feature unit 162SG, a special figure is shown depending on whether the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 162SG001 is a normal state, a time-saving state (low probability state), or a probability change state (high probability state). A numerical value (determination value) to be compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the display result is assigned to the special figure display result of "big hit" or "missing".

In the display result determination table 1, the table data indicating the determination value to be compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result is the determination result of whether or not to control the special figure display result as a "big hit" to the big hit gaming state. It is the judgment data assigned to. In the display result determination table 1 in the feature unit 162SG, when the gaming state is the probabilistic state (high probability state), more judgment values are obtained as "big hit" than when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state (low probability state). Is assigned to the special figure display result. As a result, in the probabilistic state (high probability state) in which the probability change control is performed in the pachinko gaming machine 162SG001, the special figure display result is controlled as a "big hit" in the normal state or the time saving state (low probability state). Then, the probability of being determined to control the special figure display result as a "big hit" to the big hit gaming state is higher than the probability determined (about 1/300 in this feature unit 162SG) (about 1 in this feature unit 162SG). / 30). That is, in the display result determination table 1, when the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 162SG001 is in the probabilistic state (high probability state), the probability that it is determined to control the game state to the big hit game state as compared with the normal state or the time saving state. The determination data is assigned to the determination result of whether or not to control the jackpot gaming state so that

Further, FIG. 11-4 (B) shows a configuration example of the display result determination table 2 stored in the ROM 101. The display result determination table 2 has a variable display result in a special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 4A and a special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 4B. In order to determine whether or not to control the variable display result as a "small hit" to the small hit game state before the definite special symbol is derived and displayed, based on the random number value MR1 for determining the special symbol display result. It is a referenced table.

In the display result determination table 2 in the feature unit 162SG, the special figure shows whether the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 162SG001 is a normal state, a time-saving state (low probability state), or a probability change state (high probability state). A numerical value (determination value) to be compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the display result is assigned to the special figure display result of "small hit".

In the display result determination table 2, the table data indicating the determination value to be compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result determines whether or not the special figure display result is controlled as a "small hit" in the small hit gaming state. It is the judgment data assigned to the decision result. In the display result determination table 2 in the feature unit 162SG, the number of determination values assigned to the "small hit" is different between the case of the special figure game of the first special figure and the case of the second special figure. Specifically, in the case of the special figure game of the first special figure, the judgment value is assigned to "small hit", but in the case of the special figure game of the second special figure, it is assigned to "small hit". Judgment value is not assigned. Therefore, as will be described later, the variable display of the second special figure is executed with priority over the variable display of the first special figure, and the second start winning is formed by the variable winning ball device 6B by executing the time saving control. In the high base state where a prize is generated in the mouth and a lot of variable display of the second special figure is executed, "small hit" is almost not generated, and the second start formed by the variable prize ball device 6B. In a high base state where a game ball can easily enter the winning opening, it is possible to avoid the occurrence of a small hit in which a large number of game balls cannot be obtained and to prevent the game interest from deteriorating.

FIG. 11-5 (A) shows a configuration example of the jackpot type determination table stored in the ROM 101. The jackpot type determination table in the feature unit 162SG has a plurality of jackpot types based on the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type when it is determined to control the jackpot game state with the special figure display result as "big hit". It is a table referenced to determine the crab. In the jackpot type determination table, whether the special symbol whose variable display (variable display) is performed in the special symbol game is the first special symbol (special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A) or the second special symbol (first). 2 The numerical value (judgment value) to be compared with the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type is "non-probability variation jackpot", "probability variation jackpot A", or "probability variation jackpot A", depending on whether the game is a special figure game by the special symbol display device 4B). It is assigned to a plurality of types of jackpots such as "probability variation jackpot B" and "probability variation jackpot C".

Here, the jackpot type in the feature unit 162SG will be described with reference to FIG. 11-5 (B). In the feature unit 162SG, the jackpot type includes high accuracy control and time saving control after the end of the jackpot gaming state. "Probability change big hit A" and "Probability change big hit B" that are executed and shift to the high accuracy high base state, and high accuracy low base state where high accuracy control is executed but time saving control is not executed after the end of the big hit game state. A "probability variation jackpot C" to be transferred and a "non-probability variation jackpot" to be executed only for the time saving control after the end of the jackpot game state and to transition to the low probability variation high base state are set.

The big hit game state by the "probability change big hit A" is a normal open big hit in which the special variable winning ball device 7 is repeatedly executed 10 times (so-called 10 rounds) to change the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state advantageous to the player. On the other hand, the big hit game state by "probability change big hit B" is a normal open big hit in which the special variable winning ball device 7 is repeatedly executed five times (so-called 5 rounds) to change to the first state advantageous to the player. .. Further, the jackpot game state due to the "non-probability variable jackpot" is a normal open jackpot that is repeatedly executed 10 times (so-called 10 rounds) in which the special variable winning ball device 7 is changed to the first state advantageous to the player. .. Therefore, the "probability change jackpot A" may be referred to as a 10 round (10R) probability variation jackpot, and the "probability variation jackpot B" may be referred to as a 5 round (5R) probability variation jackpot. Further, in the jackpot game by "probability variation jackpot C", the round that changes the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state advantageous to the player is repeatedly executed twice (so-called two rounds), and the special in each round is executed. The open period of the variable winning ball device 7 is shorter than that of other jackpot games (for example, 0.1 second), which is a high-speed open jackpot. It should be noted that the probability variation control and the time saving control are not executed even during the big hit game of any of the big hit types.

Further, although not particularly shown, the small hit game state in the feature unit 162SG changes the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state advantageous to the player twice, and the opening time is the same as the probability variation big hit C. It is an open period (0.1 seconds in this feature unit 162SG). After the small hit game is completed, the game state immediately before the small hit game is inherited.

That is, in this feature unit 162SG, when it is determined to be "probability variable big hit C" or "small hit", variable display is executed with the same fluctuation pattern (PC1-1 shown in FIG. 11-6). As a result of the variable display, the chance eye is stopped and displayed, and since the opening pattern of the special variable winning ball device 7 is the same, these variable displays and the opening pattern of the special variable winning ball device 7 are used. Since it is not possible to distinguish between the "probability change jackpot C" in which the probability variation control is executed and the "small hit" in which the previous gaming state is continued without the probability variation control being executed, the probability variation jackpot C After the big hit game or the small hit game is completed, it is possible to continue the game while expecting the player to execute the probability change control.

The high-accuracy control and the time-saving control executed after the end of the jackpot gaming state of the probabilistic jackpot A and the probabilistic jackpot B are continuously executed until the jackpot occurs again after the end of the jackpot gaming state. Therefore, when the jackpot that occurs again is the probability variation jackpot A or the probability variation jackpot B, the high accuracy control and the time saving control are executed again after the end of the jackpot gaming state, so that the jackpot gaming state does not go through the normal state. It becomes a so-called consecutive villa state that occurs continuously.

On the other hand, the time saving control executed after the end of the big hit game state by the "non-probability change big hit" is that the special figure game is executed a predetermined number of times (100 times in the feature unit 162SG), or the special figure of the predetermined number of times. It ends when the game is in a big hit game state before the game is executed.

In addition, the big hit that occurred in the low base state may be described as the first big hit (first hit), and the big hit that occurred in the time saving state (high accuracy high base state and low accuracy high base state) may be referred to as the consecutive villa big hit (ream). It may be described as (per villa). In addition, the period between the big hit state and the high base state from the time when the first big hit (first hit) occurs to the time when it is controlled to the normal state after that is also called the consecutive villa period (advantageous period). In addition, in this feature unit 162SG, even if the probabilistic jackpot C occurs, it is not controlled to a high base after the jackpot. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the probabilistic jackpot C is set as the first jackpot (first hit), and the probabilistic jackpot C is used as the first jackpot. The period of the later high-accuracy and low-base state may be included in the consecutive villa period (advantageous period).

Although it is not carried out in this feature unit 162SG, instead of the probability variation jackpot C, a sudden time saving jackpot that makes the gaming state after the jackpot a low probability high base state may be provided. Suddenly, the time-saving jackpot becomes the first jackpot (first hit).

Further, for example, when a time-saving symbol (for example, a stop symbol of 137 or a stop symbol dedicated to time-saving that is not displayed in the variable display) is derived and displayed as a stop symbol, a round game for opening the special variable winning ball device 7 is executed. It may be controlled to the high base state without any problem, and when the normal state is directly controlled to the high base state in this way, the start of the high base state is the timing of the start of the consecutive villa period (advantageous period). Will be.

In other words, the consecutive villa period (advantageous period) is the period from the time when it is controlled from the normal state to the jackpot state (advantageous state) or the high base state (special state) to the time when it is controlled to the normal state thereafter. Is.

In the setting example of the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 11-5 (A), "probability variable jackpot A" and "probability variable jackpot A" are used depending on whether the variablely displayed special figure is the first special figure or the second special figure. The assignment of judgment values for the jackpot types of "probability variation jackpot B", "probability variation jackpot C", and "non-probability variation jackpot" is different. That is, when the special figure to be variably displayed is the first special figure, the determination value in the predetermined range (value in the range of "81" to "100") is "probability change jackpot B" or "probability change" with a small number of rounds. While assigned to the jackpot type of "big hit C", if the special figure that is variably displayed is the second special figure, the judgment value is assigned to the jackpot type of "probability variation jackpot B" or "probability variation jackpot C". Not done. With such a setting, the jackpot type is determined to be one of a plurality of types based on the fact that the first start condition for starting the special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 4A is satisfied. In the case of Therefore, the ratio of determining the jackpot type to "probability variation jackpot B" or "probability variation jackpot C" with a small number of rounds can be different. In particular, in the special figure game using the second special figure, it is not decided to control the jackpot type to the normal open jackpot state or the high-speed open jackpot state with a small number of rounds by setting the jackpot type to "probability variation jackpot B" or "probability variation jackpot C". Therefore, for example, by the high opening control accompanying the time saving control, in the game state where the game ball easily enters the second start winning opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B, it is possible to avoid the frequent occurrence of the big hit state where the winning ball is small. It is possible to prevent the game entertainment from deteriorating.

In the setting example of the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 11-5 (A), the allocation of the determination value for the jackpot type of "non-probability variation" is the special figure game of the first special figure or the second special figure. Since it is the same regardless of whether it is present or not, the probability of becoming a non-probability jackpot and the probability of becoming a probabilistic jackpot are the same regardless of whether it is the special figure game of the first special figure or the second special figure. It is said that.

Therefore, as described above, the assignment of the determination values for the "probability change jackpot B" and the "probability variation jackpot C" differs depending on whether the game is the special figure game of the first special figure or the second special figure. Therefore, the assignment of the judgment value to the "probability change jackpot A" also differs depending on whether it is the special figure game of the first special figure or the second special figure, and for the "probability change jackpot A" having a large number of rounds, the second It is set so that the case of the special figure game of the special figure is easier to determine than the case of the special figure game of the first special figure.

Even in the case of the special figure game of the second special figure, the judgment value in a predetermined range different from that of the special figure game of the first special figure is the big hit of "probability change big hit B" or "probability change big hit C". It may be assigned to a type. For example, in the case of the special figure game of the second special figure, the judgment value smaller than that in the case of the special figure game of the first special figure is in the big hit type of "probability change big hit B" or "probability change big hit C". May be assigned. Alternatively, the jackpot type may be determined by referring to the common table data regardless of whether the game is the special figure game of the first special figure or the second special figure.

FIG. 11-6 shows the fluctuation pattern in the feature unit 162SG. In this feature unit 162SG, among the cases where the variable display result is "off", the variable display mode of the decorative symbol corresponds to the case of "non-reach" and the case of "reach", and is variable. A plurality of fluctuation patterns are prepared in advance in response to cases where the display result is a "big hit" or a "small hit". The variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "off" and the variation display mode of the decorative symbol is "non-reach" is called a non-reach variation pattern (also referred to as "non-reach loss variation pattern"). The variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "off" and the variation display mode of the decorative symbol is "reach" is called a reach variation pattern (also referred to as "reach loss variation pattern"). Further, the non-reach fluctuation pattern and the reach fluctuation pattern are included in the missed fluctuation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is “missing”. The fluctuation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "big hit" is called a big hit fluctuation pattern.

The jackpot fluctuation pattern and the reach fluctuation pattern include a normal reach fluctuation pattern in which the reach effect of the normal reach is executed and a super reach fluctuation pattern in which the reach effect of the super reach is executed. Although the feature unit 162SG provides only one type of normal reach fluctuation pattern, the present invention is not limited to this, and a plurality of normal reach fluctuation patterns such as normal reach α, normal reach β, and the like are provided. It may be provided. Further, even in the super reach fluctuation pattern, a plurality of super reach fluctuation patterns may be provided, such as super reach α, super reach β, and so on.

The fluctuation pattern in the feature unit 162SG is a special hit fluctuation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "small hit" or the variable display result is "big hit" and the big hit type is "probability variable big hit C". PC1-1) is also included.

As shown in FIG. 11-6, the special figure variable display time of the normal reach variation pattern in which the reach effect of the normal reach is executed in the feature unit 162SG is set shorter than that of the super reach variation pattern.

Further, in the present feature unit 162SG, as will be described later, these fluctuation patterns are first determined as the type of fluctuation pattern, for example, the type of non-reach, the type of normal reach, the type of super reach, and the like. Then, instead of determining the variation pattern to be executed from the variation patterns belonging to the determined type, the determination is made using only the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern without determining these types. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, in addition to the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern, a random value for determining the variation pattern type is provided, and the random values for determining the variation pattern type are used. The type of the variation pattern may be determined first, and then the variation pattern to be executed may be determined from the variation patterns belonging to the determined type.

FIG. 11-7 is an explanatory diagram of a method for determining a fluctuation pattern in the feature unit 162SG. In this feature unit 162SG, the variation pattern determination table to be selected is different depending on the display result of the variable display to be executed and the number of reserved storages.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 11-7, when the variable display result is a non-probability variable jackpot, the jackpot variation pattern determination table A is selected, and the variation pattern is used using the jackpot variation pattern determination table A. Is determined from PB1-1 (variation pattern of normal reach jackpot) and PB1-2 (variation pattern of super reach jackpot). When the variable display result is the probability variation jackpot A or the probability variation jackpot B, the jackpot variation pattern determination table B is selected, and the variation pattern is set to PB1-1 (normal reach jackpot) using the jackpot variation pattern determination table A. Fluctuation pattern) and PB1-2 (variation pattern of super reach jackpot).

As shown in FIG. 11-7, the number of determination values assigned to PB1-1 and PB1-2 is different between the jackpot variation pattern determination table A and the jackpot variation pattern determination table B. Specifically, in the jackpot variation pattern determination table A, 498 determination values are assigned to PB1-1 and 497 determination values are assigned to PB1-2. On the other hand, in the jackpot variation pattern determination table B, 250 determination values are assigned to PB1-1 and 747 determination values are assigned to PB1-2. That is, in the present feature unit 162SG, when the variable display result is the probability variation jackpot A or the probability variation jackpot B, the variation pattern is the fluctuation pattern of the super reach at a higher rate than when the variable display result is the non-probability variation jackpot PB1. Since it is determined to be -2, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the fluctuation pattern in the variable display.

If the variable display result is a probabilistic big hit C or a small hit, select the special hit variation pattern determination table, and use the special hit variation pattern determination table to set the variation pattern to PC1-1 (special hit variation). Pattern) is decided. That is, in the present feature unit 162SG, the variable display is executed with the same variation pattern depending on whether the variable display result is the probability variation big hit C or the small hit, so that the player can perform the variable display from the variation pattern. It is difficult to specify whether the result is a probabilistic big hit C or a small hit.

Further, when the variable display result is "off" in the normal game state (low base state) and the number of reserved storages of the variation special figure is 2 or less, the deviation pattern determination table A is selected, and the variation pattern determination table A is selected. The variation pattern is determined from PA1-1 (non-reach out-of-reach variation pattern), PA2-1 (normal reach out-of-range variation pattern), and PA2-2 (super reach out-of-reach variation pattern) using the out-of-reach variation pattern determination table A. do.

Further, when the variable display result is "off" in the normal game state (low base state) and the number of reserved storages of the variation special figure is 4, the deviation pattern determination table C for loss is selected and the deviation is achieved. The fluctuation pattern is determined from PA1-3 (shortening fluctuation pattern of non-reach loss), PA2-1 (variation pattern of normal reach loss), and PA2-2 (variation pattern of super reach loss) using the fluctuation pattern determination table C. do.

If the variable display result is "off" in the time saving state (high base state), the out-of-order variation pattern determination table D is selected, and the out-of-order variation pattern determination table D is used to set the variation pattern to PA1-4. It is determined from (non-reach out-of-time shortening variation pattern), PA2-1 (normal reach out-of-time variation pattern), and PA2-2 (super reach out-of-time variation pattern).

That is, when the variable display result is "missing" in the feature unit 162SG, the special figure is based on the fact that the number of reserved storages of the variable special figure is 3 or 4, or the time is shortened. Since the variable display time is shorter than the normal non-reach deviation pattern (PA1-1), the variable display is executed at a higher rate due to the shortening variation pattern (PA1-2, PA1-3, PA1-4). It is possible to shorten the period until the next variable display result becomes a big hit while preventing the game from being delayed.

Next, the relationship between the fluctuation pattern and the ball ejection state will be described with reference to FIG. 11-8. The ball ejection state flag in FIG. 11-8 is a flag updated by the ball ejection state determination process shown in FIG. 11-13, which will be described later, and is set to "0" when the ball ejection state is in a low ball ejection state. It is a flag in which "1" is set when the ball is in a high ball ejection state, and "2" is set in the case of a second high ball ejection state. It is possible to specify whether the state is a low ball ejection state, a first high ball ejection state, or a second high ball ejection state.

The variable display time of each variation pattern corresponding to the low ball ejection state in which "0" is set in the ball ejection status flag is the same as the variable display time of each variation pattern shown in FIG. 11-6, and the ball ejection status flag is set to "0". The variable display time corresponding to the case where "0" is set in the state flag is not extended, but the variable pattern corresponding to the first high ball ejection state in which "1" is set in the payout status flag is variable. As for the display time, the variable display time of the fluctuation pattern of the non-reach off (PA1-1 to PA1-4), which appears frequently, corresponds to "0" in the ball ejection status flag. 4) When the variable display time longer than the variable display time of the fluctuation pattern is set and extended, and "1" is set in the ball ejection status flag, these extended variable display times are not set. By executing the variable display out of reach, the average variable display time becomes longer.

In addition, the variable display time of the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the second high ball ejection state in which "2" is set in the ball ejection state flag is non-reach off (PA1-1 to PA1-4) and normal reach, which frequently appear. The variable display time of the fluctuation pattern of the loss (PA2-1) and the normal reach jackpot (PB1-1) corresponds to the ball ejection status flag "1". PA2-1) and the variable display time that is longer than the variable display time of the fluctuation pattern of the normal reach jackpot are set and extended, and if "2" is set in the ball ejection status flag, these are extended. By executing the variable display of the non-reach deviation, the normal reach deviation, and the normal reach jackpot of the variable display time, the average variable display time is further lengthened.

The extended variable display time is 1 second in the first high ball ejection state in which the ball ejection state flag is "1" for the non-reach PA1-1 which is a non-shortened fluctuation pattern, and the ball ejection state flag is "1". In the second high ball ejection state where the status flag is "2", it is 1.5 seconds, and for the non-reach PA1-2-2 non-reach PA1-4 which is a variation pattern of shortening, the ball ejection state flag is "1". It is 0.5 seconds in the first high ball ejection state, and 1.0 second in the second high ball ejection state where the ball ejection state flag is "2", which is a variation pattern of reach PA2. Regarding -1 and PB1-1, it is 0 seconds in the first high ball ejection state where the ball ejection state flag is "1", and in the second high ball ejection state where the ball ejection state flag is "2". 5 seconds.

The length of the variable display time to be extended shown in FIG. 11-8 is an example, and an extension different from these lengths may be performed. For example, in the second high ball ejection state, the extension may be longer than the extension in the first high ball ejection state.

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 11-8, the fluctuation pattern of the non-reach outlier, which is frequently executed due to the high determination rate, and the fluctuation pattern of the normal reach, which is frequently executed as compared with the super reach, are extended. The average variable display time can be efficiently lengthened, and the data capacity of the reach and super reach fluctuation patterns, which have a large amount of data related to the effect due to the long variable display time, can be stored by storing multiple data by extending the variable display time. The present invention is not limited to this, and the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, "1 second" is set as a predetermined extension time for all fluctuation patterns. It may be uniformly added to the variable display time and extended, and for these extended periods, a common effect using common effect data in each variation pattern may be executed.

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 11-8, in the first high ball ejection state where the ball ejection state flag is "1", only the non-reach out-of-reach fluctuation pattern is extended, and the ball ejection state flag is "2". In the second high ball output state, the average variable display time is further increased by increasing the variation pattern to be extended so that the reach fluctuation pattern is also extended when a certain second high ball output state is reached. Although it is possible to extend efficiently, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, regarding a fluctuation pattern in which the payout state flag is extended at "1" even when the payout state flag is "2". It may be possible to prevent the control load related to the extension from being excessively increased by further extending the ball so that the fluctuation pattern of the object to be extended does not change according to the ball ejection state. ..

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 11-8, not only the fluctuation pattern of the non-reach PA1-4 corresponding to the time saving state (high base state), which is the gaming state in which the variable display is executed during the consecutive villa period, but also the fluctuation pattern of the non-reach PA1-4 will be described later. As described above, these consecutive villa periods (advantageous period) have ended so that even if a big hit occurs again with a small number of variable display times after the consecutive villa period (advantageous period) ends and is controlled to the normal state. The present invention exemplifies a form in which the variation pattern of the non-reach PA1-1 to the non-reach PA1-3 corresponding to the normal state is also extended so that the variable display in the normal state at the time of the normal state can be extended. The present invention is not limited to this, and the variation pattern of the non-reach PA1-4 corresponding to the time saving state (high base state), which is the gaming state in which the variable display is executed during the consecutive villa period, may be extended. ..

In the RAM 102 of the feature unit 162SG, as an area for holding various data used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 162SG001, for example, a game control data holding area 162SG150 as shown in FIG. 11-9. Is provided. The game control data holding area 162SG150 shown in FIG. 11-9 includes a first special figure holding storage unit 162SG151A, a second special figure holding storage unit 162SG151B, a normal drawing holding storage unit 162SG151C, and a game control flag setting unit 162SG152. , The game control timer setting unit 162SG153, the game control counter setting unit 162SG154, and the game control buffer setting unit 162SG155 are provided.

In the first special figure reservation storage unit 162SG151A, the game ball passes (enters) through the first start winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6A, and a starting prize (first starting winning) is generated, but the special starting prize has not been started yet. The reserved data of the figure game (the special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 4A) is stored. As an example, the first special figure reservation storage unit 162SG151A associates the holding number with the winning order (the order of detecting the game ball) to the first starting winning opening, and determines the first starting condition in the passage (entry) of the game ball. Hold data such as random number value MR1 for special figure display result determination, random number value MR2 for jackpot type determination, and random number value MR3 for variable pattern determination extracted from the random number circuit 104 etc. by the CPU 103 based on the establishment. As the number of stored data reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, "4"), the data is stored. The hold data stored in the first special figure hold storage unit 162SG151A in this way indicates that the execution of the special figure game using the first special figure is held, and the variable display result (special figure display) in this special figure game. It is pending information that makes it possible to determine whether or not it will be a big hit based on the result).

The second special figure reservation storage unit 162SG151B has not been started yet, although the game ball has passed (entered) through the second starting winning opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B and a starting winning (second starting winning) has occurred. The reserved data of the special figure game (the special figure game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 4B) is stored. As an example, the second special figure reservation storage unit 162SG151B associates the winning order (the order of detecting the game ball) with the second starting winning opening with the holding number, and determines the second starting condition in the passage (entry) of the game ball. Hold data such as random number value MR1 for special figure display result determination, random number value MR2 for jackpot type determination, and random number value MR3 for variable pattern determination extracted from the random number circuit 104 or the like by the CPU 103 based on the establishment. As the number reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, "4"), the data is stored. The hold data stored in the second special figure hold storage unit 162SG151B in this way indicates that the execution of the special figure game using the second special figure is held, and the variable display result (special figure display) in this special figure game. It is pending information that makes it possible to determine whether or not it will be a big hit based on the result).

It should be noted that the hold information (first hold information) based on the establishment of the first start condition due to the game ball passing (entering) through the first start winning opening and the game ball passing (entering) through the second start winning opening. The hold information (second hold information) based on the establishment of the second start winning prize may be stored in association with the hold number in the common hold storage unit. In this case, the start opening data indicating which of the first start winning opening and the second starting winning opening the game ball has passed (entered) may be included in the hold information and stored in association with the hold number. ..

The normal figure hold storage unit 162SG151C stores the hold information of the normal figure game that has not yet been started by the normal symbol display 20 even though the game ball that has passed through the passing gate 41 is detected by the gate switch 21. For example, the normal map holding storage unit 162SG151C associates with the hold number in the order in which the game balls pass through the passage gate 41, and determines the normal figure display result extracted from the random number circuit 104 or the like by the CPU 103 based on the passage of the game balls. Numerical data indicating the random number value MR4 for use is stored as reserved data until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, “4”).

The game control flag setting unit 162SG152 is provided with a plurality of types of flags whose state can be updated according to the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 162SG001. For example, the game control flag setting unit 162SG152 stores data indicating the value of the flag and data indicating the on state or the off state for each of the plurality of types of flags including the above-mentioned ball ejection state flag.

The game control timer setting unit 162SG153 is provided with various timers used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 162SG001. For example, the game control timer setting unit 162SG153 stores data indicating timer values for each of a plurality of types of timers.

The game control counter setting unit 162SG154 is provided with a plurality of types of counters for counting the count values used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 162SG001. For example, the game control counter setting unit 162SG154 stores data indicating the count values of each of the plurality of types of counters. Here, the game control counter setting unit 162SG154 may be provided with a random counter for the CPU 103 to count a part or all of the game random numbers so that they can be updated by software.

In the random counter of the game control counter setting unit 162SG154, a random number value not generated by the random number circuit 104, for example, numerical data indicating the random number values MR2 to MR4 is stored as a random count value, and is stored as a random count value according to the execution of the software by the CPU 103. Numerical data indicating each random number value is updated periodically or irregularly. The software executed by the CPU 103 to update the random count value may be for updating the random count value separately from the operation of updating the numerical data in the random number circuit 104, or may be extracted from the random number circuit 104. It may be for updating the random count value by performing a predetermined process such as scramble processing or arithmetic processing on all or a part of the numerical data.

The game control buffer setting unit 162SG155 is provided with various buffers for temporarily storing data used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 162SG001. For example, the game control buffer setting unit 162SG155 stores data indicating buffer values in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

The RAM 122 mounted on the effect control board 12 shown in FIG. 11-1 has an area for holding various data used for controlling the effect operation, for example, for effect control as shown in FIG. 11-10 (A). A data holding area 162SG190 is provided. The effect control data holding area 162SG190 shown in FIG. 11-10 (A) includes an effect control flag setting unit 162SG191, an effect control timer setting unit 162SG192, an effect control counter setting unit 162SG193, and an effect control buffer setting unit 162SG194. I have.

The effect control flag setting unit 162SG191 has a plurality of types capable of updating the state according to the effect operation state such as the display state of the effect image on the screen of the image display device 5 and the effect control command transmitted from the main board 11. Flag is provided. For example, the effect control flag setting unit 162SG191 stores data indicating a flag value and data indicating an on state or an off state for each of a plurality of types of flags.

The effect control timer setting unit 162SG192 is provided with a plurality of types of timers used for controlling the progress of various effect operations such as the display operation of the effect image on the screen of the image display device 5. For example, the effect control timer setting unit 162SG192 stores data indicating timer values for each of a plurality of types of timers.

The effect control counter setting unit 162SG193 is provided with a plurality of types of counters used for controlling the progress of various effect operations. For example, the effect control counter setting unit 162SG193 stores data indicating the count values of the plurality of types of counters.

The effect control buffer setting unit 162SG194 is provided with various buffers for temporarily storing data used for controlling the progress of various effect operations. For example, the effect control buffer setting unit 162SG194 stores data indicating buffer values in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

In the feature unit 162SG, the data constituting the start winning reception command buffer 162SG194A as shown in FIG. 11-10 (B) is stored in a predetermined area of the effect control buffer setting unit 162SG194. In the start winning command receive command buffer 162SG194A, the storage area (buffer numbers "1-1" to "1-4" corresponding to the maximum value (for example, "4") of the total number of reserved storages of the first special figure reserved storage is stored. A corresponding area) and a storage area (area corresponding to the buffer number “1-0”) corresponding to the first special figure during variable display are provided. Further, the start winning command buffer 162SG194A has a storage area (buffer numbers "2-1" to "2-4" corresponding to the maximum value (for example, "4") of the total number of reserved storages in the second special figure reserved storage. A storage area corresponding to the second special figure during variable display (area corresponding to the buffer number “2-0”) is provided. When there is a start winning to the 1st start winning opening or the 2nd starting winning opening, the starting opening winning designation command (1st starting opening winning designation command or the 2nd starting opening winning designation command), the symbol designation command, the variable category designation Four commands, a command and a hold storage number notification command (first hold storage number notification command or second hold storage number notification command), are transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 as one set. The storage area corresponding to the first special figure hold storage and the storage area corresponding to the second special figure hold storage in the start winning command receive command buffer 162SG194A are the start opening winning designation command, the symbol designation command, the variable category designation command, and the storage area corresponding to the second special figure hold storage. A storage area (entry) for storing the first special figure hold storage and the second special figure hold storage separately is secured in association with the hold storage number notification command.

The stored contents of these storage areas (entries) will be described later when the start condition is satisfied and the variable display of the highest held storage (buffer number "1-1" or buffer number "2-1") is started. The stored contents of the buffer number "1-0" or the buffer number "2-0" for storing the contents of the reserved storage for which the start condition is satisfied are displayed in a variable manner. It is set to be cleared in the special figure hit waiting process executed when the process is finished.

Further, in the start winning command buffer 162SG194A of the feature unit 162SG, whether or not the determination of the display pattern accompanying the determination of whether or not the pre-reading advance notice effect is executed in the pre-reading advance notice setting process (FIG. 9) is undecided. That is, the display pattern is undecided because the start opening prize designation command, the symbol designation command, the variable category designation command, and the hold storage number notification command are newly stored due to the occurrence of a new start prize. The display undecided flag indicating, and the hold display flag in which the flag value corresponding to the display pattern (display mode) of the hold storage display is set, respectively, corresponding to the first special figure hold storage and the second special figure hold storage. A storage area is secured for each storage area (entry) so that it can be stored in association with the buffer number.

Further, in the start winning command buffer 162SG194A of the feature unit 162SG, a storage area can be stored so that the effect restriction flag can be stored in association with each buffer number corresponding to the first special figure hold storage and the second special figure hold storage. Is secured for each storage area (entry). In the command analysis process (FIG. 11-22), the effect restriction flag is a symbol designation command, a variable category designation command, and a hold storage number, although a start prize is generated at the first start winning opening or the second starting winning opening. When the notification command is not received within the first reserved storage number notification waiting time or the second reserved storage number notification waiting time, which will be described later, it is a flag indicating that the entry is not the target of the pre-reading notice effect.

In the hold display flag, "0" corresponding to the display pattern of the normal hold storage display is stored when the execution of the look-ahead notice effect is not determined in the look-ahead notice setting process described later. As a result, the hold storage display in the normal display mode (for example, white circle) is displayed in the first hold storage display area 5D and the second hold storage display area 5U provided at the lower part of the image display device 5, and the first is displayed. When it is decided to execute the reading notice effect, "1" (square) corresponding to the display pattern of the hold storage display in a special mode (for example, square (◇) or star (☆)) different from the normal display mode. (◇))) or "2" (star (☆)) is set, so that the reserved storage display in a special mode different from the normal display mode is the first reserved storage display area 5D and the second reserved storage display area 5U. In the variable display corresponding to the hold storage display, it is foretold that there is a high possibility of a big hit or a super reach.

The effect control CPU 120 stores the command at the time of the start winning to the first start winning opening from the beginning (the youngest entry of the buffer number) in the empty entry corresponding to the first special figure hold storage of the start winning command buffer 162SG194A. Then, at the time of the start winning to the second start winning opening, the command is stored from the beginning (the youngest entry of the buffer number) in the empty entry corresponding to the second special figure hold storage of the start winning command buffer 162SG194A. go. At the time of the start winning, the start opening prize designation command to the hold storage number notification command are sequentially transmitted. Therefore, when the command is received, the start opening prize designation command is placed in the storage area corresponding to each of the end "1" to "4" of the buffer number corresponding to the first special figure hold storage or the second special figure hold storage. , The symbol specification command, the variable category specification command, and the hold storage count notification command are stored in this order.

The command stored in the start winning command buffer 162SG194A shown in FIG. 11-10 (B) is an entry (buffer) corresponding to the hold storage of the variable display that was terminated immediately before each time the variable display of the decorative symbol was started. The entry stored in the number "1-0" or "2-0") is deleted, and the entry corresponding to the pending storage of the variable display to be started (buffer number "1-1" or "2") is deleted. The storage contents of the entries stored in the entry corresponding to -1 ”) and the entries after the hold storage of the variable display to be started are shifted. For example, when the variable display of the decorative symbol of the first special figure hold storage is completed in the stored state shown in FIG. 11-10 (B), each command stored in the buffer number "0" is deleted, and the buffer number is deleted. Each command stored in "1" is shifted to the buffer number "0", and each command stored in the area corresponding to the buffer number "2" is moved to the area corresponding to the buffer number "1". Each command that has been shifted and stored in the area corresponding to the buffer numbers "3" and "4" is shifted to the area corresponding to the buffer numbers "2" and "3". Therefore, the buffer number "0" is an area (entry) for storing each command related to the hold storage that is variably displayed at that time.

Next, the game control main process of the feature unit 162SG will be described with reference to FIGS. 11-11. As shown in FIGS. 11-11, the game control main process of the feature unit 162SG also executes almost the same process as the game control main process in the basic configuration of FIG. 4, but features of the game control main process of the feature unit 162SG. The reason is that the contents of the recovery process of S4 are different, and the process of step S6b relating to the initial setting of the ball ejection state flag is added in addition to the initialization process of step S6a.

In the restoration process of step S4 of the game control main process of the feature unit 162SG, a process of restoring the ball ejection state flag to the state before the power failure is executed. As will be described later, in the power interruption process of step S19 in the game control timer interrupt processing of the feature unit 162SG shown in FIG. 11-12, the backup data stored when the power failure occurs includes the power failure occurrence. The data of the flag value of the payout state flag at the time is included.

As a specific recovery status of the ball ejection status flag, when the value of the ball ejection status flag is "0" corresponding to the low ball ejection state when a power failure occurs, the ball ejection status flag is set to "0" by the recovery process. Is set, and when the value of the ball ejection status flag is "1" corresponding to the first ball ejection state when a power failure occurs, "1" is set in the ball ejection status flag by the recovery process, and when a power failure occurs. When the value of the ball ejection state flag is "2" corresponding to the second ball ejection state, "2" is set in the ball ejection status flag by the recovery process. That is, by the restoration process of S4, the value before the power failure occurs is set in the value of the ball ejection state flag, and the ball ejection state before the power failure is restored.

The backup data described above also includes data on the number of consecutive villas after determination and the remaining number of variable display after determination, which will be described later, and the data on the number of consecutive villas after determination and the remaining number of variable display after determination are also in S4. It is restored to the data at the time of power failure by the restoration process.

In this way, the recovery process in step S4 restores the value of the ball ejection status flag to the value before the occurrence of the power failure, and also restores the data of the number of consecutive villas after the determination and the remaining number of variable displays after the determination. Even if an electric power failure occurs in the first ball ejection state or the second ball ejection state in which the ball ejection speed is adjusted, the adjustment of the ball ejection speed is not completed by the electric power failure, and after the electric power failure is restored. Will continue.

On the other hand, since the recovery condition is not satisfied in step S3, the initialization process of step S6a is executed, and the initial setting (including the initialization of various game data such as the number of consecutive villas) at the time of turning on the power is executed. Later, the ball ejection state flag is set to "0", which is a value corresponding to the low ball ejection state, which is the initial value when the power is turned on. In this way, when the power is turned on (when the power supply is started other than the power supply recovery) when the power failure recovery condition is not satisfied, "0", which is a value corresponding to the low ball output state, is set in the ball output state flag. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the ball ejection speed from being improperly adjusted when the power is turned on.

Next, the game control timer interrupt processing of the feature unit 162SG will be described with reference to FIGS. 11-12. The game control timer interrupt process of the feature unit 162SG executes each process of steps S21 to S27 in the same manner as the game control timer interrupt process of FIG. 5 in the basic configuration. In addition to these processes, the basic configuration The difference is that the power cutoff process in step S19, which was omitted in the above, and the ball ejection state determination process, which is a feature point of the game control timer interrupt process of the feature unit 162SG, are provided.

In the power cutoff process in step S19, it is detected whether or not the power supply cutoff signal is output from the power supply board 17 (whether or not it is turned on). The power supply cutoff signal is a signal output when, for example, the power supply monitoring circuit mounted on the power supply board 17 detects a drop in the voltage of the supplied power supply. When it is detected that a power cutoff signal has been output, as described above, the above-mentioned ball ejection state flag and the like necessary for restoring the state of the pachinko gaming machine 162SG001 to the state at the time of power failure are included. Each game data is stored as backup data in the RAM 102, which is a backup RAM for game control. If it is not detected that the power cutoff signal has been output, the power cutoff process is terminated. Then, after executing the ball ejection state determination process in step S20, each process of steps S21 to S27 is executed.

Here, the ball ejection state determination process in step S20 of the feature unit 162SG will be described with reference to FIG. 11-13 (a). FIG. 11-13 (a) is a flow chart showing an example of the processing content of the ball ejection state determination process in step S20.

In the ball ejection state determination process, the game control microcomputer 100 first determines whether or not the value of the ball ejection state flag is "0", that is, whether the ball ejection state is the low ball ejection state or the first high ball ejection state. It is determined whether it is in a state or a second high ball output state (step 162SGS01).

When the value of the ball ejection state flag is "0" (step 162SGS01; Y), the number of consecutive villas stored in the game control data holding area 162SG150 of the RAM 102 is "5" or more, which is the first determination number. It is determined whether or not there is (step 162SGS02). When the number of times of the first determination is not "5" or more, that is, when the villa is not in the villa state or when the number of villas is less than 5 even in the villa state (step 162SGS02; N). Ends the ball ejection status determination process. On the other hand, when the number of consecutive villas is "5" or more, which is the first determination number (step 162SGS02; Y), it is further determined whether or not the number of consecutive villas is "10" or more, which is the second determination number. Determination (step 162SGS03).

When the number of consecutive villas is not "10" or more, which is the number of second determinations (step 162SGS03; N), that is, when the number of consecutive villas reaches "5", which is the number of first determinations, the first ball is ejected. It is determined that the ball is ejected, and "1" corresponding to the first ejected state is set in the ball ejection state flag (step 162SGS06), and the adjustment of the first stage is started as shown in FIG. 11-13 (b) (step 162SGS07). ). Since the update of the number of consecutive villas is updated in the jackpot end process as described later, the fifth jackpot of the number of consecutive villas is a jackpot in which the jackpot period extension adjustment of the first stage is not executed, and the first stage The jackpot period extension adjustment is executed for the 6th to 10th jackpots of consecutive villas.

As shown in FIG. 11-21, the jackpot period extension adjustment is performed during the fanfare production period at the start of the jackpot state, which is the period during which the special variable winning ball device 7 constituting the jackpot is not open, and the round game ends. The interval period from the start of the next round game to the start of the next round game, and the ending effect period at the end of the big hit state are extended from the low ball output state in which "0" is set in the ball output state flag, so that the same number of game balls are played. By extending the period of the jackpot game to be paid out, the number of game balls to be paid out in a unit time will be reduced.

As shown in FIG. 11-21, the extension lengths of the fanfare production period, the interval period, and the ending production period are higher than those in the first high ball ejection state in which "1" is set in the ball ejection state flag. The second high ball ejection state in which "2" is set in the ball status flag is set longer, and the jackpot period extension adjustment in the first high ball ejection state in which "1" is set in the ball ejection status flag is set. , The extension length is relatively short in the first stage jackpot period extension adjustment, and the second high ball ejection state jackpot period extension adjustment in which "2" is set in the ball ejection status flag has a relatively extended length. It is a long second stage jackpot period extension adjustment.

Then, the lighting of the high ball ejection state notification LED 162SG071 is started, the notification that the high ball ejection state has been reached is started (step 162SGS08), and the variable display number of times after the determination of the high ball ejection state is determined is a predetermined number of times. In addition to setting the variable display remaining number (100) after the judgment to specify the remaining number of times until it reaches 100 times, it is the number of consecutive villa jackpots that occurred after it was judged to be in a high ball output state. After setting the initial value "0" for the number of villas (step 162SGS09), the process proceeds to step 162SGS17. The feature unit 162SG exemplifies a form in which a predetermined number of times is 100 times, but the present invention is not limited to this, and these times depend on specifications such as a big hit probability and a big hit continuation rate. It may be changed as appropriate.

On the other hand, when the number of consecutive villas is "10" or more, which is the number of second determinations (step 162SGS03; Y), that is, when the number of consecutive villas reaches "10", which is the number of second determinations, the second ball is released. It was determined that the state was reached, "2" corresponding to the second ball ejection state was set in the ball ejection status flag (step 162SGS04), and the adjustment of the second stage was started as shown in FIG. 11-13 (b). After that (step 162SGS05), the process proceeds to step 162SGS17. Since the update of the number of consecutive villas is updated in the jackpot end process as described later, the second stage jackpot period extension adjustment is executed for the jackpot after the 11th consecutive villa count.

Further, when the value of the ball ejection state flag is not "0" (step 162SGS01; N), whether or not the number of consecutive villas after the determination is 10 or more, which is the number of end determinations for ending the adjustment. That is, it is determined whether or not the number of consecutive villas after the determination has reached 10 times, which is the number of end determinations (step 162SGS10). The feature unit 162SG exemplifies a form in which the number of end determinations is 10 times, but the present invention is not limited to this, and these times are specified in specifications such as a jackpot probability and a jackpot continuation rate. It may be changed as appropriate.

When the number of consecutive villas after the determination is 10 or more, which is the number of end determinations (step 162SGS10; N), that is, after the number of consecutive villas is 5 or more and it is determined that the number of consecutive villas is high, the consecutive villa state is changed. When the number of consecutive villa jackpots that occur without ending reaches 10 times, it is determined whether or not the gaming state is in the low base state, that is, whether or not the consecutive villa state is finished. (Step 162SGS11), if the gaming state is the low base state (step 162SGS11; Y), the process proceeds to step 162SGS13. The number of consecutive villas is reset when the consecutive villa state ends and the low base state is reached.

On the other hand, when the number of consecutive villas after determination is not 10 times or more which is the number of end determinations (step 162SGS10; N), or when the number of consecutive villas after determination is 10 times or more which is the number of end determinations (step 162SGS10; Y). When the gaming state is not the low base state (step 162SGS11; N), it is further determined whether or not the number of remaining variable display after determination set in step 162SGS09 is "0" (step 162SGS12).

When the remaining number of variable display after determination is not "0" (step 162SGS12; N), that is, after the number of consecutive villas is 5 or more and it is determined that the ball is in a high ball output state, the variable display is 100 times, which is a predetermined number. If is not executed, the ball ejection state determination process is terminated.

When the remaining number of variable displays after the determination is "0" (step 162SGS12; Y), that is, when the variable display of 100 times, which is a predetermined number of times, is executed after the determination of the high ball output state is executed. Step 162 Proceed to SGS13.

In step 162SGS13, by updating the ball ejection status flag to "0", after the adjustment of the first stage or the second stage described above is completed (step 162SGS14), the lighting of the high ball ejection status notification LED 162SG071 is terminated. After the notification that the adjustment is being performed in the high ball output state is completed (step 162SGS15), the variable display remaining number after the judgment and the number of consecutive villas after the judgment are reset (step 162SGS16), and the process proceeds to step 162SGS17. ..

In step 162SGS17, after executing the transmission setting of the payout state specification command corresponding to the value of the payout state flag set in any of the steps of step 162SGS04, step 162SGS06, and step 162SGS13, the payout state determination is performed. End the process. The ball ejection state designation command set to be transmitted in this way is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by executing the command control process in step S27 shown in FIG.

As described above, by executing the ball ejection state determination process shown in FIG. 11-13 (a), the value of the ball ejection state flag is set to the time when the power supply is started, as shown in FIG. 11-13 (b). Similarly, when it is "0", neither the variable display time extension adjustment in which the variable display time is extended nor the jackpot period extension adjustment in which the jackpot game period is extended is executed, but the first ball ejection state determination process is performed. When the value of the ball ejection state flag is updated to "1" by determining that the ball ejection state is high, the variable display time is extended to the length of the first stage. The variable display time extension of the first stage is extended. Both the adjustment and the first stage jackpot period extension adjustment, in which the duration of the jackpot game is extended to the length of the first stage, are performed. Further, when the value of the ball ejection state flag is updated to "2" by determining the second high ball ejection state in the ball ejection state determination process, the variable display time is longer than that of the first stage. Both the second stage variable display time extension adjustment that is extended to the stage length and the second stage jackpot period extension adjustment that the jackpot game period is extended to the second stage length longer than the first stage It is executed, and it is notified by lighting of the high ball ejection state notification LED 162SG071 that these adjustments are being executed.

Further, when the value of the ball ejection state flag is "1" or "2", the number of consecutive villas after the determination reaches the end determination number, or the variable display remaining number after the determination becomes 0 (ball ejection status flag). When the variable display is executed 100 times after the value of is set to "1" or "2"), the value of the ball ejection status flag is updated to "0", and the variable display time extension adjustment and the jackpot period The extension adjustment is completed.

Further, the feature unit 162SG exemplifies a mode in which the high ball ejection state notification LED 162SG071 is turned on from the timing when the value of the ball ejection state flag is updated from "0" to "1". The high ball ejection state notification LED 162SG071 is not limited, and is not turned on from the timing when the value of the ball ejection status flag is updated from "0" to "1" during a normal game, and the ball ejection status flag is set. When a power failure occurs while the value is set to "1" or "2", the light may be turned on only for a certain period from the time of recovery from the power failure.

Further, in the present feature unit 162SG, when the value of the ball ejection state flag is "1" or "2", both the variable display time extension adjustment and the jackpot period extension adjustment are executed. The invention is not limited to this, and when the value of the ball ejection state flag is "1" or "2", only one of the variable display time extension adjustment and the jackpot period extension adjustment may be executed. Furthermore, when the value of the ball ejection state flag is "1", only one of the variable display time extension adjustment and the jackpot period extension adjustment is executed, and the ball ejection status flag value is "2". In some cases, both the variable display time extension adjustment and the jackpot period extension adjustment may be executed.

Further, in the feature unit 162SG, as shown in FIG. 11-13 (a), the CPU 103 transmits a ball ejection state designation command to the effect control board 12 only when the value of the ball ejection state flag changes. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the CPU 103 always issues a ball ejection state designation command every time the ball ejection state determination process is executed or every time the variable display is executed. It may be sent to. Further, in the feature unit 162SG, an embodiment in which a ball ejection state designation command is provided as a part of the effect control command is exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the present invention is not limited to this, and instead of these ball ejection state designation commands. , A game state designation command corresponding to each ball ejection state (low ball ejection state, first high ball ejection state, second high ball ejection state) may be provided.

Next, the start winning determination process of the feature unit 162SG executed in step S101 of FIG. 6 will be described with reference to FIGS. 11-14. In the start winning determination process, the CPU 103 first turns on the first starting opening switch 22A based on the detection signal from the first starting opening switch 22A provided corresponding to the first starting winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6A. It is determined whether or not it is in a state (step 162SGS101). At this time, if the first start port switch 22A is in the ON state (step 162SGS101; Y), the number of reserved special figure reservations, which is the number of reserved special figure games using the first special figure, is the predetermined upper limit. It is determined whether or not it is a value (for example, "4" as the upper limit storage number) (step 162SGS102). The CPU 103 may specify the first special figure reserved storage number by reading, for example, the first reserved storage number count value which is the stored value of the first reserved storage number counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 162SG154. When the first special figure reserved storage number is not the upper limit value in step 162SGS102 (step 162SGS102; N), for example, the stored value of the start port buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 162SG155 is set to "1" (step 162SGS102; N). Step 162 SGS103).

Variable when the first start port switch 22A is off in step 162SGS101 (step 162SGS101; N) or when the first special figure reserved storage number reaches the upper limit value in step 162SGS102 (step 162SGS102; Y). Based on the detection signal from the second starting port switch 22B provided corresponding to the second starting winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6B, it is determined whether or not the second starting opening switch 22B is in the ON state ( Step 162 SGS104). At this time, if the second start port switch 22B is in the ON state (step 162SGS104; Y), the second special figure reserved storage number, which is the reserved storage number of the special figure game using the second special figure, is a predetermined upper limit. It is determined whether or not it is a value (for example, "4" as the upper limit storage number) (step 162SGS105). The CPU 103 may specify the second special figure reserved storage number by reading, for example, the second reserved storage number count value which is the stored value of the second reserved storage number counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 162SG154. When the second special figure reserved storage number is not the upper limit value in step 162SGS105 (step 162SGS105; N), for example, the stored value of the start port buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 162SG155 is set to "2" (step 162SGS105; N). Step 162 SGS106).

After executing any of the processes of step 162SGS103 and step 162SGS106, the number of special figure hold storage corresponding to the start port buffer value, which is the storage value of the start port buffer, is updated to be added by 1 (step 162SGS107). For example, when the start port buffer value is "1", the first hold storage count value is added by 1, while when the start port buffer value is "2", the second hold storage count value is added by 1. In this way, the first reserved memory count value is set to 1 when the game ball passes (enters) the first start winning opening and the first start condition corresponding to the special figure game using the first special figure is satisfied. Updated to increase. Further, the second reserved memory count value is set to 1 when the game ball passes (enters) the second start winning opening and the second start condition corresponding to the special figure game using the second special figure is satisfied. Updated to increase. At this time, the total number of reserved storages is also updated to be added by 1 (step 162SGS108). For example, the total hold storage count value, which is the storage value of the total hold storage counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 162SG154, may be updated to be added by 1.

After executing the process of step 162SGS108, the CPU 103 determines the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result and the jackpot type determination from the numerical data updated by the random number circuit 104 and the random number of the game control counter setting unit 162SG154. Numerical data indicating the random number value MR2 for the purpose and the random number value MR3 for the fluctuation pattern determination are extracted (step 162SGS109). Numerical data indicating each random value extracted in this way is stored by being set as hold information at the beginning of an empty entry in the special figure hold storage unit corresponding to the start port buffer value (step 162SGS110). For example, when the start port buffer value is "1", the first special figure reservation storage unit 162SG151A stores numerical data indicating the random numbers MR1 to MR3, while when the start port buffer value is "2", the start port buffer value is "2". Numerical data indicating random number values MR1 to MR3 are stored in the second special figure reservation storage unit 162SG151B.

Numerical data indicating the random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result and the random value MR2 for determining the jackpot type determine whether or not the variable display result of the special symbol or decorative symbol is "big hit", and further, the variable display result. It is used to determine the type of big hit when it is called "big hit". The random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern is used to determine the variation pattern including the variable display time of the special symbol or the decorative symbol. By executing the process of step 162SGS109, the CPU 103 extracts numerical data indicating all of the random number values used for determining the variable display result including the variable display result of the special symbol and the decorative symbol and the variable display time.

Following the process of step 162SGS110, the transmission setting of the start opening winning designation command according to the start opening buffer value is performed (step 162SGS111). For example, when the start port buffer value is "1", the storage address of the first start port winning designation command table in the ROM 101 is stored in the buffer area specified by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer. 12 is set to send the first start opening winning designation command. On the other hand, when the start port buffer value is "2", the storage address of the second start port winning designation command table in the ROM 101 is stored in the buffer area of the transmission command buffer, so that the effect control board 12 can be used. The setting for sending the second start opening prize designation command is made. The start port winning designation command set in this way is executed from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by, for example, executing the command control process in step S27 shown in FIG. 5 after the special symbol process process is completed. Be transmitted.

Following the process of step 162SGS111, the winning random number value determination process is executed (step 162SGS112). After that, for example, by storing the storage address of the hold storage number notification command table in the ROM 101 in the buffer area designated by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer, the hold storage number notification command is transmitted to the effect control board 12. (Step 162 SGS113). The hold storage number notification command set in this way is executed from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by, for example, executing the command control process in step S27 shown in FIG. 5 after the special symbol process process is completed. Be transmitted.

After executing the process of step 162SGS113, it is determined whether or not the start port buffer value is "1" (step 162SGS114). At this time, if the start port buffer value is "1" (step 162SGS114; Y), the start port buffer is cleared, the stored value is initialized to "0" (step 162SGS115), and then the process of step 162SGS104 is performed. move on. On the other hand, when the start port buffer value is "2" (step 162SGS114; N), the start port buffer is cleared, the stored value is initialized to "0" (step 162SGS116), and then the start prize is won. End the process. As a result, even when both the first start port switch 22A and the second start port switch 22B detect a valid start prize for the game ball at the same time, the process based on the detection of both valid start prizes can be surely completed.

FIG. 11-15 (A) is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step 162SGS112 of FIG. 11-14 as the winning random number value determination process. When the variable display of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is started in the feature unit 162SG, the special symbol display result (variable display of the special symbol) is performed by the special symbol normal processing (step S110 in FIG. 6, FIG. 11-16) described later. The result) is regarded as a "big hit", and it is determined whether or not to control the big hit gaming state. Further, in the variation pattern setting process (step S111 in FIG. 6, FIG. 11-17) described later, the determination of the variation pattern that specifically defines the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is performed. On the other hand, apart from these determinations, the CPU 103 executes the winning random number value determination processing in step 162SGS112 at the timing when the game ball is detected at the starting winning opening (first starting winning opening or second starting winning opening). As a result, it is determined whether or not it is determined that the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed as a result of displaying the special symbol, and whether or not the variable display mode of the decorative symbol becomes a predetermined display mode accompanied by super reach. As a result, before the variable display of the special symbol or the decorative symbol based on the detection of the game ball that has entered the start winning opening is started, that is, whether or not to make a big hit at the start of the variable display is determined. Before, it is determined whether the special figure display result is a "big hit" or the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is the variable display mode of which category, and based on this determination result, the effect control CPU 120 or the like determines. , As will be described later, advance notice effects such as pre-reading advance notice effects will be executed.

In the winning random number value determination process shown in FIG. 11-15 (A), the game control microcomputer 100 (CPU103) first determines the state of the time saving flag and the probability change flag provided in, for example, the game control flag setting unit 162SG152. By confirming or the like, the current gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 162SG001 is specified (step 162SGS121). The CPU 103 identifies that it is in the probabilistic state when the probabilistic flag is on, identifies that it is in the probabilistic state when the probabilistic flag is off and the time saving flag is on, and both the probabilistic flag and the time saving flag are in the time saving state. When it is off, it may be specified that it is in the normal state.

Following the process of step 162SGS121, the display result determination table 1 shown in FIG. 11-4 is selected and set (step 162SGS122). After that, it is determined whether or not the numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result extracted in step 162SGS109 of FIG. 11-14 is within the predetermined jackpot determination range (step 162SGS123). In the jackpot determination range, individual determination values assigned to the special figure display result of "big hit" in the display result determination table 1 selected by the process of step 162SGS 122 are set, and the CPU 103 sets the random number value MR1 and each determination value. It suffices if it can be determined whether or not there is a determination value that matches the random number value MR1 by comparing the above one by one. Alternatively, a numerical value indicating the minimum value (lower limit value) and the maximum value (upper limit value) of the judgment value included in the big hit judgment range is set, and the CPU 103 sets the random number value MR1 and the minimum value or the maximum value of the big hit judgment range. By comparing, it suffices if it can be determined whether or not the random number value MR1 is within the range of the jackpot determination range. At this time, by determining that the random number value MR1 is within the range of the jackpot determination range, it can be determined that the variable display result based on the reserved data including the random number value MR1 is determined as "big hit".

When it is determined in step 162SGS123 that the jackpot is not within the jackpot determination range, that is, when it is determined that the jackpot is not achieved in the variable display (step 162SGS123; N), the display result determination table 2 shown in FIG. 11-4 is displayed. Select and set (step 162SGS124). After that, it is determined whether or not the numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result extracted in step 162SGS109 of FIG. 11-14 is within the predetermined small hit determination range (step 162SGS125).

When the numerical data indicating the random value MR1 is within the predetermined small hit determination range, that is, when it is determined to be a small hit in the variable display (step 162SGS125; Y), the variable display result is "small hit". The transmission setting of the sixth symbol designation command, which is the symbol designation command corresponding to the above, is executed (step 162SGS126), the variation pattern determination table for special hits is selected and set (step 162SGS127), and the process proceeds to step 162SGS138. ..

If the numerical data indicating the random value MR1 is not within the predetermined small hit judgment range, that is, if the variable display result is "missing" in the variable display, the symbol corresponding to the variable display result being "missing". The transmission setting of the first symbol designation command, which is a designated command, is executed (step 162SGS128), and it is determined whether or not the time saving flag is on, that is, whether or not the current gaming state is the time saving state (step). 162SGS129). When the time reduction flag is off (step 162SGS129; N), the deviation pattern determination table A is selected and set, and when the time reduction flag is on (step 162SGS129; Y), the deviation pattern determination table A is selected and set. Table D is selected and set (step 162SGS131). The deviation pattern determination table A is an deviation variation pattern determination table used when the number of reserved storages is 2 or less. Further, the deviation pattern determination table D is an deviation variation pattern determination table used when the gaming state is a high base state in which the time saving control is executed.

In the feature unit 162SG, in addition to the deviation pattern determination table A and the deviation variation pattern determination table D, the deviation pattern determination table B used when the number of reserved storages is three is used. , The deviation pattern determination table C used when the number of reserved storages is 4, is prepared in advance. However, as shown in FIGS. 11-7, these are out of the deviation pattern determination tables A to C. In the deviation pattern determination table A, 600 determination values from 0 to 599 are assigned to the non-reach variation pattern within the range that the random value MR3 for the variation pattern determination can take. In the variation pattern determination tables B and C, a value exceeding 0 to A is assigned to the non-reach variation pattern within the range that the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern can take. On the other hand, in the deviation pattern determination tables A to C, 97 small determination values from 901 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach within the range that the random number value MR3 for the variation pattern determination can take. ..

Therefore, by determining the variation pattern using the deviation pattern determination table A in step 162SGS126, the determination of non-reach and super reach is always non-reach or super reach even if the reserved storage number changes after the determination. Therefore, in the determination at the time of starting winning, the variation pattern determination table A for loss is used for determination.

Further, when it is determined in step 162SGS123 that the jackpot is within the jackpot determination range, that is, when it is determined to be a jackpot during variable display (step 162SGS123; Y), as shown in FIG. 11-15 (A). , The jackpot type is determined based on the random value MR2 for determining the jackpot type (step 162SGS132). At this time, the CPU 103 responds to the fluctuation special figure (“first special figure” corresponding to “1” or “second special figure” corresponding to “2”) specified corresponding to the start port buffer value. , Select the jackpot type determination table data from the table data that constitutes the jackpot type determination table. Then, by referring to the selected jackpot type determination table data, it is determined which of the plurality of types the jackpot type is determined.

In addition, a symbol designation command according to the determined jackpot type, that is, a second symbol designation command when the probability variation jackpot A, a third symbol designation command when the probability variation jackpot B, and a probability variation jackpot C. Executes the transmission setting of the 4th symbol designation command, and if it is a non-variable jackpot, the transmission setting of the 5th symbol designation command (step 162SGS133), and then determines whether or not the determined jackpot type is a non-variable jackpot. (Step 162 SGS134a). When the determined jackpot type is a non-probability variation jackpot (step 162SGS134a; Y), the jackpot variation pattern determination table A is selected and set as a table for determining the jackpot variation pattern (step 162SGS135), and the step is performed. Proceed to 162SGS138.

Further, when the determined jackpot type is not a non-probability change jackpot (step 162SGS134a; N), it is further determined whether or not the determined jackpot type is a probability variation jackpot A or a probability variation jackpot B (step 162SGS134b).

When the determined jackpot type is probability variation jackpot A or probability variation jackpot B (step 162SGS134b; Y), the jackpot variation pattern determination table B is selected and set as a table for determining the jackpot variation pattern (step). 162SGS136), the process proceeds to step 162SGS138.

When the determined jackpot type is not the probability variation jackpot A or the probability variation jackpot B (step 162SGS134b; N), that is, when the determined jackpot type is the probability variation jackpot C, the special hit variation pattern determination table is selected and set. (Step 162SGS137), and the process proceeds to step 162SGS138.

After executing any of the processes of step 162SGS127, step 162SGS130, step 162SGS131, step 162SGS135, step 162SGS136, and step 162SGS137, each fluctuation pattern determination table set in each of these steps and the random number value MR3 for fluctuation pattern determination are executed. (Step 162SGS138), the variation category according to the range of the determination value including the random number value MR3 is determined by using the numerical data indicating the above. In this feature unit 162SG, as shown in FIG. 11-15 (B), when at least the variable display result is "off", the variable display mode is "non-reach" in common regardless of the total number of reserved storages. A variable category that is a variable display mode of "super reach", a variable category that is a variable display mode other than "non-reach" and "super reach" (for example, normal reach), and a variable category of "other" that is a variable display mode other than "non-reach" and "super reach" are provided. It suffices if it can be determined whether or not such a fluctuation category is determined based on the random number value MR3.

After that, the setting for transmitting the variable category designation command according to the determination result by the process of step 162SGS138 to the effect control board 12 is set (step 162SGS132), and then the winning random number value determination process is terminated.

FIG. 11-16 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in S110 of FIG. 6 as the special symbol normal process. In the special symbol normal processing shown in FIGS. 11-16, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the second special figure reserved storage number is “0” (step 162SGS141). The second special figure hold storage number is the hold storage number of the special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 4B. For example, in the process of step 162SGS141, the second reserved storage number count value stored in the game control counter setting unit 162SG154 may be read out, and it may be determined whether or not the read value is “0”.

When the second special figure hold storage number is other than "0" in step 162SGS141 (step 162SGS141; N), the hold stored in the second special figure hold storage unit 162SG151B corresponding to the hold number "1". As the data, numerical data indicating the random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the random value MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and the random value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern are read out (step 162SGS142). The numerical data read at this time may be stored in, for example, a random number buffer for fluctuation and temporarily stored.

Following the process of step 162 SGS142, the second special figure holding memory number and the total holding storage number are subtracted by 1 by subtracting 1 from the second special figure holding storage count value and the total holding storage count value and updating. The data of the second special figure reservation storage unit 162SG151B is updated as well as being updated. Specifically, the random number values MR1 to MR3 stored in the entries lower than the hold number "1" (for example, the entries corresponding to the hold numbers "2" to "4") in the second special figure hold storage unit 162SG151B are stored. The indicated pending data is shifted upward one entry at a time (step 162SGS143).

After that, after updating the variable special map designated buffer value, which is the stored value of the variable special map designated buffer, to "2" (step 162SGS144), the process proceeds to step 162SGS149.

On the other hand, when the second special figure reserved storage number is "0" in step 162SGS141 (step 162SGS141; Y), it is determined whether or not the first special figure reserved storage number is "0" (step 162SGS145). .. The first special figure hold storage number is the hold storage number of the special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 4A. For example, in the process of step 162SGS145, the game control counter setting unit 162SG154 reads the first hold storage number count value stored in the first hold storage number counter, and determines whether or not the read value is "0". Just do it. As described above, the process of step 162SGS145 is executed when it is determined in step 162SGS141 that the second special figure holding storage number is "0", and the first special figure holding storage number is "0". Judge whether or not. As a result, the special figure game using the second special figure is started to be executed with priority over the special figure game using the first special figure.

It should be noted that the special figure game using the second special figure is not limited to the one executed in preference to the special figure game using the first special figure, for example, the first start winning opening and the second starting winning opening. The execution of the special figure game may be started in the order in which the game balls enter (pass) and the start prize is generated. In this case, a table for storing data that can specify the order in which the start winning is generated is provided, and the execution of the special figure game using either the first special figure or the second special figure is started from the stored data. I just need to be able to decide.

When the first special figure hold storage number is other than "0" in step 162SGS145 (step 162SGS145; N), the hold stored in the first special figure hold storage unit 162SG151A corresponding to the hold number "1". As the data, numerical data indicating the random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the random value MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and the random value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern are read out (step 162SGS146). The numerical data read at this time may be stored in, for example, a random number buffer for fluctuation and temporarily stored.

Step 162 Following the processing of SGS146, the first special figure holding memory number and the total holding storage number are subtracted by 1 by subtracting 1 from the first special figure holding storage number count value and the total holding storage number count value and updating. The data of the first special figure reservation storage unit 162SG151A is updated. Specifically, the random number values MR1 to MR3 stored in the entries lower than the hold number "1" (for example, the entries corresponding to the hold numbers "2" to "4") in the first special figure hold storage unit 162SG151A are stored. The indicated pending data is shifted upward one entry at a time (step 162SGS147).

After that, after updating the variable special map designated buffer value, which is the stored value of the variable special map designated buffer, to "1" (step 162SGS148), the process proceeds to step 162SGS149.

In step 162 SGS149, the display result determination table 1 shown in FIG. 11-4 is used as a table for determining whether the special symbol display result, which is the variable display result of the special symbol, is "big hit" or "missing". Select and set. Next, the numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result stored in the random number buffer for fluctuation is compared with the determination value assigned to each special figure display result of "big hit" or "missing". , It is determined whether the special figure display result is "big hit" or "missing" (step 162SGS150a). In this step 162SGS150a, if the gaming state at that time is a high probability state (probability change state) in which the probability change flag is on, the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result is in the high probability state (probability change state). ) Corresponds to the range of 1000 to 12180, it is determined to be a "big hit", and if it is not applicable, it is determined to be "missing". In the low probability state where the probability change flag is off, if the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result falls within the range of 1 to 219, it is judged as "big hit", and if not, it is judged as "missing". judge.

As described above, in the display result determination table 1 selected in step 162SGS149, different determination values are assigned to the "big hit" according to the game state (high probability, low probability) at that time, and thus the step. In the processing of 162SGS150a, the special figure display result is "" using different judgment data (judgment value) depending on whether or not the gaming state when the variable display of the special figure game or the like is started is a high probability state. By determining whether or not to make a "big hit", when the gaming state is in a high probability state, it is determined (determined) to be a "big hit" with a higher probability than in the case of a low probability state.

When it is determined in step 162SGS150a that it is a "big hit" (step 162SGS150a; Y), the big hit flag is turned on in the game control flag setting unit 162SG152 (step 162SGS152). At this time, the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 11-5 (A) is selected and set as a table to be used for determining the jackpot type to one of a plurality of types (step 162SGS153). By referring to the jackpot type determination table set in this way, the numerical data indicating the random number value MR2 for jackpot type determination stored in the variable random number buffer, and the "non-probability variation jackpot" and "probability variation jackpot" in the jackpot type determination table. It is determined which of the plurality of types the jackpot type is to be, depending on which of the determination values assigned to each jackpot type of "A", "probability variation jackpot B", and "probability variation jackpot C" is matched (step 162SGS154). ).

By determining the jackpot type in the process of step 162SGS154, the gaming state after the end of the jackpot gaming state is set to either a time-saving state or a probabilistic state in which the player has a higher advantage than the time-saving state. It will be decided before the definite special symbol as a variable display result is derived. Corresponding to the jackpot type determined in this way, for example, by setting the jackpot type buffer value which is the stored value of the jackpot type buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 162SG155 (step 162SGS155), the determined jackpot type Remember. As an example, if the jackpot type is "non-probability variation jackpot" corresponding to non-probability variation jackpot, the jackpot type buffer value is set to "0", and if it is "probability variation A" corresponding to probability variation jackpot A, it is set to "1". If it is "probability change B" corresponding to B, it may be set to "2", and if it is "probability change C" corresponding to probability change jackpot C, it may be set to "3".

On the other hand, if it is determined in step 162SGS150a that it is not a "big hit" (step 162SGS150a; N), the process proceeds to S150b, and the display result determination table 2 shown in FIG. 11-4 is selected and set. Subsequently, the numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result stored in the random number buffer for fluctuation is compared with the determination value assigned to each special figure display result of "small hit", and the special figure is compared. It is determined whether or not the display result is a "small hit" (step 162SGS150c). In step 162SGS150c, when the variable special figure is the first special figure, it is determined whether or not the special figure display result is "small hit" by using the determination value corresponding to the first special figure. When the variable special figure is the second special figure, it is determined whether or not the special figure display result is "small hit" by using the determination value corresponding to the second special figure.

When it is determined in step 162SGS150c that the special figure display result is "small hit" (step 162SGS150c; Y), the small hit flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 162SG152 is turned on (step 162SGS151).

On the other hand, if it is not determined in step 162SGS150c that the special figure display result is "small hit" (step 162SGS150c; N), the process proceeds to step 162SGS156.

In step 162 SGS156, as a result of the preliminary determination of whether or not to control the big hit gaming state (whether or not the big hit flag is turned on), whether or not to control the small hit gaming state (the small hit flag is turned on). A definite special symbol is set according to the pre-determined result of (whether or not it is done) and the determination result of the jackpot type in the case of the jackpot gaming state. As an example, a special symbol indicating the "-" symbol, which is an outlier symbol, is set as the finalized special symbol in response to the pre-determined result that the special symbol display result is "out of place". Further, when it is determined in step 162SGS150a that the special figure display result is "big hit", when the big hit type in step 162SGS154 is "probability variable big hit A", a special symbol indicating the number "7" is displayed. Set to a confirmed special symbol. When the jackpot type is "probability variation jackpot B", the special symbol indicating the number "5" is set as the confirmed special symbol. When the jackpot type is "non-probability variable jackpot", the special symbol indicating the number "3" is set as the confirmed special symbol. When the jackpot type is "probability variation jackpot C", the special symbol indicating the number "1" is set as the confirmed special symbol. Further, in response to the pre-determined result that the special symbol display result is "small hit", the special symbol indicating the symbol "2" which is the small hit symbol is set as the confirmed special symbol. It should be noted that these confirmed special symbols are examples, and other confirmed special symbols may be set, or a plurality of types of symbols may be set as confirmed special symbols.

After setting the confirmed special symbol in step 162SGS156, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "1" which is a value corresponding to the fluctuation pattern setting process (step 162SGS157), and then the special symbol normal processing is terminated. ..

If the reserved memory number of the special figure game using the first special figure is "0" in step 162SGS145 (step 162SGS145; Y), after performing the predetermined demo display setting (step 162SGS158), The normal processing of the special symbol is terminated. In this demo display setting, for example, an effect control command (customer waiting demo designation command) for designating a demonstration display (demo screen display) by displaying a predetermined effect image on the image display device 5 is an effect control from the main board 11. It is determined whether or not the transmission has been sent to the board 12. At this time, if the customer waiting demo designation command has already been sent, the demo display setting is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it has not been sent, the setting for sending the customer waiting demo designation command is made, and then the demo display setting is terminated.

FIG. 11-17 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S111 of FIG. 6 as the variation pattern setting process. In the fluctuation pattern setting process shown in FIGS. 11-17, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the jackpot flag is turned on (step 162SGS161). Then, if the jackpot flag is turned on (step 162SGS161; Y), the jackpot type is specified from the jackpot type buffer value (step 162SGS162).

Then, it is determined whether or not the specified jackpot type is "probability variation jackpot C" (step 162SGS163), and if it is not "probability variation jackpot C", that is, "probability variation jackpot A", "probability variation jackpot B", "non-probability variation jackpot C". In the case of either "probability variation jackpot" (step 162SGS163; N), the jackpot variation pattern determination table A or the jackpot variation pattern determination table B is selected and set according to the specified jackpot type. Specifically, when the specified jackpot type is "non-probability change jackpot", the fluctuation pattern determination table A for jackpot is selected and set, and the specified jackpot type is "probability variation jackpot A" or "probability variation jackpot B". , The jackpot variation pattern determination table B is selected and set.

On the other hand, when the specified jackpot type is "probability variation jackpot C" (step 162SGS163; Y), the special hit variation pattern determination table is selected and set (step 162SGS165).

In the determination in step 162SGS161, if the big hit flag is not turned on (step 162SGS161; N), it is further determined whether or not the small hit flag is turned on (step 162SGS166). When the small hit flag is turned on (step 162SGS166; Y), the special hit variation pattern determination table is selected and set (step 162SGS167), and the process proceeds to step 162SGS175.

On the other hand, when the small hit flag is off (step 162SGS166; N), the game state is changed to a probable state or a time reduction by determining whether or not the time reduction flag is turned on in the game control flag setting unit 162SG152. It is determined whether or not the time saving control is being performed in the state (step 162SGS168). Then, if the time saving flag is turned on (step 162SGS168; Y), the out-of-order variation pattern determination table D is selected and set as the table to be used for determining the variation pattern to any of a plurality of types (step 162SGS168; Y). Step 162 SGS169).

On the other hand, when the time reduction control is not in progress, that is, when the time reduction flag is not turned on (step 162SGS168; N), for example, the storage of the reserved storage number counter of the fluctuation special figure provided in the game control counter setting unit 162SG154. By reading the value or the like, the reserved storage number of the variable special map is specified, and it is determined whether or not the reserved storage number of the specified variable special map is 1 or 2 (step 162SGS170).

When the number of reserved memory of the specified variation special figure is 1 or 2 (step 162SGS170; N), the deviation pattern determination table A is used as a table to be used for determining the variation pattern to one of a plurality of types. Select and set (step 162SGS171).

Further, when the reserved storage number of the specified variable special figure is not 1 or 2 (step 162SGS170; N), it is further determined whether or not the reserved storage number of the specified variable special figure is 3 (step 162SGS172). ).

When the number of reserved memory of the specified variation special figure is 3 (step 162SGS172; Y), the deviation pattern determination table B is selected as the table to be used for determining the variation pattern to one of a plurality of types. And set (step 162 SGS173).

Further, when the number of reserved memory of the specified variable chart is not 3, that is, when the number of reserved memory of the specified variable chart is 4 (step 162SGS172; N), any one of a plurality of types of fluctuation patterns is used. As the table to be used for determining the above, the deviation pattern determination table C is selected and set (step 162SGS174), and the process proceeds to step 162SGS175.

After executing any of the processes of step 162SGS164, step 162SGS165, step 162SGS167, step 162SGS169, step 162SGS1711, step 162SGS173, and step 162SGS174, for example, the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern stored in the random number buffer for fluctuation or the like. By referring to any of the large hit variation pattern determination table, the special hit variation pattern determination table, or the loss variation pattern determination table A to D selected (set) based on the numerical data indicating Is determined to be one of a plurality of types (step 162SGS175). Even if the fluctuation pattern determined in this case is the same fluctuation pattern, if the value of the ball ejection state flag at that time is "1", the first high ball ejection state corresponds to the first high ball ejection state. The fluctuation pattern of the variable display time with one-step extension adjustment will be determined, and if the value of the ball ejection state flag at that time is "2", it corresponds to the second high ball ejection state. The variation pattern of the variable display time to which the extension adjustment of the second stage is performed will be determined.

That is, in step 162SGS175, the fluctuation pattern of the variable display time is determined according to the value of the ball ejection state flag.

When the jackpot flag is off, the variation pattern is determined in the process of step 162SGS175 to determine whether or not the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is set to "reach". That is, the process of step 162 SGS170 includes a process of determining whether or not to set the variable display state of the decorative symbol to the reach state when the variable display result is “missing”.

After the fluctuation pattern is determined in step 162SGS175, the special symbol game using the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B according to the fluctuation special symbol designation buffer value. A setting is made to start the variation of the special symbol so as to start any of the special symbol games using the second special symbol (step 162SGS176). As an example, if the variable special figure designation buffer value is "1", a setting for transmitting a drive signal for updating the display of the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 4A is performed. On the other hand, if the variable special figure designation buffer value is "2", a setting for transmitting a drive signal for updating the display of the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 4B is made.

Following the process of step 162SGS176, settings for transmitting various commands used at the start of fluctuation of the special symbol are set (step 162SGS177). For example, when the variable special figure designation buffer value is "1", the CPU 103 receives a game state designation command, a first variable start command, a variable pattern designation command, and a variable display result from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. In order to sequentially transmit the designated command and the first hold storage number notification command, the setting data indicating the storage address (start address) in the ROM 101 of the first fluctuation start command table prepared in advance is used as the game control buffer setting unit 162SG155. It is stored in the buffer area specified by the send command pointer in the send command buffer provided in. On the other hand, when the fluctuation special figure designation buffer value is "2", the CPU 103 receives a game state designation command, a second fluctuation start command, a fluctuation pattern designation command, and a variable display result from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. In order to sequentially transmit the designated command and the second reserved storage number notification command, the game control buffer setting unit 162SG155 is provided with the setting data indicating the storage address in the ROM 101 of the second fluctuation start command table prepared in advance. Stores in the buffer area specified by the send command pointer in the send command buffer.

After executing the process of step 162SGS177, the special figure variable display time, which is the variable display time of the special symbol corresponding to the value of the ball ejection state flag, is set for the fluctuation pattern determined in step 162SGS175 (step 162SGS178). The special symbol variable display time, which is the variable display time of the special symbol, is from the start of the variable display of the special symbol in the special symbol game to the stop display of the confirmed special symbol that is the variable display result (special symbol display result). The time required. After that, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "2", which is a value corresponding to the special symbol variation processing (step 162SGS179), and then the variation pattern setting process is terminated.

Based on the command transmission setting in step 162SGS177, every time the command control process of step S27 shown in FIG. 5 is executed after the variation pattern setting process is completed, the game state is played from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. The designated command, the first variable start command or the second variable start command, the variable pattern specification command, the variable display result specification command, the first reserved storage number notification command, or the second reserved storage number notification command will be transmitted in sequence. Become. The order in which these effect control commands are transmitted can be arbitrarily changed. For example, after the variable display result specification command is transmitted first, the first variation start command, the second variation start command, and the variation pattern specification command are transmitted. , The game state designation command, the first hold storage number notification command, the second hold storage number notification command, and the like may be transmitted in this order.

FIG. 11-18 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S113 of FIG. 6 as the special symbol stop process. In the special symbol stop processing, the CPU 103 sets the end flag referred to in the special symbol variation processing in step S113 to the ON state, terminates the variation of the special symbol, and causes the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B. Control is performed to stop and display the stop symbol (step 162SGS180). When the variation special symbol designation buffer value is "1" indicating the first special symbol, the variation of the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A is terminated, and the variation special symbol designation buffer value is changed. When it is "2" indicating the second special symbol, the variation of the second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 4B is terminated. In addition, control is performed to transmit a symbol determination command to the effect control board 12 (step 162SGS181). Then, it is determined whether or not the big hit flag is turned on (step 162SGS182), and when the big hit flag is turned off (step 162SGS182; N), the small hit flag is further turned on. It is determined whether or not it is present (step 162SGS183).

When the small hit flag is turned on, the effect control board 12 is set to send the hit start 5 designated command corresponding to the small hit (step 162SGS190a). Then, a value corresponding to the small hit display time is set in the small hit display time timer (step 162SGS190b). Further, the number of times of opening (for example, twice) is set in the large winning opening opening number counter (step 162SGS190c). Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "8" (step 162SGS190d), which is a value corresponding to the small hit opening pre-processing (step S118), and the special symbol stop processing is terminated.

On the other hand, when the jackpot flag is turned on (step 162SGS182; Y), the CPU 103 clears the probability change flag and the time saving flag to turn it off (step) if the probability change flag and the time saving flag are turned on. 162SGS184), the effect control board 12, the hit start 1 designation command (probability change jackpot A), the hit start 2 designation command (probability change jackpot B), and the hit start 3 designation command (probability change jackpot C) according to the type of jackpot stored in the effect control board 12. ), Set to send the hit start 4 designated command (non-probability change) (step 162SGS185).

Further, the CPU 103 makes settings for transmitting a game state designation command indicating a normal state to the effect control board 12 (step 162SGS186).

Then, a value corresponding to the jackpot display time (time corresponding to the execution period of the fanfare effect for notifying, for example, that the jackpot has occurred in the image display device 5) is set in the jackpot display time timer (step 162SGS187). At this time, as the jackpot display time set in the jackpot display time timer, the jackpot display time corresponding to the ball ejection state flag is set.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 11-21, if the value of the ball ejection state flag is "0", 30,000 corresponding to the non-extended fanfare production period corresponding to the low ball ejection state of 30,000 milliseconds. Milliseconds are set as the jackpot display time.

If the value of the payout state flag is "1", 40,000 milliseconds corresponding to the fanfare production period of the first stage extension corresponding to the first high payout state is set as the jackpot display time. If the value of the payout state flag is "2", the jackpot display time is set to 60,000 milliseconds corresponding to the fanfare production period of the second stage extension corresponding to the second high payout state. ..

Then, the number of times of opening (for example, 10 times in the case of non-probability big hit or probability change big hit A, 5 times in the case of probability change big hit B, and 2 times in the case of probability change big hit C) is set in the big winning opening opening number counter. After that (step 162SGS188), the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "4" corresponding to the jackpot opening preprocessing (step S114) (step 162SGS189).

On the other hand, when the small hit flag is off (step 162SGS183; N), in step 162SGS190, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the value of the time reduction counter is "0". Although not particularly shown in this feature unit 162SG, when the jackpot type of the jackpot game completed in the jackpot game end process is the probability variation jackpot A or the probability variation jackpot B, the CPU 103 has a probability variation flag and a time saving flag. Both are turned on (the game state is controlled to the high accuracy and high base state), and "0" is set as the value of the time reduction counter, and the jackpot type of the jackpot game completed in the jackpot game end process is the probability variation jackpot C. If there is, the probability change flag is turned on (the game state is controlled to the high probability and low base state), and "0" is set as the value of the time reduction counter. Then, when the jackpot type of the jackpot game completed in the jackpot game end process is a non-probability variable jackpot, the CPU 103 turns on the time reduction flag and sets "100" as the value of the time reduction counter. ing. Occasionally, the process proceeds to step 162 SGS196.

On the other hand, when the value of the time reduction counter is not "0" (step 162SGS190; N), that is, in the high base state where the time reduction remains, the value of the time reduction counter is decremented by -1 (step). 162SGS191). Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the time reduction counter after subtraction is "0" (step 162SGS193), and if it is not "0" (step 162SGS193; N), the process proceeds to step 162SGS196, and the value of the time reduction counter is reached. When is "0" (step 162SGS193; Y), after clearing the time saving flag and turning it off (step 162SGS194) in order to end the time saving control, the state of the probability change flag or the time saving flag is supported. After setting the transmission of the game state designation command corresponding to the game state (specifically, low accuracy and low base) (step 162SGS195), the process proceeds to step 162SGS196. With the execution of step 162SGS195, the number of consecutive villas is also reset.

Then, after the determination, the variable display remaining number update process is executed (step 162SGS196). In this post-determination variable display remaining count update process, it is determined whether or not the post-judgment variable display remaining count is "0", and if it is not "0" (when the remaining count exists), the remaining count is set to 1. Subtraction is updated, and if it is "0", the variable display remaining number update process after the determination is terminated.

Next, in step 162SGS197, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "0", which is a value corresponding to the special symbol normal processing, and then the special symbol stop processing is terminated.

FIG. 11-19 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in S117 of FIG. 6 as the jackpot end process.

In the jackpot end process, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the jackpot end display timer is operating, that is, the timer is being counted (step 162SGS201). When the jackpot end display timer is not operating (step 162SGS201; N), a value corresponding to the execution period of the ending effect of displaying the jackpot end on the image display device 5 is set as the jackpot end display time in the jackpot end display timer. (Step 162SGS202), and the process is terminated.

At this time, as the jackpot end display time set in the jackpot end display timer, the jackpot end display time corresponding to the ball ejection status flag is set. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 11-21, if the value of the ball ejection state flag is "0", the timer corresponding to the non-extended ending effect period corresponding to the low ball ejection state is 60,000 milliseconds. The value is set. If the value of the ball ejection state flag is "1", a timer value corresponding to 70,000 milliseconds, which is the ending effect period of the first stage extension corresponding to the first high ball ejection state, is set, and the ball ejection state is set. If the value of the flag is "2", the timer value corresponding to 90000 milliseconds, which is the ending effect period of the second stage extension corresponding to the second high ball output state, is set.

On the other hand, when the big hit end display timer is operating (step 162SGS201; Y), the value of the big hit end display timer is subtracted by 1 (step 162SGS203). Then, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the value of the jackpot end display timer is 0, that is, whether or not the jackpot end display time has elapsed (step 162SGS204). If it has not passed, the process ends.

If the jackpot end display time has elapsed (step 162SGS204; Y), the CPU 103 determines whether the stored jackpot type is a non-probability variable jackpot (step 162SGS205).

When the stored jackpot type is not a non-probability change jackpot (step 162SGS205; N), it is further determined whether or not the stored jackpot type is a probability variation jackpot C (step 162SGS206).

When the stored jackpot type is the probability variation jackpot C (step 162SGS206; Y), after turning on the probability variation flag (step 162SGS210), the process proceeds to step 162SGS213.

On the other hand, when the stored jackpot type is not the probability variation jackpot C, that is, when the jackpot type is the probability variation jackpot A or the probability variation jackpot B (step 162SGS206; N), the probability variation flag is turned on (step 162SGS207). After turning on the time saving flag (step 162SGS208) and setting the time saving number counter to "0" (step 162SGS209), the process proceeds to step 162SGS213.

On the other hand, when the jackpot type is a non-probability variable jackpot (step 162SGS205; Y), by executing step 162SGS211 and step 162SGS212, the time saving flag is turned on and "100" is set in the time saving number counter. After that, the process proceeds to step 162SGS213.

In step 162SGS213, the jackpot flag is turned off, and the transmission setting of the jackpot end designation command according to the jackpot type is set (step 162SGS214). Then, the transmission setting of the game state designation command for notifying the effect control board 12 of the game state based on the probability change flag and the time reduction flag turned on is set (step 162SGS215).

Then, the update process of the number of consecutive villas and the number of consecutive villas after the determination is executed (step 162SGS216). In this update process, specifically, whether the finished jackpot is the first jackpot that occurred in the low base state or the consecutive villa jackpot that occurred in the high base state, for example, the finished jackpot. It is specified from the value of the state flag before the start of big hit (“0” for low base, “1” for high base) corresponding to the state before the occurrence of the first big hit, and if it is the first big hit, it is the number of consecutive villas. Set "1". On the other hand, in the case of a consecutive villa jackpot, since the number of consecutive villas is already a value other than "0", 1 is added and updated to the number of consecutive villas. Further, in the case of a consecutive villa jackpot, if the initial value is set in the number of consecutive villas after the determination, 1 is added and updated to the number of consecutive villas after the determination.

Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "0", which is a value corresponding to the special symbol normal processing (step 162SGS217).

Although not particularly shown in this feature unit 162SG, when the number of round executions has not reached the set upper limit number of times in the jackpot opening post-processing (step S116), the CPU 103 responds to the value of the ball ejection state flag. Set the interval period timer. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 11-21, if the value of the ball ejection state flag is "0", the timer value corresponding to 5000 milliseconds, which is the non-extended interval period corresponding to the low ball ejection state. To set. If the value of the ball ejection state flag is "1", the timer value corresponding to 6000 milliseconds, which is the interval period of the first stage extension corresponding to the first high ball ejection state, is set. If the value of the ball ejection state flag is "2", a timer value corresponding to 7000 milliseconds, which is the interval period of the second stage extension corresponding to the second high ball ejection state, is set.

After setting these timer values in the interval period timer, the CPU 103 subtracts and updates the value of the interval period timer every time the jackpot opening post-processing is executed, and the CPU 103 is large based on the timer out of the interval period timer. While controlling the opening of the winning opening, the value of the special figure process is updated to the value corresponding to the processing during the opening of the big hit, that is, a new round game is started.

As described above, in the present feature unit 162SG, as shown in FIGS. 11-20, in the period from the derivation display of the jackpot symbol to the end of the jackpot game based on the derivation display of the jackpot symbol, the payout state flag is set. Regardless of the value, the round game continues until a certain opening period (for example, 29 seconds) elapses or a certain number of game balls (for example, 10 balls) win the big prize opening. The number of prize balls that can be paid out in each round game does not change according to the value. On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 11-20 and 11-21, the fanfare effect in which the game ball cannot win the prize ball due to the closure of the prize ball, that is, the prize ball cannot be won. The period, interval period, and ending effect period become longer as the value of the ball ejection state flag changes from 0 to 1 to 2.

For this reason, the number of prize balls that can be paid out in each round game does not change according to the value of the payout state flag, so that the number of prize balls that can be acquired by the player does not decrease, and the game balls are large. By changing (prolonging) the fanfare production period, interval period, and ending production period, which are the periods during which prizes cannot be won, according to the value of the payout status flag, the number of prize balls to be paid out per unit time can be increased. It is possible to suppress it.

Next, the processing that can be executed by the effect control CPU 120 will be described.

FIG. 11-22 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S75 of FIG. 8 as the command analysis process. In the command analysis process shown in FIGS. 11-22, the effect control CPU 120 first receives from the main board 11 transmitted via the relay board 15 by confirming the stored contents of the effect control command reception buffer. It is determined whether or not there is a command (step 162SGS221).

If there is a receive command in step 162SGS221 (step 162SGS221; Y), for example, by checking the MODE data of the receive command, it is determined whether or not the receive command is the first start opening winning designation command. (Step 162 SGS222). Then, when the command is the first start opening winning designation command (step 162SGS222; Y), the first hold storage number notification waiting time is set (step 162SGS223). For example, in the process of step 162SGS223, a predetermined timer initial value corresponding to the reception waiting time of the first hold storage number notification command is set in the command reception control timer provided in the effect control timer setting unit 162SG192. Just do it.

If the reception command in step 162SGS222 is not the first start opening winning designation command (step 162SGS222; N), it is determined whether or not the reception command is the second start opening winning designation command (step 162SGS224). Then, when the command is the second start opening winning designation command (step 162SGS224; Y), the second hold storage number notification waiting time is set (step 162SGS225). For example, in the process of step 162SGS225, a predetermined timer initial value corresponding to the reception waiting time of the second hold storage number notification command may be set in the command reception control timer.

If the reception command is not the second start opening winning designation command in step 162SGS224 (step 162SGS224; N), it is determined whether or not the reception command is a symbol designation command (step 162SGS226). If the received command is not a symbol designation command in step 162SGS226 (step 162SGS226; N), it is determined whether or not the received command is a variable category command (step 162SGS227). If the received command is not a variable category command in step 162SGS227 (step 162SGS227; N), it is determined whether or not the received command is the first reserved storage number notification command (step 162SGS228). Then, when it is the first hold storage number notification command (step 162SGS228; Y), the first hold storage number notification waiting time is cleared by, for example, initializing the timekeeping operation by the command reception control timer (step 162SGS229). ..

If the reception command is not the first hold storage number notification command in step 162SGS228 (step 162SGS228; N), it is determined whether or not the reception command is the second hold storage number notification command (step 162SGS230). Then, when it is the second reserved storage number notification command (step 162SGS230; Y), the second reserved storage number notification waiting time is cleared by, for example, initializing the timekeeping operation by the command reception control timer (step 162SGS231). ..

Then, after executing any of the processes of step 162SGS229 and step 162SGS231, "1" indicating that the hold display mode is undecided is set in the display undecided flag of the stored entry (display undecided flag). If there is an unreceived command, the effect restriction flag is set to "1" (the display restriction flag is turned on) (step 162SGS232).

When the reception command is a symbol specification command in step 162SGS226 (step 162SGS226; Y), when the reception command is a variable category command in step 162SGS227 (step 162SGS227; Y), or in step 162SGS223, step 162SGS225, step 162SGS232. After executing any of the processes of, the received command is stored at the beginning of the free area in the start winning command buffer 162SG194A (step 162SGS233) (step 162SGS233), and the process returns to the process of step 162SGS221.

When the hold storage number notification command (first hold storage number notification command or second hold storage number notification command) is received together with the variable display start command (first variable display start command or second variable display start command). , The hold storage number notification command may not be stored in the start winning command receive command buffer 162SG194A. That is, it suffices that the effect control commands received in response to the occurrence of the start winning can be sequentially stored from the beginning of the free area in the start winning command buffer 162SG194A.

If the reception command is not the second hold storage number notification command in step 162SGS230 (step 162SGS230; N), settings are made according to other reception commands (step 162SGS234), and then the process returns to step 162SGS221. For example, when the reception command is a ball ejection state designation command, the effect control CPU 120 specifies the ball ejection state from the ball ejection state designation command in the process of step 162SGS234, and responds to the specified ball ejection state. Processing such as turning the flag on may be executed. By doing so, the effect control CPU 120 can specify the ball ejection state by referring to the flag.

When there is no receive command in the command reception buffer in step 162SGS221 (step 162SGS221; N), it is determined whether or not the first reserved storage number notification waiting time or the second reserved storage number notification waiting time has elapsed (step 162SGS221; N). 162SGS237). If the first reserved storage number notification waiting time or the second reserved storage number notification waiting time has not elapsed (step 162SGS237; N), the command analysis process is terminated, and the first reserved storage number notification waiting time or the second reserved storage number notification waiting time or the second reserved storage is completed. When the number notification waiting time has elapsed (step 162SGS237; Y), the display undecided flag of the corresponding storage incomplete entry is set to "1" in the effect restriction flag (the display undecided flag is turned on). End the command analysis process.

FIG. 11-23 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S161 of FIG. 9 as the pre-reading notice setting process. In the pre-reading advance notice setting process shown in FIG. 11-23, the effect control CPU 120 first checks the start winning command buffer 162SG194A (step 162SGS241), and whether or not there is a new storage of the command at the time of starting winning. Is determined by whether or not there is an entry in which the display undecided flag is on (step 162SGS242a).

If there is no entry in which the display undecided flag is on (step 162SGS242a; N), the process proceeds to step 162SGS252, and if there is an entry in which the display undecided flag is on (step 162SGS242a; Y), further determination is made. It is determined whether or not the remaining variable display count is equal to or less than the read-ahead limit (step 162SGS242b). When the number of remaining variable displays after determination is equal to or less than the pre-reading limit (step 162SGS242b; Y), by proceeding to step 162SGS250, "0" corresponding to the normal display mode is set as the hold display flag, as will be described later. It is set.

If the number of remaining variable displays after determination is larger than the number of read-ahead limits (step 162SGS242b; N), whether or not the effect restriction flag of the entry is in the ON state (whether or not "1" is set). Is determined (step 162SGS242c). When the effect restriction flag is on (step 162SGS242c; Y), by proceeding to step 162SGS250, “0” corresponding to the normal display mode is set in the hold display flag, as will be described later.

On the other hand, when the effect restriction flag is off (step 162SGS242b; N), whether or not the symbol designation command of the entry is the 4th symbol designation or the 6th symbol designation command, that is, the symbol designation command is a probable change. It is determined whether or not it is a symbol designation command indicating C or a small hit (step 162SGS243a). When the symbol designation command is a symbol designation command indicating a probability variation big hit C or a small hit (step 162SGS243a; Y), by proceeding to step 162SGS250, "0" corresponding to the normal display mode is set. , Set to the hold display flag. That is, the pre-reading advance notice effect is not executed for the reserved memory that becomes the probabilistic big hit C or the small hit.

On the other hand, if the symbol designation command is not a symbol designation command indicating probability variation big hit C or small hit, whether or not the symbol designation command of the entry is the first symbol designation command, that is, a command indicating that the symbol designation command is off. (Step 162SGS243b). If the symbol designation command of the entry is not the first symbol designation command, that is, if it is a command indicating a jackpot (either a probability variation jackpot A, a probability variation jackpot B, or a non-probability variation jackpot) (step 162SGS243b; N), the entry is concerned. The jackpot type is specified from the symbol specification command of (step 162SGS244).

Then, for example, based on the numerical data indicating the random number value for the look-ahead advance notice effect extracted from the random number circuit 124 or the random counter of the effect control counter setting unit 162SG193 and the jackpot type specified in step 162SGS244, the jackpot pre-reading (not shown) is performed. By referring to the advance notice effect determination table, it is determined whether or not to execute the look-ahead advance notice effect and the display pattern when the look-ahead advance notice effect is executed (step 162SGS245).

In step 162 SGS245, for example, the presence / absence of execution of the pre-reading notice effect and the display pattern (notice type) are determined at the determination ratio as shown in FIG. 11-24 (A). In the setting example of the determination ratio shown in FIG. 11-24 (A), the presence / absence of the pre-reading advance notice effect and the determination ratio of the display pattern (notice type) are different depending on the jackpot type specified in the process of step 162SGS244. ..

Specifically, two types of display patterns α and display patterns β are provided as display patterns (notice types) for the pre-reading notice effect. Of these, when the display pattern of the pre-reading notice effect is determined to be the display pattern α, the hold storage display is displayed in the first hold storage display area 5D or the second hold storage display area 5U as a white square (◇). When the display pattern (notice type) of the pre-reading notice effect is determined to be the display pattern β, the hold storage display is a white star (☆) and the first hold storage display area 5D or the second hold storage display is displayed. Displayed in area 5U.

If the variable display result is a jackpot other than the probabilistic jackpot C, the pre-reading notice effect is not determined to be non-executed, and the execution of the pre-reading notice effect is always determined as the display pattern (notice type). The display pattern (notice type) of either the display pattern α or the display pattern β is determined.

Further, as shown in FIG. 11-24 (A), when the jackpot type is "probability variation jackpot A", the display pattern α determines the ratio at which the display pattern β is determined as the display pattern (notice type). It is set higher than the ratio to be set. On the other hand, when the jackpot type is "probability variation jackpot B" or "non-probability variation jackpot", the ratio at which the display pattern β is determined as the display pattern (notice type) is higher than the ratio at which the display pattern α is determined. It is set low.

With such a setting, when the variable display result is "big hit" and the display pattern β is displayed as the display pattern (notice type), the big hit type is compared with the case where the display pattern α is displayed. The ratio of the probability variation jackpot A is increased, and the player's expectation of becoming the probability variation jackpot A can be increased.

In the feature unit 162SG, when the variable display result is a "big hit" other than the probabilistic big hit C, the hold storage display is displayed in a white square (◇) by always deciding to execute the pre-reading notice effect. The display pattern of either the display pattern α or the display pattern β displayed in the white star shape (☆) is executed, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the variable display result is a probability variation jackpot C. Even in the case of a "big hit" other than the above, a case may be provided in which the non-execution of the pre-reading notice effect is determined in the same manner as in the case where the variable display result is "missing".

Further, in step 162SGS243b, when the symbol designation command of the entry in which the display undecided flag is on is the first symbol designation command, that is, when the command indicates an error (step 162SGS243b; Y), the display is undecided. The variable category indicated by the variable category specification command of the entry in which the flag is on is specified (step 162SGS247). Specifically, if the variation category specification command of the entry is C600H, it is specified as a category of "non-reach" variation pattern, and if it is C601H, it is a category of "super reach" variation pattern. If it is C602H, it may be specified that it is a category of "other" fluctuation patterns including normal reach.

Then, for example, it is not shown based on the numerical data indicating the random number value for the pre-reading advance notice effect extracted from the random number circuit 124 or the random counter of the effect control counter setting unit 162SG193, and the category of the fluctuation pattern specified in step 162SGS247. By referring to the pre-reading notice effect determination table at the time of loss, it is determined whether or not to execute the pre-reading notice effect and the display pattern (notice type) when the pre-reading notice effect is executed (step 162SGS248).

In step 162SGS248, for example, the presence / absence of execution of the pre-reading notice effect and the display pattern (notice type) are determined at the determination ratio as shown in FIG. 11-24 (B). In the setting example of the determination ratio shown in FIG. 11-24 (B), the presence / absence of execution of the pre-reading advance notice effect and the determination ratio of the display pattern (notice type) are determined according to the category of the fluctuation pattern specified in the process of step 162SGS247. It's different.

Specifically, two types of display patterns (notice types) are provided, a display pattern α and a display pattern β. Of these, when the display pattern (notice type) is determined to be the display pattern α, the first reserved storage display area 5D or the second reserved storage display area is represented by a white square (◇) in which the reserved storage display is a specific mode. When it is displayed on 5U and the display pattern (notice type) is determined to be the display pattern β, the first hold storage display area 5D or the second hold is displayed in a white star shape (☆) in which the hold storage display is a specific mode. It is displayed in the storage display area 5U. When the pre-reading notice effect is determined not to be executed, the reserved storage display is displayed in the first reserved storage display area 5D or the second reserved storage display area 5U in a round shape (◯), which is a normal mode.

As shown in FIG. 11-24 (B), when the variable display result is "missing" and the variable pattern category is "other", the variable display result is "missing" and the variable pattern category. The rate at which the pre-reading notice effect is executed (the rate determined other than "no notice effect") is set higher than when is "non-reach". Also, when the variable display result is "off" and the variable pattern category is "super reach", the variable display result is "off" and the variable pattern category is "other". The rate at which the pre-reading notice effect is executed (the rate determined other than "no notice effect") is set high.

When the execution of the pre-reading notice effect is decided when the variable display result is "off", when the variable category is "other", the variable pattern category is "non-reach". Also, the ratio at which the display pattern α is determined is set high. Further, when the category of the fluctuation pattern is "super reach", the rate at which the display pattern α is determined is set higher than when the category of the fluctuation pattern is "other". Further, when the variable display result is "off" and the execution of the pre-reading notice effect is decided, when the variable pattern category is "other", the variable pattern category is "non-reach". The rate at which the display pattern β is determined is set higher than in the case of, and when the fluctuation pattern category is "super reach", the display pattern is higher than when the fluctuation pattern category is "other". The rate at which β is determined is set high.

When the variable display result is "off", the rate at which the pre-reading notice effect is determined to be non-execution regardless of whether the variation pattern category is "non-reach", "other", or "super reach". Is set to the highest, and the ratio at which the pre-reading notice effect is determined to be executed and the display pattern β is determined is set to the lowest.

Further, as shown in FIG. 11-24 (A), when the variable display result is "big hit", the pre-reading advance notice effect is not determined to be non-execution (no advance notice effect), and the pre-reading notice effect is not determined. The ratio at which the advance notice effect is determined to be executed and the display pattern α or the display pattern β is determined is determined by the display pattern α or the display pattern β in any of the fluctuation pattern categories when the variable display result is “missing”. It is set higher than the ratio to be set.

Further, when the variable display result is "off (non-reach)", "off (super reach)", or "off (other)", the display pattern α is determined when the execution of the pre-reading notice effect is determined. Is set higher than the rate at which the display pattern β is determined. On the other hand, when the variable display result is "big hit (probability variation A)" and the execution of the pre-reading notice effect is determined, the ratio at which the display pattern β is determined is the ratio at which the display pattern α is determined. Is set higher than.

When the display pattern α or the display pattern β is executed (displayed) as the display pattern (notice type) of the pre-reading notice effect by such a setting, the display pattern α or the display pattern β is not executed (displayed). The variable display result is more likely to be a "big hit", and especially when the display pattern β is executed (displayed), the variable display result is a "big hit" and the jackpot type is "probability variable jackpot A". Since the ratio of the above is increased, the expectation of the player can be increased.

After the execution of step 162SGS248, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the execution of the look-ahead advance notice effect is determined in step 162SGS247, that is, the display pattern (notice type) is determined to be either the display pattern α or the display pattern β. It is determined whether or not (step 162SGS249).

After the execution of step 162SGS245 or when the execution of the pre-reading notice effect is decided (step 162SGS249; Y), the flag value corresponding to the decided display pattern (notice type) is set in the hold display flag of the entry (step). 162SGS246). Specifically, if the display pattern (notice type) determined in step 162SGS245 or step 162SGS248 is the display pattern α indicating the hold storage display by “◇”, “1” is set in the hold display flag of the entry, and the step If the display pattern (notice type) determined in 162SGS245 or step 162SGS248 is the display pattern β indicating the hold storage display by “☆”, “2” is set in the hold display flag of the entry, and then the process proceeds to step 162SGS251.

If the execution of the pre-reading notice effect is not determined in step 162SGS249 (step 162SGS249; N), after setting the hold display flag of the entry to "0" indicating white "○" (step). 162SGS250), step 162SGS251.

After executing step 162SGS246 or step 162SGS250, the effect control CPU 120 changes the value of the display undecided flag of the entry to "0" (step 162SGS251). After that, the hold display is updated based on the stored contents of the start winning command buffer 162SG194A (step 162SGS252). As a result, the hold storage newly stored in the start winning command buffer 162SG194A is displayed in the display mode corresponding to any of "0", "1", and "2" set in the hold display flag. NS. Further, even when the variable display is executed and the stored contents of the start winning command buffer 162SG194A are shifted, the stored contents of the start winning command buffer 162SG194A after the shift are shifted according to the stored contents of FIG. As shown in A), the hold display of the first hold storage display area 5D and the second hold storage display area 5U provided at the lower position of the image display device 5 is updated.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 11-25 (B), if the number of reserved storages in the first special figure is one, one reserved storage display is displayed. As the display mode of the hold storage display, when the flag value of the hold display flag corresponding to the hold storage is "0", the display mode is "○" as shown in FIG. 11-25 (B). When the flag value of the hold display flag is "1", it is displayed in the display mode of "◇", and when the flag value of the hold display flag is "2", "☆" is displayed. It is displayed in the display mode of. If the number of reserved storages in the first special figure is two, two reserved storage displays are displayed, and each reserved storage display corresponds to a flag value set in the corresponding reserved storage display flag. Is displayed in the first hold storage display area 5D. Further, if the number of reserved storages in the first special figure is three, three reserved storage displays are displayed, and each reserved storage display corresponds to a flag value set in the corresponding reserved storage display flag. Is displayed in the first hold storage display area 5D. Further, if the number of reserved storages in the first special figure is four, four reserved storage displays are displayed, and each reserved storage display corresponds to a flag value set in the corresponding reserved storage display flag. Is displayed in the first hold storage display area 5D.

Further, if the number of the second special figure reserved storage is one, one reserved storage display is displayed. As in the case of the first special figure, when the flag value of the hold display flag corresponding to the hold storage is "0", the display mode of the hold storage display is "○". When the flag value of the hold display flag is "1", it is displayed in the display mode of "◇", and when the flag value of the hold display flag is "2", "☆" is displayed. It is displayed in the mode. If the number of the second special figure reserved storage is two, for example, as shown in FIG. 11-25 (B), two reserved storage displays are displayed, and each reserved storage display is the corresponding reserved storage. As a mode according to the flag value set in the hold display flag of, for example, the second hold storage display in the display mode in which the hold storage display of 1 is "○" and the display mode in which the hold storage display of 1 is "☆". Displayed in area 5U. Further, if the number of reserved storages in the second special figure is three, three reserved storage displays are displayed, and each reserved storage display corresponds to a flag value set in the corresponding reserved storage display flag. Is displayed in the second hold storage display area 5U. Further, if the number of reserved storages in the second special figure is four, four reserved storage displays are displayed, and each reserved storage display corresponds to a flag value set in the corresponding reserved storage display flag. Is displayed in the second hold storage display area 5U.

Then, as shown in FIG. 11-25 (B), the reserved storage display also has a predetermined shift direction (this feature unit) in response to the decrease (consumption) of the reserved storage each time the variable display is executed. In 162SG, it shifts toward the center of the screen).

That is, when the hold memory is consumed in the variable display start setting process described later, which is executed at the start of the variable display, and the hold memory of the start winning command buffer 162SG194A is shifted, the start winning after the shift is started. Based on the hold storage of the receive command buffer 162SG194A, the hold storage display in the first hold storage display area 5D and the second hold storage display area 5U is also shifted and displayed, and there is a new hold storage due to the start winning. In that case, the display pattern of the hold storage is determined and set in the hold display flag, and the first hold storage display area 5D or the second hold is set in the display mode according to the flag value set in the hold display flag. It will be displayed in the storage display area 5U.

Although the feature unit 162SG exemplifies a mode in which the process of step 162SGS252 is executed in the pre-reading notice setting process, the present invention is not limited to this, and the first reserved storage display area 5D thereof is not limited thereto. The process for updating the hold display of the second hold storage display area 5U may be individually executed as a process different from the pre-reading notice setting process (for example, the hold display update process).

Further, in the present feature unit 162SG, it is determined in step 162SGS242 to execute or not execute the pre-reading notice effect in the hold memory in the start winning, provided that the command at the time of the start winning is newly stored. Since the start winning to the first starting winning opening and the starting winning to the second starting winning opening occur at the same time, a new storage of the command at the time of starting winning in both the first special figure and the second special figure in step 162SGS242 If it is determined that there is, that is, if there is an entry in which the display undecided flag is on in both the first special figure hold memory and the second special figure hold memory, both entries are pre-read notice. It is the target of the decision of execution and non-execution of the production. Both the hold memory in which the command at the time of the start winning in the first special figure is newly stored and the hold memory in which the command at the time of the start winning in the second special figure is newly stored are executed and non-executed of the pre-reading notice effect. In the case of a decision target, if there is no entry of the hold display flag of "1" or "2" indicating the execution of the pre-reading notice effect, the hold display of the hold storage of the first special figure and the hold of the second special figure are held. The pre-reading notice effect may be executed at the same time on both sides of the display.

Further, in this feature unit 162SG, when the start winning to the first starting winning opening and the starting winning to the second starting winning opening occur at the same time as described above, the command at the time of starting winning in the first special figure is issued. Both the newly stored hold memory and the newly stored hold memory in which the command at the time of the start winning in the second special figure is newly stored are subject to the determination of execution and non-execution of the pre-reading notice effect, but this is the present invention. In such a case, the execution and non-execution of the pre-reading notice effect in the reserved storage in the first special figure, and the execution and non-execution of the pre-reading notice effect in the reserved storage in the second special figure. You may decide to execute only one of them.

Specifically, when the gaming state is a normal state in which the high opening control is not performed, the determination of execution and non-execution of the pre-reading notice effect in the hold storage in the first special figure is held in the second special figure. Prioritize the execution and non-execution of the pre-reading notice effect in memory. Then, when it is decided to execute the pre-reading notice effect in the reserved memory in the first special figure, the execution of the pre-reading notice effect in the reserved memory in the second special figure is uniquely decided not to be executed, and the first special figure is determined. When it is decided not to execute the pre-reading notice effect in the reserved memory in the figure, it may be decided to execute or not execute the pre-reading notice effect in the reserved storage in the second special figure.

On the other hand, when the gaming state is a time-saving state (high-accuracy high-base state / low-accuracy high-base state) in which high-opening control is performed, execution and non-execution of the pre-reading notice effect in the hold memory in the second special figure. Is prioritized over the decision of execution and non-execution of the pre-reading notice effect in the reserved memory in the first special figure. Then, when it is decided to execute the look-ahead notice effect in the hold memory in the second special figure, the execution of the look-ahead notice effect in the hold memory in the first special figure is uniquely decided not to be executed, and the second special figure is made. When it is decided not to execute the pre-reading notice effect in the reserved memory in the figure, it may be decided to execute or not execute the pre-reading notice effect in the reserved storage in the first special figure.

11-26 is a flowchart showing the variable display start setting process (step S171) in the effect control process process shown in FIG. 9. In the variable display start setting process, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the first variable start command reception flag is on (step 162SGS271). When the first variable start command reception flag is on (step 162SGS271; Y), the buffer numbers “1-0” to “1-4” of the first special figure hold storage in the start winning command buffer 162SG194A are set. The various command data and various flags stored in association with each other are shifted higher by one buffer number (step 162SGS272). The contents of the buffer number "1-0" are deleted because they cannot be shifted because there is no shift destination.

Specifically, the shift is made so that various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "1-1" of the first special figure hold storage are stored in association with the buffer number "1-0". Then, the various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "1-2" of the first special figure hold storage are shifted so as to be stored in association with the buffer number "1-1". 1 Special figure The first special figure is shifted so that various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "1-3" of the hold storage are stored in association with the buffer number "1-2". The various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "1-4" of the hold storage are shifted so as to be stored in association with the buffer number "1-3".

If the first variation start command reception flag is off in step 162SGS271 (step 162SGS271; N), it is determined whether or not the second variation start command reception flag is on (step 162SGS273). When the second variation start command reception flag is off (step 162SGS273; N), the variable display start setting process is terminated, and when the second variation start command reception flag is on (step 162SGS273; Y), Various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer numbers "2-0" to "2-4" of the second special figure hold storage in the received command buffer 162SG194A at the time of starting winning are stored for each buffer number. Shift to higher (step 162SGS274). The contents of the buffer number "2-0" are deleted because they cannot be shifted because there is no shift destination.

Specifically, the shift is made so that various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "2-1" of the second special figure hold storage are stored in association with the buffer number "2-0". Then, the various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "2-2" of the second special figure hold storage are shifted so as to be stored in association with the buffer number "2-1". 2 Special figure The second special figure is shifted so that various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "2-3" of the hold storage are stored in association with the buffer number "2-2". The various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "2-4" of the hold storage are shifted so as to be stored in association with the buffer number "2-3".

After executing step 162SGS272 or step 162SGS274, the effect control CPU 120 reads the variation pattern designation command from the variation pattern designation command storage area (step 162SGS275).

Next, the display result (stop symbol) of the decorative symbol is determined according to the data stored in the display result designation command storage area (that is, the received display result designation command) (step 162SGS276). In this case, the effect control CPU 120 determines the stop symbol of the decorative symbol according to the display result specified by the display result designation command, and stores the data indicating the stopped symbol of the determined decorative symbol in the decorative symbol display result storage area. do.

In the feature unit 162SG, when the received variable display result designation command is the second variable display result designation command corresponding to the probability variation jackpot A, the effect control CPU 120 has, for example, "7" as a stop symbol. ”Determine the combination of decorative symbols (big hit symbols). Further, when the received variable display result specification command is the third variable display result specification command corresponding to the probability variation jackpot B, a plurality of combinations of odd-numbered symbols other than "7" (for example, "111") are used as stop symbols. It is determined from the combination of decorative patterns such as "333", "555", and "999"). Further, when the received variable display result specification command is the fourth variable display result specification command corresponding to the probabilistic big hit C, the stop symbol is "334", "778", etc., which are the same chances as the small hit. Decide from among. Further, when the received variable display result specification command is the fifth variable display result specification command corresponding to the non-probability change jackpot, the effect control CPU 120 has, for example, a decorative symbol in which three symbols are arranged as even symbols as stop symbols. Determine the combination (big hit symbol). Further, when the received variable display result specification command is the sixth variable display result specification command corresponding to a small hit, the stop symbol is "334", "778", etc., which are the same chances as the probability change big hit C. Decide from among. Further, when the received variable display result specification command is the first variable display result specification command corresponding to the outlier, if the variation pattern is a non-reach variation pattern, the three symbols are irregular as stop symbols. If the combination of the symbols other than the above-mentioned chance eyes (missing symbol) is determined and the fluctuation pattern is the reach fluctuation pattern, the combination of the reach-off decorative symbols such as "121" and "464" (missing symbol) is determined. ) Is determined.

In determining these stop symbols, the effect control CPU 120 extracts, for example, a random number for determining the stop symbol, and uses a stop symbol determination table in which data indicating a combination of decorative symbols and a numerical value are associated with each other. Then, the stop symbol of the decorative symbol may be determined. That is, the stop symbol may be determined by selecting data indicating a combination of decorative symbols corresponding to the numerical value corresponding to the extracted random number.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 executes the advance notice effect determination process shown in FIGS. 11-27 to determine whether or not to execute the advance notice effect in the variable display (step 162SGS277). It should be noted that the feature unit 162SG exemplifies a mode in which the execution of any one of the four advance notice effects A to the advance notice effect D can be determined in the advance notice effect determination process, as will be described later. Is not limited to this, and the number of possible advance notice effects may be 3 or less or 5 or more.

In the notice effect determination process of the feature unit 162SG, the effect control CPU 120 first specifies the ball ejection state, and sets the advance notice effect type determination table corresponding to the specified ball ejection state (step 162SGS290). The payout state may be specified, for example, from the value of the flag that was turned on when the payout state designation command was received in the command analysis process.

Here, as shown in FIGS. 11-28, when the effect control CPU 120 specifies the ball ejection state as the low ball ejection state, the notice effect type determination table A is selected, and the ball ejection state is set to the first high. When the ball ejection state is specified, the notice effect type determination table B may be selected, and when the ball ejection state is specified as the second high ball ejection state, the advance notice effect type determination table C may be selected.

Further, the effect control CPU 120 specifies the variable display result and the variable pattern (step 162SGS291). The variable display result is a variable display for designating the variable display result (missing, probabilistic jackpot A, probabilistic jackpot B, probabilistic jackpot C, non-probabilistic jackpot, small hit) transmitted from the main board 11 at the start of variable display. Variable display result specification command for storing the result specification command This can be specified by the variable display result specification command stored in the storage area. Further, as described above, the variation pattern can be specified by the variation pattern specification command stored in the variation pattern specification command storage area.

Then, a random number for determining the advance notice effect is extracted, and whether or not the advance notice effect is executed and the advance notice effect type when the advance notice effect is executed are determined using the advance notice effect type determination table set in step 162SG290 (step 162SGS292).

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 11-28, when the ball ejection state is the low ball ejection state, the advance notice effect type determination table A is used, and if the variable display result is out of reach, 85. %% Decided not to execute the advance notice effect A, 10% decided to execute the advance notice effect A, 5% decided to execute the advance notice effect B, and 0% decided to execute the advance notice effect C. The execution is decided, and the execution of the notice effect D is decided at a rate of 0%. If the variable display result is out of super reach, 20% decides not to execute the advance notice effect, 50% decides to execute the advance notice effect A, and 30% decides to execute the advance notice effect B. It is decided, the execution of the notice effect C is decided at a rate of 0%, and the execution of the notice effect D is decided at a rate of 0%. If the variable display result is a big hit excluding the big hit C, the non-execution of the notice effect is decided at a rate of 10%, the execution of the notice effect A is decided at a rate of 25%, and the notice effect is decided at a rate of 65%. The execution of B is determined, the execution of the advance notice effect C is determined at a rate of 0%, and the execution of the advance notice effect D is determined at a rate of 0%.

In addition, when the ball ejection state is the first high ball ejection state, the advance notice effect type determination table B is used, and if the variable display result is out of reach, the advance notice effect is not executed at a rate of 85%. It is decided, the execution of the notice effect A is decided at the rate of 10%, the execution of the notice effect B is decided at the rate of 5%, the execution of the notice effect C is decided at the rate of 0%, and the execution of the notice effect C is decided at the rate of 0%. The execution of the notice effect D is decided. If the variable display result is out of super reach, 20% decides not to execute the advance notice effect, 50% decides to execute the advance notice effect A, and 25% decides to execute the advance notice effect B. It is decided, the execution of the notice effect C is decided at a rate of 5%, and the execution of the notice effect D is decided at a rate of 0%. If the variable display result is a big hit excluding the big hit C, the non-execution of the notice effect is decided at a rate of 10%, the execution of the notice effect A is decided at a rate of 25%, and the notice effect is decided at a rate of 50%. The execution of B is decided, the execution of the notice effect C is decided at a rate of 15%, and the execution of the notice effect D is decided at a rate of 0%.

In addition, when the ball ejection state is the second high ball ejection state, the advance notice effect type determination table C is used, and if the variable display result is out of reach, the advance notice effect is not executed at a rate of 85%. It is decided, the execution of the notice effect A is decided at the rate of 8%, the execution of the notice effect B is decided at the rate of 4%, the execution of the notice effect C is decided at the rate of 3%, and the execution of the notice effect C is decided at the rate of 0%. The execution of the notice effect D is decided. If the variable display result is out of super reach, 20% decides not to execute the advance notice effect, 45% decides to execute the advance notice effect A, and 20% decides to execute the advance notice effect B. It is decided, the execution of the notice effect C is decided at a rate of 10%, and the execution of the notice effect D is decided at a rate of 0%. If the variable display result is a big hit excluding the big hit C, the non-execution of the notice effect is decided at a rate of 10%, the execution of the notice effect A is decided at a rate of 15%, and the notice effect is decided at a rate of 45%. The execution of B is decided, the execution of the notice effect C is decided at a rate of 20%, and the execution of the notice effect D is decided at a rate of 10%.

That is, as the notice effect in the feature unit 162SG, the notice effect D has the highest jackpot expectation (the ratio at which the variable display result becomes a jackpot), and the notice effect C has a larger hit expectation than the notice effect D. It is set low, the notice effect B is set to have a lower jackpot expectation than the notice effect C, and the notice effect A is set to have a lower jackpot expectation than the notice effect B. When the notice effect is not executed, the jackpot expectation is set lower than when any of the notice effects is executed (big hit expectation: notice effect D> notice effect C> notice effect B> notice effect). A> Notice production not executed).

In addition, paying attention to the number of advance notice effects that can be executed in each payout state, there are two advance notice effects that can be executed in the low payout state, the notice effect A and the notice effect B, and can be executed in the first high payout state. There are three notice effects: notice effect A, notice effect B, and notice effect C. There are four. That is, in this feature unit 162SG, the advance notice effect that can be executed during the variable display increases by continuing the consecutive villa state after the first hit occurs, so that the game is delayed during the consecutive villa. It is possible to suppress the deterioration of the game entertainment due to the storage.

In particular, in the second high ball output state, the notice effect D for determining that the variable display result is a big hit can be executed, so that the notice effect D is executed during the variable display in the second high ball output state. It is possible to draw the player's attention to whether or not it is played, and it is possible to improve the game interest.

Returning to FIG. 11-27, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the execution of the advance notice effect is determined after the execution of step 162SGS292 (step 162SGS293). If the execution of the advance notice effect has not been decided (step 162SGS293; N), the advance notice effect determination process ends. When it is decided to execute the advance notice effect (step 162SGS293; Y), the advance notice effect type determined in step 162SGS292 is stored (step 162SGS294), the advance notice effect execution decision flag is turned on (step 162SGS295), and the advance notice is given. The production determination process is completed.

After executing the advance notice effect determination process, the effect control CPU 120 returns to the variable display start setting process shown in FIGS. 11-26, and in step 162SGS278, whether the effect control CPU 120 has the advance notice effect execution decision flag turned on. That is, it is determined whether or not the advance notice effect of either "notice effect A" or "notice effect B" is determined in the advance notice effect determination process of step 162SGS277.

When the advance notice effect execution decision flag is turned on, the process proceeds to step 162SGS279, the timer for waiting for the advance notice effect is set to a value corresponding to the period until the start of the advance notice effect (step 162SGS279), and the advance notice effect is executed. The determination flag is turned off (step 162SGS280), and the process proceeds to step 162SGS281. On the other hand, when the advance notice effect execution determination flag is off, the process proceeds to step 162SGS281 without going through step 162SGS279 and step 162SGS280.

As for the period until the start of the advance notice effect, the feature unit 162SG performs an effect (not shown) showing a sign of execution of the advance notice effect before the timing when the advance notice effect is started, and starts the advance notice effect. Since the timing is set as the start timing of the advance notice effect, a period shorter than the period until the advance notice effect is started is set, and the start timing of these advance notice effects is the process table of the advance notice effect executed from the start of the advance notice effect. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the present invention is not limited to this, and when these precursory effects are not performed in the advance notice effect, the advance notice effect is provided. Since the start timing is the start timing of the advance notice effect, the period until the start timing of the advance notice effect may be set in the timer for waiting for the start of the advance notice effect.

In step 162 SGS281, the effect control CPU 120 specifies a ball ejection state and selects an effect control pattern (process table) corresponding to the specified ball ejection state and the variation pattern designation command. Then, the process timer in the process data 1 of the selected process table is started (step 162SGS282).

In addition, in step 162SGS281, the effect control CPU 120 may specify the output state by referring to the value of the effect ball ejection state flag set in the process of step 162SGS234 of the command analysis process.

In the process table, display control execution data for controlling the display of the image display device 5, lamp control execution data for controlling the lighting of each LED, and sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R are controlled. The sound control execution data, the operation unit control execution data for controlling the operation of the push button 31B and the stick controller 31A, etc. are sequentially arranged in chronological order in association with each process data n (1 to N). There is.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 performs an effect device (image display as an effect component) according to the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound control execution data 1, operation unit control execution data 1). Control of the device 5, various lamps as production parts, speakers 8L, 8R as production parts, and operation units (push button 31B, stick controller 31A, etc.) is executed (step 162SGS283). For example, the image display device 5 outputs a command to the display control unit 123 in order to display an image corresponding to the fluctuation pattern. Further, in order to control lighting / extinguishing of various lamps, a control signal (lamp control execution data) is output to the lamp control board 14. Further, in order to output the voice from the speakers 8L and 8R, the control signal (sound number data) is output to the voice control board 13.

In this embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 controls the variation pattern specification command so that the decorative pattern is variably displayed according to the variation pattern corresponding to one-to-one, but the effect control CPU 120 specifies the variation pattern. The fluctuation pattern to be used may be selected from a plurality of types of fluctuation patterns corresponding to the command.

Then, a value corresponding to the variable display time specified by the specified ball ejection state and the fluctuation pattern designation command is set in the variable display time timer (step 162SGS284). Further, a predetermined time is set in the variable display control timer (step 162SGS285). The predetermined time is, for example, 30 ms, and each time the predetermined time elapses, the effect control CPU 120 writes image data indicating the display state of the decorative symbol on the left, middle, and right to the VRAM, and the display control unit 123 writes to the VRAM. A signal corresponding to the image data is output to the image display device 5, and the image display device 5 displays an image corresponding to the signal, whereby variable display (variation) of the decorative pattern is realized. Next, the value of the effect control process flag is set to a value corresponding to the effect processing during variable display (step S172) (step 162 SGS286).

By executing the variable display start setting process by the effect control CPU 120 as described above, in the feature unit 162SG, the ball ejection state is any of the low ball ejection state, the first high ball ejection state, and the second high ball ejection state. Even so, it is possible to execute the variable display of the decorative symbol in conjunction with the variable display time of the special figure. In addition, in this feature unit 162SG, the effect control CPU 120 exemplifies a form in which a variable display of a decorative symbol according to a ball ejection state can be executed by a value of a ball ejection state flag for effect and a variation pattern specification command. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the CPU 103 specifies a variation pattern determination state that specifies in which ball ejection state the variation pattern specification command is determined together with the variation pattern specification command. A command can be transmitted to the effect control board 12 (effect control CPU 120), and each time the effect control CPU 120 receives these variation pattern specification commands and variation pattern determination state specification commands, a decorative pattern corresponding to the ball ejection state is received. You may want to perform a variable display of.

FIG. 11-29 is a flowchart showing the effect processing during variable display (step S172) in the effect control process process. In the effect processing during variable display, the effect control CPU 120 sets the respective values of the process timer, the variable display time timer, and the variable display control timer to -1 (step 162SGS301, step 162SGS302, step 162SGS303). Further, in the effect control CPU 120, the timer for waiting for the start of the advance notice effect is set (it is determined to perform the advance notice effect), or the advance notice effect execution flag is on (during the execution of the advance notice effect). If there is) (step 162SGS304; Y), the advance notice effect processing is executed (step 162SGS305). If neither the timer for waiting for the start of the advance notice effect nor the flag for executing the advance notice effect is off, the process proceeds to step 162SGS306 without executing the advance notice effect process in step 162SGS305.

In step 162 SGS306, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the process timer has timered out. If the process timer is out, the process data is switched (step 162SGS307). That is, the process timer is started again by setting the next set process timer setting value in the process table to the process timer (step 162SGS308). Further, the control state for the effect device (effect component) is changed based on the display control execution data, the lamp control execution data, the sound control execution data, the operation unit control data, etc., which are set next (step 162SGS309a). On the other hand, when the process timer is not timer-out, the effect device (for effect) is according to the contents of the process data corresponding to the process timer (display control execution data, lamp control execution data, sound control execution data, operation unit control data, etc.). The control of the component) is executed (step 162SGS309b).

Next, it is confirmed whether or not the variable display control timer is out of the timer (step 162SGS310). When the variable display control timer is out of the timer (step 162SGS310; Y), the effect control CPU 120 displays the next display screen of the decorative symbol on the left, middle, and right (30 ms after the previous display switching of the decorative symbol). The image data of the screen to be displayed) is created and written in a predetermined area of the VRAM (step 162SGS311). In this way, the image display device 5 realizes variable display control of the decorative pattern. The display control unit 123 transmits a signal based on data obtained by superimposing image data of a predetermined area such as a set background image and image data based on display control execution data set in the process table to the image display device 5. Output. In this way, the image display device 5 displays the background image, the character image, and the decorative pattern in the variation of the decorative pattern. Further, the predetermined value is reset in the variable display control timer (step 162SGS312).

Further, when the variable display control timer is not timer-out (step 162SGS310; N), after the execution of step 162SGS312, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the variable display time timer is timer-out (step 162SGS313). .. If the variable display time timer is out of the timer, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the special figure hit wait process (step S173) (step 162SGS315). Even if the variable display time timer is not out, if the confirmation command reception flag indicating that the symbol confirmation designation command has been received is in the ON state (step 162SGS314; Y), the value of the effect control process flag is set as a special figure. The value is updated according to the wait process (step S173) (step 162SGS315). Even if the variable display time timer is not out of the timer, the control shifts to stop the fluctuation when the symbol confirmation specification command is received. Therefore, for example, the fluctuation pattern specification command that indicates a long fluctuation time due to noise between the boards. Is received, the variable display of the decorative symbol can be terminated when the regular variable display time has elapsed (at the end of the variable display of the special symbol).

In the process table used for the variable display control of the decorative symbol, the process data during the variable display of the decorative symbol is set. That is, the sum of the process timer setting values of the process data 1 to n in the process table corresponds to the variable display time of the decorative symbol. Therefore, when the process timer of the last process data n in the process of step 162 SGS306 times out, there is no process data (display control execution data, lamp control execution data, etc.) to be switched, and variable display control of the decorative symbol based on the process table. Is finished.

When the advance notice effect is executed with the advance notice effect start waiting timer set, the effect control CPU 120 first subtracts and updates the value of the advance notice effect start wait timer in the advance notice effect process, and starts the advance notice effect. Determines whether the wait timer has timed out. When the timer for waiting for the start of the advance notice effect times out, that is, when the start timing of the advance notice effect is reached, the process table for the advance notice effect according to the type of the advance notice effect determined to be executed is selected, and the process for the advance notice effect is selected. Start the timer. That is, the effect device is controlled according to the content of the first process data in the advance notice effect process table. In addition, the advance notice effect processing is terminated with the advance notice effect execution flag turned on.

Then, when the advance notice effect is executed when the advance notice effect execution flag is on, the effect control CPU 120 performs subtraction update of the process timer for the advance notice effect, and the process timer for the advance notice effect is timer-out. Judge whether or not. If the process timer for the advance notice effect is not timered out, the control of the effector is executed according to the contents of the process data corresponding to the process timer being executed, and if the process timer for the advance notice effect is out of the timer. , Switch process data. At this time, the effect control CPU 120 may start the process timer for the next advance notice effect again and control the effect device according to the contents of the next process data. By executing the advance notice effect processing as described above, the advance notice effect can be executed during the variable display.

In the above-mentioned feature unit 162SG, the high ball ejection state notification LED 162SG071 exemplifies a mode in which only lighting / extinguishing is performed, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, a high ball ejection state. When the variable display time extension adjustment is executed because the variable display is executed in, but the jackpot period extension adjustment is not executed because it is not in the jackpot state, it lights up in green (first mode) and is high output. When the jackpot period extension adjustment is executed due to the jackpot state in the ball state, but the variable display time extension adjustment is not executed because the variable display is not executed, the light is turned on in red (second mode). Then, it may be possible to confirm (understand) which adjustment is being executed.

Further, in the above-mentioned feature unit 162SG, the value of the ball ejection state flag is continuously updated from 0 → 1 → 2 in the continuous villa state (the ball ejection state is the first high ball ejection state from the low ball ejection state). By prolonging the fanfare production period, interval period, and ending production period of the jackpot game during the consecutive villa state, depending on the state and changing to the second high ball output), the ball output per unit time The embodiment in which the number is suppressed, that is, the speed at which the prize balls are given is reduced has been exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, in the first high ball output state and the second high ball output state, the low output is achieved. Special figure such as fluctuation pattern of super reach than ball state The fluctuation pattern is controlled to the big hit game state by determining the fluctuation pattern using the fluctuation pattern judgment table for high ball output state where the determination rate of the fluctuation pattern is long. It is also possible to extend the period until the game is completed and reduce the number of balls to be played per unit time.

Further, it is determined that the pre-reading notice effect can be executed for a form in which the fluctuation pattern can be determined using the fluctuation pattern determination table for the high ball ejection state in the first high ball ejection state and the second high ball ejection state. When the pending storage of the variable display that is executed after the remaining number of variable display after judgment becomes 0 when the remaining number of variable display after judgment is still set to a value of 1 or more, the effect pattern of the pre-reading notice effect There is a large difference between the variation pattern suggested by (Variable display is executed according to the variation pattern of reach, etc.), and there is a risk that the pre-reading notice effect will be inappropriate.

Therefore, as shown in step 162SGS242a of the pre-reading notice setting process (see FIG. 11-23) of the above-mentioned feature unit 162SG, when the variable display remaining number after determination is equal to or less than the pre-reading limit number, the pre-reading notice effect is executed. By limiting, the look-ahead notice effect is inappropriate by preventing a large difference between the variation pattern suggested by the effect pattern of the look-ahead advance notice effect and the variation pattern actually selected in the variable display. It can be prevented from becoming.

Further, although not particularly shown in the feature unit 162SG, the effect control CPU 120 refers to the value of the effect ball ejection state flag in the jackpot middle effect process shown in FIG. 9, and the value of the effect ball ejection state flag. By selecting the process table for the fanfare effect according to the above and controlling the effect device according to the value of the process timer, the fanfare effect according to the ball ejection state may be executed.

Further, although not particularly shown in the feature unit 162SG, the effect control CPU 120 refers to the value of the effect payout state flag in the ending effect process shown in FIG. 9, and sets the value of the effect payout state flag. The ending effect according to the ball ejection state may be executed by selecting the corresponding process table for the ending effect and controlling the effect device according to the value of the process timer.

As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the feature unit 162SG, the CPU 103 executes the ball ejection state determination process shown in FIGS. 11-13 to determine whether the ball ejection state is a low ball ejection state or a high ball ejection state. If it is determined that the ball ejection state is the high ball ejection state, the value of the ball ejection state flag is set to the high ball ejection state from "0" corresponding to the low ball ejection state. By setting the value according to "1", the fanfare production period, interval period, and ending production period during the jackpot game are lengthened (adjustment to reduce the payout speed of prize balls per unit time is started. ) Is possible. In addition, after setting the ball ejection status flag to "1", the value of the ball ejection status flag is set to "0" based on the fact that the variable display is executed 100 times, that is, the ball ejection state is set to high. By updating from the payout state to the low payout state, the fanfare production period, interval period, and ending production period during the big hit game are returned to the original period (the adjustment to reduce the payout speed of the prize ball per unit time is completed. ). For this reason, it is possible to reduce the number of prize balls paid out per unit time during the period of consecutive villas, and it is possible to prevent excessive increase in gambling due to excessive prize balls being paid out in a short period of time. ..

Further, in this feature unit 162SG, when the value of the ball ejection state flag is set from "0" to "1", as shown in FIG. 11-8, only the special figure variable display time of the non-reach fluctuation pattern is set. By prolonging the period and not prolonging the special figure variable display time of the fluctuation pattern of normal reach and super reach, the increase in the amount of data related to variable display is suppressed, and the variable display time of super reach and normal reach is lengthened. It prevents the decline of interest due to this.

In addition, in this feature unit 162SG, the adjustment to reduce the payout speed of the prize ball per unit time is started by setting the value of the payout state flag from "0" to "1", and the variable display of 100 times is displayed. An example is exemplified in a mode in which the adjustment for reducing the payout speed of the prize ball is terminated by setting the value of the payout state flag to "0" again based on the execution, but the present invention is limited to this. Instead, for example, it is based on the fact that it is equipped with a time measuring means (for example, a real-time clock or a timer) capable of measuring time, and the time measuring means measures a certain time (for example, 15 minutes, 30 minutes, etc.) from the start of the adjustment. The adjustment may be completed. That is, the termination condition in the present invention may be "a certain time has elapsed during the period of the consecutive villa state after the CPU 103 sets the value of the ball ejection state flag to" 1 "".

Further, in the present feature unit 162SG, as an end condition for ending the adjustment for reducing the payout speed of the prize ball per unit time, an example is provided in which only one variable display is executed 100 times. The present invention is not limited to this, and a plurality of termination conditions for ending the adjustment for reducing the payout speed of the prize balls per unit time may be provided. When a plurality of end conditions for terminating the adjustment are provided in this way, the adjustment may be terminated when any one of the end conditions is satisfied, or the adjustment may be terminated when the plurality of end conditions are satisfied. The adjustment may be completed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 11-8, when the value of the ball ejection state flag is set to "1" or "2", that is, the ball ejection state is the first high ball ejection state or the second high ball ejection state. In the state, the special figure variable display time in the fluctuation pattern is set longer than when the value of the ball ejection state flag is set to "0" (when the ball ejection state is the low ball ejection state). Therefore, by prolonging the period required for variable display, it is possible to lengthen the time interval until the variable display result becomes a big hit during the period of the consecutive villa state, and the number of prize balls paid out in the big hit game state can be increased. It is possible to reduce the payout speed of the prize balls during the period of the consecutive villa state without reducing it.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 11-20 and 11-21, when "1" or "2" is set as the value of the ball ejection state flag during the big hit game, the value of the ball ejection state flag is set. The fanfare effect period, interval period, and ending effect period during which the game ball cannot win the big prize opening are set longer than when "0" is set. Therefore, the game ball cannot be won in the big winning opening between each round game during the big hit game without reducing the number of game balls that can be won in each round game according to the value of the ball ejection state flag. The period can be extended, and the payout speed of prize balls per unit time during the period of the consecutive villa state can be reduced.

In this feature unit 162SG, when "1" or "2" is set as the value of the ball ejection state flag, it is a big hit game than when "0" is set as the value of the ball ejection state flag. An example is an example of a form in which a total of three periods of a fanfare production period, an interval period, and an ending production period are lengthened, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the value of the ball ejection state flag is "1" or "1". When "2" is set, any one of the fanfare production period, the interval period, and the ending production period during the jackpot game is set as compared with the case where "0" is set as the value of the ball ejection status flag. The two periods may be lengthened.

Further, in this feature unit 162SG, the value of the ball ejection state flag is updated from 0 to 1 to 2, so that the fanfare effect period, the interval period, and the ending effect period during the big hit game are gradually extended. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, when the value of the ball ejection state flag is updated from "0" to "1", the fanfare effect period, the interval period, and the ending effect period If one or two of these periods are lengthened and the value of the payout status flag is updated from "1" to "2", the remaining period may be lengthened.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 11-11, when the CPU 103 executes the game control main process at the time of starting the pachinko gaming machine 1, if the recovery condition is not satisfied, the CPU 103 sets the value of the payout state flag to a low payout. Since "0" corresponding to the state is set, it is possible to prevent adjustments that reduce the payout speed of the prize balls per unit time from the start of the pachinko gaming machine 1. Furthermore, when the recovery upper limit is established, that is, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started again due to a power failure, "1" or "2" is set as the value of the ball ejection state flag when the power failure occurs. If it is set, the CPU 103 sets "1" or "2" as the value of the ball ejection status flag again, so that the adjustment to reduce the payout speed of the prize ball from the time when the pachinko gaming machine 1 recovers from the power failure is adjusted. Can be resumed.

In this feature unit 162SG, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 recovers from a power failure, if "1" or "2" is set as the value of the ball ejection state flag when the power failure occurs, the CPU 103 ejects a ball. Although the embodiment in which "1" or "2" is set again as the value of the state flag is exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and when the pachinko gaming machine 1 recovers from the power failure, the ball is ejected. It is also possible to set "0" as the value of the state flag, that is, not to execute the adjustment for reducing the payout speed of the prize ball that was executed when the power failure occurred. By doing so, it is possible to reduce the amount of data to be stored as backup data when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is disconnected.

Further, as shown in FIG. 11-13, when the CPU 103 determines in the ball ejection state determination process that the ball ejection state is in a high ball ejection state, the high ball ejection state notification LED 162SG071 is started to be lit by the control of the CPU 103. It is possible to recognize from outside the pachinko gaming machine 1 that the adjustment for reducing the payout speed of the prize ball is being executed by lighting the high payout state notification LED 162SG071.

Although the feature unit 162SG exemplifies a mode in which the high ball ejection state notification LED 162SG071 can be turned on under the control of the CPU 103, the present invention is not limited to this, and the high ball ejection state notification LED 162SG071 is an effect control. It may be an LED that can be turned on by the control of the CPU 120. In this case, for example, the game control means (CPU103) can transmit control information (effect control command) capable of specifying whether or not the high-granted state is provided to the effect control means (effect control CPU 120). Therefore, the effect control means should be provided with a notification means (high ball output state notification LED 162SG071) capable of notifying that the control is controlled to the high grant state according to the identification of the high grant state from the control information. Just do it.

Further, the feature unit 162SG exemplifies a mode in which the high ball ejection state notification LED 162SG071 is provided as a notification means capable of notifying that the high ball ejection state (high ball ejection state) is determined in the present invention. Is not limited to this, and the notification means includes a sound output means (for example, speakers 8L, 8R) for notifying that it is determined to be in a high ball ejection state by a specific sound output, and a high ball ejection state. An image display means (for example, an image display device 5) that notifies that a determination has been made by displaying a specific image, and an information output means that can output information (signal) according to the determination of a high ball output state. And so on.

Further, the control cycle for turning on / off the high ball output state notification LED 162SG071 shall be the same as the control cycle for turning on / off the first special symbol display device 4A, the second special symbol display device 4B, and the normal symbol display device 20. Then, the CPU 103 can execute the notification by the high ball output state notification LED 162SG071 by the lighting / extinguishing control common to the first special symbol display device 4A, the second special symbol display device 4B, and the normal symbol display 20. It has become.

Further, the CPU 103 executes the command control process shown in FIG. 5 after executing the transmission setting of the ball ejection state designation command in the ball ejection state determination process shown in FIG. 11-13, whereby the effect control board 12 (effect control) is executed. It is possible to send a ball ejection status specification command to the CPU 120). Then, as shown in FIGS. 11-27 and 11-28, the effect control CPU 120 identifies the ball ejection state from the received ball ejection state designation command in the advance notice effect determination process, and sets the specified ball ejection state to the specified ball ejection state. It is possible to determine whether or not to execute the advance notice effect during the variable display and the effect type of the advance notice effect to be executed by using the corresponding advance notice effect type determination table. In particular, in this feature unit 162SG, a notice effect (preliminary effect type) that can be executed in each of the case where the ball output state is the low ball output state, the first high ball output state, and the second ball output state. Is different, so it is possible to improve the game entertainment by executing the advance notice effect according to these ball ejection states.

In addition, in this feature unit 162SG, as shown in FIG. 11-28, it is executed in the case where the ball ejection state is the low ball ejection state, the first high ball ejection state, and the second ball ejection state. The present invention is not limited to this, and the present invention is not limited to this, and the case where the ball ejection state is the low ball ejection state and the case where the first high ball ejection state is the first high ball ejection state. , In the case of the second payout state, the noticeable effect (notice effect type) that can be executed is the same, but the determination ratio of each notice effect type may be different, and the payout state is low. In any of the cases of the ball state, the first high ball output state, and the second ball output state, the executable advance notice effect (notice effect type) and the determination ratio of each advance notice effect type are the same. There may be.

Further, in the present feature unit 162SG, it is possible to execute a notice effect suggesting that the variable display result becomes a big hit during the variable display, and an example is made in which the executeable notice effect type is different depending on the ball ejection state. However, the present invention is not limited to this, for example, a probability change suggestion effect suggesting that the jackpot game is controlled to a probability change state after the end of the jackpot game, or the jackpot game is up to 10 rounds during the jackpot game. It is possible to execute a continuation suggestion effect that suggests continuation in a plurality of effect types, and the ball ejection state is a low ball ejection state, the first high ball ejection state, and the second high ball ejection state. In some cases, the determination ratios of the effect types that can be executed and the effect types that can be executed as the probabilistic change suggestion effect and the continuous suggestion effect may be different.

Further, as shown in FIG. 11-23, the effect control CPU 120 can display the hold display of the new hold storage generated by the start winning in a plurality of display patterns by executing the look-ahead notice setting process. The pre-reading notice effect can be executed, and the rate at which the variable display result becomes a big hit differs depending on which display pattern the hold display is displayed. Further, in the feature unit 162SG, the effect control CPU 120 does not execute the pre-reading advance notice effect when the remaining number of variable displays after the determination is equal to or less than the pre-reading limit number in the pre-reading advance notice setting process (the hold display is normally white). Since it is displayed with a blank circle), when the pre-reading notice effect is executed for the reserved memory generated in the start winning in the first high ball output state or the second high ball output state, the pre-reading is performed. To prevent the pre-reading notice effect from becoming inappropriate due to the change of the ball output state to the low ball output state before the variable display based on the hold memory, which is the target of the advance notice effect, is started. It has become.

In addition, in this feature unit 162SG, when the ball ejection state is the first high ball ejection state or the second high ball ejection state, if the variable display remaining number after determination is equal to or less than the pre-reading limit number, the pre-reading notice effect is executed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and when the ball ejection state is the first high ball ejection state or the second high ball ejection state, the pre-reading notice effect is not uniquely executed. You may do so.

Although the feature portions of the present invention have been described above with reference to the drawings, the specific configuration is not limited to these feature portions and is included in the present invention even if there are changes or additions within the scope of the gist of the present invention. Will be.

For example, in the feature unit 162SG, when the ball ejection state is the high ball ejection state, the fanfare production period, the interval period, and the ending production period during the big hit game are longer than those when the ball ejection state is the low ball ejection state. However, the present invention is not limited to this, although adjustments have been made to reduce the payout speed of prize balls per unit time by prolonging the special figure variable display time of some fluctuation patterns. As a modification 162SG-1, when the ball ejection state is the high ball ejection state, the determination rate of the probabilistic jackpot A is lowered as the jackpot type and the probability variable jackpot B is lower than the case where the ball ejection state is the low ball ejection state. You may increase the decision rate of. By doing so, when the ball ejection state is a high ball ejection state, it becomes easy to determine the probability variable jackpot B in which the number of rounds is 5 rounds as the jackpot type, and the probability variable jackpot A in which the number of lands is 10 rounds. Since it is difficult to determine, the number of prize balls to be paid out in one big hit game can be reduced, and as a result, adjustments can be made to reduce the payout speed of the prize balls in a high payout state.

Furthermore, as a modification 162SG-2, when the ball ejection state is a high ball ejection state, the probability variation jackpot (probability variation hit A, probability variation jackpot B, probability variation) is more important than when the ball ejection state is a low ball ejection state. By lowering the determination rate of the jackpot C) and increasing the determination rate of the non-probability variable jackpot, it may be easier to control the time saving state (low probability high base state) after the end of the jackpot game. By doing so, in the time saving state (low accuracy high base state), the rate at which the variable display result becomes a big hit is lower than in the probability variation state (high accuracy high base state), and as a result, 100 times in the time saving state. By executing the variable display of, it becomes easier to determine the end of the consecutive villa state and it becomes easier to control to the normal state, so that the number of consecutive big hit games can be reduced through the high base state, so that it is high. It is possible to realize an adjustment that reduces the payout speed of the prize ball in the ball ejection state. In this case, the "advantageous period end determination means" in the present invention is the processing of steps 162SGS190 to 162SGS194 (processing of determining the value of the time reduction counter and time reduction) in the special symbol stop processing shown by the CPU 103 in FIG. 11-18. The part that executes the process of subtracting the value of the count counter, the process of determining the value of the time reduction counter after subtraction again, and the process of turning off the time reduction flag) corresponds to this.

Further, the CPU 103 of the feature unit 162SG changes the game state from the time saving state (low probability high base state) to the normal state (low probability low) based on the end of 100 variable displays after the end of the big hit game of the non-probability change big hit. Although the embodiment of controlling to the base state (base state), that is, ending the continuous villa state is exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and the CPU 103 has a high base state (high accuracy high base state, low accuracy high base). In the state), a high-base state fall lottery (end lottery) is executed every time the variable display is started in the special symbol normal processing or every time the variable display is finished in the special symbol stop processing, and the lottery is performed. Based on the winning, the high base state (high accuracy high base state, low accuracy high base state) may be controlled to the low accuracy low base state, that is, the consecutive villa state may be terminated. Regarding the case where the fall lottery is executed every time the variable display is started or the variable display is finished, for example, when the ball ejection state is the high ball ejection state, the ball ejection state is the low ball ejection state. It suffices to make it easier to win the fall lottery at a higher rate than in the case. By doing so, it becomes easier to determine the end of the consecutive villa state in the high ball output state and it becomes easier to control to the normal state, so that the number of consecutive big hit games generated through the high base state can be reduced. As a result, it is possible to realize an adjustment that reduces the payout speed of the prize ball in a high payout state. In this case, the "advantageous period end determination means" of the present invention is a process of executing a fall lottery when the CPU 103 starts variable display in the special symbol normal process or when the special symbol stop process is executed. , The process of turning off the probability change flag and the time saving flag when the fall lottery is won is applicable.

Further, in the feature unit 162SG, the CPU 103 sets the value of the ball ejection state flag from "1" or "2" to "0" on condition that the variable display is executed 100 times, that is, the CPU 103 sets the value of the ball ejection state flag to "0". The first high ball output state and the second high ball output state are changed to the low ball output state on condition that the variable display is executed 100 times after being controlled to the first high ball output state and the second high ball output state. Although the mode to be controlled is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and as a modification 162SG-3, the CPU 103 sets the value of the ball ejection state flag to "1" and then sets the value of the ball ejection state flag to "1" and then sets the ball-out state flag to "1". The value of the ball ejection state flag is set to "0" based on the execution of the jackpot game a predetermined number of times (for example, 10 times) during the period, that is, the "end condition" in the present invention is set to the "ball ejection state flag". After setting the value of to "1", the jackpot game may be executed a predetermined number of times during the period of the consecutive villa state. " By doing so, the CPU 103 has reached a predetermined number of times (for example, 10 times), which is the number of times of execution of the big hit game executed after setting the value of the ball ejection state flag to "1". Therefore, the value of the ball ejection status flag can be reset from "1" or "2" to "0" again.

Further, in the feature unit 162SG, the CPU 103 sets the value of the ball ejection state flag from "1" or "2" to "0" on condition that the variable display is executed 100 times, that is, the CPU 103 sets the value of the ball ejection state flag to "0". The first high ball output state and the second high ball output state are changed to the low ball output state on condition that the variable display is executed 100 times after being controlled to the first high ball output state and the second high ball output state. Although the mode to be controlled is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and as a modified example 162SG-4, the CPU 103 sets the value of the ball ejection state flag to "1" and then sets the value of the ball ejection state flag to "1" and then sets the ball-out state flag to "1". The value of the ball ejection status flag is set to "0" based on the fact that the total number of game balls that have won in each winning opening and the game balls that have entered the out opening has reached a predetermined number (for example, 1000 balls) during the period. That is, the number of game balls used for the game has reached a predetermined number during the period of the consecutive villa state after the "end condition" in the present invention is set to "the value of the ball ejection state flag is set to" 1 ". May be. By doing so, the CPU 103 outputs based on the fact that the number of game balls used for the game reaches a predetermined number (for example, 1000 balls) after the value of the ball ejection state flag is set to "1". The value of the ball state flag can be reset from "1" or "2" to "0" again.

Further, in the feature unit 162SG, when the value of the ball ejection state flag is "1" (first high ball ejection state) or "2" (second high ball ejection state), the special figure variable display in each fluctuation pattern is performed. An example is an example of performing an adjustment to reduce the payout speed of a prize ball in a high payout state by prolonging the time, but the present invention is not limited to this, and depends on the value of the payout state flag. Therefore, adjustments may be made to reduce the payout speed of the prize balls in a high payout state by making the determination ratio of each fluctuation pattern different.

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 11-30 and 11-31 as a modification 162SG-5, the variation pattern for loss for when the value of the ball ejection state flag is "0" (low ball ejection state). Judgment table A, deviation pattern judgment table B for when the value of the ball ejection state flag is "1" (first ball ejection state), the value of the ball ejection state flag is "2" (second ball ejection state) ), A variation pattern determination table C for loss is provided.

As shown in FIG. 11-30 (A), in the deviation pattern determination table A, among the possible ranges 1 to 997 of the random value MR3 for the deviation pattern determination, 1 to 600 are non-reach variation patterns PA1. It is assigned to -1, 601 to 900 are assigned to the normal reach variation pattern PA2-1, and 901 to 997 are assigned to the super reach variation pattern PA2-2.

As shown in FIG. 11-30 (B), in the deviation pattern determination table B, among the possible ranges 1 to 997 of the random value MR3 for the deviation pattern determination, 1 to 400 are non-reach variation patterns PA1. It is assigned to -1, and 401 to 800 are assigned to the normal reach variation pattern PA2-1, and 801 to 997 are assigned to the super reach variation pattern PA2-2.

As shown in FIG. 11-30 (C), in the deviation pattern determination table C, among the possible ranges 1 to 997 of the random value MR3 for the deviation pattern determination, 1 to 200 are non-reach variation patterns PA1. It is assigned to -1, and 2001-700 are assigned to the normal reach variation pattern PA2-1, and 701 to 997 are assigned to the super reach variation pattern PA2-2.

Here, when the deviation pattern determination table A and the deviation variation pattern determination table B are compared, the ratio in which the deviation pattern determination table B determines the non-reach variation pattern more than the deviation pattern determination table A. On the other hand, the rate at which the fluctuation pattern of normal reach and super reach is determined is set high. That is, the deviation pattern determination table B is a variation pattern determination table in which a variation pattern having a longer variable display time than the detachment variation pattern determination table A can be easily determined.

Further, when the deviation pattern determination table B and the deviation variation pattern determination table C are compared, the ratio of the non-reach variation pattern is determined in the deviation pattern determination table C is higher than that in the deviation pattern determination table B. On the other hand, the rate at which the fluctuation pattern of normal reach and super reach is determined is set high. That is, the deviation pattern determination table C is a variation pattern determination table in which a variation pattern having a longer variable display time than the detachment variation pattern determination table B can be easily determined.

That is, in the deviation pattern determination table A, the deviation pattern determination table B, and the deviation variation pattern determination table C, the deviation pattern determination table C has the longest average variable display time, and the deviation pattern determination table. A has the shortest average variable display time.

Then, as shown in FIGS. 11-31, when the value of the ball ejection state flag is "0" and the variable display result is out of order, the out-of-order variation pattern determination table A is selected and the variation pattern is selected. If the variable display result is out of alignment when the value of the payout status flag is "1", the outlier variation pattern determination table B is selected to determine the variation pattern, and the payout status flag is set. If the variable display result is out of alignment when the value is "2", the outlier variation pattern determination table B may be selected to determine the variation pattern. In this way, by determining the fluctuation pattern using the fluctuation pattern determination table according to the value of the payout state flag, it is possible to execute the adjustment to reduce the payout speed of the prize ball in the high payout state.

Further, in the feature unit 162SG, the "advantageous state" in the present invention is set as the jackpot gaming state, and the jackpot gaming state is controlled a specific number of times (five times in the feature unit 162SG) during the period of the consecutive villa state. Although the embodiment in which the value of the payout state flag is set from "0" to "1" is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the "advantageous state" in the present invention includes a small hit gaming state. But it may be. In particular, the present invention has the game property that the small hit game state can be frequently controlled during the period of the consecutive villa state, and the prize ball is paid out by winning the game ball to the large winning opening in these small hit game states. When applied to a machine (so-called small hit rush machine), the total number of times controlled to the big hit gaming state and the number of times controlled to the small hit gaming state during the period of the consecutive villa state is a specific number of times (for example, 100). By setting the value of the payout state flag from "0" to "1" based on the fact that the number of times has been reached, it is possible to realize an adjustment that reduces the payout speed of the prize ball in the high payout state.

Further, in the feature unit 162SG, when the game is controlled to the jackpot game state of the non-probability variable jackpot, the time saving control is executed several times by the variable display 100 times after the jackpot game. The non-probability variable jackpot may be provided in which the number of time reduction controls executed after the jackpot game is completed is less than 100 (for example, 50 or 30). When a non-probable variable jackpot such as 50 or 30 times of time reduction control is provided in this way, the value of the ball ejection state flag is set to "1" or "2" (high ball ejection state). After the execution of the non-probability change jackpot game, when the variable display of the time reduction control number according to the non-probability change jackpot is executed, the variable display is executed 100 times after the value of the ball ejection state flag is set to "1". Even if it is not, the value of the ball ejection state flag may be set to "0". In other words, if the non-probability change jackpot is won in the consecutive villa state, and the jackpot is not won in the short time state after the end of the jackpot game of the non-probability change jackpot, and the normal state is reached, the normal state is reached. Originally, the adjustment to reduce the payout speed of the prize ball in the high payout state may be completed.

Further, the present specification discloses both a pachinko gaming machine to which the invention of the feature section 109SG is applied and a pachinko gaming machine to which the invention of the feature section 162SG is applied, but the present invention is not limited thereto. Both the invention of the feature portion 109 and the invention of the feature portion 162SG may be applied to the pachinko gaming machine of 1.

The present invention is not limited to those described above. Further, the specific configuration is included in the present invention even if there are changes or additions within a range that does not deviate from the gist of the present invention, in addition to the above-described embodiment and other embodiments described later.

Further, all or a part of the configurations shown in the above-described embodiment and each modification, and the configurations shown in the following embodiment and each modification may be arbitrarily combined.

It should be considered that the above-described embodiment and the following-described embodiment disclosed this time are exemplary in all respects and are not restrictive. The scope of the present invention is shown by the scope of claims rather than the above description and the description below, and is intended to include all modifications within the meaning and scope equivalent to the scope of claims.

The gaming machine of the present invention can also be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a big hit gaming state) that is advantageous to the player, and is a special state that is more likely to be controlled to the normal state and the advantageous state than the normal state. (For example, a gaming machine that can be controlled to a time saving state (high accuracy high base state or low accuracy high base state)) (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1).
A game control means (for example, CPU 103) capable of controlling the progress of the game,
An effect control means (for example, an effect control CPU 120) capable of controlling an effect based on control information (for example, an effect control command shown in FIG. 11-2) transmitted from the game control means.
The number of times of the advantageous state that has occurred in the advantageous period (for example, the period of the consecutive villa state) that has never been controlled to the normal state from the time when the normal state is controlled to either the advantageous state or the special state is When the specified number of times has been reached (for example, when the number of consecutive villas is "5" or more, which is the first determination number of times), the predetermined numerical data is changed from the first value (for example, "0") to the second value (for example). For example, an update means that can be updated to "1" or "2" (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the ball ejection state determination process shown in FIG. 11-13).
As shown in FIGS. 11-13 and 11-21, adjustment means (for example, FIGS. 11-13 and 11-21) for adjusting so that the speed at which the game value given in the unit period is reduced when the predetermined numerical data is the second value. In addition, the CPU 103 sets the ball ejection state flag value to "1" or "2" in the ball ejection state determination process to prolong the fanfare effect period, interval period, and ending effect period during the big hit game).
Equipped with
The game control means can transmit control information that can identify that the predetermined numerical data is the second value to the effect control means (for example, as shown in FIGS. 11-13, the CPU 103 can transmit the control information. Step 162 A part for executing the command control process shown in FIG. 5 after executing the transmission setting of the payout state specification command in the process of SGS17).
The effect control means can execute effect control based on control information that can identify that the predetermined numerical data is the second value (for example, as shown in FIGS. 11-27 and 11-28). In addition, the effect control CPU 120 identifies the ball ejection state from the received ball ejection state designation command in the advance notice effect determination process, and is variably displaying using the advance notice effect type determination table according to the specified ball ejection state. The part where it is possible to determine whether or not to execute the advance notice effect and the type of effect of the advance notice effect to be executed),
Moreover,
It has a display area in which an image can be displayed, and the display area is smaller than the game-related information related to the progress of the game (for example, the first special figure reserved storage number, the second special figure reserved storage number, and the decorative symbol). A display means (for example, an image display device 5) capable of displaying a display image (for example, a first interface image 006SG005I or a second interface image 006SG005J) of a design), and
A storage means (for example, CGROM205) that can store image data including at least a specific image (for example, a decorative pattern or a background image) displayed in the display area and a display image of the game-related information.
A plurality of display layers (for example, a layer 1 image drawing area, a layer 2 image drawing area, a layer 3 image drawing area, a displacement image creation area, and a display image creation area shown in FIGS. 15-5) on which an image based on the image data can be arranged. An image processing means (for example, a display control unit 123 and an SDRAM 210) capable of generating an image to be displayed in the display area by superimposing and synthesizing each image arranged on the plurality of display layers.
An effect executing means capable of executing an effect of displaying the specific image in the display area (for example, a portion where the effect control CPU 120 executes the variable display effect process shown in FIGS. 15-17).
Equipped with
The storage means sets the display position of at least a part of the specific image in the display area from the first position (for example, in the case of the feature unit 006SG, the central portion of the display area of the image display device 5) to the first position. Can store display position displacement information for displacement to a different second position (for example, in the case of the feature unit 006SG, an upper position or a lower position of the display area of the image display device 5) (for example, displacement in the CGROM 205). The part where the image data is stored),
The image processing means can generate a displacement specific image in which the specific image arranged on the specific display layer based on the image data is displaced based on the display position displacement information (for example, shown in FIGS. 15-23). As described above, the decorative pattern drawn in the layer 2 image drawing area and the background image drawn in the layer 3 image drawing area are superimposed to create a displacement target image, and the displacement target image is applied to the displacement target image. As a result, the images of the left region 006SG005L and the right region 006SG005R are moved upward and the images of the middle region 006SG005C are moved downward as the display images displayed on the image display device 5 during the development suggestion effect. The part that creates the image),
The effect executing means can execute a specific effect (for example, a development suggestion effect in the feature unit 006SG) for displaying the displacement specific image generated by the image processing means in the display area during variable display.
The display image of the game-related information is arranged in a special display layer in which the arranged image is preferentially displayed in the display area over the specific display layer (for example, as shown in FIGS. 15-26, the first interface. The image 006SG005I and the second interface image 006SG005J are a portion drawn in the layer 1 image drawing area having the highest image display priority), and a gaming machine.
According to this feature, when the predetermined numerical data is the second value, the adjustment for lowering the game value imparting speed is executed, so that when the predetermined numerical data is the second value, an excessive amount is excessive in a short period of time. It is possible to prevent the game value from being given and the gambling to be excessively increased, and it is possible to execute the effect control corresponding to whether or not the predetermined numerical data is the second value, so that the game interest can be improved. .. Further, since a displacement specific image in which at least a part of the specific image displayed in the predetermined effect is displaced can be generated from the image data of the specific image and the display position displacement information and displayed in the specific effect, these displacements can be displayed. The specific effect can be executed with a smaller amount of data as compared with the case where the image data of the specific image is stored exclusively. Further, it is possible to prevent the display image of the game-related information from being displaced due to the displacement of the specific image at the time of executing the specific effect, and the visibility of the display image of the game-related information is deteriorated.
That is, when an adjustment for lowering the game value granting speed (for example, an adjustment for making the variable display time longer than when the game value granting speed is not lowered in the variable pattern selection) is executed, the adjustment is made. Because the effect is performed, it is possible to prevent the game from being given an excessive amount of game value in a short period of time, and to prevent the game from deteriorating. , It is possible to prevent the visibility of the display image of the game-related information from being lowered. That is, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that looks good when installed in a gaming field and can execute a specific effect with a small amount of data without deteriorating the visibility of the display image of the gaming-related information.

Further, the execution frequency of the specific effect may be different depending on the updated value. By doing so, a more suitable specific effect can be executed.

Further, it is possible to increase the degree of freedom in design, and it is possible to execute a specific effect with a small amount of data and prevent the visibility of the display image of the game-related information from being deteriorated. As an example, it has a display area capable of displaying an image, and the display area has a game-related information related to the progress of the game (for example, a display area rather than a first special figure reserved storage number, a second special figure reserved storage number, and a decorative symbol. A display means (for example, an image display device 5) capable of displaying a display image (for example, a first interface image 006SG005I or a second interface image 006SG005J) of a small symbol (for example).
A storage means (for example, CGROM205) that can store image data including at least a specific image (for example, a decorative pattern or a background image) displayed in the display area and a display image of the game-related information.
A plurality of display layers (for example, a layer 1 image drawing area, a layer 2 image drawing area, a layer 3 image drawing area, a displacement image creation area, and a display image creation area shown in FIGS. 15-5) on which an image based on the image data can be arranged. An image processing means (for example, a display control unit 123 and an SDRAM 210) capable of generating an image to be displayed in the display area by superimposing and synthesizing each image arranged on the plurality of display layers.
An effect executing means capable of executing an effect of displaying the specific image in the display area (for example, a portion where the effect control CPU 120 executes the variable display effect process shown in FIGS. 15-17).
Equipped with
The storage means sets the display position of at least a part of the specific image in the display area from the first position (for example, in the case of the feature unit 006SG, the central portion of the display area of the image display device 5) to the first position. Can store display position displacement information for displacement to a different second position (for example, in the case of the feature unit 006SG, an upper position or a lower position of the display area of the image display device 5) (for example, displacement in the CGROM 205). The part where the image data is stored),
The image processing means can generate a displacement specific image in which the specific image arranged on the specific display layer based on the image data is displaced based on the display position displacement information (for example, shown in FIGS. 15-23). As described above, the decorative pattern drawn in the layer 2 image drawing area and the background image drawn in the layer 3 image drawing area are superimposed to create a displacement target image, and the displacement target image is applied to the displacement target image. As a result, the images of the left region 006SG005L and the right region 006SG005R are moved upward and the images of the middle region 006SG005C are moved downward as the display images displayed on the image display device 5 during the development suggestion effect. The part that creates the image),
The effect executing means can execute a specific effect (for example, a development suggestion effect in the feature unit 006SG) for displaying the displacement specific image generated by the image processing means in the display area during variable display.
The display image of the game-related information is arranged in a special display layer in which the arranged image is preferentially displayed in the display area over the specific display layer (for example, as shown in FIGS. 15-26, the first interface. The image 006SG005I and the second interface image 006SG005J are a portion drawn in the layer 1 image drawing area having the highest image display priority), and a gaming machine. Hereinafter, an example of a form example of these gaming machines will be described as another form example.

FIG. 12 shows a configuration example of the display result determination table. FIG. 12A shows a configuration example of the display result determination table for the first special figure used when the variable special figure is the first special figure, and FIG. 12B shows the second special figure of the variable special figure. The configuration example of the display result determination table for the second special figure used in the case of a figure is shown. The display result determination table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 101. In the display result determination table, the hit determination value to be compared with the random number value MR1 is assigned to the special symbol display result which is the variable display result of the special symbol according to the set value. The random number value MR1 is a random number value for determining a display result, and the value is randomly updated in the range of 0 to 65535. As the display result determination table, a display result determination table common to the first special figure and the second special figure may be used.

As shown in FIG. 12A, when the variable special figure is the first special figure, when the set value is 1 and the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range is 0 to 65535. Of the hit judgment values that can be taken and compared with the random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, 1020-1237 are assigned to "big hits", and 65317 to 65535 are "with time reduction". It is assigned to "out of place", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "out of place". When the set value is 1 and the gaming state is in the probable change state, out of the above-mentioned hit determination values, 1020 to 1346 are assigned to "big hit", and the other numerical ranges are "missing". Assigned. The case where the variable special map has a set value of 2 to 6 in the first special map and the gaming state is a normal state or a time-saving state is as shown in FIG. 12 (A).

As shown in FIG. 12B, when the variable special figure is the second special figure, when the set value is 1 and the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range is 0 to 65535. Of the hit judgment values that can be taken and compared with the random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, 1020 to 1237 are assigned to "big hits", and 65317 to 65425 are "with time reduction". It is assigned to "out of place", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "out of place". When the set value is 1 and the gaming state is in the probable change state, out of the above-mentioned hit determination values, 1020 to 1346 are assigned to "big hit", and the other numerical ranges are "missing". Assigned. The case where the variable special map has a set value of 2 to 6 in the second special map and the gaming state is a normal state or a time-saving state is as shown in FIG. 12 (B).

Here, focusing on the numerical range of the hit determination value assigned to the "big hit" and the "missing time reduction" in each display result determination table, as shown in FIG. 13, when the gaming state is the normal state or the time reduction state. In the display result determination table for the first special figure in the above, the range from 102 to 1237 of the hit determination values is set to the common numerical range of the jackpot determination values for determining the jackpot regardless of the set value.

When the set value is 1, only the common numerical range of the big hit judgment value for judging the big hit is set (1020-1237 is assigned to the "big hit"), while the set value 2 In the case of the set value 6, the numerical range corresponding to each set value is set as the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value. The non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value is a range of 1238 to 1253 for the setting value 2, a range of 1238 to 1272 for the setting value 3, a range of 1238 to 1292 for the setting value 4, and a range of 1238 to 1317 for the setting value 5. , The set value 6 is set in the range of 1238 to 1346, respectively.

That is, in the display result determination table for the first special figure when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, when the set value is 1, it is common among the hit determination values that can take a value in the range of 0 to 65535. When only the numerical values in the numerical range (1020 to 1237) are assigned to "big hit", when the set value is 2 or more, the non-common numerical range is added to the common numerical range among the big hit judgment values. The numbers in the range are assigned to "big hits". Further, the non-common numerical range increases with reference to 1238 as the value of the set value increases.

Therefore, the jackpot probability increases as the non-common numerical range continuous with the common numerical range increases as the set value increases, with 1020 as the reference value for the jackpot determination value (big hit reference value). go.

Further, in the display result determination table for the first special figure when the gaming state is the normal state or the time reduction state, the range from 65317 to 65535 of the hit determination values determines the time reduction loss regardless of the set value. It is set in the common numerical range of the loss judgment value with time reduction. Focusing on the case where the set value is 6, when the set value is 6, as described above, 1020 to 1346 of the hit judgment values are set in the numerical range of the big hit judgment value, and the time is shortened. The loss judgment value is in the range of 65317 to 65535, with 65317 as the reference value for loss with time reduction (reference value for loss with time reduction) in a numerical range different from the range of jackpot judgment value (1020 to 1346) set in the previous term. Since it is set, it is prevented that the numerical range of the loss determination value with time reduction overlaps with the range of the jackpot determination value that changes according to each set value.

Further, in the display result determination table for the first special figure when the gaming state is the probability change state, the range from 102 to 1346 of the hit determination values is the jackpot determination value for determining the jackpot regardless of the set value. It is set in the common numerical range.

When the set value is 1, only the common numerical range of the big hit judgment value for judging the big hit is set (1020-1346 is assigned to "big hit"), while the set value 2 is set. In the case of the value 6, the numerical range corresponding to each set value is set to the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value. The non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value is a range of 1347 to 1383 for the setting value 2, a range of 1347 to 1429 for the setting value 3, a range of 1347 to 1487 for the setting value 4, and a range of 1347 to 1556 for the setting value 5. , The setting value 6 is set in the range of 1347 to 1674, respectively.

That is, in the display result determination table for the first special figure when the gaming state is the probabilistic state, when the set value is 1, the common numerical value range among the hit determination values which can take the value in the range of 0 to 65535 ( When only the numerical value in 1020 to 1346) is assigned to "big hit", when the set value is 2 or more, it is within the range of the common numerical range plus the non-common numerical range among the big hit judgment values. Numerical values are assigned to "big hits". Further, the non-common numerical range increases with reference to 1347 as the value of the set value increases.

Therefore, the jackpot probability increases as the non-common numerical range continuous with the common numerical range increases as the set value increases, with 1020 as the reference value for the jackpot determination value (big hit reference value). go.

In the display result judgment table for the second special figure when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 102 to 1237 of the hit judgment values is the big hit judgment value for judging the big hit regardless of the set value. It is set in the common numerical range of.

When the set value is 1, only the common numerical range of the big hit judgment value for judging the big hit is set (1020-1237 is assigned to the "big hit"), while the set value 2 In the case of the set value 6, the numerical range corresponding to each set value is set as the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value. The non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value is a range of 1238 to 1253 for the setting value 2, a range of 1238 to 1272 for the setting value 3, a range of 1238 to 1292 for the setting value 4, and a range of 1238 to 1317 for the setting value 5. , The set value 6 is set in the range of 1238 to 1346, respectively.

That is, in the pachinko gaming machine 1, in the display result determination table for the second special figure when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the value can be taken in the range of 0 to 65535 when the set value is 1. Of the hit judgment values, only the values within the common numerical range (1020 to 1237) are assigned to "big hit", while when the set value is 2 or more, the common numerical range of the big hit judgment values is set. Numerical values within the range including the non-common numerical range are assigned to "big hits". Further, the non-common numerical range increases with reference to 1238 as the value of the set value increases.

Therefore, the jackpot probability increases as the non-common numerical range continuous with the common numerical range increases as the set value increases, with 1020 as the reference value for the jackpot determination value (big hit reference value). go.

Further, in the display result determination table for the second special figure when the gaming state is the normal state or the time reduction state, the range from 65317 to 65425 of the hit determination values determines the time reduction loss regardless of the set value. It is set in the common numerical range of the loss judgment value with time reduction. Focusing on the case where the set value is 6, when the set value is 6, as described above, 1020 to 1346 of the hit judgment values are set in the numerical range of the big hit judgment value, and the time is shortened. The loss determination value is in the range of 65317 to 65425, with 65317 as the reference value for loss with time reduction (reference value for loss with time reduction) in a numerical range different from the range of jackpot determination value (1020 to 1346) of the set value 6. Since it is set, it is prevented that the numerical range of the loss determination value with time reduction overlaps with the range of the jackpot determination value that changes according to each set value.

In the display result determination table for the second special figure when the game state is the probability change state, the range from 102 to 1346 of the hit determination values is a common numerical value of the jackpot determination value for determining the jackpot regardless of the set value. It is set to the range. The features of the other display result determination table for the second special figure are the same as those of the display result determination table for the first special figure.

As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1, when the variable special symbol is the first special symbol, 65317 to 65317 to the case where the gaming state is the normal state and the time saving state, regardless of the set value. When the range of 65535 is set to the common numerical range of the time saving and the time saving, and the variable special figure is the second special symbol, the set value is set in the case where the gaming state is the normal state and the case where the playing state is the time saving state. Regardless, the range of 65317 to 65425 is set to the common numerical range that is out of time. In other words, in the case where the game state is the normal state and the time saving state, the ratio of the variable display result to be out of time is the same ratio in all the set values, so that the setting value is gambling. Can be prevented from becoming excessively high. Further, regarding the time-reduced deviation to which a common judgment value number is assigned to each set value, since it is set in a continuous numerical range from 65317, which is the time-reduced deviation reference value, in any setting value, it is variablely displayed. It is possible to reduce the processing load of the CPU 103 regarding the determination that the result is out of time.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the set values that can be set are 6 from 1 to 6, but the setting values that can be set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be 5 or less or 7 or more. .. Further, the smaller the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the more advantageous the player may be.

The jackpot type may be determined at different ratios according to the set value based on the allocation of the determination values in the jackpot type determination table. Alternatively, the jackpot type may be determined at a common ratio regardless of the set value. The variation pattern may be determined at different ratios depending on the set value based on the allocation of the determination values in the variation pattern determination table. Alternatively, the variation pattern may be determined at a common rate regardless of the set value. Since the execution rate of normal reach or super reach differs depending on the set value, the set value may be suggested by the frequency of execution of normal reach or super reach. Alternatively, the execution ratios of normal reach and super reach may be the same regardless of the set value. In addition, it may be possible to execute an arbitrary setting suggestion effect at different ratios according to the set value.

FIG. 14 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S76 of FIG. 9 as the effect control process process. In the effect control process process shown in FIG. 14, the effect control CPU 120 first executes the read-ahead notice setting process (step S161). In the pre-reading notice setting process, for example, a determination, determination, setting, and the like for executing the pre-reading notice effect are performed based on the effect control command at the time of starting winning, which is transmitted from the main board 11. In addition, a process for displaying the hold display is executed based on the number of hold storages specified from the effect control command.

After executing the process of step S161, the effect control CPU 120 selects and executes any of the following processes of steps S170 to S175 according to the value of the effect process flag provided in, for example, the RAM 122.

The variable display start waiting process in step S170 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “0” (initial value). This variable display start waiting process is a process of determining whether or not to start variable display of the decorative symbol on the image display device 5 based on whether or not a command for designating the start of variable display is received from the main board 11. And so on. When it is determined that the variable display of the decorative symbol on the image display device 5 is to be started, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "1", and the variable display start waiting process is terminated.

The variable display start setting process in step S171 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “1”. In this variable display start setting process, the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol (fixed decorative symbol), the mode of the variable display of the decorative symbol, the reach effect, and various types are based on the display result and the variation pattern specified by the effect control command. It is determined whether or not various effects such as a notice effect are executed, the mode thereof, and the execution start timing. Then, an effect control pattern (a collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute the effect) that reflects the determination result and the like is set. After that, based on the set effect control pattern, the display control unit 123 is instructed to start the execution of the variable display of the decorative symbol, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "2", and the variable display start setting process is terminated. The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to start the variable display of the decorative symbol in response to the instruction to start the execution of the variable display of the decorative symbol.

The variable display effect process in step S172 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “2”. In this variable display effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 instructs the display control unit 123 to display the effect image based on the effect control pattern set in step S171 on the display screen of the image display device 5. , Driving the movable body 32, outputting voice and sound effects from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting commands (sound effect signals) to the voice control board 13, and commands (illuminated signals) to the lamp control board 14. Various effect controls are executed during the variable display of the decorative pattern, such as turning on / off / blinking the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED by the output. After performing such effect control, for example, an end code indicating the end of variable display of the decorative symbol is read from the effect control pattern, or a command is received from the main board 11 to specify that the fixed decorative symbol is to be stopped and displayed. In response to what has been done, the final decorative symbol, which is the display result of the decorative symbol, is stopped and displayed. When the fixed decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "3", and the effect process during variable display ends.

The special figure hit waiting process in step S173 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “3”. In this special figure hit waiting process, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not an effect control command specifying to start the big hit game state has been received from the main board 11. Then, when the effect control command for specifying to start the jackpot game state is received, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "4". In addition, when the reception waiting time of the command elapses without receiving the command specifying to start the jackpot game state, it is determined that the display result in the special figure game is "missing", and the effect process flag. The value of is updated to the initial value "0". When the value of the effect process flag is updated, the waiting process for hitting the special figure ends.

The jackpot effect process in step S174 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “6”. In this big hit middle effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to the effect content in the big hit game state, and executes various effect controls in the big hit game state based on the set content. Further, in the big hit middle effect process, for example, the value of the effect process flag is set to the value corresponding to the ending effect process in response to receiving a command from the main board 11 to specify the end of the big hit game state. Update to ", and end the production process during the big hit.

The ending effect process of step S175 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “7”. In this ending effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to the end of the big hit game state, and controls various effects of the ending effect at the end of the big hit game state based on the setting contents. Run. After that, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value "0", and the ending effect process is terminated.

(Modified example of basic explanation)
The present invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine 1 described in the above basic description, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the spirit of the present invention.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 of the above basic explanation is a payout type gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of gaming media as prizes based on the occurrence of winning, but the gaming media are enclosed and points are given based on the occurrence of winning. It may be an enclosed gaming machine.

Only one type of symbol (for example, a symbol indicating "-") is displayed during the variable display of the special symbol, and the variable display may be performed by repeating the display and extinguishing of the symbol. Further, even if the symbol is displayed during the variable display, the symbol may not be displayed when the variable display is stopped (the symbol indicating "-" may not be displayed as the display result).

In the above basic explanation, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is shown as a gaming machine, but a medal is inserted and a predetermined number of bets is set, and a plurality of types of symbols are rotated according to the operation of the operation lever by the player, and the player If the combination of stop symbols becomes a specific combination of symbols when the symbols are stopped in response to the operation of the stop button by, a slot machine capable of executing a game in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out to the player (for example, a big bonus) The present invention can also be applied to a slot machine equipped with one or more of regular bonus, RT, AT, ART, and CZ (hereinafter, bonus, etc.).

The program and data for realizing the present invention are not limited to the form of being distributed and provided by the detachable recording medium to the computer device included in the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the computer device and the like in advance. It may take the form of being distributed by installing it in the storage device of the. Further, the program and data for realizing the present invention are distributed by downloading from other devices on the network connected via a communication line or the like by providing a communication processing unit. It doesn't matter.

The execution mode of the game is not limited to the one executed by attaching a detachable recording medium, but can be executed by temporarily storing the program and data downloaded via the communication line or the like in the internal memory or the like. It may be executed directly by using the hardware resources of other devices on the network connected via a communication line or the like. Furthermore, it is also possible to execute a game by exchanging data with another computer device or the like via a network.

In this specification, one of the expressions for comparison of various ratios such as the execution ratio of the production (expressions such as "high", "low", and "differentiate") is "0%". It may be included. For example, one may have a percentage of "0%" and the other a percentage of "100%" or less than "100%".

(Explanation of Feature Unit 006SG in Embodiment of the Present Invention)
Next, the feature unit 006SG in the embodiment of the present invention will be described.

The gaming machine of Form 1 is
A gaming machine capable of executing variable display (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1 or a slot machine).
It has a display area in which an image can be displayed, and the display area is smaller than the game-related information related to the progress of the game (for example, the first special figure reserved storage number, the second special figure reserved storage number, and the decorative symbol). A display means (for example, an image display device 5) capable of displaying a design) and
A storage means (for example, CGROM205) that can store image data including at least a specific image (for example, a decorative pattern or a background image) displayed in the display area and a display image of the game-related information.
A plurality of display layers (for example, a layer 1 image drawing area, a layer 2 image drawing area, a layer 3 image drawing area, a displacement image creation area, and a display image creation area shown in FIGS. 15-5) on which an image based on the image data can be arranged. An image processing means (for example, a display control unit 123 and an SDRAM 210) capable of generating an image to be displayed in the display area by superimposing and synthesizing each image arranged on the plurality of display layers.
An effect executing means capable of executing an effect of displaying the specific image in the display area (for example, a portion where the effect control CPU 120 executes the variable display effect process shown in FIGS. 15-17).
Equipped with
The storage means sets the display position of at least a part of the specific image in the display area from the first position (for example, in the case of the feature unit 006SG, the central portion of the display area of the image display device 5) to the first position. Can store display position displacement information for displacement to a different second position (for example, in the case of the feature unit 006SG, an upper position or a lower position of the display area of the image display device 5) (for example, displacement in the CGROM 205). The part where the image data is stored),
The image processing means can generate a displacement specific image in which the specific image arranged on the specific display layer based on the image data is displaced based on the display position displacement information (for example, shown in FIGS. 15-23). As described above, the decorative pattern drawn in the layer 2 image drawing area and the background image drawn in the layer 3 image drawing area are superimposed to create a displacement target image, and the displacement target image is applied to the displacement target image. As a result, the images of the left region 006SG005L and the right region 006SG005R are moved upward and the images of the middle region 006SG005C are moved downward as the display images displayed on the image display device 5 during the development suggestion effect. The part that creates the image),
The effect executing means displays the displacement specific image generated by the image processing means in the display area during variable display (for example, a development suggestion effect in the feature unit 006SG, a reach suggestion in the modification 006SG-1). It is possible to execute an effect, a revival effect in the modified example 006SG-2, a look-ahead notice effect in the modified example 006SG-3, a promotion effect in the modified example 006SG-5, a temporary stop suggestion effect and a temporary stop notification effect in the modified example 006SG-6). be,
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, only the image data for displaying the specific image in the display area and the display position displacement information for displacing the display position of the specific image are used, and the display position of the specific image is changed from the first position to the first position. Since the specific effect can be executed by displacing it at two positions, the amount of data stored in the storage means for executing the specific effect can be suppressed as compared with the case where the specific effect is executed using the dedicated image data. ..

The gaming machine of the second embodiment is the gaming machine according to the first embodiment.
The display image of the game-related information is arranged in a special display layer in which the arranged image is preferentially displayed in the display area over the specific display layer (for example, as shown in FIGS. 15-26, the first interface. The image 006SG005I and the second interface image 006SG005J are portions drawn in the layer 1 image drawing area having the highest image display priority).
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, when the specific effect is executed, the display position of the game-related information is not displaced together with at least a part of the specific image, so that the game-related information is difficult for the player to see when the specific effect is executed. It is possible to prevent it from being lost.

The gaming machine of the third embodiment is the gaming machine according to the second embodiment.
At least a part of the game-related information is displayed in an area overlapping the displacement specific image (for example, the second interface image 006SG005J is an image of the right area 006SG005R that slides upward during the development suggestion effect. Duplicate display),
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, even if the specific image is displaced to the second position to become the displacement specific image, the game-related information is not displaced and is displayed overlapping with the displacement specific image, so that the player feels uncomfortable. You can recognize game-related information without any problem.

The gaming machine of the fourth embodiment is the gaming machine according to the second embodiment.
At least a part of the game-related information is displayed in a region that does not overlap with the displacement specific image in the display region (for example, the first interface image 006SG005I is a left region 006SG005L, a middle region 006SG005C, and a right region during the development suggestion effect. The part displayed at the bottom of the image display device 5 so as not to overlap with each image of the area 006SG005R),
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, even if the specific image is displaced to the second position to become the displacement specific image, the game-related information is not displaced and is displayed so as not to overlap with the displacement specific image, so that the player can accurately perform the game. Can recognize game-related information.

The gaming machine of the fifth embodiment is the gaming machine according to any one of the second and fourth embodiments.
A game identification information variable display executing means (for example, the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B shown in FIG. 3) capable of executing variable display of game identification information (for example, special symbol) is provided. ,
The effect executing means is
In the first area in the display area, it is possible to execute the variable display of the effect identification information according to the variable display of the game identification information (for example, as shown in FIG. 15-21, the image display device 5 In the central part of the display area, the part where variable display of decorative symbols can be executed according to the variable display of special symbols),
In the second area in the display area, which is different from the first area and smaller than the first area, it is possible to execute the variable display of the reduced identification information according to the variable display of the game identification information. (For example, as shown in FIG. 15-21, in the upper right portion of the display area of the image display device 5, a portion capable of performing variable display of a small symbol according to variable display of a special symbol).
The display image of the effect identification information is arranged in the specific display layer, and the visual state is changed from the first visual state to the second visual state, which is less visible to the player than the first visual state, according to the execution of the specific effect. The decorative symbol changes to a state (for example, as shown in FIGS. 15-21 and 15-23, the decorative symbol is drawn and arranged in the layer 2 image drawing area, and the decorative symbol is displayed on the image display device 5 when the development suggestion effect is executed. The part where visibility is reduced by moving upward or downward from the center of the display area),
The display image of the reduced identification information is arranged in the special display layer, and the visual state does not change from the first visual state according to the execution of the specific effect (for example, FIGS. 15-21 and 15-23 are shown. As described above, the small symbol is drawn and arranged in the layer 1 image drawing area, and unlike the decorative symbol, it does not move from the upper right portion of the display area of the image display device 5 when the development suggestion effect is executed, so that the visibility does not deteriorate. ),
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the effect of the specific effect can be improved by changing the visual state of the identification information for the effect from the first visual state to the second visual state by the execution of the specific effect, and the effect is reduced by the execution of the specific effect. Since the visual recognition state of the identification information does not change from the first visual recognition state, the player can easily grasp the progress of the game by visually recognizing the reduced identification information even during the execution of the specific effect.

The gaming machine of the sixth embodiment is the gaming machine according to any one of the first to fifth embodiments.
The display area includes a first specific display area (for example, the upper area 006SG005T shown in FIG. 15-31) and a second specific display area different from the first specific display area (for example, the lower area shown in FIG. 15-31). 006SG005B), including
The effect executing means is
In the specific effect, the specific image is displayed over the first specific display area and the second specific display area (for example, as shown in FIGS. 15-31 (C), the upper region 006SG005T and the lower region 006SG005B are displayed. It is possible to display an image in which the relative positions of the first specific display area and the second specific display area are displaced as the displacement specific image (for example, a portion for displaying the decorative pattern and the background image). As shown in 15-31 (D), the portion where the upper region 006SG005T and the lower region 006SG005B move in the left-right direction),
When the relative position between the first specific display area and the second specific display area is displaced, the first specific display area and the first specific display area are located at the boundary between the first specific display area and the second specific display area. 2 An effect image different from the image displayed in the specific display area (for example, the cutting effect image 006SG005S shown in FIGS. 15-31) is displayed.
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it is possible to make the player more effectively recognize the displacement of the specific image to the second position as the specific effect, so that the game entertainment can be improved.

The gaming machine of the seventh embodiment is the gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment.
The effect executing means can displace the first specific display area in the first direction as a displacement of the specific image from the first position to the second position in the specific effect, and the second specific can be used. The display area can be displaced toward the second direction opposite to the first direction (for example, as shown in FIG. 15-31 (D), the upper area 006SG005T is on the right side and the lower area 006SG005B is on the left side. A portion to be moved toward the direction, or a portion to move the upper region 006SG005T upward and the lower region 006SG005B downward as shown in FIG. 15-31 (E)).
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, as a specific effect, the displacement of the specific image to the second position is the second direction opposite to the displacement of the first specific display area in the first direction and the first direction of the second specific display area. By executing it as a displacement in the direction, the effect of the specific effect can be further improved.

The gaming machine of the eighth embodiment is the gaming machine according to the sixth or seventh embodiment.
The displacement amount of the first specific display area and the displacement amount of the second specific display area in the specific effect are different (for example, as shown in the modification 006SG-3, the upper region 006SG005T and the lower region 006SG005B are used as pre-reading notice effects. When the upper region 006SG005T and the lower region 006SG005B are moved in opposite directions, the movement amount (displacement amount) of the upper region 006SG005B is different).
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the effect of the specific effect can be further improved.

The gaming machine of the ninth embodiment is the gaming machine according to any one of the sixth and eighth embodiments.
The effect image is arranged in a special display layer in which the arranged image is preferentially displayed in the display area over the specific display layer (for example, as shown in FIGS. 15-32, the cutting effect image 006SG005S is a decoration. The part that is drawn and placed in the layer 2 image drawing area as an image with a higher display priority than the design or background image),
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, even if the display position of the specific image is displaced as a specific effect, the display position of the effect image is not displaced. Therefore, the displacement of the display position of the specific image is made more conspicuous by comparing these specific images with the effect image. It is possible to further improve the effect of a specific effect.

The gaming machine of the tenth embodiment is the gaming machine according to any one of the sixth to nine embodiments.
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1 or a slot machine) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a big hit gaming state) that is advantageous to the player.
The effect executing means can display the effect image in a plurality of display modes (for example, as shown in FIGS. 15-30, a portion capable of displaying the crack effect image 006SG005H in two colors of blue and red, and a portion thereof. As shown in FIGS. 15-33, the cutting effect image 006SG005S can be displayed in three colors of blue, green, and red).
The ratio controlled to the advantageous state differs depending on which display mode the effect image is displayed (for example, as shown in FIG. 15-30, the crack effect image 006SG005H is displayed in any color. The part where the jackpot expectation is different depending on the color, or the part where the jackpot expectation is different depending on which color the cutting effect image 006SG005S is displayed as shown in FIGS. 15-33).
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the player can pay attention to the display mode of the effect image displayed during the specific effect, so that the effect of the specific effect can be further improved.

The gaming machine of the eleventh form is the gaming machine according to any one of the first to tenth forms.
The specific effect is an effect in which the specific image changes stepwise (for example, as shown in FIG. 15-21, it is displayed in the left region 006SG005L, the middle region 006SG005C, and the right region 006SG005R in the development suggestion effect of the feature unit 006SG. The part where the amount of movement of the image is gradually increased, and as shown in FIGS. 15-27, the decorative design inside is gradually expanded in the revival production of the modified example 006SG-2. As shown in Fig. 15-35, the part where the amount of movement of the fragments constituting the decorative pattern gradually increases, the distortion of the decorative pattern and the background image is gradually large in the promotion effect of the modified example 006SG-5. The part that goes to),
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the effect of the specific effect can be improved by changing the specific image step by step.

The gaming machine of the form 12 is the gaming machine according to the embodiment 11.
The specific effect is an effect in which the display position of the specific image is gradually displaced from the first position toward the second position (for example, as shown in FIG. 15-21, the development suggestion of the feature unit 006SG. In the production, the amount of movement of the image displayed in the left area 006SG005L, the middle area 006SG005C, and the right area 006SG005R gradually moves upward or downward from the central portion of the display area of the image display device 5. As shown in FIGS. 15-27, in the revival effect of the modified example 006SG-2, the fragments constituting the decorative pattern inside are stepwise from the central portion of the display area of the image display device 5 toward the peripheral edge portion of the display area. The moving part, the part where the decorative pattern and the background image are gradually distorted toward the left side in the promotion effect of the modified example 006SG-5),
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the displacement from the first position to the second position of the specific image in the specific effect can be emphasized, so that the effect of the effect can be further improved.

The gaming machine of the thirteenth aspect is the gaming machine according to the eleventh embodiment.
The specific image is composed of a plurality of image pieces (for example, a portion in which the decorative pattern inside is composed of a plurality of fragments as shown in FIGS. 15-28).
The specific effect is an effect in which the number of the displayed image pieces is gradually increased (for example, as shown in the modification 006SG-2, a plurality of fragments constituting the decorative pattern inside are the progress of the revival effect. The part that gradually increases according to),
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it is possible to strongly impress the player with a specific effect by the visual effect that the image pieces gradually increase.

The gaming machine of the form 14 is the gaming machine according to the embodiment 11.
The specific effect is an effect in which the ratio of the area in which the specific image is displayed to the display area is gradually increased (for example, in the hot water shown in FIG. 1-28, in the revival effect, the image display device 5 is used. The part where the ratio of the display area of the decorative pattern in the display area gradually increases),
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the ratio of the area where the specific image is displayed to the display area is gradually increased, so that the player can be more effectively attracted to the specific effect.

The gaming machine of the form 15 is the gaming machine according to any one of the forms 11 to 14.
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1 or a slot machine) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a big hit gaming state) that is advantageous to the player.
The storage means can store a plurality of display position displacement information having different displacement modes of the specific image (for example, a portion in which a plurality of displacement image data are stored in the CGROM 206).
The ratio controlled to the advantageous state differs depending on which display position displacement information the specific image is displaced from (for example, in the variable display in the fluctuation pattern of the super reach, the left region 006SG005L, While the displacement image data for sliding the images of the middle area 006SG005C and the right area 006SG005R to the third stage is used, in the variable display with the fluctuation pattern of the normal reach, the left area 006SG005L, the middle area 006SG005C, and the right area are used. Since the displacement image data for sliding the image of 006SG005R to the first stage or the second stage is used, the ratio controlled to the jackpot gaming state differs depending on the displacement image data used in the development suggestion effect. Part),
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the player can pay attention to the displacement mode of the specific image in the specific effect, so that the effect of the specific effect can be improved.

The gaming machine of the 16th embodiment is the gaming machine according to any one of the 11th to 15th embodiments.
The plurality of display position displacement information is the first display position change information in which the specific image changes from the first aspect to the second aspect different from the first aspect (for example, as shown in FIG. 15-21, super reach. In the variable display with the fluctuation pattern of, the left region 006SG005L, the middle region 006SG005C, and the right region 006SG005R are displacement image data for sliding movement to the third stage), and the specific image is from the first aspect to the first aspect. The second display position change information that does not change in two modes (for example, as shown in FIG. 15-22, in the variable display with the normal reach displacement pattern, the images of the left area 006SG005L, the middle area 006SG005C, and the right area 006SG005R are the first stage. Or data for displacement image for sliding to the second stage), including
The first display position change information and the second display position change information have a common change portion in which the image processing means changes the specific image from the first aspect to the second aspect (for example, FIG. As shown in 15-21 and FIG. 15-22, when the image for the displacement image in which the images of the left region 006SG005L, the middle region 006SG005C, and the right region 006SG005R slide and move to the third stage is used, and the left region 006SG005L, the middle region 006SG005C, In the case of using the displacement image data in which the image of the right region 006SG005R slides to the first stage, the portion where the images of the left region 006SG005L, the middle region 006SG005C, and the right region 006SG005R slide to the first stage is common. When using the displacement image data in which the images of the left area 006SG005L, the middle area 006SG005C, and the right area 006SG005R slide to the third stage, and the images of the left area 006SG005L, the middle area 006SG005C, and the right area 006SG005R slide to the second stage. When the displacement image data is used, the part where the images of the left area 006SG005L, the middle area 006SG005C, and the right area 006SG005R slide to the second stage is common).
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the player can pay attention to the process in which the specific image changes from the first aspect to the second aspect as the specific effect, so that the effect of the specific effect can be further improved.

The gaming machine of the 17th form is the gaming machine according to any one of the 1st to 16th forms.
The display area includes a first specific display area (for example, upper area 006SG005T) and a second specific display area (for example, lower area 006SG005B) different from the first specific display area.
The effect executing means is
In the specific effect, the specific image is displayed over the first specific display area and the second specific display area (for example, as shown in FIGS. 15-31 (C), the upper region 006SG005T and the lower region 006SG005B are displayed. It is possible to display an image in which the relative positions of the first specific display area and the second specific display area are displaced as the displacement specific image (for example, a portion for displaying the decorative pattern and the background image). As shown in 15-31 (D), the portion where the upper region 006SG005T and the lower region 006SG005B move in the left-right direction),
After the displacement specific image is displayed, the boundary portion between the first specific display area and the second specific display area can be displaced (for example, shown in FIGS. 15-31 (D) and 15-31 (E)). (A portion in which the upper region 006SG005T is moved to the right side and the lower region 006SG005B is moved to the left side, and then the boundary portion between the upper region 006SG005T and the lower region 006SG005B is moved upward and downward, respectively).
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, after the displacement specific image is displayed, the boundary portion between the first specific display area and the second specific display area is further displaced, so that the effect of the specific effect can be enhanced. Can be improved.

The gaming machine of the 18th embodiment is the gaming machine according to the 17th embodiment.
The boundary portion between the first specific display area and the second specific display area is different from at least one display area among the plurality of display areas including the first specific display area and the second specific display area. It is displaceable in the direction (eg, as shown in FIGS. 15-31 (D) and 15-31 (E), the upper region 006SG005T moves to the right and the lower region 006SG005B moves to the left, but the upper part. The boundary between the area 006SG005T and the lower area 006SG005B is a part that moves in the vertical direction),
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the effect of the specific effect can be further enhanced by the synergistic effect of the displacement of the plurality of display areas and the displacement of the boundary portion between the first specific display area and the second specific display area.

The gaming machine of the form 19 is the gaming machine according to any one of the forms 1 to 18.
At least in the specific display layer, the image can be arranged over the area corresponding to the display area and the area outside the area corresponding to the display area (for example, as shown in FIGS. 15-39, the promotion effect is executed. The decorative pattern drawn / arranged in the layer 2 image drawing area and the background image drawn / arranged in the layer 3 image drawing area are enlarged, and a part of the background image is moved out of the display area of the image display device 5. Placement part),
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, when a displacement specific image is displayed in the display area as a specific effect, it is possible to reduce the possibility that an inappropriate display is performed in the display area.
In the modified example 006SG-5 of the present invention, when the promotion effect (specific effect) is executed, the displacement target image is enlarged so that the left-right width dimension is longer than the display area of the image display device 5. An example is an example of creating an image for promotion effect by applying a displacement image to the whole, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the range to which the displacement image is applied among the displacement target images is limited to this. It is not necessary to displace only the portion corresponding to the display area of the image display device 5, that is, the image outside the display area of the image display device 5.

The gaming machine of the form 20 is the gaming machine according to the embodiment 19.
The effect executing means can enlarge the image displayed in the display area during the period in which the specific image is displaced from the first position to the second position as the specific effect (for example, depending on the progress of the promotion effect). The part that gradually enlarges the decorative pattern drawn / placed in the layer 2 image drawing area and the background image drawn / placed in the layer 3 image drawing area),
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent inappropriate display in the display area in the process of displaying the displacement specific image while maintaining the effect of the specific effect.

The gaming machine of the 21st form is the gaming machine according to any one of the 1st to 20th forms.
The display area includes a first specific display area (for example, upper area 006SG005T) and a second specific display area (for example, lower area 006SG005B) different from the first specific display area.
The effect executing means displays the specific image over the first specific display area and the second specific display area in the specific effect, and the first specific display area and the second specific image are displayed as the displacement specific image. It is possible to display an image whose position is displaced relative to the display area (for example, as shown in FIG. 15-31 (D), a decorative pattern and a background image are displayed over the upper area 006SG005T and the lower area 006SG005B. , The upper area 006SG005T is moved to the right side, and the lower area 006SG005B is moved to the left side).
When the displacement specific image is displayed in the display area, the image displayed in the first specific display area and the image displayed in the second specific display area are different (for example,). As shown in the modification 006SG-3, the part where the image manually displayed in the upper region 006SG005T and the image displayed in the lower region 006SG005B are different),.
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, since the specific effect can be performed without giving the player a sense of discomfort, it is possible to prevent the gaming interest from being deteriorated.

The gaming machine of the 22nd form is the gaming machine according to any one of the 1st to 20th forms.
The display area includes a first specific display area (for example, upper area 006SG005T) and a second specific display area (for example, lower area 006SG005B) different from the first specific display area.
The effect executing means displays the specific image over the first specific display area and the second specific display area in the specific effect, and the first specific display area and the second specific image are displayed as the displacement specific image. It is possible to display an image whose position is displaced relative to the display area (for example, as shown in FIG. 15-31 (D), a decorative pattern and a background image are displayed over the upper area 006SG005T and the lower area 006SG005B. , The upper area 006SG005T is moved to the right side, and the lower area 006SG005B is moved to the left side).
When the displacement specific image is displayed in the display area, at least a part of the image displayed in the first specific display area and the image displayed in the second specific display area is displayed. It is the same (for example, as shown in the modification 006SG-3, the image displayed in the upper region 006SG005T after moving to the right side and the image displayed in the lower region 006SG005B after moving to the left side). At least part of the common part),
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it is possible to give unexpectedness to a specific effect, so that it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The gaming machine of the form 23 is the gaming machine according to the form 21 or the form 22.
A part of the image displayed in the first specific display area and the second specific display area when the specific image is displayed is the first specific display when the displacement specific image is displayed. In the display area of the image display device 5, the upper area 006SG005T and the lower area 006SG005B are not displayed in the area and the second specific display area (for example, as shown in the modification 006SG-3, at the timing before the execution of the look-ahead notice effect). A part of the image displayed over is not displayed as an image displayed over the upper area 006SG005T after moving to the right side and the lower area 006SG005B after moving to the left side as a look-ahead notice effect. part),
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it is possible to further improve the production interest of a specific production.

The gaming machine of the 24th form is the gaming machine according to any one of the 1st to 23rd forms.
The display means can display a stereoscopic image composed of an image for the right eye and an image for the left eye in the display area (for example, as shown in FIGS. 15-44, the naked-eye stereoscopic image display device 5'. Is a part where a stereoscopic image (video) consisting of an image for the right eye (R image) and an image for the left eye (L image) can be displayed),
The effect executing means is
It is possible to execute a stereoscopic effect for displaying the stereoscopic image (for example, as shown in FIGS. 15-45 (B), a portion where the notice effect during variable display can be displayed on the stereoscopic image).
When the specific effect is executed, a non-stereoscopic image is displayed as the displacement specific image in the display area (for example, as shown in FIGS. 15-45 (D), when the development suggestion effect is executed, the development is performed. The part where the image displayed as a suggestion effect is displayed as a stereoscopic image),
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the player's interest can be improved by the stereoscopic effect, and the displacement specific image is not displayed as the stereoscopic image in the specific effect, so that the specific effect can be suitably carried out.

The gaming machine of the form 25 is the gaming machine according to the embodiment 24.
The image for the right eye and the image for the left eye are arranged in a stereoscopic display layer in which the arranged image is preferentially displayed in the display area over the specific display layer.
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, when the specific effect is executed, the stereoscopic effect can be suitably executed.

The gaming machine of the 26th form is the gaming machine according to the 24th or 25th form.
The effect executing means can execute the stereoscopic effect as an introduction effect of the specific effect in a period before the execution period of the specific effect during variable display.
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it is possible to make the player recognize in advance that the specific effect is executed by executing the stereoscopic effect, so that the effect of the specific effect can be further improved.

As shown in FIG. 15-1, the effect control board 12 is equipped with an effect control CPU 120, a RAM 122, a display control unit 123, and the like. In the effect control board 12, the effect control CPU 120 operates according to the program stored in the built-in ROM 121, and receives the effect control command via the input circuit 260. Further, the effect control CPU 120 performs display control of the image display device 5 such as generation of an image to be displayed on the image display device 5 on the display control unit (VDP (video display processor)) 123 based on the effect control command. Perform the processing to make it.

As shown in FIG. 15-1, the display control unit 123 includes characters (also referred to as image data such as people, animals, characters, figures, symbols, and CG data), decorative patterns, and backgrounds as image element data used as sprite images. The first reserved storage display area 006SG005D for displaying the image and the first special figure reserved storage number as game-related information in the feature unit 006SG and the second reserved storage for displaying the second special figure reserved storage number in a identifiable manner. Displayed together with CGROM205 for storing data such as the first interface image 006SG005I for displaying the display area 006SG005U and the second interface image 006SG005J including a small symbol, and SDRAM 210 (synchronous DRAM) used as a VRAM (video RAM) area. Configure the control circuit.

The effect control CPU 120 outputs a command for reading necessary data from the CGROM 205 in which the image data is stored according to the received effect control command to the display control unit 123. The CGROM 205 stores in advance character image data and moving image data displayed on the image display device 5, specifically, image data of a person, characters, figures, symbols, etc. (including decorative patterns), and a background image. It is a ROM for storing. The CGROM 205 in the feature unit 006SG also stores a plurality of displacement image data for shifting the positions of the pixels constituting the displacement target image to other positions by applying the displacement target image to be described later. There is. The display control unit 123 reads image data from the CGROM 205 in response to a command from the effect control CPU 120. Then, the display control unit 123 executes display control based on the read image data.

The display control unit 123 is a system register 202 in which various settings of the display control unit 123 are stored, attributes (parameters used when drawing a character, the drawing order of the character, the number of colors, the enlargement / reduction ratio, and the like. The attribute register 203 that stores the data that specifies the palette number, coordinates, etc.), the drawing control unit 206 that controls drawing of the image to the drawing area described later in the VRAM area, and the CG data stored in the CGROM 205 are stored in the VRAM area. Data transfer control unit 211 that controls transfer, video signals for displaying image data stored in the display image creation area described later in the VRAM area (R (red), G (green), B (blue)) It is an integrated circuit equipped with a display control unit 213 that outputs a signal and a synchronization signal, a DA converter 214 that converts a video signal output from the display control unit 213 into an analog signal, and outputs the data to the image display device 5.

A system bus and a CG bus are provided inside the display control unit 123, and the system bus and the CG bus are connected to the effect control CPU 120 via the CPU interface 201, and an infrared camera 60 is connected to the system bus. The image processing DSP 264 is connected. Further, the CG bus is connected to the CGROM 205 via the CG bus interface 204. The system register 202 is connected to the system bus, and the attribute register 203 is connected to the CG bus, so that the effect control CPU 120 can access the system register 202 and the attribute register 203.

Further, the drawing control unit 206, the data transfer control unit 211, and the display control unit 213 are connected to the system bus so that the system register 202 can be accessed. Further, the drawing control unit 206 and the data transfer control unit 211 are connected to the CG bus so that the CGROM 205 and the attribute register 203 can be accessed.

Further, a VRAM bus is further provided inside the display control unit 123, and the VRAM bus is connected to the SDRAM 210 via the VRAM bus interface 209. A drawing control unit 206, a data transfer control unit 211, and a display control unit 213 are connected to the VRAM bus so that the VRAM area of the SDRAM 210 can be accessed via the VRAM bus.

In the system register 202, a system control register for storing instructions such as initial setting, drawing, and data transfer, an interrupt control register for storing interrupt signal output instructions described later, a drawing area in the VRAM area, and arrangement of palette data. A drawing register for storing an area and the like, a data transfer register for storing a transfer source address and a transfer destination address at the time of data transfer, a display register for storing a display image creation area in the VRAM area, and the like are allocated.

The CPU interface 201 outputs a V blank interrupt signal to the effect control CPU 120 at each start of the V blank (cycle for updating the image), and outputs various other interrupt signals to the effect control CPU 120. do.

The display control unit 213 performs display processing for outputting the image data of the display image creation area of the VRAM area designated by the display register as a video signal. In the feature unit 006SG, the display image creation area and the drawing area are switched for each V blank. Therefore, the area allocated as the drawing area is drawn in a certain V blank, and in the next V blank, the area is switched to the display image creation area, so that the image data drawn in the previous V blank is displayed and output. In the meantime, drawing is performed in the other area.

In particular, as shown in FIGS. 15-2 (a) and 15-2 (b), in the feature unit 006SG, an image for displaying on the image display device 5 by superimposing (combining) a plurality of layers. Is being generated. In the VRAM area, a layer image drawing area for drawing and arranging images of each of these layers and an image drawn and arranged in each layer image drawing area are further superimposed (combined) and displayed on the image display device 5. A display image creation area for generating an image for the purpose is arranged (see FIG. 15-5). It should be noted that each layer has the concept of upper, middle, and lower layers, and the higher the image, the higher the display priority is set in the image display device 5, and the lower the layer image, the higher the display priority in the image display device 5. Is set low.

As shown in FIGS. 15-5 (A) and 15-5 (B), a layer 1 image drawing area for drawing / arranging an image of layer 1 and an image of layer 2 are drawn / arranged in the VRAM area. A layer 2 image drawing area for drawing and a layer 3 image drawing area for drawing and arranging a layer 3 image are arranged. Further, a displacement image creation area for creating a displacement image, which will be described later, and a display image creation area are also arranged in the VRAM area.

In the displacement image creation area, an image obtained by superimposing (combining) an image drawn / arranged in the layer 2 image drawing area and an image drawn / arranged in the layer 3 image drawing area is created as a displacement target image. This is an area for creating a displacement image by applying a displacement image described later to the displacement target image.

In the display image creation area, an image drawn / arranged in the layer 1 image drawing area, an image drawn / arranged in the layer 2 image drawing area, and an image drawn / arranged in the layer 3 image drawing area are superimposed ( Display for displaying on the image display device 5 an image (combined) or an image in which an image drawn / arranged in the layer 1 image drawing area and a displacement image created in the displacement image creation area are superimposed (combined). This is the area to be created as an image.

The image drawn / arranged in the layer 1 image drawing area is the image having the highest display priority in the image display device 5 (display priority: high), and the image drawn / arranged in the layer 2 image drawing area is an image display. An image having a lower display priority (display priority: medium) than an image drawn / arranged in the layer 1 image drawing area in the device 5 and an image drawn / arranged in the layer 3 image drawing area are the most in the image display device 5. Each image has a low display priority (display priority: low).

That is, layer 1 is an upper layer having the highest image display priority, layer 2 is a middle layer having an image display priority lower than layer 1, and layer 3 is a lower layer having the lowest image display priority. It is a layer.

As shown in FIGS. 15-2 (b) and 15-5 (B), in the layer 1 image drawing area, the first special figure reserved storage number is identifiablely displayed in the lower part of the display area of the image display device 5. In the first interface image 006SG005I including the first reserved storage display area 006SG005D and the second reserved storage display area 006SG005U for identifiable display of the number of reserved storages, and in the upper right portion of the display area of the image display device 5. This is a drawing area for drawing these images in order to display the second interface image 006SG005J including a small symbol whose display area is smaller than the decorative symbol.

The layer 2 image drawing area is a drawing area for drawing the left, middle, and right decorative symbols in order to execute variable display of the decorative symbols in the central portion of the display area of the image display device 5.

The layer 3 image drawing area is a drawing area for drawing the background image in order to display the background image in the entire display area of the image display device 5.

In the feature unit 006SG, an image drawn / arranged in the layer 1 image drawing area (layer 1 image), an image drawn / arranged in the layer 2 image drawing area (layer 2 image), and a layer 3 image drawing area. By superimposing each of the images drawn and arranged in (the image of the layer 3), it is possible to generate an image to be displayed in the display area of the image display device 5. In particular, as described above, the images drawn in the layer 1 image drawing area (first interface image 006SG005I and second interface image 006SG005J) have the highest display priority, and thus are the highest in the image display device 5. Since the image (decorative pattern) displayed as the upper layer image and drawn in the layer 2 image drawing area is set to have a lower display priority than the image drawn in the layer 1 image drawing area, the image display device 5 The image (background image) displayed in the middle layer image and drawn in the layer 3 image drawing area is displayed as a low layer image in the image display device 5 because the display priority is set to the lowest.

The image drawn / arranged in each image drawing area in the feature unit 006SG has a transparency of 0% because the upper layer image makes the overlapping portion of the lower layer image invisible to the player when superimposed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the transparency of the image drawn / arranged in each image drawing area is set to be higher than 0% depending on the situation, and the image display device 5 An image that is transparently displayed in the display area of the above or an image that is temporarily hidden may be provided.

Next, a displacement method of the displacement target image in the feature unit 006SG will be described. As shown in FIG. 15-3 (A), a plurality of pixels having a red component value (R value) and a green component value (G value) are arranged in the displacement image applied to the displacement target image. These R value and G value each take a value in the range of 1 to 256.

Explaining the pixel A of one of these a plurality of pixels as an example, the display control unit 123 is in the displacement target image according to the values of the R value and the G value of the pixel A from the position corresponding to the pixel A in the displacement target image. The position of the pixel X to be displaced is specified from. Specifically, if the R value of the pixel A is 1 to 127, the display control unit 123 moves from the position corresponding to the pixel A in the displacement target image toward the minus direction (left direction) of the X axis. Is specified as the coordinates (position) of the pixel X in the X-axis direction, and if the R value of the pixel A is 129 to 256, the position corresponding to the pixel A in the displacement target image is in the plus direction (right direction) of the X-axis. The position moved toward the pixel X is specified as the coordinates in the X-axis direction of the pixel X. The amount of movement in the X-axis direction from the position corresponding to the pixel A in the displacement target image is a difference from 128, which is the median value of the R value.

Further, if the G value of the pixel A is 1 to 127, the position moved in the negative direction (downward) of the Y axis from the position corresponding to the pixel A in the displacement target image is the coordinate of the pixel X in the Y axis direction. If the G value of the pixel A is 129 to 256, the position moved from the position corresponding to the pixel A in the displacement target image toward the plus direction (upward) of the Y axis is the Y-axis direction of the pixel X. Specify as the coordinates (position) of. The amount of movement in the Y-axis direction from the position corresponding to the pixel A in the displacement target image is a difference from 128, which is the median value of the G value.

Then, after the position of the pixel X in the displacement target image is specified, the pixel X is designated as a pixel to be displayed at the position corresponding to the pixel A in the displacement target image. That is, the pixel X is displaced to the position corresponding to the pixel A. That is, in the present feature unit 006SG, by individually adjusting the R value and the G value of the pixel A, any pixel X can be displaced to the position corresponding to the pixel A, and the R value and the G of the pixel A can be displaced. By adjusting the values to the same value, it is possible to displace a specific pixel X, which is the same amount away from the position corresponding to the pixel A, to the position corresponding to the pixel A.

The display control unit 123 executes the above process for a plurality of pixels. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 15-3 (B), the displacement image has a plurality of regions (displacement image a, displacement image b, displacement image c, displacement) in which the R value and the G value are different from each other. Image d) is configured, and each region is applied to the displacement target image to generate a displacement image.

For example, as shown in FIGS. 15-4 (A) to 15-4 (C), the R value is 128 and the G value is any one of 1 to 127 as the region constituting the displacement image. A displacement image a, an R value of 128 and a G value of any one of 129 to 256, a displacement image b, an R value of any one of 1 to 127, and a G value of 128. A displacement image c, an image d for displacement having an R value of any one of 129 to 256 and a G value of 128 is provided, and an image of a triple circle is used as a displacement target image.

In this case, as shown in FIG. 15-4 (D), for the displacement image a, in the displacement target image, the range moved downward by the difference of the G value from the corresponding position of the displacement image a is the displacement image. Specify in the display range of. Further, as shown in FIG. 15-4 (E), for the displacement image b, in the displacement target image, the range moved above the difference of the G value from the corresponding position of the displacement image b is displayed in the displacement image. Specify in the range. Further, as shown in FIG. 15-4 (F), for the displacement image c, in the displacement target image, the range moved to the left by the difference of the R value from the corresponding position of the displacement image c is the displacement image. Specify in the display range. Further, as shown in FIG. 15-4 (G), for the displacement image d, in the displacement target image, the position moved to the right by the difference of the R value from the corresponding position of the displacement image d is the displacement image. Specify in the display range.

As described above, the range specified from the displacement target image by the R and G values of the displacement image a, the displacement image b, the displacement image c, and the displacement image d is set as the displacement image a, the displacement image b, and the displacement. By displacing to the positions of the image c and the displacement image d, a displacement image as shown in FIG. 15-4 (H) is generated.

In this feature unit 006SG, the displacement image a, the displacement image b, the displacement image c, and the displacement image d are set to either the R value or the G value as a fixed value, so that the displacement image a, Although the boundaries of the displacement image b, the displacement image c, and the displacement image d are clearly separated, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the displacement image a, the displacement image b, and the displacement image d are used. It is also possible to generate an image such as a gradation as a displacement image by gradually making the R value and the G value of the pixels near the boundaries of the image c and the displacement image d different from each other.

FIG. 15-6 (A) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the contents of the effect control command used in the feature unit 006SG. The effect control command has, for example, a 2-byte configuration, the first byte represents MODE (command classification), and the second byte represents EXT (command type). The first bit (bit 7) of the MODE data is always "1", and the first bit of the EXT data is "0". The command form shown in FIG. 15-6 (A) is an example, and other command forms may be used. Further, in this example, the control command is composed of two control signals, but the number of control signals constituting the control command may be one or a plurality of three or more.

In the example shown in FIG. 15-6 (A), the command 8001H is a first variable display start command for designating the start of variable display in the special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 4A. .. The command 8002H is a second variable display start command for designating the start of variable display in the special figure game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 4B. The command 81XXH is a decoration that is variably displayed in each of the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in the image display device 5 in response to the variable display of the special symbol in the special symbol game. This is a variation pattern specification command that specifies a variation pattern (variation time (variable display time)) such as a symbol (also referred to as an effect symbol). Here, XXH indicates that it is an unspecified hexadecimal number, and may be a value arbitrarily set according to the content of instruction by the effect control command. In the variation pattern specification command, different EXT data are set according to the variation pattern to be specified.

The command 8CXXH is a variable display result designation command, and is an effect control command for designating a variable display result such as a special symbol or a decorative symbol. In the variable display result specification command, for example, as shown in FIG. 15-6 (B), the determination result (predetermined result) of whether the variable display result (also referred to as the variable display result) is "missing" or "big hit". ) Or, different EXT data are set according to the determination result (big hit type determination result) of which of a plurality of types the jackpot type is set when the variable display result is "big hit".

In the variable display result designation command, for example, as shown in FIG. 15-6 (B), the command 8C00H is the first variable display result designation command indicating a predetermined result indicating that the variable display result is “missing”. .. The command 8C01H is a second variable display result designation command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "big hit" and the big hit type is "probability variable big hit A" and the big hit type determination result. The command 8C02H is a third variable display result designation command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "big hit" and the big hit type is "probability variable big hit B" and the big hit type determination result. The command 8C03H is a fourth variable display result designation command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "big hit" and the big hit type is "probability variable big hit C" and the big hit type determination result. The command 8C04H is a fifth variable display result designation command for notifying the pre-determined result and the jackpot type determination result that the variable display result is "big hit" and the jackpot type is "non-probability variable jackpot".

The command 8F00H is a symbol confirmation command for designating the change stop (confirmation) of the decorative symbol in each of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in the image display device 5. The command 95XXH is a gaming state designation command for designating the current gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1. In the game state designation command, for example, different EXT data are set according to the current game state in the pachinko gaming machine 1. As a specific example, the command 9500H is used as the first game state specification command corresponding to the game state (low probability low base state, normal state) in which neither the time reduction control nor the probability change control is performed, and the command 9501H is executed by the time reduction control. On the other hand, it is a second game state specification command corresponding to a game state (low probability high base state, time saving state) in which probability change control is not performed. Further, the command 9502H is used as the third game state specification command corresponding to the game state (high probability low base state, time reduction no probability change state) in which the time reduction control is performed while the probability change control is performed, and the command 9503H is the time reduction control and probability change. This is the 4th game state specification command corresponding to the game state (high accuracy high base state, time reduction probability change state) in which control is performed together.

The command A0XXH is a hit start designation command (also referred to as a "fanfare command") for designating the display of an effect image indicating the start of a jackpot game. The command A1XXH is a notification command during the opening of the big winning opening that notifies that the big winning opening is in the open state in the big hit game state. The command A2XXH is a notification command after opening the big winning opening that notifies that it is a period during which the big winning opening has changed from the open state to the closed state in the big hit game state. The command A3XXH is a hit end designation command for designating the display of the effect image at the end of the big hit game.

In the hit start specification command and the hit end specification command, different EXT data may be set according to the pre-determined result and the big hit type determination result, for example, by setting the same EXT data as the variable display result specification command. .. Alternatively, in the hit start designation command or the hit end designation command, the correspondence between the pre-determined result and the jackpot type determination result and the set EXT data may be different from the correspondence in the variable display result designation command. .. In the notification command during the opening of the big winning opening and the notification command after opening the big winning opening, for example, the number of round executions (for example, "1" to "10") in the normal open big hit state and the high-speed open big hit state described later corresponds to. Different EXT data are set.

The command B100H is based on the fact that the game ball that has passed (entered) the first starting winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6A is detected by the first starting opening switch 22A and the starting winning (first starting winning) is generated. This is a first start opening winning designation command for notifying that the first start condition for executing the special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 4A is satisfied. The command B200H is based on the fact that the game ball that has passed (entered) the second starting winning opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B is detected by the second starting opening switch 22B and the starting winning (second starting winning) is generated. , The second start opening winning designation command for notifying that the second start condition for executing the special figure game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 4B is satisfied.

The command C1XXH is a first hold storage number notification command for notifying the first special figure hold storage number in order to make it possible to specify the special figure hold storage number. The command C2XXH is a second hold storage number notification command for notifying the second special figure hold storage number in order to make it possible to specify the special figure hold storage number. The first hold storage number notification command is, for example, when the first start opening prize designation command is transmitted based on the fact that the game ball passes (enters) the first start winning opening and the first start condition is satisfied. , Is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. The second hold storage number notification command is, for example, when the second start opening prize designation command is transmitted based on the fact that the game ball passes (enters) the second start winning opening and the second start condition is satisfied. , Is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. Further, the first hold storage number notification command and the second hold storage number notification command are used in the special figure game when either the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied (when the hold storage number decreases). It may be transmitted in response to the start of execution.

Instead of the first hold storage number notification command and the second hold storage number notification command, the total hold storage number notification command for notifying the total hold storage number may be transmitted. That is, a total hold storage number notification command may be used to notify an increase (or decrease) of the total hold storage number.

The commands shown in FIG. 15-6 (A) are examples, and may not have some of these commands, or different commands may be used in place of these commands. You may add a command different from the command in. For example, a prize ball number notification command for making it possible to specify the number of prize balls to be paid out based on the winning of a game ball at each winning opening, or a gate for notifying that the game ball has passed through the passing gate 41. A passage notification command, a notification command for notifying the remaining number of times that the probability change control or the time reduction control is executed, or the like may be provided.

FIG. 15-7 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a random number value counted on the side of the main board 11. As shown in FIG. 15-7, in the feature unit 006SG, on the side of the main board 11, the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern , Numerical data indicating each of the random number values MR4 for determining the display result of the normal map is controlled so as to be countable. In addition, random values other than these may be used in order to enhance the game effect. Random numbers used to control the progress of such games are also referred to as game random numbers.

The random number circuit 104 may count numerical data indicating a part or all of these random number values MR1 to MR4. The CPU 103 uses a random counter different from the random number circuit 104, such as a random counter provided in a game control counter setting unit (not shown), to update various numerical data by software to obtain random numbers MR1 to MR4. Numerical data indicating a part may be counted.

The random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result is a random number value used for determining whether or not to control the variable display result such as a special symbol in the special figure game as a “big hit” to the big hit gaming state, for example. It takes a value in the range of "1" to "65536". The random value MR2 for determining the jackpot type has one of "probability variable jackpot A", "probability variation jackpot B", "probability variation jackpot C", and "non-probability variation jackpot" when the variable display result is "big hit". It is a random value used to determine, for example, a value in the range of "1" to "100".

The random value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern is a random value used to determine the fluctuation pattern in the variable display of the special symbol or the decorative symbol to one of a plurality of types prepared in advance, and is, for example, "1" to "1" to ". It takes a value in the range of 997.

The random number value MR4 for determining the normal figure display result is used to determine whether the variable display result in the normal figure game by the normal symbol display 20 is "per normal figure" or "out of normal figure". It is a random value to be obtained, and takes a value in the range of "3" to "13", for example.

FIG. 15-8 shows a configuration example of the special figure display result determination table stored in the ROM 101. The feature unit 006SG uses a special figure display result determination table common to the first special figure and the second special figure as the special figure display result determination table, but the present invention is not limited to this. , The individual special figure display result determination table may be used for the first special figure and the second special figure.

The special figure display result determination table is a variable display result in a special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 4A and a special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 4B. Before the definite special symbol is derived and displayed, it is referred to to determine whether or not to control the variable display result as a "big hit" to the big hit game state based on the random number value MR1 for determining the special symbol display result. It is a table to be played.

In the special figure display result determination table in the feature unit 006SG, the special figure display result determination table is characterized according to whether the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a normal state, a time saving state (low probability state), or a probability change state (high probability state). A numerical value (determination value) to be compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the figure display result is assigned to the special figure display result of "big hit" or "missing".

In the special figure display result judgment table, the table data showing the judgment value to be compared with the random number value MR1 for the special figure display result judgment determines whether or not to control the special figure display result as a "big hit" to the big hit gaming state. It is the judgment data assigned to the result. In the special figure display result determination table in the feature unit 006SG, when the gaming state is in the probabilistic state (high probability state), more judgment values are obtained than in the normal state or the time saving state (low probability state). It is assigned to the special figure display result of "big hit". As a result, in the probabilistic state (high probability state) in which the probability change control is performed in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the special figure display result is controlled as a "big hit" in the normal state or the time saving state (low probability state). Then, the probability of being determined to control the special figure display result as a "big hit" to the big hit gaming state is higher than the probability determined (about 1/300 in the main feature unit 006SG) (about 1 in the main feature unit 006SG). / 30). That is, in the special figure display result determination table, it is determined that when the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the probabilistic state (high probability state), it is controlled to the big hit gaming state as compared with the normal state or the time saving state. The determination data is assigned to the determination result of whether or not to control the jackpot gaming state so that the probability is high.

FIG. 15-9 (A) shows a configuration example of the jackpot type determination table stored in the ROM 101. The jackpot type determination table in the feature unit 006SG is based on the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type when it is determined to control the jackpot game state with the special figure display result as "big hit". It is a table referenced to determine the crab. In the jackpot type determination table, whether the special symbol whose variable display (variable display) is performed in the special symbol game is the first special symbol (special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A) or the second special symbol (first). 2 The numerical value (judgment value) to be compared with the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type is "non-probability variation jackpot", "probability variation jackpot A", or "probability variation jackpot A", depending on whether the game is a special figure game by the special symbol display device 4B). It is assigned to a plurality of types of jackpots such as "probability variation jackpot B" and "probability variation jackpot C".

Here, the jackpot type in the feature unit 006SG will be described with reference to FIG. 15-9 (B). In the feature unit 006SG, the jackpot type includes high accuracy control and time saving control after the end of the jackpot gaming state. "Probability change big hit A" and "Probability change big hit B" that are executed and shift to the high accuracy high base state, and high accuracy low base state where high accuracy control is executed but time saving control is not executed after the end of the big hit game state. A "probability variation jackpot C" to be transferred and a "non-probability variation jackpot" to be executed only for the time saving control after the end of the jackpot game state and to transition to the low probability variation high base state are set.

The big hit game state by the "probability change big hit A" is a normal open big hit in which the special variable winning ball device 7 is repeatedly executed 10 times (so-called 10 rounds) to change the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state advantageous to the player. On the other hand, the big hit game state by "probability change big hit B" is a normal open big hit in which the special variable winning ball device 7 is repeatedly executed five times (so-called 5 rounds) to change to the first state advantageous to the player. .. The jackpot game state by the "probability variation jackpot C" is a normal open jackpot in which the special variable winning ball device 7 is repeatedly executed twice (so-called two rounds) in a first state advantageous to the player. Further, the jackpot game state due to the "non-probability variable jackpot" is a normal open jackpot that is repeatedly executed 10 times (so-called 10 rounds) in which the special variable winning ball device 7 is changed to the first state advantageous to the player. .. Therefore, "Probability change jackpot A" is called 10 rounds (10R) probability variation jackpot, "Probability variation jackpot B" is called 5 rounds (5R) probability variation jackpot, and "Probability variation jackpot C" is called 2 rounds (2R) probability variation jackpot. May be called.

The high-accuracy control and the time-saving control executed after the end of the jackpot gaming state of the probabilistic jackpot A to the probabilistic jackpot C are continuously executed until the jackpot occurs again after the end of the jackpot gaming state. Therefore, when the jackpot that occurs again is one of the probability variation jackpot A to the probability variation jackpot C, the high accuracy control and the time saving control are executed again after the end of the jackpot gaming state, so that the jackpot gaming state is in the normal state. It becomes a so-called consecutive villa state that occurs continuously without intervention.

On the other hand, the time saving control executed after the end of the big hit game state by the "non-probability change big hit" is that the special figure game is executed a predetermined number of times (100 times in this feature unit 006SG), or the special figure of the predetermined number of times. It ends when the game is in a big hit game state before the game is executed.

In the setting example of the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 15-9 (A), "probability variable jackpot A" and "probability variable jackpot A" are used depending on whether the variablely displayed special figure is the first special figure or the second special figure. The assignment of judgment values for the jackpot types of "probability variation jackpot B", "probability variation jackpot C", and "non-probability variation jackpot" is different. That is, when the special figure to be variably displayed is the first special figure, the determination value in the predetermined range (value in the range of "81" to "100") is "probability change jackpot B" or "probability change" with a small number of rounds. While assigned to the jackpot type of "big hit C", if the special figure that is variably displayed is the second special figure, the judgment value is assigned to the jackpot type of "probability variation jackpot B" or "probability variation jackpot C". Not done. With such a setting, the jackpot type is determined to be one of a plurality of types based on the fact that the first start condition for starting the special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 4A is satisfied. In the case of Therefore, the ratio of determining the jackpot type to "probability variation jackpot B" or "probability variation jackpot C" with a small number of rounds can be different. In particular, in the special figure game using the second special figure, it is not determined to control the jackpot type to the jackpot state with a small number of rounds as "probability variation jackpot B" or "probability variation jackpot C". Due to the high opening control, in the game state where the game ball easily enters the second start winning opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B, the frequent occurrence of the big hit state where the number of prize balls obtained is small is avoided and the game interest is reduced. It is designed to prevent this.

In the setting example of the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 15-9 (A), the allocation of the determination value for the jackpot type of "non-probability variation" is the special figure game of the first special figure or the second special figure. Since it is the same regardless of whether it is present or not, the probability of becoming a non-probability jackpot and the probability of becoming a probabilistic jackpot are the same regardless of whether it is the special figure game of the first special figure or the second special figure. It is said that.

Therefore, as described above, the assignment of the determination values for the "probability change jackpot B" and the "probability variation jackpot C" differs depending on whether the game is the special figure game of the first special figure or the second special figure. Therefore, the assignment of the judgment value to the "probability change jackpot A" also differs depending on whether it is the special figure game of the first special figure or the second special figure, and for the "probability change jackpot A" having a large number of rounds, the second It is set so that the case of the special figure game of the special figure is easier to determine than the case of the special figure game of the first special figure.

Even in the case of the special figure game of the second special figure, the judgment value in a predetermined range different from that of the special figure game of the first special figure is the big hit of "probability change big hit B" or "probability change big hit C". It may be assigned to a type. For example, in the case of the special figure game of the second special figure, the judgment value smaller than that in the case of the special figure game of the first special figure is in the big hit type of "probability change big hit B" or "probability change big hit C". May be assigned. Alternatively, the jackpot type may be determined by referring to the common table data regardless of whether the game is the special figure game of the first special figure or the second special figure.

FIG. 15-10 shows a fluctuation pattern in the feature unit 006SG. In this feature unit 006SG, among the cases where the variable display result is "off", the variable display mode of the decorative symbol corresponds to the case of "non-reach" and the case of "reach", and is variable. A plurality of fluctuation patterns are prepared in advance in response to the case where the display result is a "big hit". The variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "off" and the variation display mode of the decorative symbol is "non-reach" is called a non-reach variation pattern (also referred to as "non-reach loss variation pattern"). The variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "off" and the variation display mode of the decorative symbol is "reach" is called a reach variation pattern (also referred to as "reach loss variation pattern"). Further, the non-reach fluctuation pattern and the reach fluctuation pattern are included in the missed fluctuation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is “missing”. The fluctuation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "big hit" is called a big hit fluctuation pattern.

The jackpot fluctuation pattern and the reach fluctuation pattern include a normal reach fluctuation pattern in which the reach effect of the normal reach is executed and a super reach fluctuation pattern in which the reach effect of the super reach is executed. Although the feature unit 006SG is provided with one type of normal reach variation pattern, the present invention is not limited to this, and two or more types of normal reach variation patterns may be provided. Further, in the present feature unit 006SG, two types of fluctuation patterns, super reach α and super reach β, are provided as super reach fluctuation patterns, but the present invention is not limited to this, and two types of super reach fluctuation patterns are provided. The above or only one type may be provided.

The super reach fluctuation pattern in the feature unit 006SG is a fluctuation pattern (PA2-2) that is different from the fluctuation pattern (PB1-2) in which the variable display result is a big hit as the fluctuation pattern of the super reach α, and the super reach β. As the fluctuation pattern, a fluctuation pattern (PA2-3) that is different from the fluctuation pattern (PB1-3) in which the variable display result is a big hit is provided.

As shown in FIG. 15-10, the special figure fluctuation time of the normal reach fluctuation pattern in which the reach effect of the normal reach is executed in the feature unit 006SG is set shorter than that of the super reach fluctuation pattern.

In addition, in this feature unit 006SG, since the jackpot expectation that the variable display result becomes "big hit" in the order of super reach, normal reach, and non-reach is set to be high, the normal reach fluctuation pattern and the super reach fluctuation pattern are set. The longer the special figure fluctuation time, the higher the expectation of a big hit.

In particular, the special map fluctuation time of the super reach β fluctuation pattern is set longer than the special map fluctuation time of the super reach α fluctuation pattern. That is, the super reach β fluctuation pattern is set so that the jackpot expectation that the variable display result is “big hit” is higher than that of the super reach α fluctuation pattern.

Further, in the present feature unit 006SG, as will be described later, these fluctuation patterns are determined by using only the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in addition to the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern, a random value for determining the variation pattern type is provided, and the type of the variation pattern is first determined from these random values for determining the variation pattern type. The fluctuation pattern belonging to the determined type may be determined.

The normal reach fluctuation patterns (PA2-1 and PB1-1) and the super reach fluctuation patterns (PA2-2, PA2-3, PB1-2, PB1-3) in the feature unit 006 are displayed in a variable manner. It is also a fluctuation pattern that executes a development suggestion effect to the reach effect of super reach after the reach is established. In the normal reach variation pattern (PA2-1 and PB1-1), the variable display result is displayed without developing into the super reach reach effect after the development suggestion effect is executed, while the super reach variation pattern (PA2-2) is displayed. , PA2-3, PB1-2, PB1-3), the reach effect of the super reach is executed after the execution of the development suggestion effect.

In this feature unit 006SG, the normal reach fluctuation pattern (PA2-1 and PB1-1) and the super reach fluctuation pattern (PA2-2, PA2-3, PB1-2, PB1-3) are displayed in a variable manner. , However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the invention is not limited to this. A fluctuation pattern that does not execute the development suggestion effect may be provided. In addition, when the development suggestion effect is executed, the ratio of developing to the reach effect of the super reach may be set higher than the case where the development suggestion effect is not executed.

FIG. 15-11 is an explanatory diagram of a method for determining a fluctuation pattern in the feature unit 006SG. In this feature unit 006SG, the variation pattern determination table to be selected is different depending on the display result of the variable display to be executed and the number of reserved storages.

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 15-11, when the variable display result is a big hit, the jackpot variation pattern determination table is selected, and the variation pattern is set to PB1-1 using the jackpot variation pattern determination table. It is determined from (variation pattern of normal reach jackpot), PB1-2 (variation pattern of super reach α jackpot), and PB1-3 (variation pattern of super reach β jackpot).

Specifically, in the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table, PB1-1 is determined at a rate of 5%, PB1-2 is determined at a rate of 35%, and PB1-3 is determined at a rate of 60%.

In the present feature unit 006SG, if the variable display result is a big hit, the same big hit variation pattern determination table is used to determine the variation pattern regardless of the jackpot type. A plurality of jackpot variation pattern determination tables having different determination ratios of any one of PB1-1, PB1-2, and PB1-3 are provided, and different jackpot variation pattern determination tables are provided according to the jackpot type. May be used to determine the variation pattern. By doing so, it is possible to create a variation pattern that is easily determined for each jackpot type, so that the player can pay attention to which variation pattern variable display results in a jackpot. You can improve your hobby.

Further, when the variable display result is "off" in the normal game state (low base state) and the number of reserved storages of the variation special figure is 2 or less, the deviation pattern determination table A is selected, and the variation pattern determination table A is selected. Using the deviation pattern determination table A, the variation patterns are PA1-1 (non-reach deviation variation pattern), PA2-1 (normal reach deviation variation pattern), PA2-2 (super reach α deviation variation pattern), PA2. Determined from -3 (fluctuation pattern of super reach β off).

Specifically, in the deviation pattern determination table A, PA1-1 is determined at a rate of 50%, PA2-1 is determined at a rate of 40%, and PA2-2 is determined at a rate of 7%. PA2-3 is determined at a rate of 3%.

Further, when the variable display result is "missing" in the normal gaming state (low base state) and the number of reserved storages of the variable special figure is 3, the deviation pattern determination table B for loss is selected and the deviation is obtained. Using the fluctuation pattern determination table B, the fluctuation patterns are PA1-2 (shortening fluctuation pattern of non-reach loss), PA2-1 (variation pattern of normal reach loss), PA2-2 (variation pattern of super reach α loss), PA2. Determined from -3 (fluctuation pattern of super reach β off).

Specifically, in the deviation pattern determination table B, PA1-2 is determined at a rate of 60%, PA2-1 is determined at a rate of 30%, and PA2-2 is determined at a rate of 7%. PA2-3 is determined at a rate of 3%.

Further, when the variable display result is "missing" in the normal gaming state (low base state) and the number of reserved storages of the variable special figure is 4, the deviation pattern determination table C for loss is selected and the deviation is obtained. Using the fluctuation pattern determination table C, the fluctuation patterns are PA1-3 (shortening fluctuation pattern of non-reach loss), PA2-1 (variation pattern of normal reach loss), PA2-2 (variation pattern of super reach α loss), PA2. Determined from -3 (fluctuation pattern of super reach β off).

Specifically, in the deviation pattern determination table C, PA1-3 is determined at a rate of 70%, PA2-1 is determined at a rate of 20%, and PA2-2 is determined at a rate of 7%. PA2-3 is determined at a rate of 3%.

If the variable display result is "off" in the time saving state (high base state), the out-of-order variation pattern determination table D is selected, and the out-of-order variation pattern determination table D is used to set the variation pattern to PA1-4. Determined from (non-reach off-time shortening fluctuation pattern), PA2-1 (normal reach off-off fluctuation pattern), PA2-2 (super reach α off-off fluctuation pattern), PA2-3 (super reach β off-off fluctuation pattern) do.

Specifically, in the deviation pattern determination table D, PA1-4 is determined at a rate of 70%, PA2-1 is determined at a rate of 20%, and PA2-2 is determined at a rate of 7%. PA2-3 is determined at a rate of 3%.

That is, when the variable display result is "missing" in the feature unit 006SG, the special figure is based on the fact that the number of reserved storages of the variable special figure is 3 or 4, or the time is shortened. Since the variable display is executed at a higher rate due to the shortening fluctuation pattern (PA1-2, PA1-3, PA1-4) whose fluctuation time is shorter than the normal non-reach deviation fluctuation pattern (PA1-1). While preventing the game from being delayed, it is possible to shorten the period until the next variable display result becomes a big hit.

The RAM 102 in the feature unit 006SG is provided with, for example, a game control data holding area (not shown) as an area for holding various data used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. The game control data holding area includes a first special figure holding storage unit, a second special drawing holding storage unit, a normal drawing holding storage unit, a game control flag setting unit, a game control timer setting unit, and a game control counter. It has a setting unit and a game control buffer setting unit.

In the first special figure reservation storage unit, the game ball passes (enters) through the first start winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6A, and a starting prize (first starting winning) is generated, but the special drawing has not been started yet. The reserved data of the game (the special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 4A) is stored. As an example, the first special figure reservation storage unit associates the winning order (the order of detecting the game ball) with the holding number with the first starting winning opening, and satisfies the first starting condition in the passage (entry) of the game ball. Based on this, the random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result extracted from the random number circuit 104 or the like by the CPU 103, the random number MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and the numerical data indicating the random number MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern are used as pending data. , The storage number is stored until a predetermined upper limit value (for example, "4") is reached. The hold data stored in the first special figure hold storage unit in this way indicates that the execution of the special figure game using the first special figure is held, and the variable display result (special figure display result) in this special figure game. ) Is the pending information that makes it possible to determine whether or not it will be a big hit.

In the second special figure reservation storage unit, the game ball passes (enters) through the second start winning opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B, and the starting winning (second starting winning) is generated, but the special drawing has not been started yet. The reserved data of the figure game (the special figure game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 4B) is stored. As an example, the second special figure reservation storage unit associates the winning order (the order of detecting the game ball) with the holding number with the second starting winning opening, and satisfies the second starting condition in the passage (entry) of the game ball. Based on this, the random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result extracted from the random number circuit 104 or the like by the CPU 103, the random number MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and the numerical data indicating the random number MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern are used as pending data. , Store until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, "4"). The hold data stored in the second special figure hold storage unit in this way indicates that the execution of the special figure game using the second special figure is held, and the variable display result (special figure display result) in this special figure game. ) Is the pending information that makes it possible to determine whether or not it will be a big hit.

It should be noted that the hold information (first hold information) based on the establishment of the first start condition due to the game ball passing (entering) through the first start winning opening and the game ball passing (entering) through the second start winning opening. The hold information (second hold information) based on the establishment of the second start winning prize may be stored in association with the hold number in the common hold storage unit. In this case, the start opening data indicating which of the first start winning opening and the second starting winning opening the game ball has passed (entered) may be included in the hold information and stored in association with the hold number. ..

The normal figure hold storage unit stores the hold information of the normal figure game that has not yet been started by the normal symbol display 20 even though the game ball that has passed through the passing gate 41 is detected by the gate switch 21. For example, the normal map holding storage unit is associated with the hold number in the order in which the game ball passes through the passage gate 41, and is for determining the normal figure display result extracted from the random number circuit 104 or the like by the CPU 103 based on the passage of the game ball. Numerical data indicating the random number value MR4 of the above is set as pending data, and is stored until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, “4”).

The game control flag setting unit is provided with a plurality of types of flags that can update the state according to the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control flag setting unit stores data indicating a flag value and data indicating an on state or an off state for each of a plurality of types of flags.

The game control timer setting unit is provided with various timers used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control timer setting unit stores data indicating timer values for each of a plurality of types of timers.

The game control counter setting unit is provided with a plurality of types of counters for counting the count values used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control counter setting unit stores data indicating count values for each of a plurality of types of counters. Here, the game control counter setting unit may be provided with a random counter for the CPU 103 to count a part or all of the game random numbers so that they can be updated by software.

Numerical data indicating random numbers, for example, random numbers MR2 to MR4, which are not generated by the random number circuit 104, are stored as random count values in the random counter of the game control counter setting unit, and are periodically executed according to the execution of software by the CPU 103. Numerical data indicating each random number value is updated targetly or irregularly. The software executed by the CPU 103 to update the random count value may be for updating the random count value separately from the operation of updating the numerical data in the random number circuit 104, or may be extracted from the random number circuit 104. It may be for updating the random count value by performing a predetermined process such as scramble processing or arithmetic processing on all or a part of the numerical data.

The game control buffer setting unit is provided with various buffers for temporarily storing data used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control buffer setting unit stores data indicating buffer values in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

The RAM 122 mounted on the effect control board 12 shown in FIG. 15-1 is provided with, for example, an effect control data holding area as an area for holding various data used for controlling the effect operation. The effect control data holding area shown in FIG. 15-15 (A) includes an effect control flag setting unit, an effect control timer setting unit, an effect control counter setting unit, and an effect control buffer setting unit.

In the effect control flag setting unit, there are a plurality of types that can update the state according to the effect operation state such as the display state of the effect image on the screen of the image display device 5 and the effect control command transmitted from the main board 11. A flag is provided. For example, the effect control flag setting unit stores data indicating a flag value and data indicating an on state or an off state for each of a plurality of types of flags.

The effect control timer setting unit is provided with a plurality of types of timers used to control the progress of various effect operations such as, for example, an effect image display operation on the screen of the image display device 5. For example, the effect control timer setting unit stores data indicating timer values for each of a plurality of types of timers.

The effect control counter setting unit is provided with a plurality of types of counters used to control the progress of various effect operations. For example, the effect control counter setting unit stores data indicating the count values of each of the plurality of types of counters.

The effect control buffer setting unit is provided with various buffers for temporarily storing data used for controlling the progress of various effect operations. For example, the effect control buffer setting unit stores data indicating buffer values in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

In the feature unit 006SG, the data constituting the start winning command buffer is stored in a predetermined area of the effect control buffer setting unit. The command buffer received at the time of starting winning corresponds to the storage area (buffer numbers "1-1" to "1-4" corresponding to the maximum value (for example, "4") of the total number of reserved storages in the first special figure reserved storage. A storage area (area corresponding to the buffer number “1-0”) corresponding to the first special figure during variable display is provided. Further, in the start winning command buffer, the storage area (buffer numbers "2-1" to "2-4" corresponding to the maximum value (for example, "4") of the total number of reserved storages in the second special figure reserved storage is stored. (Area corresponding to) and a storage area (area corresponding to the buffer number “2-0”) corresponding to the second special figure during variable display are provided. When there is a start winning to the 1st start winning opening or the 2nd starting winning opening, the starting opening winning designation command (1st starting opening winning designation command or the 2nd starting opening winning designation command) and the hold storage number notification command ( The first hold storage number notification command or the second hold storage number notification command) is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 as one set. The storage area corresponding to the first special figure hold storage and the storage area corresponding to the second special figure hold storage in the start winning reception command buffer are associated with these start opening winning designation commands and the hold storage number notification commands. A storage area (entry) for storing the first special figure holding storage and the second special figure holding storage separately is secured.

The stored contents of these storage areas (entries) will be described later when the start condition is satisfied and the variable display of the highest held storage (buffer number "1-1" or buffer number "2-1") is started. The stored contents of the buffer number "1-0" or the buffer number "2-0" for storing the contents of the reserved storage for which the start condition is satisfied are displayed in a variable manner. It is set to be cleared in the special figure hit waiting process executed when the process is finished.

FIG. 15-12 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in S110 of FIG. 6 as the special symbol normal process. In the special symbol normal processing shown in FIG. 15-12, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the second special figure reserved storage number is “0” (step 006SGS141). The second special figure hold storage number is the hold storage number of the special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 4B. For example, in the process of step 006SGS141, the second reserved storage number count value stored in the game control counter setting unit may be read, and it may be determined whether or not the read value is “0”.

When the second special figure hold storage number is other than "0" in step 006SGS141 (step 006SGS141; N), the hold data stored corresponding to the hold number "1" in the second special figure hold storage unit. As a result, numerical data indicating the random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the random value MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and the random value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern are read out (step 006SGS142). The numerical data read at this time may be stored in, for example, a random number buffer for fluctuation and temporarily stored.

Following the process of step 006SGS142, the second special figure holding storage number and the total holding storage number are subtracted by 1 by subtracting 1 from the second special figure holding storage count value and the total holding storage count value and updating. The data in the second special figure reservation storage unit is updated as well as being updated. Specifically, the random number values MR1 to MR3 stored in the entry lower than the hold number "1" (for example, the entry corresponding to the hold numbers "2" to "4") in the second special figure hold storage unit are shown. The pending data is shifted upward one entry at a time (step 006SGS143).

After that, after updating the variable special map designated buffer value, which is the stored value of the variable special map designated buffer, to "2" (step 006SGS144), the process proceeds to step 006SGS149.

On the other hand, when the second special figure reserved storage number is "0" in step 006SGS141 (step 006SGS141; Y), it is determined whether or not the first special figure reserved storage number is "0" (step 006SGS145). .. The first special figure hold storage number is the hold storage number of the special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 4A. For example, in the process of step 006SGS145, if the game control counter setting unit reads the first hold storage count value stored in the first hold storage counter and determines whether or not the read value is "0". good. As described above, the process of step 006SGS145 is executed when it is determined in step 006SGS141 that the second special figure holding storage number is "0", and the first special figure holding storage number is "0". Judge whether or not. As a result, the special figure game using the second special figure is started to be executed with priority over the special figure game using the first special figure.

It should be noted that the special figure game using the second special figure is not limited to the one executed in preference to the special figure game using the first special figure, for example, the first start winning opening and the second starting winning opening. The execution of the special figure game may be started in the order in which the game balls enter (pass) and the start prize is generated. In this case, a table for storing data that can specify the order in which the start winning is generated is provided, and the execution of the special figure game using either the first special figure or the second special figure is started from the stored data. I just need to be able to decide.

When the first special figure hold storage number is other than "0" in step 006SGS145 (step 006SGS145; N), the hold data stored corresponding to the hold number "1" in the first special figure hold storage unit. As a result, numerical data indicating the random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the random value MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and the random value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern are read out (step 006SGS146). The numerical data read at this time may be stored in, for example, a random number buffer for fluctuation and temporarily stored.

Following the process of step 006SGS146, the first special figure holding memory number and the total holding storage number are subtracted by 1 by subtracting 1 from the first special figure holding storage number count value and the total holding storage number count value and updating. The data in the first special figure reservation storage unit is updated as well as being updated. Specifically, the random number values MR1 to MR3 stored in the entry lower than the hold number "1" (for example, the entry corresponding to the hold numbers "2" to "4") in the first special figure hold storage unit are shown. The pending data is shifted up one entry at a time (step 006SGS147).

After that, after updating the variable special map designated buffer value, which is the stored value of the variable special map designated buffer, to "1" (step 006SGS148), the process proceeds to step 006SGS149.

In step 006SGS149, the special figure display result determination shown in FIG. 15-8 is used as a table for determining whether the special figure display result, which is the variable display result of the special symbol, is "big hit" or "missing". Select a table and set it. Next, the numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result stored in the random number buffer for fluctuation is compared with the determination value assigned to each special figure display result of "big hit" or "missing". , It is determined whether the special figure display result is "big hit" or "missing" (step 006SGS150a). In this step 006SGS150a, if the gaming state at that time is a high probability state (probability change state) in which the probability change flag is on, the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result is in the high probability state (probability change state). ) Corresponds to the range of 1000 to 12180, it is determined to be a "big hit", and if it is not applicable, it is determined to be "missing". In the low probability state where the probability change flag is off, if the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result falls within the range of 1 to 219, it is judged as "big hit", and if not, it is judged as "missing". judge.

As described above, in the special figure display result determination table 1 selected in step 006SGS149, different determination values are assigned to the "big hit" according to the game state (high probability, low probability) at that time. , In the process of step 006SGS150a, the special figure display result using different judgment data (judgment value) depending on whether or not the gaming state when the variable display of the special figure game or the like is started is a highly accurate state. By determining whether or not to set "big hit", when the gaming state is in the high probability state, it is determined (determined) to be "big hit" with a higher probability than in the case of the low probability state.

When it is determined in step 006SGS150a that it is a "big hit" (step 006SGS150a; Y), the big hit flag is turned on in the game control flag setting unit (step 006SGS152). At this time, the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 15-9 (A) is selected and set as a table to be used for determining the jackpot type to one of a plurality of types (step 006SGS153). By referring to the jackpot type determination table set in this way, the numerical data indicating the random number value MR2 for jackpot type determination stored in the variable random number buffer, and the "non-probability variation jackpot" and "probability variation jackpot" in the jackpot type determination table. It is determined which of the plurality of types the jackpot type is to be, depending on which of the determination values assigned to each jackpot type of "A", "probability variation jackpot B", and "probability variation jackpot C" is matched (step 006SGS154). ).

By determining the jackpot type in the process of step 006SGS154, the gaming state after the end of the jackpot gaming state is set to either a time-saving state or a probabilistic state in which the player has a higher advantage than the time-saving state. It will be decided before the definite special symbol as a variable display result is derived. Corresponding to the jackpot type determined in this way, for example, by setting the jackpot type buffer value which is the stored value of the jackpot type buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit (step 006SGS155), the determined jackpot type can be selected. Remember. As an example, if the jackpot type is "non-probability variation jackpot" corresponding to non-probability variation jackpot, the jackpot type buffer value is set to "0", and if it is "probability variation A" corresponding to probability variation jackpot A, it is set to "1". If it is "probability change B" corresponding to B, it may be set to "2", and if it is "probability change C" corresponding to probability change jackpot C, it may be set to "3".

After the end of step 006SGS155, or when it is determined in step 006SGS150a that it is not a "big hit" (step 006SGS150a; N), whether or not to control the big hit gaming state (whether or not the big hit flag is turned on). A definite special symbol is set according to the pre-determined result of () and the determined result of the jackpot type in the case of the jackpot gaming state. As an example, a special symbol indicating the "-" symbol, which is an outlier symbol, is set as the finalized special symbol in response to the pre-determined result that the special symbol display result is "out of place". Further, when it is determined in step 006SGS150a that the special figure display result is "big hit", when the big hit type in step 006SGS154 is "probability variable big hit A", a special symbol indicating the number "7" is displayed. Set to a confirmed special symbol. When the jackpot type is "probability variation jackpot B", the special symbol indicating the number "5" is set as the confirmed special symbol. When the jackpot type is "non-probability variable jackpot", the special symbol indicating the number "3" is set as the confirmed special symbol. When the jackpot type is "probability variation jackpot C", the special symbol indicating the number "1" is set as the confirmed special symbol. It should be noted that these confirmed special symbols are examples, and other confirmed special symbols may be set, or a plurality of types of symbols may be set as confirmed special symbols.

After setting the confirmed special symbol in step 006SGS156, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "1" which is a value corresponding to the fluctuation pattern setting process (step 006SGS157), and then the special symbol normal processing is terminated. ..

If the reserved memory number of the special figure game using the first special figure is "0" in step 006SGS145 (step 006SGS145; Y), after performing the predetermined demo display setting (step 006SGS158), The normal processing of the special symbol is terminated. In this demo display setting, for example, an effect control command (customer waiting demo designation command) for designating a demonstration display (demo screen display) by displaying a predetermined effect image on the image display device 5 is an effect control from the main board 11. It is determined whether or not the transmission has been sent to the board 12. At this time, if the customer waiting demo designation command has already been sent, the demo display setting is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it has not been sent, the setting for sending the customer waiting demo designation command is made, and then the demo display setting is terminated.

FIG. 15-13 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S111 of FIG. 6 as the variation pattern setting process. In the variation pattern setting process shown in FIG. 15-13, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the jackpot flag is turned on (step 006SGS161). Then, if the jackpot flag is turned on (step 006SGS161; Y), the jackpot variation pattern determination table is selected and set (step 006SGS164).

In the determination in step 006SGS161, if the jackpot flag is not turned on (step 006SGS161; N), the gaming state is probablely changed by determining whether or not the time saving flag is turned on in the game control flag setting unit. It is determined whether or not the time saving control is being performed in the state or the time saving state (step 006SGS168). Then, if the time saving flag is turned on (step 006SGS168; Y), the out-of-order variation pattern determination table D is selected and set as the table to be used for determining the variation pattern to one of a plurality of types (step 006SGS168; Y). Step 006SGS169).

On the other hand, when the time reduction control is not in progress, that is, when the time reduction flag is not turned on (step 006SGS168; N), for example, the stored value of the hold storage number counter of the fluctuation special figure provided in the game control counter setting unit. The reserved storage number of the variable special map is specified by reading the above, and it is determined whether or not the reserved storage number of the specified variable special map is 1 or 2 (step 006SGS170).

When the number of reserved memory of the specified variation special figure is 1 or 2 (step 006SGS170; N), the deviation pattern determination table A is used as a table to be used for determining the variation pattern to one of a plurality of types. Select and set (step 006SGS171).

Further, when the reserved storage number of the specified variable special figure is not 1 or 2 (step 006SGS170; N), it is further determined whether or not the reserved storage number of the specified variable special figure is 3 (step 006SGS172). ).

When the number of reserved memory of the specified variation special figure is 3 (step 006SGS172; Y), the deviation pattern determination table B is selected as the table to be used for determining the variation pattern to one of a plurality of types. And set (step 006SGS173).

Further, when the number of reserved memory of the specified variable chart is not 3, that is, when the number of reserved memory of the specified variable chart is 4 (step 006SGS172; N), any one of a plurality of types of fluctuation patterns is used. As the table to be used for determining the above, the deviation pattern determination table C is selected and set (step 006SGS174), and the process proceeds to step 006SGS175.

After executing any of the processes of step 006SGS164, step 006SGS169, step 006SGS171, step 006SGS173, and step 006SGS174, for example, the numerical data indicating the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern stored in the random number buffer for fluctuation is displayed. Based on this, one of a plurality of types of variation patterns can be selected by referring to any of the selected (set) jackpot variation pattern determination table, special hit variation pattern determination table, and loss variation pattern determination tables A to D. (Step 006SGS175).

When the jackpot flag is off, the variable display mode is determined by the process of step 006SGS175 to determine whether or not the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is set to "reach". That is, the process of step 006SGS170 includes a process of determining whether or not to set the variable display state of the decorative symbol to the reach state when the variable display result is "missing".

After the fluctuation pattern is determined in step 006SGS175, the special symbol game using the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B according to the fluctuation special symbol designation buffer value. A setting is made to start the variation of the special symbol so as to start any of the special map games using the second special symbol (step 006SGS176). As an example, if the variable special figure designation buffer value is "1", a setting for transmitting a drive signal for updating the display of the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 4A is performed. On the other hand, if the variable special figure designation buffer value is "2", a setting for transmitting a drive signal for updating the display of the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 4B is made.

Following the process of step 006SGS176, settings for transmitting various commands used at the start of fluctuation of the special symbol are set (step 006SGS177). For example, when the variable special figure designation buffer value is "1", the CPU 103 receives a game state designation command, a first variable display start command, a variable pattern designation command, and a variable display from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. In order to sequentially send the result specification command and the first hold storage number notification command, the game control buffer setting unit uses the setting data indicating the storage address (start address) in the ROM 101 of the first fluctuation start command table prepared in advance. It is stored in the buffer area specified by the send command pointer in the send command buffer provided in. On the other hand, when the variable special figure designation buffer value is "2", the CPU 103 receives a game state designation command, a second variable display start command, a variable pattern designation command, and a variable display from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. In order to sequentially transmit the result specification command and the second hold storage number notification command, setting data indicating the storage address in ROM 101 of the second fluctuation start command table prepared in advance is provided in the game control buffer setting unit. Stores in the buffer area specified by the send command pointer in the send command buffer.

After executing the process of step 006SGS177, the special symbol variation time, which is the variable display time of the special symbol according to the determination result of the variation pattern, is set (step 006SGS178). The special symbol fluctuation time, which is the variable display time of the special symbol, is required from the start of the variable display of the special symbol in the special symbol game until the finalized special symbol, which is the variable display result (special symbol display result), is stopped and displayed. It's time. After that, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "2", which is a value corresponding to the special symbol variation processing (step 006SGS179), and then the variation pattern setting process is terminated.

Based on the command transmission setting in step 006SGS177, every time the command control process of step S27 shown in FIG. 5 is executed after the variation pattern setting process is completed, the game state from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 The specified command, the first variable display start command or the second variable display start command, the variable pattern specification command, the variable display result specification command, the first reserved storage number notification command or the second reserved storage number notification command are sequentially transmitted. It will be. The order in which these effect control commands are transmitted can be arbitrarily changed. For example, after the variable display result specification command is transmitted first, the first variable display start command, the second variable display start command, and the variation pattern It may be transmitted in the order of a designated command, a game state designation command, a first hold storage number notification command, a second hold storage number notification command, or the like.

FIG. 15-14 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S113 of FIG. 6 as the special symbol stop process. In the special symbol stop processing, the CPU 103 sets the end flag referred to in the special symbol variation processing in step S112 to the ON state, terminates the variation of the special symbol, and causes the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B. Control is performed to stop and display the stop symbol (step 006SGS180). When the variation special symbol designation buffer value is "1" indicating the first special symbol, the variation of the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A is terminated, and the variation special symbol designation buffer value is changed. When it is "2" indicating the second special symbol, the variation of the second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 4B is terminated. In addition, control is performed to transmit a symbol determination command to the effect control board 12 (step 006SGS181).

Then, it is determined whether or not the jackpot flag is turned on (step 006SGS182). When the jackpot flag is turned on (step 006SGS182; Y), the CPU 103 clears the probability change flag and the time saving flag to turn it off (step 006SGS184) if the probability change flag and the time saving flag are turned on. , Hit start 1 designated command (probability variable jackpot A), hit start 2 designated command (probable variable jackpot B), hit start 3 designated command (probability variable jackpot C), according to the type of jackpot stored on the effect control board 12. Hit start 4 Make settings for transmitting the designated command (non-probability change) (step 006SGS185).

Further, the CPU 103 makes settings for transmitting a game state designation command indicating a normal state to the effect control board 12 (step 006SGS186).

Then, a value corresponding to the jackpot display time (time for notifying the occurrence of the jackpot, for example, in the image display device 5) is set in the jackpot display time timer (step 006SGS187). In addition, the number of times of opening (for example, 10 times in the case of non-probability big hit or probability change big hit A, 5 times in the case of probability change big hit B, and 2 times in the case of probability change big hit C) is set in the big winning opening opening number counter. (Step 006SGS188). Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "4" (step 006SGS189), which is a value corresponding to the jackpot opening pre-processing (step S114), and the special symbol stop processing is terminated.

On the other hand, when the jackpot flag is off (step 006SGS182; N), in step 006SGS190, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the value of the time reduction counter is "0". If the value of the time reduction counter is "0" (step 006SGS190; Y), the process proceeds to step 006SGS196.

On the other hand, when the value of the time reduction counter is not "0" (step 006SGS190; N), that is, in the high base state where the time reduction remains, the value of the time reduction counter is decremented by -1 (step). 006SGS191). Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the time reduction counter after subtraction is "0" (step 006SGS193), and if it is not "0" (step 006SGS193; N), the process proceeds to step 006SGS196, and the value of the time reduction counter is reached. When is "0" (step 006SGS193; Y), after clearing the time saving flag and turning it off (step 006SGS194) in order to end the time saving control, the state of the probability change flag or the time saving flag is supported. After setting the transmission of the game state designation command corresponding to the game state (specifically, the low accuracy low base state) (step 006SGS195), the process proceeds to step 006SGS196.

In step 006SGS196, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "0", which is a value corresponding to the special symbol normal processing, and then the special symbol stop processing is terminated.

FIG. 15-15 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in S117 of FIG. 6 as the jackpot end process.

In the jackpot end process, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the jackpot end display timer is operating, that is, the timer is being counted (step 006SGS201). When the big hit end display timer is not operating (step 006SGS201; N), the value corresponding to the display time corresponding to the time (big hit end display time) for displaying the big hit end on the image display device 5 on the big hit end display timer. Is set (step 006SGS202), and the process ends.

On the other hand, when the big hit end display timer is operating (step 006SGS201; Y), the value of the big hit end display timer is subtracted by 1 (step 006SGS203). Then, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the value of the jackpot end display timer is 0, that is, whether or not the jackpot end display time has elapsed (step 006SGS204). If it has not passed, the process ends.

If the jackpot end display time has elapsed (step 006SGS204; Y), the CPU 103 determines whether the stored jackpot type is a non-probability variable jackpot (step 006SGS205).

When the stored jackpot type is not a non-probability jackpot (step 006SGS205; N), the probability variation flag is turned on (step 006SGS207), the time saving flag is turned on (step 006SGS208), and the time saving count counter is set to "0". After setting (step 006SGS209), the process proceeds to step 006SGS213.

On the other hand, when the jackpot type is a non-probability variable jackpot (step 006SGS205; Y), by executing step 006SGS211 and step 006SGS212, the time saving flag is turned on and "100" is set in the time saving number counter. After that, the process proceeds to step 006SGS213.

In step 006SGS213, the jackpot flag is turned off, and the transmission setting of the jackpot end designation command according to the jackpot type is set (step 006SGS214). Then, after setting the transmission of the game state specification command for notifying the effect control board 12 of the game state based on the probability change flag and the time reduction flag turned on (step 006SGS215), the value of the special figure process flag is special. It is updated to "0" which is a value corresponding to the symbol normal processing (step 006SGS216).

Next, the operation of the effect control CPU 120 will be described. 15-16 is a part of the flowchart of the effect control process process shown in FIG. The effect control CPU 120 has a background image change process (step 006SG162) for changing the background image displayed on the image display device 5 after the pre-reading notice setting process (step S161) described above is executed in the effect control process process. ) Is executed, and any of the processes of steps S170 to S175 is executed.

As the background image change processing, for example, the effect control CPU 120 displays an image at the start timing of variable display (the timing when the effect control process process is executed while the value of the effect control process flag is set to 1). The change of the background image displayed on the device 5 may be determined at a predetermined ratio (for example, a ratio of 20%), and the image display device 5 may start displaying a new background image according to the determination. That is, in the feature unit 006SG, the variable display of the decorative pattern and the effect corresponding to the variable display are executed in the state where any one of the plurality of background images is displayed on the image display device 5. There is.

When the game state changes in the background image change process (for example, from the normal state to the big hit game state, from the big hit game state to the probable change state or the time saving state, from the probable change state or the time saving state to the big hit state or the normal state). When the state is changed), the background image corresponding to the game state of the change destination may be displayed on the image display device 5.

FIG. 15-17 is a diagram showing a flowchart showing the effect processing during variable display of the effect control process process. In the effect processing during variable display, the effect control CPU 120 is a process timer according to the process table selected by the effect control CPU 120 according to the variation pattern in the variable display start setting process, and the effect control CPU 120 is in the variable display start setting process. The respective values of the set variable display time timer and variable display control timer are set to -1 (step 006SGS901, step 006SGS902, step 006SGS903).

Then, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the process timer has timed out (step 006SGS906). If the process timer is out, the process data is switched (step 006SGS907). That is, the process timer is started again by setting the process timer setting value set next in the process table to the process timer (step 006SGS908). In addition, the control status for the effect device (effect component) is changed based on the contents of the process data set next (display control execution data, lamp control execution data, sound control execution data, operation unit control data, etc.). (Step 006SGS909). On the other hand, when the process timer is not timer-out, the effect device (for effect) is according to the contents of the process data corresponding to the process timer (display control execution data, lamp control execution data, sound control execution data, operation unit control data, etc.). The control of the component) is executed (step 006SGS910).

Next, it is confirmed whether or not the variable display control timer is out of the timer (step 006SGS921). When the variable display control timer is out of the timer (step 006SGS921; Y), the effect control CPU 120 displays the display control unit 123 on the next display screen of the decorative symbol on the left, middle, and right (display switching of the previous decorative symbol). The image data (the screen to be displayed after 30 ms has elapsed from the time point) is created (step 006SGS922). Further, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the variable display is a variable display of a fluctuation pattern of normal reach or super reach (step 066SGS923).

If the variable display is a variable display with a non-reach variable pattern (step 066SGS923; N), the process proceeds to step 006SGS927, and if the variable display is a normal reach or super reach variable display (step 006SGS923; Y), the process proceeds to step 006SGS927. Further, it is determined whether or not the display image processing flag described later is on (step 006SGS924).

If the display image processing flag is on (step 006SGS924; Y), the process proceeds to step 006SGS926, and if the display image processing flag is off (step 006SGS924; N), the content of the process data being executed is confirmed. It is determined whether or not it is the timing to start suggesting the development of the super reach into the reach effect (step 006SGS925). If it is not the development suggestion start timing for the reach production of the super reach (step 006SGS925; N), the process proceeds to step 006SGS927, and if it is the development suggestion start timing for the super reach reach production (step 006SGS925; Y), the step 006SGS926 is performed. move on.

As step 006SGS926, the effect control CPU 120 executes a display image processing process for processing (displacement) a part of the image displayed on the image display device 5, and proceeds to step 006SGS927.

In step 006SGS927, the effect control CPU 120 causes the display control unit 123 to perform a process of synthesizing (superimposing) the images created in the above-mentioned steps 006SGS922 and step 006SGS921 on the display image creation area of the VRAM 209. Then, the variable display control timer is reset (step 006SGS928). In this way, the image display device 5 realizes variable display control of the decorative pattern. The display control unit 123 outputs a signal based on an image obtained by superimposing an image such as a set background image and an image based on the display control execution data set in the process table to the image display device 5. In this way, the image display device 5 displays a background image, a character image, a decorative pattern, and the like in the variation of the decorative pattern.

As shown in FIG. 15-19, the image displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 in the feature unit 006SG is positioned in advance so as to be displayed in a part of the background image and the display area. Is the adjusted first interface image 006SG005I, the second interface image 006SG005J, and a decorative pattern. In particular, the background image in the feature unit 006SG is drawn as an image that is longer in the left-right width direction and the vertical width direction than the display area of the image display device 5, and the background is in the display area of the image display device 5. The central part of the image in the horizontal width direction is displayed. That is, in the feature unit 006SG, at least the layer 3 image drawing area, the displacement image creation area, and the display image creation area for drawing and arranging the background image are vertically and horizontally wider than the display area of the image display device 5. It is an area for drawing and arranging an image having a long dimension, and in the display area of the image display device 5, only a portion of the image corresponding to the display area is displayed.

In this feature unit 006SG, an image whose vertical width dimension and horizontal width dimension are longer than the display area of the image display device 5 is drawn and arranged in the layer 3 image drawing area, the displacement image creation area, and the display image creation area. The present invention is not limited to this, and the layer 3 image drawing area and the displacement image creation area are vertically wider than the display area of the image display device 5. While the area for drawing and arranging an image having long dimensions and left-right width dimensions is used, the display image creation area is an image having the same vertical width dimension and left-right width dimension as the display area of the image display device 5. May be used as an image for drawing and arranging. In this case, of the images (background images) drawn in the layer 3 image drawing area or the displacement image creation area, only the portion corresponding to the display area of the image display device 5 is arranged in the display image creation area to create an image. The background image may be displayed in the display area of the display device 5.

Further, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the variable display time timer is out of the timer (step 006SGS929). If the variable display time timer is out of the timer, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the special figure hit wait process (step S173) (step 006SGS931). Even if the variable display time timer is not timer-out, if the confirmation command reception flag indicating that the symbol confirmation designation command has been received is in the ON state (step 006SGS930; Y), the value of the effect control process flag is per special figure. The value is updated according to the wait process (step S173) (step 006SGS931). Even if the variable display time timer is not out of the timer, the control shifts to stop the fluctuation when the symbol confirmation specification command is received. Therefore, for example, the fluctuation pattern specification command that indicates a long fluctuation time due to noise between the boards. Is received, the variable display of the decorative symbol can be terminated when the regular variable display time has elapsed (at the end of the variable display of the special symbol).

FIG. 15-18 is a flowchart showing a display image processing process (step 006SGS926) during the variable display effect process shown in FIG. 15-17. In the display image processing process, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the display image processing flag is on (step 006SGS941). When the display image processing flag is off (step 006SGS941; N), it is determined whether or not the variable display being executed is a variable display based on the fluctuation pattern of the super reach (step 006SGS942). When the variable display during execution is a variable display based on the fluctuation pattern of the super reach (step 006SGS942; Y), the displacement image data for successful development to the super reach effect (for notification of execution of the super reach effect) is selected. Then, the process proceeds to step 006SGS948 (step 006SGS943).

The image data for displacement in the feature unit 006SG includes an image to be displaced (in the case of the feature unit 006SG, an image in which an image arranged in the layer 2 image drawing area and an image arranged in the layer 3 image drawing area are superimposed). This is data in which displacement images for application to (images arranged in the displacement image creation area) are arranged in order in chronological order.

Further, when the variable display during execution is a variable display based on the fluctuation pattern of the normal reach (step 006SGS942; N), the effect control CPU 120 is for failure to develop into a super reach effect (for non-execution notification of the super reach effect). As the displacement image data, it is determined at a predetermined ratio whether to select the displacement image data of the super reach effect development failure A or the displacement image data of the super reach effect development failure B (step 006SGS944). For example, the selection of the displacement image data of the super reach effect development failure A may be determined at a rate of 50%, and the selection of the displacement image data of the super reach effect development failure B may be determined at a rate of 50%.

In this feature unit 006SG, there are two types of image data for displacement for failure of development to super reach effect: displacement image data of A for failure of development of super reach effect and displacement image data of B for failure of development of super reach effect. Although the embodiment in which the displacement image data can be selected is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the displacement image data that can be selected as the displacement image data for failure to develop into a super reach effect is 3. It may be one or more.

Then, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the selection of the displacement image data of the super reach effect development failure A is determined in step 006SGS944 (step 006SGS945). When the selection of the displacement image data of the super reach effect development failure A is determined in step 006SGS944 (step 006SGS945; Y), the displacement image data of the super reach effect development failure A is selected and the process proceeds to step 006SGS948. (Step 006SGS946), when the selection of the displacement image data of the super reach effect development failure B is determined (step 006SGS945; N), the displacement image data of the super reach effect development failure B is selected and the step 006SGS948 is selected. Proceed to (step 006SGS947).

In step 006SGS948, the effect control CPU 120 turns on the display image processing flag. Then, the first displacement image is selected from the selected displacement image data (step 006SGS949), and the process proceeds to step 006SGS951.

When the display image processing flag is on in step 006SGS941 (step 006SGS941; Y), the effect control CPU 120 selects the next displacement image from the selected displacement image data and proceeds to step 006SGS951 (step). 006SGS950).

In step 006SGS951, the effect control CPU 120 executes the displacement image drawing process. In the displacement image drawing process, the effect control CPU 120 uses, for example, an image arranged in the layer 2 image drawing area and an image arranged in the layer 3 image drawing area shown in FIG. 15-5 in the displacement image creation area. A displacement target image may be created by compositing (superimposing), and a process of creating a displacement image may be executed by applying the displacement image selected in step 006SGS949 or step 006SGS950 to the image.

After executing the displacement image drawing process, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the displacement image created in the displacement image drawing process is the last displacement image (step 006SGS952). Whether or not the displacement image created in the displacement image drawing process is the last displacement image is determined by, for example, whether or not the displacement image selected in step 006SGS950 is the last displacement image in the displacement image data. do it.

When the displacement image created in the displacement image drawing process is the last displacement image (step 006SGS952; Y), the display image processing flag is turned off to end the display image processing process (step 006SGS953), and the displacement image drawing process is performed. If the displacement image created in is not the last displacement image (step 006SGS952; N), the display image processing process is terminated without going through step 006SGS953.

Next, the display mode of the image display device 5 in the variable display of the decorative pattern in the feature unit 006SG will be described with reference to FIGS. 15-20 to 15-23. First, as shown in FIGS. 15-20 (A) and 15-20 (B), in the feature unit 006SG, the display mode of the decorative pattern displayed on the image display device 5 differs depending on the gaming state. .. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 15-20 (A), when the gaming state is the normal state (low accuracy low base state), the character image and the numerical image are combined as a decorative pattern for the normal state. A decorative pattern is displayed. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 15-20 (B), when the gaming state is the time saving state (low accuracy low base state or high accuracy high base state), the decoration for the time saving state of only the numerical image is used as the decorative pattern. The design is displayed.

Then, in the variable display with the fluctuation pattern of the super reach, first, as shown in FIGS. 15-21 (A) and 15-21 (B), the left and right decorative patterns stop swinging due to the combination of reach. After that, as the decorative pattern inside, the decorative pattern with a numerical value different from the left and right decorative patterns stops swinging. Next, the development suggestion effect is executed. As a development suggestion effect, as shown in FIG. 15-21 (C), among the display areas displayed on the image display device 5, the display area excluding the first interface image 006SG005I is the left area 006SG005L including the left decorative symbol. , The middle area 006SG005C including the decorative symbol in the middle, and the right area 006SG005R including the decorative symbol on the right. Then, as shown in FIGS. 15-21 (C) to 15-21 (E), the images displayed in the middle region 006SG005C (decorative patterns and background images included in the middle region 006SG005C) are gradually displayed. A development notification symbol (indicated as "development!" Shown in FIGS. 15-21 (C) to 15-21 (E)) that informs the development of a super reach reach effect from above by sliding downward. The symbol) is moved and displayed toward the center of the display area of the image display device 5.

The development notification symbol in the feature unit 006SG is a symbol that is displayed only when the development suggestion effect is executed, and is not displayed during the execution period of other effects during the variable display.

In addition, the image displayed in the left area 006SG005L (decorative pattern and background image on the left) and the image displayed in the right area 006SG005R according to the downward slide movement of the image displayed in the middle area 006SG005C (the left decorative pattern and the background image). The decorative pattern on the right and the background image) slide upward.

The slide movement amount of each image displayed in the left area 006SG005L, the middle area 006SG005C, and the right area 006SG005R is the first step shown in FIG. 15-21 (C) and the second step shown in FIG. 15-21 (D). Eyes, the third stage shown in FIG. 15-21 (E), and the number increases as the stage progresses.

Then, when the third stage slide movement of each image displayed in the left area 006SG005L, the middle area 006SG005C, and the right area 006SG005R is completed, the center part of the display area of the image display device 5 (the central part of the middle area 006SG005C) is reached. Development notification The movement of the symbol is completed, and the development of the super reach to reach production is notified.

On the other hand, in the variable display with the fluctuation pattern of the normal reach, first, as shown in FIGS. 15-22 (A) and 15-22 (B), the left and right decorative patterns stop swinging due to the combination of reach. After that, as the decorative pattern inside, the decorative pattern with a numerical value different from the left and right decorative patterns stops swinging. Next, the development suggestion effect is executed. As a development suggestion effect, as shown in FIG. 15-22 (C), the display area excluding the first interface image 006SG005I among the display areas displayed on the image display device 5 is the left area 006SG005L including the left decorative symbol. , The middle area 006SG005C including the decorative symbol in the middle, and the right area 006SG005R including the decorative symbol on the right. Then, as shown in FIGS. 15-22 (C) to 15-22 (E), the images displayed in the middle region 006SG005C (decorative patterns and background images included in the middle region 006SG005C) are gradually displayed. A development notification symbol for notifying the development of a super reach reach effect from above by sliding downward is displayed by moving toward the center of the display area of the image display device 5.

In addition, the image displayed in the left area 006SG005L (decorative pattern and background image on the left) and the image displayed in the right area 006SG005R according to the downward slide movement of the image displayed in the middle area 006SG005C (the left decorative pattern and the background image). The decorative pattern on the right and the background image) slide upward.

The slide movement amount of each image displayed in the left area 006SG005L, the middle area 006SG005C, and the right area 006SG005R is the first step shown in FIG. 15-22 (C) and the second step shown in FIG. 15-22 (D). It increases with the eyes and stages.

However, in the variable display of the normal reach, after the first-step slide movement of each image displayed in the left area 006SG005L, the middle area 006SG005C, and the right area 006SG005R is executed, or the second-step slide movement is performed. After the execution, as shown in FIG. 15-22 (E), the development suggestion effect is completed without the third stage slide movement being executed, and the image displayed on the image display device 5 is shown in FIG. The state returns to the state shown in -22 (B), and the decorative symbol and the small symbol are stopped at the combination indicating the detachment.

As shown in FIGS. 15-21 (C) to 15-21 (E), the slide movement amount of each image displayed in the left region 006SG005L, the middle region 006SG005C, and the right region 006SG005R in the feature unit 006SG. Illustrates a mode in which the number of images increases as the stage progresses, but the present invention is not limited to this, and slides of each image displayed in the left region 006SG005L, the middle region 006SG005C, and the right region 006SG005R. The amount of movement may decrease as the stage progresses, or the amount of movement may increase or decrease only in any of the first to third stages.

Further, in the present feature unit 006SG, as a development suggestion effect, each image displayed in the left area 006SG005L, the middle area 006SG005C, and the right area 006SG005R is illustrated as a form in which each image can be moved and displayed in up to three stages. The number of steps for sliding and moving each image displayed in the left region 006SG005L, the middle region 006SG005C, and the right region 006SG005R as a development suggestion effect may be two or less or four or more.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 15-21 (C) to 15-21 (E), in the feature unit 006SG, the slide direction of the images displayed in the left area 006SG005L and the right area 006SG005R is displayed in the middle area 006SG005C. The present invention is not limited to this, and the slide direction of the images displayed in the left region 006SG005L and the right region 006SG005R is the middle region 006SG005C. It may be in the same direction as the image displayed in.

Further, the feature unit 006SG exemplifies a mode in which the image displayed on the image display device 5 is displaced for the development suggestion effect when the gaming state is the normal state (low accuracy low base state). The image displayed on the image display device 5 may be displaced for the development suggestion effect when the gaming state is a time saving state (low accuracy high base state or high accuracy high base state). ..

As a development suggestion effect in the feature unit 006SG, as shown in FIGS. 15-23 (A) to 15-23 (E), the layer 1 image drawing area of the VRAM area has a first reserved storage display area. The first interface image 006SG005I including the 006SG005D and the second reserved storage display area 006SG005U and the second interface image 006SG005J including the small symbol are drawn, and the decorative symbol including the development notification symbol described above is drawn in the layer 2 image drawing area, and the layer is formed. 3 A background image is drawn in the image drawing area. Further, in the displacement image creation area, the displacement target image is created by superimposing the image drawn in the layer 2 image drawing area and the image drawn in the layer 3 image drawing area, and the displacement target is created. A displacement image is created by applying a displacement image to the image.

Then, in the display image creation area, the image drawn in the layer 1 image drawing area and the image drawn in the displacement image creation area (displacement image) are superimposed to be displayed on the image display device 5. Images are being created.

That is, as shown in FIGS. 15-21 and 15-22, the first interface image 006SG005I and the first interface image 006SG005I are used in both the case of the variable display of the fluctuation pattern of the normal reach and the case of the variable display of the fluctuation pattern of the super reach. Since the second interface image 006SG005J is an image drawn and arranged in the layer 1 image drawing area, it is not subject to displacement. Therefore, the decorative pattern moves toward the upper side or the lower side of the display area of the image display device 5 as a development suggestion effect, so that the visibility from the player is lowered, while the first interface image 006SG005I is the image display device 5. Since the display of the second interface image 006SG005J at the lower part of the display area is maintained at the upper right part of the display area of the image display device 5, the visibility of the first interface image 006SG005I and the second interface image 006SG005J is deteriorated. There is no.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 15-21 and 15-22, in the variable display in the fluctuation pattern of the super reach, the images of the left region 006SG005L, the middle region 006SG005C, and the right region 006SG005R slide to the third stage. While the data for the displacement image of is used, in the variable display with the fluctuation pattern of the normal reach, the displacement for sliding the images of the left area 006SG005L, the middle area 006SG005C, and the right area 006SG005R to the first stage or the second stage. Image data is used. Here, as described above, the variable display in the fluctuation pattern of the super reach is set to have a higher ratio of being controlled to the jackpot gaming state than the variable display in the fluctuation pattern of the normal reach. The ratio controlled to the jackpot gaming state differs depending on the displacement image data used in the suggestion effect.

Further, in the development suggestion effect of the feature unit 006SG, the left area 006SG005L contains the left decorative pattern, the middle area 006SG005C contains the middle decorative pattern, and the right area 006SG005R contains the right decorative pattern. Since the decorative design of No. slides and moves without being divided, including the character and the number, it is prevented that the development suggestion production is less interesting due to the division of the left, middle, and right decorative patterns. ing.

The feature unit 006SG exemplifies a mode in which the images of the left region 006SG005L, the middle region 006SG005C, and the right region 006SG005R are moved upward or downward, respectively, but the present invention is not limited thereto. , Only one or two of the images of the left region 006SG005L, the middle region 006SG005C, and the right region 006SG005R may be moved upward or downward.

As described above, in the pachinko game machine 1 in the feature unit 006SG, the image data for displaying the decorative pattern and the background image and the displacement image data for shifting the display position of the decorative pattern and the background image are obtained. Specific effects that displace the display position of these decorative patterns and background images just by using them (development suggestion effect in feature unit 006SG, reach suggestion effect in variant 006SG-1, revival effect in variant 006SG-2, variant 006SG- Since it is possible to execute the look-ahead notice effect in 3, the promotion effect in the modified example 006SG-5, the temporary stop suggestion effect and the temporary stop notification effect in the modified example 006SG-6), these specific effects are executed using dedicated data. The amount of data to be stored in the CGROM 205 can be suppressed as compared with the case where the data is stored in the CGROM 205.

In particular, since the feature unit 006SG can display a plurality of images as background images on the image display device 5, originally, a specific effect is produced depending on the case where each background image is displayed or the variable display mode. The pattern must be stored in the CGROM 205 in advance, but in the feature unit 006SG, the image displayed on the image display device 5 can be instantly displaced only by using the data of the displacement image, so that the pattern is stored in the CGROM 205. The amount of data can be suppressed. In the feature unit 006SG, as game-related information, the first reserved storage display area 006SG005D capable of specifying the first special figure reserved storage number and the second reserved storage display area 006SG005U capable of specifying the second special figure reserved storage number. , And a mode in which a small symbol having a display area smaller than that of the decorative symbol is displayed on the image display device 5 is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the game state is shortened as the game-related information. A fourth that can identify that a launch promotion display or a variable display that urges the player to launch (launch) the game ball toward the big winning opening or the gate 41 by being in a state or a probable change state is being executed. A design or the like may be displayed on the image display device 5.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 15-26, the first interface image 006SG005I and the second interface image 006SG005J are drawn in the layer 1 image drawing area having the highest image display priority, that is, the feature unit 006SG. Since it is a non-target image of the image displacement in the development suggestion effect in, the display position does not shift together with the image of the left region 006SG005L, the image of the right region 006SG005R, and the image of the middle region 006SG005C, which is the target of the displacement, and the development suggestion. It is possible to prevent the player from having difficulty in visually recognizing game-related information such as the number of reserved special figures and the variable display of small symbols when the effect is executed.

Further, of the first interface image 006SG005I and the second interface image 006SG005J, the second interface image 006SG005J is displayed overlapping with the image of the right region 006SG005R that slides upward during the development suggestion effect. Since the display position of the two-interface image 006SG005J itself does not shift, the player can recognize the variable display of the small symbol in the second interface image 006SG005J without discomfort. On the other hand, since the first interface image 006SG005I is displayed at the lower part of the image display device 5 so as not to overlap with the images of the left region 006SG005L, the middle region 006SG005C, and the right region 006SG005R during the development suggestion production, the player can see the player. The first special figure reserved storage number in the first interface image 006SG005I is accurately displayed without being affected by the displacement (slide movement) of each image of the left area 006SG005L, the middle area 006SG005C, and the right area 006SG005R. It is possible to recognize the hold storage display area 006SG005D and the second hold storage display area 006SG005U that identifiablely displays the number of hold storages in the second special figure.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 15-21 and 15-23, the decorative symbol is drawn and arranged in the layer 2 image drawing area, and when the development suggestion effect is executed, the decorative symbol is in the center of the display area of the image display device 5. By moving upward or downward from the portion, the visibility is lowered, so that the effect of the development suggestion effect can be improved. Further, the small symbols are drawn and arranged in the layer 1 image drawing area, and unlike the decorative symbols, they do not move from the upper right portion of the display area of the image display device 5 when the development suggestion effect is executed, so that the visibility does not deteriorate. The player can easily grasp the progress of the game by visually recognizing the small symbol even during the execution of the development suggestion effect.

Further, as shown in FIG. 15-21, in the development suggestion effect of the feature unit 006SG, the amount of movement of the images displayed in the left area 006SG005L, the middle area 006SG005C, and the right area 006SG005R gradually increases. While improving the effect of the development suggestion effect, the amount of movement of the image displayed in the left area 006SG005L, the middle area 006SG005C, and the right area 006SG005R at each stage can be emphasized, so that the effect is further improved. can.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 15-21 and 15-22, in the variable display in the fluctuation pattern of the super reach, the images of the left region 006SG005L, the middle region 006SG005C, and the right region 006SG005R are slid to the third stage. While the data for the displacement image is used, in the variable display with the fluctuation pattern of the normal reach, the displacement image for sliding the images of the left area 006SG005L, the middle area 006SG005C, and the right area 006SG005R to the first stage or the second stage. Because the data for development is used, the ratio controlled to the jackpot gaming state differs depending on the image data for displacement used in the development suggestion effect, so that the left area 006SG005L, the middle area 006SG005C, and the right area 006SG005R in the development suggestion effect It is possible to draw the player's attention to the number of moving stages of the image, and it is possible to improve the production interest of the development suggestion production.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 15-21 and 15-22, when the image for the displacement image in which the images of the left region 006SG005L, the middle region 006SG005C, and the right region 006SG005R are slid to the third stage is used, and the left region 006SG005L, the middle. When using the displacement image data in which the images of the area 006SG005C and the right area 006SG005R slide to the first stage, the parts where the images of the left area 006SG005L, the middle area 006SG005C, and the right area 006SG005R slide to the first stage are common. When using the displacement image data in which the images of the left area 006SG005L, the middle area 006SG005C, and the right area 006SG005R slide and move to the third stage, and the images of the left area 006SG005L, the middle area 006SG005C, and the right area 006SG005R up to the second stage. When using the slide-moving displacement image data, the left region 006SG005L, the middle region 006SG005C, and the right region 006SG005R have the same part where the images slide and move up to the second stage, so the left region 006SG005L is used as a development suggestion effect. Since the player can pay attention to the process such as the number of stages in which the images of the middle area 006SG005C and the right area 006SG005R slide and move, the effect of the development suggestion can be further improved.

Although examples of the present invention have been described above with reference to the drawings, the specific configuration is not limited to these examples, and any changes or additions within the scope of the gist of the present invention are included in the present invention. Will be.

For example, the feature unit 006SG exemplifies a development suggestion effect suggesting the development of super reach into a reach effect as an effect of displacing the image displayed on the image display device 5, but the present invention is limited thereto. Instead, as shown in FIGS. 15-24 and 15-25 as the modified example 006SG-1, it is suggested that the effect of displacing the image displayed on the image display device 5 is reach during the variable display. The reach suggestion effect may be feasible.

The production mode of the reach suggestion effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 15-24 and 15-25. First, in the variable display with the fluctuation pattern of normal reach and super reach, as shown in FIGS. 15-24 (A) to 15-24 (C), the left decoration is at the timing immediately before the stop of the left decoration symbol. The action image of the character or the like acts on the symbol, and the decorative symbol on the left stops. At this time, a part of the background image whose display position overlaps with the lower part of the decorative pattern on the left is distorted and displayed.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 15-24 (D) to 15-24 (F), an action image such as a character acts on the right decorative symbol at the timing immediately before the stop of the right decorative symbol, and the right decorative symbol acts on the right. The decorative pattern stops and reaches. At this time, a part of the background image whose display position overlaps with the lower part of the decorative pattern on the right is distorted and displayed.

On the other hand, in the variable display with the non-reach fluctuation pattern, as shown in FIGS. 15-25 (A) to 15-25 (C), the left decorative symbol is at the timing immediately before the stop of the left decorative symbol. The action image of the character or the like acts on the left decorative pattern to stop. At this time, a part of the background image whose display position overlaps with the lower part of the decorative pattern on the left is distorted and displayed.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 15-25 (D) to 15-25 (F), an action image such as a character acts on the right decorative symbol at the timing immediately before the stop of the right decorative symbol, but the right The number of symbols that do not match the reach as decorative symbols of is stopped. At this time, the decorative pattern on the right stops and reaches. At this time, a part of the background image whose display position overlaps with the lower part of the decorative pattern on the right is displayed without distortion.

As a reach suggestion effect in the present modification 006SG-1, as shown in FIGS. 15-26 (A) to 15-26 (F), the layer 1 image drawing area of the VRAM area has a first hold storage. A first interface image 006SG005I including a display area 006SG005D and a second reserved storage display area 006SG005U and a second interface image 006SG005J including a small symbol are drawn, an action image is drawn in the layer 2 image drawing area, and a layer 3 image drawing area is drawn. A decorative pattern is drawn on. Further, in the VRAM area of the present modification 006SG-1, a layer 4 image drawing area for drawing an image lower than the layer 3 image drawing area is arranged. A background image is drawn in the layer 4 image drawing area. Further, in the displacement image creation area, the displacement target image is created by superimposing the image drawn in the layer 3 image drawing area and the image drawn in the layer 4 image drawing area, and the displacement target is created. A displacement image is created by applying a displacement image to the image.

Then, in the display image creation area, the image drawn in the layer 1 image drawing area, the image drawn in the layer 2 image drawing area, and the image drawn in the displacement image creation area (displacement image) are superimposed. By doing so, a display image to be displayed on the image display device 5 is created.

In the present modification 006SG-1, a mode in which a reach suggestion effect can be executed in a variable display of fluctuation patterns of non-reach, normal reach, and super reach is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited thereto. The reach suggestion effect may not be executed in a part of the variable display of the fluctuation pattern of non-reach, normal reach, and super reach.

Further, in the present modification 006SG-1, as a reach suggestion effect, a form in which an action image such as a character acts on the left and right decorative patterns is exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and is not limited to this. As the reach suggestion effect in the variable display of the variation pattern of the reach, the case where the action image acts on the decorative symbol only once (only acts on the decorative symbol on the left) may be provided.

Further, in the present modification 006SG-1, a form in which an action image such as a character acts on a decorative pattern is exemplified as a reach suggestion effect, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a plurality of reach suggestion effects are provided. The action image of the above may be displayed, and the reach ratio may be different depending on which action image acts on the decorative pattern.

Further, in the present modification 006SG-1, in the case where the reach is not achieved even though the action image of the character or the like acts as the reach suggestion effect, the acted decorative pattern or the background image in which the display area overlaps with the decorative symbol is displayed. Although a form in which a part is not distorted is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and when an action image such as a character acts as a reach suggestion effect, the action image is always applied regardless of whether or not it becomes reach. It is also possible to distort a part of the background image in which the decorative pattern on which the above acts and the decorative pattern and the display area overlap.

Further, in the present modification 006SG-1, when an action image such as a character acts as a reach suggestion effect, the decorative pattern on which the action image acts and a part of the background image in which the decorative pattern and the display area overlap are distorted. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and when an action image such as a character acts as a reach suggestion effect, the decorative symbol on which the action image acts overlaps with the decorative symbol and the display area. Only one of the parts of the background image may be distorted.

Further, in the feature unit 213SG, as an effect of displacing the image displayed on the image display device 5, a development suggestion effect suggesting the development of the super reach to the reach effect is exemplified, but the present invention is limited thereto. Instead, as shown in FIGS. 15-27 and 15-28 as a modified example 006SG-2, as an effect of displacing the image displayed on the image display device 5, the decorative pattern that is temporarily stopped and displayed in a combination of detachment is displayed. It may be possible to execute a revival effect that changes into a combination of big hits.

The production mode of the revival effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 15-27 and 15-28. First, when the variable display result is a big hit, as shown in FIG. 15-27 (A), after it is suggested that the variable display result is out of order as a reach effect of normal reach or super reach, the decorative pattern reaches. It is oscillated by the combination of off.

Next, as shown in FIG. 15-27 (B), the crack effect image 006SG005H is overlapped and displayed on the decorative symbol inside, and a plurality of decorative symbols inside are displayed along the crack effect image 006SG005H as the first stage crack. It is divided and displayed in pieces. Then, as shown in FIG. 15-27 (C), the crack effect image 006SG005H and each fragment are enlarged and displayed as the second stage crack from the state shown in FIG. 15-27 (B), and each fragment is displayed as an image. It moves so as to diffuse from the central portion of the device 5 in different directions.

Further, as shown in FIG. 15-27 (D), the crack effect image 006SG005H and each fragment are further enlarged and displayed as the third stage crack from the state shown in FIG. 15-27 (C), and each fragment is further displayed. Move to spread.

Then, as a crack in the fourth stage, an image is finally displayed in which fragments of the decorative design inside are scattered so as to diffuse, and then a new decorative design indicating that the decorative design inside is a big hit is displayed. The variable display stops.

On the other hand, when the variable display result is out of order, as shown in FIG. 15-28 (A), after it is suggested that the variable display result is out of order as a reach effect of normal reach or super reach, the decorative pattern is displayed. It is oscillated by the combination of reach off.

Next, as shown in FIG. 15-28 (B), the crack effect image 006SG005H is overlapped and displayed on the decorative symbol inside, and a plurality of decorative symbols inside are displayed along the crack effect image 006SG005H as the first stage crack. It is divided and displayed in pieces. Then, as shown in FIG. 15-28 (C), the crack effect image 006SG005H and each fragment are enlarged and displayed as the second stage crack from the state shown in FIG. 15-28 (B), and each fragment is displayed as an image. It moves so as to diffuse from the central portion of the device 5 in different directions.

Further, as shown in FIG. 15-28 (D), the crack effect image 006SG005H and each fragment are further enlarged and displayed as the third stage crack from the state shown in FIG. 15-28 (C), and each fragment is further displayed. Move to spread.

However, in the variable display in which the variable display result is out of alignment, after the first stage crack is executed, after the second stage crack is executed, or after the third stage crack is executed, The revival effect is completed without executing the crack in the fourth stage, the image displayed on the image display device 5 returns to the state shown in FIGS. 15-28 (A), and the decorative symbol and the small symbol are removed. Stop at the combination shown.

As a revival effect in the present modification 006SG-2, as shown in FIGS. 15-29 (A) to 15-29 (F), the first hold storage display is displayed in the layer 1 image drawing area of the VRAM area. The first interface image 006SG005I including the area 006SG005D and the second reserved storage display area 006SG005U and the second interface image 006SG005J including a small pattern are drawn, and the crack effect image 006SG005H is drawn in the layer 2 image drawing area, and the layer 3 image is drawn. A decorative pattern is drawn in the area. Further, in the VRAM area of the present modification 006SG-2, a layer 4 image drawing area for drawing an image lower than the layer 3 image drawing area is arranged. A background image is drawn in the layer 4 image drawing area. Further, in the displacement image creation area, the displacement target image is created by the image drawn in the layer 3 image drawing area, and the displacement image is applied to the displacement target image to obtain the displacement image (middle). An image in which the decorative pattern of is divided into a plurality of fragments and each fragment is displayed so as to be diffused) is created.

Then, in the display image creation area, the image drawn in the layer 1 image drawing area, the image drawn in the layer 2 image drawing area, the image drawn in the displacement image creation area (displacement image), and the layer 4 A display image to be displayed by the image display device 5 is created by superimposing the image drawn in the image drawing area.

In particular, in the present modification 006SG-2, the decorative pattern inside is gradually expanded as the revival effect, that is, in the revival effect, the ratio of the display area of the decorative pattern in the display area of the image display device 5 Is gradually increased, so that the player can be more effectively focused on the revival effect by gradually expanding the decorative pattern in the decorative pattern.

In the present modification 006SG-2, a form in which the crack effect image 006SG005H is duplicated and displayed on the decorative pattern inside is illustrated as a revival effect, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the crack effect image is not limited to this. A plurality of display modes of 006SG005H may be provided, and the rate at which the variable display result becomes a big hit may be different depending on which display mode the crack effect image 006SG005H is displayed.

For example, as shown in FIG. 15-30, blue and red are provided as the display colors of the crack effect image 006SG005H, and when the variable display result is a big hit, blue cracks are performed at a rate of 20% when the revival effect is executed. The effect image 006SG005H is displayed, and the red crack effect image 006SG005H is displayed at a rate of 80% when the revival effect is executed. On the other hand, if the variable display result is out of alignment, the blue crack effect image 006SG005H is displayed at a rate of 80% when the revival effect is executed, and the red crack effect is displayed at a rate of 20% when the revival effect is executed. The image 006SG005H may be displayed.

In the present modification 006SG-2, two colors, red and blue, are provided as the display color of the crack effect image 006SG005H, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the display color of the crack effect image 006SG005H is not limited to this. Three or more colors may be provided.

Further, in the present modification 006SG-2, a mode in which the revival effect is executed when the gaming state is a time saving state (low accuracy high base state or high accuracy high base state) is exemplified, but the present invention is limited to this. The revival effect may be executed when the game state is the normal state (low probability low base state).

Further, in the present modification 006SG-2, as shown in FIGS. 15-28, the decorative pattern inside is composed of a plurality of fragments in the resurrection effect, and the number of these fragments is maintained according to the progress of the resurrection effect. , However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the decorative design in these is not limited to the embodiment in which these fragments are moved stepwise from the central portion to the peripheral portion of the display area of the image display device 5. The plurality of constituent fragments may be gradually increased according to the progress of the resurrection effect. By doing so, it is possible to strongly impress the player with the revival effect by the visual effect that the number of fragments constituting the decorative pattern inside increases as the revival effect progresses.

Further, in the feature unit 006SG, as an effect of displacing the image displayed on the image display device 5, a development suggestion effect suggesting the development of the super reach to the reach effect is exemplified, but the present invention is limited thereto. Instead, as shown in FIG. 15-31 as a modification 006SG-3, as an effect of displacing the image displayed on the image display device 5, variable display is executed in the hold storage with a fluctuation pattern of super reach. It is also possible to execute a look-ahead notice effect that suggests that the variable display in which the variable display result is a big hit is executed from the variable display multiple times before.

The production mode of the look-ahead notice effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 15-31. First, as shown in FIGS. 15-31 (A) and 15-31 (B) in a state where a plurality of reserved storages are present, the variable display during execution is stopped in a combination of missing decorative symbols. Then, as shown in FIGS. 15-31 (C) and 15-31 (D), when the next variable display is started, a cutting effect crossing the display area left and right in the display area of the image display device 5 is performed. The image 006SG005S is displayed in duplicate with respect to the decorative pattern and the background image. Then, of the display area displayed on the image display device 5, the display area excluding the first interface image 006SG005I is the lower lower area 006SG005B including a part of the decorative pattern and the background image with the cutting effect image 006SG005S as a boundary and the rest. It is divided into an upper upper area 006SG005T including a decorative pattern and a background image. That is, the boundary portion between the lower region 006SG005B and the upper upper region 006SG005T is hidden from the player by the cutting effect image 006SG005S.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 15-31 (D) to 15-31 (E), the lower region 006SG005B is on the left side along the cutting effect image 006SG005S, and the upper region 006SG005T is on the right side along the cutting effect image 006SG005S. Slide and move toward at the same time. Then, the lower region 006SG005B that slides to the left along the cutting effect image 006SG005S slides downward, and the upper region 006SG005T that slides to the right along the cutting effect image 006SG005S slides upward. .. At this time, the cutting effect image 006SG005S is moved and displayed so as to follow both the boundary portion on the lower region 006SG005B side and the boundary portion on the upper region 006SG005T side.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 15-31 (E) and 15-31 (F), in the display area of the image display device 5, the lower area 006SG005B is slid downward and the upper area 006SG005T is slid upward. Starts displaying a black image. The display area of the black image expands according to the progress of the downward slide movement of the lower region 006SG005B and the upward slide movement of the upper region 006SG005T, and the lower region 006SG005B and the upper region 006SG005T move out of the display area. By completing the movement, only the first interface image 006SG005I and the second interface image 006SG005J are displayed in the display area, which is a so-called blackout state.

After that, when the blackout ends, the display of a new background image and decorative pattern is started in the display area of the image display device 5. The pre-reading notice effect is repeatedly executed until the start of the variable display of the external pre-reading target.

As a look-ahead notice effect in the present modification 006SG-3, as shown in FIGS. 15-32 (A) to 15-32 (F), the layer 1 image drawing area of the VRAM area has a first hold storage. A first interface image 006SG005I including a display area 006SG005D and a second reserved storage display area 006SG005U and a second interface image 006SG005J including a small symbol are drawn, and a cutting effect image 006SG005S is drawn in a layer 2 image drawing area, and a layer 3 image is drawn. A decorative pattern is drawn in the drawing area. Further, in the VRAM area of the present modification 006SG-3, there is a layer 4 image drawing area for drawing an image lower than the layer 3 image drawing area and a layer 5 image drawing area for drawing an image further below. Have been placed. A background image is drawn in the layer 4 image drawing area, and a black image (blackout image) is drawn in the layer 5 image drawing area.

Further, in the displacement image creation area, the displacement target image is created by superimposing the image drawn in the layer 3 image drawing area and the image drawn in the layer 4 image drawing area, and the displacement target is created. By applying the displacement image to the image, a displacement image including the lower region 006SG005B and the upper region 006SG005T is created.

Then, in the display image creation area, the image drawn in the layer 1 image drawing area, the image drawn in the layer 2 image drawing area, the image drawn in the displacement image creation area (displacement image), and the layer 5 A display image to be displayed by the image display device 5 is created by superimposing the image drawn in the image drawing area.

As described above, in the present modification 006SG-3, in the look-ahead notice effect as the specific effect in the present invention, as shown in FIGS. 15-31 (C) and 15-31 (D), the upper region 006SG005T and the lower part are shown. A decorative pattern and a background image are displayed over the area 006SG005B, and the upper area 006SG005T moves to the right side and the lower area 006SG005B moves to the left side, respectively, at the boundary between the upper area 006SG005T and the lower area 006SG005B. Since the disconnection effect image 006SG005S is displayed, the player can more effectively recognize the movement of the upper region 006SG005T and the lower region 006SG005B as the look-ahead notice effect to the left and right sides. Can be improved.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 15-32, the cutting effect image 006SG005S is drawn and arranged in the layer 2 image drawing area as an image having a higher display priority than the decorative pattern or the background image. Even if the display position of the area 006SG005B is displaced, the display position of the cut effect image 006SG005S is not displaced. The displacement can be made more conspicuous, and the effect of the look-ahead notice effect can be further improved.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 15-31 (D) and 15-31 (E), after moving the upper region 006SG005T toward the right side and the lower region 006SG005B toward the left side, the upper region 006SG005T and the lower region are further moved. By moving the boundary portion with 006SG005B toward the upper side and the lower side, respectively, the effect of the look-ahead notice effect can be further enhanced, and the effect of the effect can be improved. In particular, as a look-ahead notice effect, as shown in FIGS. 15-31 (D) and 15-31 (E), the upper region 006SG005T moves to the right side and the lower region 006SG005B moves to the left side, but the upper region 006SG005T. Since the boundary between the upper region 006SG005B and the lower region 006SG005B moves in the vertical direction, the synergistic effect of the displacement (movement) of the upper region 006SG005T and the lower region 006SG005B and the displacement (movement) of the boundary portion further enhances the effect of the look-ahead notice effect. Can be done.

In this modification 006SG-3, the moving direction of the boundary between the upper region 006SG005T and the lower region 006SG005B is different from the right side, which is the moving direction of the upper region 006SG005T, and the left side, which is the moving direction of the lower region 006SG005B. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the moving direction of the boundary portion between the upper region 006SG005T and the lower region 006SG005B is the moving direction of the upper region 006SG005T and the moving direction of the lower region 006SG005B. It suffices if it is different from either one.

In this modification 006SG-3, the cutting effect image 006SG005S is displayed on the image display device 5 as a look-ahead notice effect, and the lower region 006SG005B and the upper region 006SG005T divided along the cutting effect image 006SG005S are moved and displayed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a plurality of display modes of the cutting effect image 006SG005S are provided, and variable display of the look-ahead target is provided depending on which display mode the cutting effect image 006SG005S is displayed. The rate at which the variable display result in is a big hit may be different.

For example, as shown in FIGS. 15-33, three types of colors, blue, green, and red, are provided as the display colors of the cutting effect image 006SG005S, and when the variable display result of the look-ahead target is a big hit, the cutting effect image 006SG005S is used. It is displayed in blue at a rate of 10%, displayed in green at a rate of 30%, and displayed in red at a rate of 60%. On the other hand, if the variable display result of the look-ahead target is out of alignment, the cutting effect image 006SG005S is displayed in blue at a rate of 60%, displayed in green at a rate of 30%, and displayed in red at a rate of 10%. Just do it.

By doing so, the player can pay attention to the display color of the disconnection effect image 006SG005S displayed during the look-ahead notice effect, so that the effect of the look-ahead notice effect can be further enhanced.

In the present modification 006SG-3, a form in which three kinds of colors of blue, green, and red are provided as display colors of the cutting effect image 006SG005S is exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the cutting effect is not limited thereto. The display color of the image 006SG005S may be two colors or four or more colors. Further, the rate at which the variable display result of the look-ahead target becomes a big hit (big hit expectation) may be different depending on the shape and size of the cutting effect image 006SG005S, the display number of the cutting effect image 006SG005S, and other aspects other than the color. ..

Further, in the present modification 006SG-3, as a look-ahead notice effect, a mode in which the image displayed on the image display device 5 is divided into two regions along the cutting effect image 006SG005S has been exemplified. The pre-reading notice effect is not limited, and the image displayed on the image display device 5 may be divided into three or more areas. In this case, the effect of the look-ahead notice effect may be improved by changing the slide movement direction of each area.

Further, in the present modification 006SG-3, as a look-ahead notice effect, a mode in which the upper region 006SG005T and the lower region 006SG005B are moved respectively is exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the look-ahead notice effect is not limited thereto. The region to be moved may be only one of the upper region 006SG005T and the lower region 006SG005B.

Further, in the present modification 006SG-3, the decorative pattern and the background image are displayed over the upper region 006SG005T and the lower region 006SG005B, and the image displayed in the upper region 006SG005T after moving to the right and the left side. It is different from the image displayed in the lower area 006SG005B after moving to. Therefore, even if the upper area 006SG005T and the lower area 006SG005B move, the image displayed in the upper area 006SG005T and the image displayed in the lower area 006SG005B are different from each other, so that the pre-reading notice effect is produced. It can be executed without giving a sense of discomfort to the player, and it is possible to prevent the gaming interest from being deteriorated.

In the present modification 006SG-3, the image displayed in the upper region 006SG005T after moving to the right side and the image displayed in the lower region 006SG005B after moving to the left side are different. Although exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and is displayed in the image displayed in the upper region 006SG005T after moving to the right side and in the lower region 006SG005B after moving to the left side. At least a part of the image may be common. By doing so, it is possible to give unexpectedness to the pre-reading notice effect, so that the game entertainment can be improved.

Further, in the present modification 006SG-3, as shown in FIGS. 15-31 (C) and 15-31 (D), the upper area in the display area of the image display device 5 at the timing before the execution of the look-ahead notice effect. The image displayed over the 006SG005T and the lower region 006SG005B is the same as the image displayed over the upper region 006SG005T after moving to the right side and the lower region 006SG005B after moving to the left side as a look-ahead notice effect. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and is displayed over the upper region 006SG005T and the lower region 006SG005B in the display area of the image display device 5 at the timing before the execution of the look-ahead notice effect. It is not necessary that a part of the image is displayed as an image displayed over the upper area 006SG005T after moving to the right side and the lower area 006SG005B after moving to the left side as a look-ahead notice effect. By doing so, it is possible to enhance the production of the look-ahead notice production.

In this modification 006SG-3, the upper region 006SG005T and the lower region 006SG005B are moved in opposite directions as a look-ahead notice effect (in FIG. 15-31 (D), the upper region 006SG005T is moved to the right side and the lower region 006SG005B is moved. The amount of movement (displacement) between the upper region 006SG005T and the lower region 006SG005B is the same when the upper region 006SG005T is moved upward and the lower region 006SG005B is moved downward in FIG. 15-31 (E). Is. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the amount of movement (displacement amount) of the upper region 006SG005T and the lower region 006SG005B when the upper region 006SG005T and the lower region 006SG005B are moved in opposite directions as a look-ahead notice effect. ) May be different. In this way, by making the amount of movement of the upper region 006SG005T and the lower region 006SG005B, which move in the opposite directions as the look-ahead notice effect different, different, the effect of the look-ahead notice effect can be further improved.

Further, in the present modification 006SG-3, as shown in FIGS. 15-33, a mode in which the ratio of the variable display result of the look-ahead target to be a big hit is different depending on the display color of the cutting effect image 006SG005S has been exemplified. Is not limited to this, and as shown in FIG. 15-34 as a modification 006SG-4, the display color of the cutting effect image 006SG005S may be changed for each variable display execution. In this case, the rate at which the variable display result of the look-ahead target becomes a big hit (big hit expectation) may be different depending on the display color of the final cutting effect image 006SG005S and the change pattern of the display color.

Further, in the feature unit 006SG, as an effect of displacing the image displayed on the image display device 5, a development suggestion effect suggesting the development of the super reach to the reach effect is exemplified, but the present invention is limited thereto. Instead, as shown in FIG. 15-35 as a modification example 006SG-5, as an effect of displacing the image displayed on the image display device 5, a non-probability change jackpot or a two-round probability change with a small number of rounds is performed during the variable display. A combination of decorative symbols that are displayed in a combination that indicates the type of jackpot, such as a jackpot, and then the left, middle, and right decorative symbols are variably displayed in the same state as the combination that indicates the jackpot, and finally stopped. You may execute a promotion effect (also called a re-lottery effect) to notify the jackpot type.

The production mode of the promotion effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 15-35. First, after notifying that the variable display result is a big hit as a reach effect of normal reach or super reach, as shown in FIG. 15-35 (A), after the end of these reach effects, the decorative design is changed to a non-probable big hit or a two-round probability change. It is displayed as a combination indicating a jackpot type having a relatively low advantage for a player such as a jackpot (in the example shown in FIG. 15-35 (A), a combination of even "2" indicating a non-probability variable jackpot).

Then, as shown in FIG. 15-35 (B), during the remaining period of the variable display, the left, middle, and right decorative symbols are used as a promotion effect, such as a 2-round probability variation jackpot, a 5-round probability variation jackpot, and a 10-round probability variation jackpot. Variable display is performed at a constant speed while including combinations of other jackpot types of decorative symbols.

During the execution of the promotion effect, as shown in FIGS. 15-35 (C) and 15-35 (D), the central portion in the vertical direction in the display area of the image display device 5 faces to the left in two steps. And distort.

Then, the jackpot type determined at the start of this variable display is a jackpot type that is more advantageous to the player than the jackpot type (see FIG. 15-35 (A)) indicated by the combination of the decorative symbols displayed first. In some cases, after the distortion of the first or second stage of the promotion effect, the decorative symbol stops at the combination of the jackpot type (the combination of the probability variation jackpot in the example shown in FIGS. 15-35 (E)). On the other hand, if the jackpot type determined at the start of this variable display is the same as the jackpot type indicated by the combination of the decorative symbols displayed first, the decorative symbol is the decorative symbol after the first stage distortion of the promotion effect. It stops at the combination of big hit types (the combination of non-probable variable big hits in the example shown in FIG. 15-35 (F)).

In this modification 006SG-5, the "advantage for the player" between the jackpot types is controlled to whether or not the probability change state is controlled after the jackpot game ends, and to the time saving state after the jackpot game ends. Refers to those with different variable display times and those with different numbers of rounds in big hit games.

As a promotion effect in the present modification 006SG-5, as shown in FIGS. 15-36 (A) to 15-36 (E), the layer 1 image drawing area of the VRAM area has a first hold storage display. A first interface image 006SG005I including an area 006SG005D and a second reserved storage display area 006SG005U and a second interface image 006SG005J including a small symbol are drawn, a decorative pattern is drawn in the layer 2 image drawing area, and a decorative pattern is drawn in the layer 3 image drawing area. The background image is drawn.

Further, in the displacement image creation area, the displacement target image is created by superimposing the image drawn in the layer 2 image drawing area and the image drawn in the layer 3 image drawing area, and the displacement target is created. By applying the displacement image to the image, a displacement image is created in which the central portion in the vertical direction is distorted toward the left side.

Then, in the display image creation area, the image drawn in the layer 1 image drawing area and the image drawn in the displacement image creation area (displacement image) are superimposed and displayed on the image display device 5. A display image is created.

The display image displayed on the image display device 5 in this modification 006SG-5 is an image that is longer than the display area of the image display device 5 in the horizontal width direction and the vertical width direction like the feature unit 006SG. (See FIG. 15-19), but the present invention is not limited to this, and as shown in FIGS. 15-37, the dimensions of the display image displayed on the image display device 5 in the left-right width direction are images. It may be the same as the dimension in the left-right width direction of the display area of the display device 5.

In this case, when the promotion effect is executed as described above, as shown in FIGS. 15-38 (A) to 15-38 (C), the promotion effect is in the vertical direction in the display area of the image display device 5. When the central portion is distorted toward the left side, an image non-display portion in which no image is displayed is formed in the right portion of the display area.

Therefore, when the dimension in the left-right width direction of the display image displayed on the image display device 5 is the same as the dimension in the left-right width direction of the display area of the image display device 5 as shown in FIGS. 15-37, FIG. As shown in −39 (A) to FIG. 15-39 (D), when the promotion effect is executed, the decorative pattern drawn / arranged in the layer 2 image drawing area and the decorative pattern drawn / arranged in the layer 3 image drawing area are drawn. By enlarging the arranged background image or enlarging the displacement target image (background image and decorative pattern) created in the displacement image creation area, a part of the background image is moved out of the display area of the image display device 5. Deploy. By doing so, by applying the displacement image to the image to be displaced, even if the central portion in the vertical direction in the display area of the image display device 5 is distorted toward the left side as a promotion effect, the right portion of the image display device 5 Since the background image arranged outside the display area of the image display device 5 is displayed due to the enlargement, the image display device 5 is inappropriate because the above-mentioned image non-display portion is formed. It is possible to reduce the possibility that the display will be displayed.

In addition, in FIG. 15-39, when the central portion in the vertical direction in the display area of the image display device 5 is distorted toward the left side as a promotion effect, no image is displayed on the right portion of the display area. Although an example is shown in which both the background image and the decorative pattern are enlarged in order to prevent the formation of the image, the present invention is not limited to this, and an image non-display portion is formed. In order to prevent this, only the background image may be enlarged.

Further, in the present modification 006SG-5, when the promotion effect is executed, the displacement image is applied to the entire displacement target image enlarged so that the left-right width dimension is longer than the display area of the image display device 5. An example is an example of creating an image for promotion effect by applying it, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the range to which the displacement image is applied among the displacement target images is the display of the image display device 5. It is not necessary to displace only the part corresponding to the area, that is, the image outside the display area of the image display device 5.

Further, in the present modification 006SG-5, promotion effect is executed when the dimension in the left-right width direction of the display image displayed on the image display device 5 is the same as the dimension in the left-right width direction of the display area of the image display device 5. By enlarging the decorative pattern drawn / arranged in the layer 2 image drawing area and the background image drawn / arranged in the layer 3 image drawing area, the image non-display portion is formed during the promotion effect. The embodiment is illustrated to prevent the image from being drawn, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the decorative pattern drawn / arranged in the layer 2 image drawing area and the decorative pattern drawn / arranged in the layer 3 image drawing area are drawn / arranged. The enlargement of the background image may be performed stepwise according to the progress of the promotion effect (according to the increase in the distortion of the image displayed in the display area of the image display device 5). By doing so, the decorative pattern and the background image are suddenly enlarged and displayed on the image display device 5, so that a sense of discomfort can be reduced. Therefore, the display area of the image display device 5 can be displayed while maintaining the effect of the promotion effect. In the process of increasing the distortion of the displayed image, it is possible to prevent inappropriate display such as the image non-display portion being displayed on the image display device 5.

Further, the feature unit 006SG exemplifies a mode in which a development suggestion effect suggesting the development of the reach effect of the super reach can be executed during the variable display, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the variable display is in progress. In, it is possible to execute a pseudo-ream effect including a temporary stop of a decorative symbol and a revariable display, and the ratio controlled to the jackpot gaming state (big hit expectation) may be different according to the number of executions of the pseudo-ream effect. ..

In particular, in the variable display for executing such a pseudo-continuous effect, a temporary stop suggestion effect suggesting that the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped immediately before the temporary stop timing of the decorative symbol, or a temporary stop suggestion effect when the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped. It may be possible to execute a temporary stop notification effect for notifying the temporary stop of the decorative pattern.

Further, in the present modification 006SG-5, when the promotion effect is executed, the image (display image) displayed on the image display device 5 is enlarged so that the display image can be displayed outside the display area of the image display device 5. An example is an example of a form in which an image non-display portion is prevented from being formed during the execution of the promotion effect by arranging a part thereof, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the promotion is performed in advance in the CGROM 205. An image having a size larger than the display area of the image display device 5 as an image for effect (at least the left-right width dimension is longer than the left-right width dimension of the display area of the image display device 5 in the case of this modification 006SG-5) is stored. However, by drawing and arranging the image in the displacement image creation area or the display image creation area, it may be possible to prevent the image non-display portion from being formed during the execution of the promotion effect.

Further, in the present modification 006SG-5, when the promotion effect is executed, the image (display image) displayed on the image display device 5 is enlarged so that the display image can be displayed outside the display area of the image display device 5. An example is an example of a form in which an image non-display portion is prevented from being formed during the execution of the promotion effect by arranging a part thereof, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the promotion effect is executed. In this case, the image is displayed on the image display device 5 at a position outside the display area of the image display device 5 (in the case of the present modification 006SG-5, the right outer side of the display area of the image display device 5) in the display image creation area. An image (non-display image) different from the image (display image) may be arranged adjacent to the display image. By doing so, when the promotion effect is executed, the displayed image and the non-display image are arranged adjacent to each other over the display area and the non-display area of the image display device 5, so that the image non-display portion is replaced. Therefore, a part of the non-display image will be displayed.

The feature unit 006SG exemplifies a development suggestion effect suggesting the development of super reach into a reach effect as an effect of displacing the image displayed on the image display device 5, but the present invention is limited thereto. Instead, as shown in FIGS. 15-40 to 15-42 as a modification 006SG-6, as the effect of displacing the image displayed on the image display device 5, these temporary stop suggestion effects and temporary stop notification effects are used. You may do it.

The production mode of the temporary stop suggestion effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 15-40. First, as shown in FIG. 15-40 (A), when a certain period of time elapses from the start of the variable display, the left and right decorative symbols stop (swing stop) and reach. After that, as a temporary stop suggestion effect, the pseudo-continuous symbol (the symbol displayed as "NEXT"), which is a part of the decorative symbol, moves from the upper side to the lower side. At this time, the image display device 5 displays the ripple effect image 006SG005P so as to converge from the peripheral portion of the display area toward the central portion of the display area, and at the same time, the image around the ripple effect image 006SG005P ( The left and right decorative patterns and background image) are displayed distorted.

When the variable display is a variable display for executing a pseudo-ream effect (variable display in which the pseudo-ream symbol is temporarily stopped), the pseudo-ream symbol is temporarily stopped and as shown in FIGS. 15-40 (B). , The ripple effect image 006SG005P is displayed around the temporary stop and the pseudo-continuous pattern. On the other hand, when the variable display is a variable display in which the pseudo-ream effect is not executed (variable display in which the pseudo-ream symbol does not temporarily stop), the pseudo-ream symbol is temporarily stopped as it is, as shown in FIGS. 15-40 (C). Without doing this, the image is moved to the lower part of the display area of the image display device 5 to be hidden, and a symbol indicating that the variable display result is out of alignment is displayed as a decorative symbol inside.

In the present modification 006SG-6, as shown in FIGS. 15-40, a form suggesting that the decorative symbol (pseudo-continuous symbol) is temporarily stopped by displaying the ripple effect image 006SG005P on the image display device 5 is provided. Although exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and a plurality of display modes of the ripple effect image 006SG005P are provided, and in which display mode the ripple effect image 006SG005P is displayed as a pseudo-continuous suggestion effect. The ratio at which the decorative symbol (pseudo-continuous symbol) is temporarily stopped may be different accordingly.

For example, in FIG. 15-40, two ripple effect images 006SG005P are displayed (doublely displayed) as a pseudo-continuous suggestion effect, but as shown in FIGS. 15-41, a ripple effect image 006SG005P is displayed as a pseudo-continuous suggestion effect. Is provided, and the rate at which the decorative symbol (pseudo-continuous symbol) is temporarily stopped may be different depending on the number of ripple effect images 006SG005P displayed in the pseudo-continuous effect.

In this modification 006SG-6, the pseudo-ream symbol is displayed as a part of the decorative symbol, that is, the pseudo-ream symbol is displayed as a part of the variable display even in a period other than the pseudo-ream effect. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the pseudo-continuous symbol may be a symbol different from the decorative symbol and may be a special symbol displayed only during the pseudo-continuous production.

As shown in FIGS. 15-42 (A) and 15-42 (B), the temporary stop notification effect is the ripple effect image 006SG005P after the pseudo-continuous symbol is temporarily stopped by executing the temporary stop suggestion effect. The image is displayed so as to diffuse from the central portion of the display area of the image display device 5 toward the peripheral portion of the display area, and the surrounding image (left and right decorative patterns and background image) of the ripple effect image 006SG005P is distorted. Is displayed.

As the temporary stop suggestion effect and the temporary stop notification effect in the modified example 006SG-6, as shown in FIGS. 15-43 (A) to 15-43 (F), the layer 1 image drawing area of the VRAM area is used. The first interface image 006SG005I including the first reserved storage display area 006SG005D and the second reserved storage display area 006SG005U and the second interface image 006SG005J including a small symbol are drawn, and the ripple effect image 006SG005P is drawn in the layer 2 image drawing area. It is drawn, and a decorative symbol including a pseudo-continuous symbol is drawn in the layer 3 image drawing area. Further, in the VRAM area of the present modification 006SG-6, a layer 4 image drawing area for drawing an image lower than the layer 3 image drawing area is arranged. A background image is drawn in the layer 4 image drawing area. Further, in the displacement image creation area, the displacement target image is created by the image drawn in the layer 3 image drawing area, and the displacement image (ripple) is applied to the displacement target image. The effect image 006SG005P creates a distorted decorative pattern and a background image).

Then, in the display image creation area, the image drawn in the layer 1 image drawing area, the image drawn in the layer 2 image drawing area, and the image drawn in the displacement image creation area (displacement image) are superimposed. By doing so, a display image to be displayed on the image display device 5 is created.

Further, the feature unit 006GS exemplifies a form in which an effect image is displayed using an image display device 5 capable of displaying only a stereoscopic image, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the modified example 006SG-. As shown in FIGS. 15-44 and 15-45 as FIG. 7, the effect image may be displayed using a display device capable of displaying a stereoscopic image.

The modified example 006SG-7 will be described below. In the above-mentioned feature unit 006SG and the modified example, a display device such as an LCD (liquid crystal display device) or an organic EL (Electro Luminescence) capable of displaying a plan view image (2D image) is used as the image display device 5. However, in the present modification 006SG-7, as shown in FIGS. 15-44, the naked-eye stereoscopic image display device 5 that allows the player to visually recognize the stereoscopic image with the naked eye by the paralux barrier method. The feature is that by using ‘’, it is possible to display a stereoscopic image (3D image) in addition to a planar view image (2D image) as various images.

As shown in FIGS. 15-44, the naked-eye liquid crystal image display device 5'of this modification 006SG-7 is a liquid crystal image (video) composed of an image for the right eye (R image) and an image for the left eye (L image). The image liquid crystal panel 006SG900 capable of displaying the image, the backlight 006SG901 that irradiates planar light from the rear to the front side of the image liquid crystal panel 006SG900, and the image liquid crystal panel on the front side of the image liquid crystal panel 006SG900. It has a structure having a 006SG900 and a liquid crystal panel for a parallax barrier 006SG910 provided at a predetermined interval.

In the disparity barrier liquid crystal panel 006SG910, the player's left eye visually recognizes the right-eye image (R image) displayed in a vertically long strip shape on the image liquid crystal panel 006SG900, and the player's right eye displays the left-eye image (L image). It has a vertical striped black portion that serves as a shutter for preventing the player from visually recognizing, and a transparent portion that enables the player's right eye to visually recognize the image for the right eye and the player's left eye to visually recognize the image for the left eye. A liquid crystal with relatively high light transparency that enables a parallax barrier image display state for displaying a parallax barrier image and a transmissive state in which all pixels are transparent parts without vertical striped black parts. It is said to be a panel.

The image liquid crystal panel 006SG900 displays, for example, a right eye image (R image) instead of the left eye image (L image), and the parallax barrier liquid crystal panel 006SG910 does not display the above-mentioned parallax barrier image ( A plan view image (2D image) can also be displayed by setting the display to full transparency.

That is, the naked-eye stereoscopic image display device 5'which is the display means of the present modification 006SG-7 is composed of a right-eye image and a left-eye image in addition to the non-stereoscopic image (2D image). It is possible to display a stereoscopic image with the naked eye.

The stereoscopic image composed of the right-eye image and the left-eye image displayed on the image liquid crystal panel 006SG900 is also drawn on each of the above-mentioned layers in the same manner as the plan view image (2D image), while the parallax barrier liquid crystal panel. The disparity barrier image displayed on the 006SG910 is drawn on a dedicated layer provided exclusively for the disparity barrier liquid crystal panel 006SG910 and displayed on the disparity barrier liquid crystal panel 006SG910.

When displaying an effect image using such a naked-eye stereoscopic image display device 5', another effect is stereoscopically displayed at a timing different from the specific effect (for example, development suggestion effect) in the present invention during variable display. It may be made feasible by displaying a visual image (3D image).

As shown in FIGS. 15-45 (A) to 15-45 (D), during the variable display, the autostereoscopic image display device 5'moves upward, which is a displacement specific image, as described above. The development suggestion effect, which is a specific effect in which the images of the left area 006SG005L and the right area 006SG005R and the image of the middle area 006SG005C moved downward are displayed, can be executed, and the execution period of the development suggestion effect is long. As a non-overlapping notice effect, a variable display notice effect suggesting that the variable display result is a big hit is executed, and a stereoscopic image is displayed in the variable display notice effect.

That is, a development suggestion effect is executed, which is a specific effect in which the image of the left region 006SG005L and the right region 006SG005R moved upward and the image of the middle region 006SG005C moved downward, which are the displacement specific images, are displayed. In this case, only the stereoscopic image (2D image), which is a non-stereoscopic image, is displayed, and the stereoscopic image (3D image) is not displayed.

When the image of the left region 006SG005L and the image of the right region 006SG005R moved upward and the image of the middle region 006SG005C moved downward as described above, which are displacement specific images, are displayed, the display is non-stereoscopic. By making it a planar image (2D image) which is an image, it becomes difficult for the player to recognize whether or not the displacement is due to the stereoscopic image, and the interest of the production is lowered. Can be prevented.

In this embodiment, the effect of displaying the stereoscopic image (3D image), the images of the left region 006SG005L and the right region 006SG005R moved upward, which are the displacement specific images, and the middle region 006SG005C moved downward. Since the execution period is different from the development suggestion effect, which is a specific effect in which the image of is displayed, the display of the stereoscopic image (3D image) is restricted based on the execution period of the effect. The present invention is not limited to this, and for example, when a displacement specific image and a stereoscopic image (3D image) are displayed in the same effect, the stereoscopic image (3D) is displayed during the display of the displacement specific image. To prevent the image) from being displayed, data such as a display flag that can specify that the displacement specific image is being displayed is stored, and the stereoscopic image (3D image) is based on the data. The display of may be restricted. In addition, regarding these restrictions, a predetermined period before and after the period in which the displacement specific image is displayed so that the stereoscopic image (3D image) is not displayed immediately after or immediately before the display of the displacement specific image is completed. Even during the period, the display of the stereoscopic image (3D image) may be restricted by storing data such as a display flag.

In the above-mentioned modification 006SG-7, a parallax barrier type autostereoscopic image display device 5'using a parallax barrier liquid crystal panel 006SG910 is exemplified, but the present invention is not limited thereto. Instead, a stereoscopic image (3D image) may be displayed using a lenticular lens method or an integral imaging type autostereoscopic image display device other than the parallax barrier method.

In the present modification 006SG0-7, a form in which the stereoscopic image (3D image) is not displayed in the development suggestion effect is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the stereoscopic view is also performed in the development suggestion effect. A case may be provided in which an image (3D image) is displayed. When displaying a stereoscopic image (3D image) even in the exhibition suggestion effect, the stereoscopic image (3D image) image (right eye image and left eye image) is drawn, and the planar view image (2D image) is drawn. It may be drawn and arranged in an image drawing area (for example, a layer 1 image drawing area) higher than the image drawing area to be arranged. By doing so, the stereoscopic image (3D image) is displayed with priority over the planar image (2D image), so that the stereoscopic image (3D image) is preferably displayed in the development suggestion effect. can do.

Further, in the present modification 006SG-7, as an effect of displaying a stereoscopic image (3D image), a variable display advance notice effect suggesting that the variable display result is a big hit is different from the development suggestion effect (specific effect). Although the form that can be executed in a period is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the introduction effect of the development suggestion effect (specific effect) is performed in the period before the development suggestion effect (specific effect). A stereoscopic image (3D image) may be displayed. By doing so, it is possible to make the player recognize in advance that the development suggestion effect (specific effect) is executed by displaying the stereoscopic image (3D image), so that the development suggestion effect (specific effect) can be performed. The production effect of can be further improved. Furthermore, a plurality of production modes of the introduction effect and the development suggestion effect (specific effect) are provided, and the practice mode of the development suggestion effect (specific effect) can be set according to which effect mode the introduction effect is executed. It may be different.

Further, in the introduction effect, the movable body 32 is operated, and the operation of the movable body 32 and the display of the stereoscopic image (3D image) are linked to produce the effect of the introduction effect and the development suggestion effect (specific effect). May be improved.

Further, the feature unit 006SG exemplifies a mode in which the present invention is applied to the pachinko gaming machine 1, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the present invention may be applied to a slot machine.

When the present invention is applied to a slot machine, as shown in FIG. 15-46 as a modified example 006SG-8, the game-related information in the present invention (first interface image 006SG005I or second interface in the feature unit 006SG). (Corresponding to image 006SG005J), the payout display of medals, the display of the number of remaining games of AT (assist time), the medal display stored as credits, etc. are displayed on the image display device 5 together with the effect image, and these game-related information is displayed. It may be a non-target image of displacement.

Further, in the feature unit 006SG and each modification, as a specific effect of the present invention, an effect of changing or distorting (distorting) the display position of the image displayed on the image display device 5 is exemplified. The present invention is not limited to this, and as a specific effect, changes and distortions in the display position of the image displayed on the image display device 5 may be repeatedly executed.

Further, in the feature unit 006SG and each modification, development suggestion effect, reach suggestion effect, revival effect, look-ahead notice effect, promotion effect, temporary stop suggestion effect, and temporary stop notification effect are exemplified as specific effects in the present invention. As these specific effects, a plurality of effects may be executed. In the case where a plurality of specific effects can be executed in this way, for example, in the normal state, it is possible to execute an effect in which the decorative pattern (character and number) is not divided, such as a development suggestion effect, in the normal state. On the other hand, it is possible to execute an effect in which the decorative pattern (only numbers) is divided into a plurality of fragments or display areas, such as a revival effect or a look-ahead notice effect. By doing so, it is possible to prevent a decrease in the interest of the specific effect due to the fact that the decorative pattern including the character and the number is not divided in the normal state, and conversely, in the time saving state, the decorative pattern containing only the number is displayed. By dividing, the effect of a specific effect can be improved.

Further, the feature unit 006SG exemplifies a form in which the decorative pattern is composed of characters and numbers in a normal state and the decorative pattern is composed only of numbers in a time-saving state, but the present invention is not limited thereto. The display mode of the decorative symbol may be changed from the middle of the variable display in a specific variable pattern such as the variable display in the variable pattern of the super reach. For example, in the variable display of Super Reach, the variable display of the decorative symbol composed of characters and numbers is executed during the period from the start of the variable display to the reach, and the decorative symbol composed of only the numbers is executed in the period after the reach. The variable display of is performed. Further, in the period after the reach, as the specific effect in the present invention, it is sufficient to enable the effect of dividing the decorative pattern such as the revival effect.

Further, in the feature unit 006SG and each modification, an image in which at least a part of the specific image in the present invention is displaced in the left-right direction or the up-down direction is displayed as a displacement specific image on the image display device 5. The present invention is not limited to this, and an image in which at least a part of a specific image is enlarged or reduced may be displayed on the image display device 5 as a displacement specific image. That is, the displacement direction of the image in the present invention may include the enlargement / reduction direction (Z-axis direction) in addition to the left-right direction (X-axis direction) and the up-down direction (Y-axis direction).

Further, in the feature unit 006SG, as shown in FIGS. 15-3 and 15-4, in the displacement target image, the R value and the G value of the displacement target image correspond to the R value and the G value of the displacement image from the position corresponding to the pixel A. An embodiment in which a displacement image is generated in a replacement method in which a pixel X is specified and the pixel X is displaced (replaced) at a position corresponding to the pixel A of the displacement image has been exemplified, but the present invention is limited thereto. Instead, for example, in the displacement target image, the displacement image is moved by a method (movement method) in which the pixel X at the position corresponding to the pixel A of the displacement image is moved to the position corresponding to the R value and the G value of the pixel A. It may be generated. In the replacement method, it is necessary to edit the displacement image of the region close to the boundary portion to the displacement image considering the width of the boundary portion of the region having a different movement direction as in the modified example 006SG-3. On the other hand, in the case of the replacement method, since it is not necessary to edit these, the load of creating an image can be reduced, and when an effect image or the like is placed at the boundary, the boundary where the effect image is placed is set. Since the degree of freedom can be increased, the load of creating images including effect images can be reduced.

1 Pachinko game machine 4A 1st special symbol display device 4B 2nd special symbol display device 5 Image display device 103 CPU
120 CPU for production control

Claims (1)

A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player, and can be controlled to a normal state and a special state that is more likely to be controlled to the advantageous state than the normal state.
A game control means that can control the progress of the game,
An effect control means capable of controlling an effect based on control information transmitted from the game control means, and an effect control means.
Predetermined when the number of times of the advantageous state that has occurred in the advantageous period that has never been controlled from the normal state to the advantageous state or the special state has reached a specific number of times. An update means that can update numerical data from the first value to the second value,
When the predetermined numerical value data is the second value, the adjusting means for adjusting so that the speed at which the game value given in the unit period is given decreases, and
Equipped with
The game control means can transmit control information that can identify that the predetermined numerical data is the second value to the effect control means.
The effect control means can execute effect control based on control information that can specify that the predetermined numerical data is the second value.
Moreover,
A display means that has a display area capable of displaying an image and can display a display image of game-related information related to the progress of the game in the display area.
A storage means capable of storing image data including at least a specific image displayed in the display area and a display image of the game-related information, and a storage means.
An image processing means having a plurality of display layers on which an image based on the image data can be arranged and capable of generating an image to be displayed in the display area by superimposing and synthesizing each image arranged on the plurality of display layers. ,
An effect executing means capable of executing an effect of displaying the specific image in the display area,
Equipped with
The storage means can store display position displacement information for shifting a display position of at least a part of the specific image in the display area from a first position to a second position different from the first position.
The image processing means can generate a displacement specific image in which the specific image arranged on the specific display layer based on the image data is displaced based on the display position displacement information.
The effect executing means can execute a specific effect of displaying the displacement specific image generated by the image processing means in the display area during variable display.
The display image of the game-related information is arranged in a special display layer in which the arranged image is preferentially displayed in the display area over the specific display layer.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

Images